AMETEK102

CAT102 Cover 8.
5x11 12/5/00 2:40 PM Page 2
Alarm Event Recording
Distributed Monitoring
Machine Monitoring
Power Quality
Calibrators
Recorders
Transducers
Signal Conditioning
Distribution Monitoring
Product Catalog102
CONTINUE
▼
AMETEK
Contents
1.Services
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 SC-4300 L/U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13
Sales & Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Training & Field Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
Parts & Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
Service Contracts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
SC-4300R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15
SC-4326 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17
SC-4372 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.19
SC-2302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21
1
Agency Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7 SC-4300M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.23
ET-1200L/U & ET-1202L/U . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.25
2.Alarm and Event Recording ET-1205 & ET-1208 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.27
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 ET-1214 & ET-1218 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.29
AN-3100C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 ET-1215 & ET-1219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.29
AN-5131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24 ET-1228 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.31
AN-6150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.33 ET-1275 & ET-1278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.33
AN-3196B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.37 ET-1200 Ordering Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.35
SM-100U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.42 SC-1300 & SC-1302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.39
AN-6100R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.44 SC-1300L & SC-1300U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.41
ISM-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49 SC-1300R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.43
DMS-2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54 SC-1372 & SC-1374 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.43
RiSCue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.61 SC-1326 & SC-1326W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.45
SC-1300 Specialty Transmitters
3.Machine Monitoring & Computational Devices . . . . . . . . . . . 7.47
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 SC-1350/1364/1380/1382/1390/1396 . . . . 7.47
VT-3360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 SC-1320/1324/1330/1352/1354/1356/
TM-2480 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 1358/1362/1398 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.48
VT-2490 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 SC-1320/1324/1330 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.49
Detector Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 SC-1350/1352/1354/1356/1358 . . . . . . . . 7.50
Vibration Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23 SC-1362/1364/1380/1382/1390/1396/1398 7.51
Velocity Pickups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26 SC-1300 Ordering Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.53
SC-1300 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.54
4.Recorders ET-1200/SC-1300 High Density Enclosures 7.57
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
ISM-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 8.Transducers
TR-2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12 CCC-1B/VCC-1B/VCX-1B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
TR-100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17 WV-15/WV-20/WV-25/WV-30 . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5
DL-8000/DL-9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.29 PCE/VCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.9
P&QR128/P&QR256 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.32 CCC-30B/VCC-30B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.13
5.Power Quality WWH/VVH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.15
RM-10/RM-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.19
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
PFA/PFN/PAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.21
PQRx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
FCX-1B/FCN-1B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.25
PQ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
PM-1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.27
PQ Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
Uility Power Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.31
DL-8000/DL-9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9
Calibration Guide & Ordering Guide . . . . . . . 8.36
Power Quality Analysis Software . . . . . . . . . 5.15
Clipping CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.37
RiS AiPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.22
ULtra Transducer Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.39
RiSACE 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.24
RLP Modular Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.46
RisACE 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.26
DIN Series Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.65
RiSACE Quatro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.88
DPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.91
PowerACE Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.30
DPMS-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.93
6.Distribution Monitoring 9.Calibrators
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
LoadLogger/LL-230A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
Load Profiler/LP-260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 CL-4002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
LOADSMART Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 CL-8026 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5
P&QR128/P&QR256 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 DPG-700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
CL-9000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.9
7. Signal Conditioning AccuPro Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.10
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 PMM-9700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.14
Product Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 PMM-9850 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.15
SC-7400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 Total IQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.17
HHC-4400/7400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
SC-4400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11
AMETEK
PRODUCT CATALOG 102
Since 1961, Rochester Instrument Systems, a division of Ametek Power

Instruments, has provided innovative instrumentation from our design and
production facilities in Rochester, New York. Joining with Scientific Columbus in
1996, Rochester has emerged as a leading supplier with its unique one-stop
shopping advantage for customers. Our ISO 9001 certification is proof of our
dedication to high standards of quality in our business and our products. Rochester
has the resources and commitment needed to be a reliable partner for your
worldwide instrumentation requirements.
PUBLICATION 102 COPYRIGHT © 2000

ROCHESTER is ISO-9001 Certified
AMETEK
Services
Ametek Power About Ametek – system is complemented by our
exclusive software that provides reliable
Instruments is a company
dedicated to providing An Introduction communication, on-screen analysis and
automatic printout of data for process
A record of innovation and experience you
the highest quality can depend on. cogeneration applications to utility
products and exceptional generation and transmission networks.
customer service. Our Rochester Instrument Systems, a
division of Ametek, was founded by Power Measurement
ISO-9001 Certification instrumentation professionals in 1961. When you compare specifications and
reflects our commitment For over 30 years we’ve designed and price, it’s clear we’re your choice for
to excellence. manufactured innovative products, power transducers. Whether you’re
provided superior technical training, and measuring inferential power in a process
offered the highest level of services application or telemetering in a substa-
anywhere. We consistently deliver tion we offer the widest range and
• About Ametek – An Introduction
innovative technology to protect your highest operational specification in the
• Worldwide Sales Offices people, your equipment and the industry. We offer % of reading accura-
environment during process plant cies as well as an almost limitless range
operations as well as maximizing utility of application capabilities. Combine this
• Product Information
Customer Service power performance. For the future you with the most competitive pricing
can expect continued support through structure available there is no other
our innovation and experience. choice.
• Training and Field Service
– Ametek Product Training
Workshops Alarm Monitoring Process Monitoring
– Field Service Visual and audible indications of alarms Keep your machinery in peak operating
• Domestic/Canada are the key benefits of our microproces- condition with the best monitoring
• International sor - based annunciator systems. These systems and signal conditioning
• Asia/Pacific Region proven, reliable annunciators give you products in the industry. They not only
maximum flexibility and dependable help protect your expensive equipment
• Repairs, Spare Parts, and operations so you can respond quickly they help reduce overall system cost
Calibration Services and appropriately. Select the model that and calibration efforts. The panel mount
best fits your application: compact models provide the highest density
remote units, compact window based available in smart technology. The
products, or large scale event logging temperature monitoring systems
systems. All of which provide the provide the highest level of operational
highest level of dependability. diagnostics and accuracy.
Our DMS-2000 system provides Test the accuracy of most process

annunciation along with event record- variables safely and easily with our
ing, alarm management, and graphical lightweight, hand-held calibrators.
analysis. This system gives you Representing the best in test and
complete and accurate records of calibration innovation, our calibrators
alarms providing you with confidence in provide benchtop performance in
operation and increased levels of safety. portable units.
For specific event recording needs, our All of these products along with the
Integrated System Monitor provides highest level support, engineering, and
unmatched design specification criteria service mean a winning combination for
with mean time between failure you. We are committed to excellence
measured in years. Modularity and and completely certified to ISO 9001.
speed of response are only a few of the
benefits of these systems. Buying from Ametek Power Instruments
means only one thing – a great value
Power Recording with the highest level of quality. Quality
We pioneered the digital transient not only in the products we ship but
recorder in the mid-1980’s and have also the highest level quality in our
advanced the technology to today’s support, engineering, and service.
level: You get the most sophisticated
fault recording and analysis systems in
the world. Reliable, high speed record-
ing with unsurpassed accuracy is
available from our 8 channel stand alone
unit to our 64 channel system. Each
1.1
AMETEK
Services
Worldwide Sales
Offices
Ametek Power Instruments has two
units, one in Rochester, NY USA, and
one in Crayford, England and Hillend,
Scotland, UK. This catalog applies to
the products sold through our offices in
Rochester, NY. If you are located in the
areas shaded in the figure below, please
contact Ametek UK, or their local
representative, for assistance and
information.
ROCHESTER NY USA BELFAST OFFICE TERRITORY:

TERRITORY: UK, EUROPE, MIDDLE EAST,
WESTERN HEMISPHERE AFRICA
www.rochester.com
Contacting Ametek SINGAPORE OFFICE TERRITORY:

FAR EAST, INDIA, PAKISTAN
Representatives
Ametek Power Instruments has
representatives throughout the USA and
the world. Our representatives are
authorized to provide you literature and
information about Ametek products and
services, and to handle your need for
pricing quotations, delivery times, and
product ordering. If you do not know
your local representative, please contact
the factory in Rochester, NY USA for
assistance.
1.2
Product Information,
Technical Support, and
Customer Service
Your local Ametek sales representative
is your full-service contact for applica-
responsible for making and delivering
our products. Each manufacturing cell
1
tion assistance, pricing, delivery, status, is able to provide application assis-
and customer service. Your local tance, pricing, delivery, status, and
representative knows your needs, and customer service for the particular
can respond directly to you. Your product lines made in the cell.
representative also can provide
demonstrations, evaluation products, Ametek encourages you to contact your
and can arrange for other Ametek authorized representative first. If this is
services. not possible, please use the following
numbers to contact our plant for
To support your local representative, assistance. The 1-800 numbers are
the Ametek plant is organized for direct effective for U.S.A. and Canada only.
contact with the people who are
Requirement Contact Phone Fax
Emergency Ordering Service Hotline 800-881-4156

or Assistance
General Information Switchboard 716-263-7700 716-262-4777

All Ametek Departments
Technical Support or Tech Support Line 800-374-4835 716-238-4985

Field Service/Training
Product Support:
1. Annunciators,
DMS-2000, RiSCue Cell Manager 716-238-4987 716-238-4029
2. Transducers Cell Manager 716-238-4955 716-238-4945
3. Signal Conditioners Cell Manager 716-238-4944 716-238-4097
4. Temp/Vibration
Monitors, Special, and
Out-of-Catalog Products Cell Manager 716-238-4984 716-238-4905
5. Transient Recorders
SERs, ISM-1, Systems Cell Manager 716-238-4987 716-238-4985
6. Calibrator/DPG Cell Manager 716-238-4944 716-238-4097
7. Load/ LineFacts,
LoadLoggers, Trips Cell Manager 716-238-4987 716-238-4985
8. Power Quality Cell Manager 716-238-4700 716-238-4927
Product Literature Only Market Pulse, Inc. 216-460-0809 216-460-0810
Ametek Web Site www.rochester.com Ametek Email info@rochester.com
1.3
AMETEK
Services
Recorder Operation & Maintenance
Training and Field Workshops. Workshops are offered
Service singly or in combinations. Choose one
workshop to fill a specific need, or a
combination workshop to meet several
needs with one session.
RiS Product Training
Workshops Each workshop offers a careful balance
between lecture and hands-on-training.
Learn How To Operate and Maintain Students will gain the practical knowl-
Your Ametek Products edge and experience of dealing with
Ametek Power Instruments is commit- real-world conditions. With the practical
ted to providing cost effective training knowledge gained in a Ametek Work-
for our customers. Ametek offers shop, students can focus on the real
intensive, hands-on workshops where cause of power/process disturbances
you can gain valuable experience and using the “first-out” information provided
training on your Ametek System(s). by a Ametek Sequential Events
Learn how to get the most from your Recorder in optimal working condition.
products with a thorough understanding
of operating characteristics and how to
efficiently correct any misoperation.
Factory Training Workshops Annunciators

Ametek recommends factory training for Ametek offers Annunciator Operation &
individuals or groups of less than five Maintenance Workshops. Choose a
students. Annual Factory Training workshop to fill your specific needs and
Workshops are offered for Transient goals.
Recorder products on an established
schedule. Workshops may also be Each workshop offers a careful balance
arranged at the factory for other Ametek between lecture and hands-on training.
products as needed. Students will gain the practical knowl-
edge and experience of dealing with
On-site Workshops real-world conditions. With the practical
Ametek recommends on-site training for knowledge gained in a Ametek Work-
groups of six to ten students. On-site shop, students can focus on plant
training offers significant savings in operations using the information
student travel and lodging costs. An provided by an Annunciator in optimal
additional benefit is realized as your working condition.
people are trained as a team. Group
dynamics contribute to a thorough Combined Systems
understanding of the subject and • Transient Recorder & Sequence of
overcoming reluctance to ask the Events Recorder systems
instructor questions. • Sequence of Events Recorder &
Annunciator systems
Transient Recorders
Ametek offers Transient Recorder Ametek can provide combinations of
Operation & Maintenance Workshops. workshops for customers with com-
Each workshop offers a careful balance bined systems. Combined systems
between lecture and hands-on training. include multiple equipment types like
Students will gain the practical knowl- the ones listed above. A Total System
edge and experience of dealing with approach to combined systems
real-world conditions. With the practical optimizes student time in class and
knowledge gained in a Ametek Work- reinforces technical skills. Complex
shop, students can focus on the issue system wiring, safety considerations,
of understanding power disturbances, system grounding, input wiring and
line faults, relay response and other other common topics are covered once
critical factors using timely information for both systems to reduce overall
provided by a Ametek Transient class time. Significant additional
Recorder in optimal working condition. savings are realized by making only
one trip to the site.
Sequential Events Recorders
Ametek offers Sequential Events
1.4
Field Service Field Service for the Repair policies
Asia/Pacific Region
Field Service is available for all Ametek 1. Repairs, including products under
Ametek provides Singapore-based field warranty, must have an RMA from
Products and Systems at published services to our customers located in the
rates plus parts and expenses. Field Ametek. An appropriate Purchase Order
Pacific rim countries. Prompt dispatch number for non- warranty repair is
Service may be arranged by contacting of a Field Service engineer can be made
the Cell Manager (see table). Please be needed before work can begin. Items
by contacting the Ametek Cell Manager received without an RMA will be
prepared to explain the nature of the (see table). Full details of the required
service desired, and identify the product returned.
service, including Ametek equipment
by specific model number and serial type and model, should be provided at
number, or system by specific serial 2. Warranty on Repairs Performed by
the time of inquiry. Ametek: Ametek Power Instruments,
number or Ametek Sales Order (S.O.)
number and location. Inc. (Ametek) warrants that repairs on
Repairs, Spare Parts, and Ametek products performed by Ametek
Rates are set at 3 levels: normal hours Calibration Services will be free from defects of workman-
(8 hours/day), overtime hours, and ship or material for 60 days from
holiday hours. Travel time to/from our Ametek provides factory repair for all of delivery of the material to the ordering
Rochester, NY office will also be its products. Rapid turnaround service is customer, or the remainder of the
charged at the normal hourly rate. available. Most repairs are quoted at a original Ametek product warranty,
fixed price, so you know the cost up whichever is longer. Additional terms of
Arrangements for Field Service should front. You or your authorized Ametek the warranty are as stated in the
be made as far in advance as practical. representative can contact Ametek standard Ametek product warranty.
concerning Repair Service (see table).
Parts required for Field Service will be 3. All items repaired by Ametek,
provided at the current list price. If the A Customer Service person is available including warranty repairs, will be
Ametek equipment being serviced is for cost inquiries, quotations, scheduling, returned by the same mode of shipment
under warranty, parts will be repaired by and to provide return material authoriza- as received at Ametek, such as
Ametek at no charge. tion (RMA) during regular business hours overnight, second day, ground express,
(see table). All items returned to Ametek or truck. Ametek will charge when a
Ametek Field Service is warranted must have an RMA number, including more costly shipping mode is requested
against workmanship defects for 60 warranty repairs. for returns.
days from the date of completion of
service, and the work will be docu- Three levels of Repair Service are Calibration Service
mented by a report provided to the available for most products. Complex
customer upon completion. products that require diagnosis and Ametek also provides NIST-Traceable
testing will be repaired at standard rates calibration service for our instruments.
International Field Service and times. Please request the service Calibration service and turnaround is
Arrangements level when contacting Ametek: arranged by contacting the appropriate
Cell (see table). Re-calibration under
Due to the need for work entry permits, 1. Super Service – 48-hour turnaround warranty will be performed at the normal
Visas, and customs clearance for from time of receipt at our Rochester calibration rates.
materials, all Field Service for non-US/ NY facility – guaranteed when you
Canada areas must allow adequate specify Super Service and provide An RMA number must also be obtained
notice of four (4) weeks prior to adequate information to perform the prior to sending in any item for
departure. Emergency arrangements repair. If Ametek does not meet the calibration. A certificate of calibration will
will be made when possible, but promised turnaround, the repair price be provided when the item is returned
Ametek does not have control of the will be reduced by 25%. to you. If calibration cannot be done on
issuing of Government documentation. the item once received by Ametek, you
2. Rush Service – 5 working day will be contacted with further
Nominal preparation time is charged for turnaround from time of receipt at our information.
preparation of travel papers, Visas, Ametek facility is guaranteed, with rates
documents for shipment of material, 10% less than Super Service. If Ametek Spare Parts
etc., when field service is to be per- does not meet the turnaround, repair
formed outside the continental USA or price will be further reduced by 15%. Spare Parts for Ametek equipment can
Canada. International service will be be ordered directly by contacting the
invoiced in US dollars. Currency 3. Standard Service – turnaround for appropriate Cell (see table).
conversion to US dollars will be made at standard service averages two weeks
published rates. after receipt. Standard service is priced
at 25% less than Super Service, and is
available for all Ametek products.
1.5
AMETEK
Services
Payment Out of Catalog Products
as of this catalog:
Ametek provides standard payment
terms of Net 30 days to our domestic SC-7500 Signal Conditioner CL-4006 RTD Calibrator
customers with approved credit. All
sales FOB Factory. SC-4301 Panel Meter CL-4202 Current/Voltage Calibrator
VISA and Mastercard are also CL-2000 Calibrator CL-4205 Temperature Calibrator
accepted.
PM-9900 Pressure Modules MM-9800 Multimeters
s r r TM
VT-1215 Vibration Switch ET-8200 Rack Mounted Trip/Alarms

Consult your Ametek representative for SC-8300 Rack Mounted Transmitters
full details. Previously Obsoleted Products
Warranty TR-1620, TR-1630, TR-1640, TR-1650,

TR-1626, TR-1645 Transient Recorders
Ametek provides a one year warranty
on our products, with factory repair or TR-1625 Master Station
replacement of defective material at our
option. Please consult your Ametek SSM-9400 Smart System Monitor
representative for a complete statement
of warranty terms. CL-4500 SuperCal II
RA-800, RA-1800, RA-2800, RA-3800

Service Contracts
TR-1622, TR-1630P, RCU, TR-1700
Custom System Service
AN-100, AN-1100, AN-2100, AN-4100,
On-site service contracts are available AN-5100, AN-3190
for support of Ametek products. This
offers the advantage of predictable DPG-600, CL-6000
costs for maintenance. An agreement
can be tailored to each customer’s FM-100 Fault Monitor
specific needs. Please contact the Cell
Manager (see table) for more details. TR-1650 Transient Recorder
LP-260 Load Profiler (Replaced by

Out-of-Catalog
Items LF-1 Power Quality Logger)
PR-2050 Tap Position Transmitter

Ametek has discontinued regular
production of several products and
SC-5400 P/I converters
removed them from this catalog. We will
accept new orders for these products
CT-1200 Calibrated Trip Alarms
only upon confirmation from the factory.
Ametek maintains a fully staffed Special
SC-6500 Smart 2-Wire Transmitter
Products Group to handle these out-of-
production products. We will continue
TD-2000 Rack Mounted Transducers
to provide service and support for these
products through spares or replace-
CL-2241 Frequency Calibrator
ment for as long as we can obtain
components.
CL-4001 Current Loop Calibrator
CL-4003 Voltage Calibrator
CL-4004 Loop Powered Indicator
CL-4005 Thermocouple Calibrator
1.6
Agency Approved Products
Ametek offers a variety of products which have agency approvals. Please consult your Ametek representative for availabil-
ity of specific models and features which have received approval, and the class of approval. Ask for drawing #1072-469.
FM FM CSA CSA BASEEFA CENELEC

PRODUCT ORDINARY HAZARDOUS ORDINARY HAZARDOUS HAZARDOUS
LINE LOCATION LOCATION LOCATION LOCATION LOCATION
AN-3100C ✓ ✓ ✓
AN-3196B ✓ ✓ ✓
AN-5131 ✓
AN-6150 ✓
TM-2480 ✓
VT-2490 ✓ ✓
VT-3360 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ET-1200 ✓ ✓ ✓
SC-1300 ✓ ✓ ✓
SC-2300 ✓ ✓ ✓
SC-4300 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
SC-4400 Pending Pending Pending Pending ✓ ✓
SC-7400 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
DPG-700 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
1.7
AMETEK
Services
1.8
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
The AMETEK series of alarm

annunciators is a family of
products including
microprocessor based
integral annunciators,
annunciator display units and
remote logic annunciators.
The following categories describe our product

offerings:
Integral Annunciators – These annunciators

are self-contained units with front window
display and all alarm electronics included to
support all annunciator functions (alarm
sequences, horn and relay outputs,
pushbuttons). Input and power connections
are made directly at the rear terminals. This is
best suited for applications where the field
contact wiring can be located near the
display.
Display Unit Only – These are lamp boxes

configured in a variety of sizes and shapes.
These are driven from remote annunciator
electronics, PLC, etc.
Remote Annunciators – This annunciator is

provided with all alarm electronics for connec-
tion to remote displays. The alarm inputs
connect directly to this unit and the display is
connected via a cable of pre-determined
length. This is best suited for applications
where ther alarm displays are remote from the
input wiring.
Description Integral Annunciators Display Unit Only Remote Annunciator

Electronics
4 point per cell Back
Lit Window Annunciator AN-3100C AN-5131C AN-6100R
8 point per cell Back
Lit Window Annunciator — AN6150 AN-6100R
12 point LED Annunciator AN-3196 — —
12 point Relay Annunciator SM-100 — —
2.1
AMETEK
AN-3100C Annunciator Each cell has built in expansion tional sequences and auxiliary relay
• Field Programmable capability with no increase in physical operation.
size or electronics and can have 1, 2,
• Internal Expandability 3, or 4 windows. Multiple window Each Sequence Control Module is
colors are available along with com- internally expandable from 1 to 4
• Modbus Output plete window engraving in various points, depending on the system
sizes. specified.
• Compact Unit This system comes with everything Adjustable Input Response Time
required for complete operation: all The standard response time is 50
• Programmable Common Relay power supplies, control push buttons
Outputs milliseconds. Each module can have
and options. Simply specify a cell optional potentiometers added to
configuration, window colors, power, vary the input response time in a 1 to
• OPC Server
30 second range to eliminate nuisance
alarms (SCI Option).
• Rugged Construction
The AN-3100C annunciator provides Transistor And Logic Level Inputs

a modular design allowing the most From PLCs
flexible physical configuration Transistor and logic level outputs from
available. This window annunciator programmable logic controllers (PLCs),
is cell-based with up to 4 windows, personal computers and other devices
or inputs, per cell. You can put can provide inputs to the AN-3100C.
virtually any number of cells in any (STO Option)
configuration into one system.
Sequence Control Module
High Speed Event Capture
This optional feature captures changes
in normally open or normally closed
field contacts down to 1 millisecond in
duration for transient alarm monitoring.
(SCJ Option)
Optional Auxiliary Relays

You can add repeat relay output
modules to any or all Sequence Control
Modules. The relay output modules
connect to the Sequence Control
Module with a flexible ribbon cable, as
shown in the adjacent photo. The
relays are specified (on a per point
Auxiliary Relay Module — Attached via ribbon basis) as being open or closed, coil
cable to the Sequence Control Module energized or de-energized, and are set
to follow alarm memory, the field
contact, or to mimic the visual display.
sequence and options.
Sequence Control Module Auxiliary Relay Action
The Sequence Control Module detects Follows Field Contact — The auxiliary
changes in field contacts and lights on relay changes state with the field
alarm. Each module contains a contact and is not affected by the
microprocessor that makes it switch sequence or any commands issued.
programmable and internally expand-
able to adapt to changing require- Follows Alarm Memory — The
ments. auxiliary relay changes state on alarm
and stays in alarm until the annunciator
DIP switches allow you to change any visual indication returns to normal.
point from Normally Open to Normally
Closed and select between two Mimics Visual Display — The auxiliary
common relay outputs. On a per relay changes state in relation to the
module basis, you can select opera- visual indication and can drive a lamp
2.2
box. For example, if the annunciator Relay Output Options Other Programmable Options
window is flashing, the auxiliary relay (A, B and C standard) A DIP switch programs flash rates,
will change state at the same rate. A. Critical audible audible pulsing, reset status and
B. Non-critical audible other system options.
Common Service Module C. Ringback audible
The Common Service Module controls D. Power failure LED Displays
E. Common contact follower Optional LED displays can reduce
F. Critical reflash the system power requirements by
G. Non-critical reflash 60 mA per point. LED displays
H. Data bus malfunction require only 10 mA to operate
versus 70 mA for conventional
Power On Indicator bulbs and don’t require replace-
A red colored LED indicates power on ment. The LED displays are
in the integral common service module. normally configured for 4 points
It is located in the center of the push per module. Engraved lamacoid
buttons. tags provide legends.
Fail-Soft Design
If a failure occurs in the Common
Service Module the individual input
Common Service Module — with membrane
switch pad and power on LED
modules still capture alarms and light
the windows.
the annunciator and provides common
relays, power supply and TEST,
ACKNOWLEDGE, SILENCE and
RESET pushbuttons.
The Common Service Module mounts
either integrally to the AN-3100C,
usually occupying the lower right hand
cell, or externally. It is available in
several configurations for remote wall
and panel mounting. The integral Rack Mounted AN-3100C with 4 point LED
version has four push buttons: TEST, display modules
ACKNOWLEDGE, SILENCE, and
RESET; an optional FIRST-OUT RESET
is available. The externally mounted Serial Modbus
CSM provides input for customer The AN-3135 Serial Modbus module
mounted TEST, ACKNOWLEDGE, occupies one cell, and is configured for
SILENCE and RESET pushbuttons. bi-directional communications, as a
master or slave device. It can transmit
Full System Test or receive information using the
The TEST push button initiates a full industry standard Modbus protocol.
system test that simulates inputs and Each serial Modbus module connects
exercises the logic of each cell. Events up to 64 alarm points, and provides
that occur during the test are stored in instant connectivity to PLC, DCS, and
memory and displayed at the end of PL based systems.
the test. The TEST function can also be
switch programmed to actuate auxiliary OPC Server
relays. The AN-3135 Modbus module is
required to activate the OPC (OLE for
Common Service Module process control) server which provides
The Common Service Module normally connectivity to many OPC client
has three common output relays, with up applications.
to five optionally available. The relays can
be selected for up to eight different RiSCue Alarm Management
output options to control audibles, reflash Software
to other annunciators, and detect power The AN-3100C Annunciator can now
or data bus malfunctions. be connected to RiSCue Alarm
Management Software, enhancing your
alarm reporting and notification. See
Section 4 for additional details on
RiSCue.
2.3
AMETEK
AN-3100C Windows Engraving Guidelines
& Engraving
Maximum Number of Lines Per Window Approximate Total Number
Windows are available in five different
Character Extra Large Large Medium Standard of Characters Available
solid colors to easily differentiate
Size Inches Window Window Window Window on any Line
groups of points by nature of the alarm.
Operators quickly distinguish solid color 02 1/16 33 15 10 5 37
windows.
03 3/32 22 10 7 4 28
04 1/8 16 7 5 3 21
The windows slide onto the front of the
input card and can be quickly removed 05 5/32 13 6 4 3 17
and exchanged when you need to 06 3/16 10 5 3 2 13
internally expand the number of inputs or
change your legend. 07 7/32 9 4 3 2 11
08 1/4 8 4 2 2 10
Each module has up to 8 bulbs to 09 9/36 7 3 2 1 9
provide lighting redundancy in any
configuration or density. Double 10 5/16 6 3 2 1 8
intensity lighting is optional with eight 11 11/32 5 2 1 1 7
bulbs per point on single input and four
bulbs per point on dual input modules. 12 3/8 5 2 1 1 7
13 13/32 5 2 1 1 6
Window Colors Available 14 7/16 4 2 1 1 6
• White
• Red 15 15/32 4 2 1 1 5
• Amber 16 1/2 4 2 1 1 5
• Green
• Blue
Engraving
Fifteen different letter sizes are
available. The chart to the right
describes the maximum number of
lines and maximum number of charac-
ters per line for each letter size. The
standard lettering is in condensed
gothic. Many other types of lettering
and symbols are available.
2.4
1.67"
(42.42mm)
3.34"
(84.48mm)
2.85" 2.85"
(72.39mm) (72.39mm)
Single-point window (extra large) Two-point windows (large)
.83"
1.11" (21.25mm)
(28.3mm)
2.85" 2.85"
(72.39mm) (72.39mm)
Three-point windows (medium) Four-point windows (standard)
2.5
AMETEK
AN-3100C Dimensions &
Connections
19" Rack Mounting
The standard configuration is 6 cells
wide. It is recommended that systems
less than 6 cells wide be ordered with Typical Rack Mounting Front View
.70
a bezel. (STD/2 Option) (17.8)
E
Mounting Depth: 9" (228.6 mm) D
Mounting Information
A B C D E F
.859 2.609 3.469
1H
(21.8) (66.2) (88.0)
C
1.484 5.434 6.969
2H
Number of Cells High
(37.7) (139.3) (177.0)

1.484 3.734 6.734 8.984 10.469
3H
(37.7) (94.8) (171.0) (228.2) (265.9) F
1.484 5.484 8.484 12.484 13.969

4H
(37.7) (139.3) (215.5) (317.1) (354.8)
1.484 5.484 11.984 15.984 17.469 B
5H
(37.69) (149.3) (304.4) (406.0) (443.7)
1.484 5.484 15.484 19.484 20.969 10.484
6H
(37.69) (139.29) (393.29) (494.9) (532.61) (266.29)
1.484 5.484 18.984 22.984 24.469 12.484
7H
(37.69) (139.29) (482.19) (583.79) (621.51) (317.09)
A
The mounting information shown above provides support
locations depending on the number of cells the system is high. O.O
(distance from 0.0 reference.)
Side View Rear View
WIRING
DUCT
Note: Wiring Duct

supplied on both
← sides for 3 cell high†→
systems and larger.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2.6
Panel Mounting Panel Mounting
All mounting dimensions are based on Depth Behind Panel:
the number of cells, not windows. Each 9.5" (241.3 mm) maximum.
cell can be divided into up to 4 windows.
Dimensions are in inches with millimeters

in parentheses ( ).
NUMBER OF CELLS WIDE
1W 2W 3W 4W 5W 6W 7W 8W 9W 10W 11W 12W 13W 14W 15W
Bezel 5.26 8.17 11.08 13.99 16.90 19.83 22.74 25.65 28.56 31.47 34.38 37.29 40.20 43.11 46.02
Width (133.6) (207.5) (281.6) (355.3) (429.3) (503.7) (577.6) (651.5) (725.4) (799.3) (873.2) (947.1) (1021.1) (1094.9) (1168.9)
Cutout 4.01 6.92 9.83 12.74 15.65 18.56 21.47 24.38 27.29 30.20 33.11 36.02 38.93 41.84 44.75
Width (101.9) (175.8) (249.7) (323.6) (397.5) (471.4) (545.3) (619.3) (693.2) (767.1) (840.9) (914.9) (968.8) (1062.7) (1136.6)
NUMBER OF CELLS HIGH
1H 2H 3H 4H 5H 6H 7H 8H 9H 10H 11H 12H 13H 14H 15H
Bezel 5.75 9.15 12.56 15.97 19.37 22.77 26.17 29.58 32.99 36.4 39.80 43.20 46.50 50.00 53.40
Height (146.0) (233.0) (319.0) (405.6) (492.0) (578.3) (664.7) (751.3) (837.9) (924.5) (1011.2) (1097.8) (1184.4) (1271.0) (1357.6)
Cutout 4.50 7.90 11.30 14.70 18.10 21.50 24.90 28.30 31.70 35.10 38.50 41.90 45.30 48.70 52.10
Height (114.3) (200.7) (287.0) (373.4) (459.7) (546.1) (632.5) (718.8) (805.2) (891.5) (978.2) (1064.8) (1151.4) (1238.0) (1324.6)
Note: Consult factory for displays beyond 15 high x 15 wide.
BEZEL WIDTH
CUTOUT WIDTH
CUTOUT BEZEL
HEIGHT HEIGHT
2.7
AMETEK
AN-3100C Dimensions
& Connections
General Outline — Front View
PANEL
MOUNTING
HARDWARE
SEQUENCE
CONTROL
MODULE
TBP, TBB FOR USE WITH

INTEGRAL CSM/POWER SUPPLY
REPEAT
RELAY OPTIONAL INTEGRAL COMMON
MODULE SERVICES MODULE
General Outline — Rear View
BEZEL
PANEL MOUNTING BRACKET

P/N1074-599
TB1 SEQUENCE CONTROL MODULE

MASTER CELLS ONLY
TB2
FOR REPEAT RELAY MODULE
TB3
FOR SYSTEMS WITHOUT
INTEGRAL COMMON SERVICES/
TBF POWER SUPPLY MODULE
FOR INPUT POWER FILTER ASSEMBLY
TBA, TBB
FOR SYSTEMS WITH
INTEGRAL COMMON SERVICES/
POWER SUPPLY MODULE
2.8
Input Field Contact Wiring Typical Field Contact Wiring
(Ametek supplied Field Contact Voltage) 3 Input Modules Shown Wired With
1FCV Connection
TB1 INPUT 1 TB1 INPUT 1
1 1 The field contact can
2 INPUT 2 be either normally open TB1
2 1
3 3 or normally closed by
4 selecting the switch on 2
4 FCV 3
the input module.
5 FCV 5
FCV 4
6 6
Input 2 is wired to 5
the third input 6
INPUT 1
INPUT 1 terminal for this
INPUT 2 configuration.
EXTRA LARGE WINDOW LARGE WINDOW

(FRONT VIEW) (FRONT VIEW)
TB1
1
2
Input 3 is wired to the 4th input 3
terminal in this configuration 4
5
TB1 INPUT 1 TB1 INPUT 1 6
1 INPUT 2 1 INPUT 2
2 2 INPUT 3
3 INPUT 3 3 INPUT 4
4 FCV 4 FCV
5 5 TB1
6 FCV 6 FCV 1
INPUT 1 INPUT 1 2
INPUT 2 3
INPUT 2 4
INPUT 3
INPUT 3 INPUT 4 5
MEDIUM WINDOW 6
STANDARD WINDOW
(FRONT VIEW) (FRONT VIEW) TO OTHER
FIELD CONTACTS
Note: Terminals 5 and 6 are connected internally. FCV is replaced where
utilizing logic inputs in lieu of contact closures.
Isolated Field Contact Wiring

(Customer Supplied Field Contact Voltage) Repeat Relay Wiring
(AN-3143-9 isolated input module)
Maximum 3 pts. per cell.
TB2 TB2
TB1 1
1 120 VAC, 24VDC POINT ONE 1
RELAY OUTPUT POINT ONE
2 or 125 VDC 2 RELAY OUTPUT
2
3
4 3
3
5
6 INPUT 1 4
4
5
5
EXTRA LARGE WINDOW POINT TWO
(FRONT VIEW) 6 RELAY OUTPUT
6
7
7
TB1
1 120 VAC, 24VDC 8
or 125 VDC 8
2
3 SINGLE POINT
TWO POINT
4
5 120 VAC, 24VDC
6 or 125 VDC
TB2 TB2
INPUT 1
1 1
INPUT 2 POINT ONE POINT ONE
RELAY OUTPUT RELAY OUTPUT
LARGE WINDOW 2 2
(FRONT VIEW)
3 POINT TWO 3
POINT TWO
RELAY OUTPUT RELAY OUTPUT
TB1 4 4
1
2 5 5
3 120 VAC, 24VDC POINT THREE
or 125 VDC 6
RELAY OUTPUT
4 6
5
6 7 7
Customer Supplied POINT THREE POINT FOUR
Field Contact Voltage Options RELAY OUTPUT RELAY OUTPUT
INPUT 1 8 8
INPUT 2 D/ISO = 125 VDC FCV THREE POINT FOUR POINT
INPUT 3 X/ISO = 24 VDC FCV
MEDIUM WINDOW Y/ISO = 120 VAC FCV
(FRONT VIEW)
T/ISO = 48 VDC FCV
2.9
AMETEK
AN-3100C NEMA
Panel Covers
For applications where panel NEMA Front Cover (NFC) Options
mounted annunciation in hostile Approximate Dimensions
environments is required, NEMA 4/
12 panel covers are recommended.
Cell Format H L
Many standard sizes are available.
To help choose the panel cover that
1 high x 3 wide 8.94" (227.0 mm) 14.89" (378.2 mm)
best meets your needs, please
x 4 wide 8.94" (227.0 mm) 17.80" (452.1 mm)
consult the adjacent chart.
x 5 wide 8.94" (227.0 mm) 20.71" (526.0 mm)
x 6 wide 8.94" (227.0 mm) 23.62" (599.9 mm)
x 7 wide 8.94" (227.0 mm) 26.53" (673.8 mm)
x 8 wide 8.94" (227.0 mm) 29.44" (747.8 mm)
2 high x 2 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 11.98" (304.3 mm)
x 3 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 14.89" (378.2 mm)
x 4 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 17.80" (452.1 mm)
x 5 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 20.71" (526.0 mm)
x 6 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 23.62" (599.9 mm)
x 7 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 26.53" (673.8 mm)
x 8 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 29.44" (747.8 mm)
x 9 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 32.35" (821.7 mm)
3 high x 3 wide 15.74" (399.8 mm) 14.89" (378.2 mm)
x 4 wide 15.74" (399.8 mm) 17.80" (452.1 mm)
x 5 wide 15.74" (399.8 mm) 20.71" (526.0 mm)
x 6 wide 15.74" (399.8 mm) 23.62" (599.9 mm)
x 7 wide 15.74" (399.8 mm) 26.53" (673.8 mm)
x 8 wide 15.74" (399.8 mm) 29.44" (747.8 mm)
x 12 wide 15.74" (399.8 mm) 41.08" (1043.4 mm)
4 high x 2 wide 19.14" (486.1 mm) 11.98" (304.3 mm)
x 3 wide 19.14" (486.1 mm) 14.89" (378.2 mm)
x 4 wide 19.14" (486.1 mm) 17.80" (452.1 mm)
x 6 wide 19.14" (486.1 mm) 23.62" (599.9 mm)
x 8 wide 19.14" (486.1 mm) 29.44" (747.8 mm)
x 9 wide 19.14" (486.1 mm) 32.35" (821.7 mm)
x 12 wide 19.14" (486.1 mm) 41.08" (1043.4 mm)
5 high x 3 wide 22.54" (572.5 mm) 14.89" (378.2 mm)
x 4 wide 22.54" (572.5 mm) 17.80" (452.1 mm)
Standard width is 1.60" (40.6 mm)
NOTE: Please consult factory for certified drawings and for other available sizes.
1.60"
(40.6mm)
Hinged NEMA 4/12 H

Panel Mount Covers
The panel cover is constructed of 16
gauge, cold-rolled steel with a textured
black finish. The corners are sealed by a
neoprene sponge gasket and the
window is 1/8" thick plexiglass. Adjust- L
able grip latches secure the hinged cover
to the mounting plate.
2.10
AN-3100C For Hazardous
Locations 11.75"
NEMA Enclosures (298.4mm)
Three standard NEMA 4/12 type
surface mount enclosures are available:
a 12 cell model (3H x 4W), an 8 cell
model (4H x 2W), and a 4 cell model
(4H x 1W). All housings are oil-tight,
water-tight, weather resistant and can
be equipped for purge applications.
Standard features include door-
mounted pushbuttons. Available 20.00"
options include repeat relays, external (508.0mm)
audibles and pushbuttons, and a
common-alarm rotating dome light.
The rotating dome light is designed to
alert operators of alarms in conditions
where noise may drown out audibles. It
can be specified in red, blue, amber, or
green for either integral or remote
mounting.
16.00"
Approvals (406.4mm)
FM and CSA approved for ordinary
locations. Some models approved by
FM for hazardous locations (DIV 2). Surface Mount NEMA 4/12
Consult factory for details. Enclosure - 4H x 1W and 4H x 2W
12.68"
(322.1mm)
24.00"
(609.6mm)
20.00"
(508.0mm)
Surface Mount NEMA 4/12

Enclosure - 3H x 4W
2.11
AMETEK
AN-3100C Specifications AN-3100C Peripherals
Input Signals (Alarm Signals): Horn
A. Relay contacts, normally closed or standby. 24 VDC P/N 1011 – 349
normally open. Isolated 24, 48 or 120 VAC P/N 4200 – 004
125 VDC normally supplied for Retransmitting Relay Ratings: 125 VDC P/N 1049 – 145
use on field contacts; 12, 24, 48, Contacts rated at 5 amperes at 24 VDC
125, or 250 VDC may also be or 120 VAC and 0.1 ampere at 125
4"
(101.6mm)
2.75"
(69.9mm)
supplied by customer. VDC resistive.
B. Optically isolated inputs
1. AC wetted contact (8 VAC through Audible Relay Ratings:
128.7 VAC customer supplied) 2 amperes at 24VDC 4"
(101.6mm)
can be used. Maximum number 0.6 amperes at 120VAC
of points per cell is three. AC 0.1 amperes at 125 VDC resistive
wetted contacts up to 12 in series
may also be monitored at 120 Controls (Integral or Remote):
VAC ±20%. (SCM Option) A. Acknowledge pushbutton. KNOCKOUT FOR
.75" (19.08mm) DIA.
2. DC series contact (10 VDC through B. Silence pushbutton. CONDUIT-2 SIDES
140 VDC customer supplied) can C. Test pushbutton.

be used. Maximum number of D. Reset pushbutton.
points per cell is three. DC wetted KNOCKOUT FOR
.5" (12.7mm) DIA.
contacts (up to nine ) may also be Circuit Design: CONDUIT TOP & BOTTOM
monitored at 125 VDC ±15%. Microprocessor per module. 2"
(SCM Option) (50.8mm)
C. Computer or other instrument-type Packaging:

logic solid-state input voltages. Extruded aluminum cell with inter- 2"
(50.8mm)
changeable plug-in modules. 1.5"
Output Signals: (38.1mm)
A. Lights (steady, fast flash, slow Ambient Temperature Range: 1.25"

flash, or intermittent fast flash). 32°F to 140°F, 0°C to 60°C. (31.8mm)
B. Auxiliary relays (retransmitting). .25" (6.4mm)
C. Alarm, critical alarm, and ringback Humidity: 0-95% non-condensing. .71875" 2.5625" DIA. (4 HOLES)
(18.3mm) (65.1mm)
audible relays.
D. Reflash and critical reflash Window Sizes:
retransmit output relays. A. 0.83" x 2.85" (21.25 x 72.39mm),
E. Power Monitor output relay. standard.
F. Common Contact Follower relay. B. 1.11" x 2.85" (28.3 x 72.39mm), Sound level: 97 dB at 10'.
G. Data Bus Malfunction relay. medium. Weight: 2 lbs. 4 oz (1.0 kg)
C. 1.67" x 2.85" (42.42 x 72.39mm),
Response Time: 50 milliseconds large. Bell — Vibrating Edwards
standard; 1 millisecond to 30 seconds D. 3.34" x 2.85" (84.84 x 72.39mm), No. 435-6" 24 VDC
available optionally. extra large. P/N 1023-298
Surge Withstand Capability (SWC): Weight: 1.68 lbs (0.76 kg) per cell.
6" MAX.
(152.4mm)
2.90625"
(73.8mm)
Test conforms to ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1-
1989 (oscillatory) and IEC 801-4 Level Approvals:
2. FM and CSA approved for ordinary
locations. Some models FM approved
Power Requirements: for hazardous locations (DIV 2). Consult
A. 120 VAC, +16%, -25% (50 or 60 factory for details.
Hz).
B. 240 VAC, +16%, -25% (50 or 60 Hz)
C. 24VDC, +25%, -16%
D. 125 or 250 VDC, +25%, -20%
E. 48VDC, +25%, -10%
F. 4.5 watts per point on alarm;
approximately 1 watt per point on
Universal adaptaplate mounts directly on

surface of any single gang opening: 3 1/4,"
3 1/2", 4" octagon; 4" SQ. box or equivalent
surface fitting. Sound level: 92 dB at 10'.
Weight: 2 lbs. 11 oz. (1.2 kg)
2.12
Buzzer — Vibrating Edwards No. 343-A 24 VDC Remote Mounted Sonalert
P/N 1005-563 Steady P/N 1011-350
Pulsing P/N 1021-949
NOSE RING
5.25" MAX. 2.375" 1.125-24 THD.
(133.4mm) (60.3mm)
6-32
1.3125"
(33.3mm)
.25"
(6.35mm)
1.6875" .375" 1.42" .4375"

(42.9mm) (9.5mm) (36mm) (11.1mm)
Universal adaptaplate mounts directly on surface of any single gang

opening: 3 1/4", 3 1/2", 4" octagon; 4" SQ. box or equivalent surface 1.25"
fitting. Sound level: 70 dB at 10'. Weight: 2 lbs. 5 oz. (1.1 kg) (31.75mm)
Beacon — Federal Model 121A Vitalite + –

P/N 1055-365
1.15625"
(29.4mm)
REVOLVING MOUNTING TEMPLATE
PARABOLIC Mtg. Hole
REFLECTOR
PLASTIC LAMP
HOUSING 2" Sound level: 60-80 dB. Weight: 3 oz. (.1 kg)
(50.83215mm) R.
6.5" 125°
(165.1mm)
100°
Remote Mounted Pushbuttons
.140625"
(3.57188mm) 125°
3 HOLES
RUBBER
SPACER
.40625" 2 PANEL (.0625" to .25" thk)
(10.31875mm) DIA.
ROOF HOLE FOR GROMMET
SHEET 3
METAL GROMMET
SCREW .134 Drill
5.125"
1 .140
(130.2mm)
1.203125"
(30.5mm)
Voltages: 12, 24 or 32/36 VDC
.600"
Weight: 1 lb. 3 oz. (.5 kg) 1.78125" 1.375"
(15.2mm)
(45.2mm) (34.9mm)
Electronic Horn
Model AN-1150A Mtg. Hole
12.00" 1.09375" 1.4375"

(304.8mm)
6.50" 2.68" (27.8mm) (36.5mm)
(165.1mm) (68.1mm)
1.68"
(42.7mm)
.343"
(8.71mm)
SEE DETAIL
NOTE: Contact Rating: Continuous, 10 A Normal Load
12.00"
‘A’
12.00"
Break: 120 VAC, 6 A or 125 VDC 2.2 A.
(304.8mm)
(304.8mm) 11.86"
(301.2mm)
Weight: 6 oz. (.2 kg)
Chime — Edwards 339-G1 24 VDC

P/N 1070-078
5.25"
3.15625"
(133.4mm) (80.2mm)
DETAIL ‘A’
.125" R
5.25"
(133.4mm)
.343" 6.5"
(8.71mm) (165.1mm)
11.86"
(301.2mm) .437 DIA.
24 VDC, 48 VDC, 125 VDC, 120 VAC, 240 VAC

Sound level: 96 dB at 10'. Weight: 11 lbs. 14 oz. (5.4 kg) Sound level: 81 dB at 10'. Weight: 2 lbs. 7 oz. (1.2 kg)
Two adjustable tones, adjustable volume
2.13
AMETEK
AN-3100C Power Table 1 — Integral Power Supply — Power Monitor AN-039
Maximum Number of Display Cells*
Supplies & Accessories
Ametek offers two configurations of Cell Configuration
power supplies: integral or remote wall 4 pts 3 pts/ 2 pts/ 1 pt/
mounted. Input voltages are 120 VAC, cell cell cell cell
240 VAC, 250 VDC, 125 VDC or 48
VDC. (24 VDC requires no power supply.) No relay 10 14 21 21
no audible
Integral Power Supply With relay 8 11 17 19
The integral power supply takes up one no audible
cell and is contained within the same
cell as the Common Service Module for With relay 8 11 17 18
maximum space savings. The integral and Sonalert For monitoring prime or backup power.
supply is provided any time that the With relay 8 10 15 17
integral Common Service Module is Output Signal: Form C relay output
and horn contacts rated at 10 amps, 24 VDC or
specified, providing that the supply has
the drive capacity to power the number 120 VAC resistive.
of windows. See Table 1. Table 2 —External Power Supply —
Maximum Number of Display Cells Dimension:
(Ratings per single power supply)* 8.5" (216.0mm) h
Remote Mounted Power Supply
The remote mounted power supply is Cell Configuration 2.75" (70mm) w
only provided when a remote mounted 5.2" (132.1mm) d
4 pts/ 3 pts/ 2 pts/ 1 pt/
Common Service Module is specified cell cell cell cell
or when the integral supply cannot be Weight: 2 lbs. 8 oz. (1.1 kg)
used. Also, the remote supply contains No relay 24 32 47 48
the common module. The remote no audible
supply is extremely compact and Ground Detector PR-2000
With relay 19 25 38 42
provides a higher drive capability than no audible
the integral supply. Multiple remote
supplies are provided when the With relay 19 25 38 42
window capacity becomes too large for and Sonalert
a single remote supply. See Table 2. With relay 19 25 37 41
and horn
Tables 1 and 2 are for quick reference.
Both tables present the maximum *Nominal 100% lamp duty cycle @ 30ºC,
number of cells a single power supply derate to 50% lamp duty cycle @ 60ºC.
can drive.
AN-3100C Remote Power Supply Dimensions

For detecting grounds in field wiring.
TYPICAL CONDUIT
MOUNTING HARDWARE
Output Signal: SPDT contacts rated 10
amps, 28 VDC or 120 VAC resistive.
OPTIONAL
Trip Adjustment: 1K-150 Kohm,
TERMINAL
BLOCK
COVER
WEIGHT:
1. HIGH POWER VERSION: 5 LB, 7 OZ.
continuously adjustable
2. LOW POWER VERSION: 4 LB, 14 OZ.
3. COMMON SERVICES ONLY:4 LB, 5 OZ
TB1 TB1
Consult factory for details on this
1 1
product.
10.25 [ 260.35 ]
10.75 [ 273.05 ]
12 12
OPTIONAL
INTEGRAL PUSHBUTTONS
FOR COMMON SERVICES
SILENCE ACKNOWLEDGE
LARGE HEATSINK PROFILE POWER
FOR HIGH POWER VERSION
TEST RESET
NO HEATSINK FOR COMMON 0.25 [ 6.4 ]

SERVICES ONLY
1.33 [ 33.8 ] 2 PLACES
2.75 [ 69.9 ]
0.25 [ 6.4 ] MTG. HOLE
2 PLACES 3.80 [ 96.5 ]
7.69 [ 195.3 ] 4.00 [ 101.6 ]
2.14
AN-3100C Programmable Option Function Description
Sequences
Fourteen sequences are switch 1 Silence Pushbutton A separate pushbutton to allow silencing the
selectable on an individual input audible device without affecting visual displays.
module basis. A brief description of
each of the nine basic sequences and 2 Interlock Pushbutton An interlock requiring operation of the
a list of available options is given pushbuttons in sequence of SILENCE,
below. ACKNOWLEDGE, RESET.
A — Automatic Reset. Acknowledged 4 No Lock-In The lock-in feature is deleted.

alarm indications are automatically Momentary alarms return to the normal
reset when process conditions return sequence state without operation of the
to normal. ACKNOWLEDGE pushbutton.
M — Manual Reset. Acknowledged 6 No Audible The audible device is deleted.

alarm indications must be manually
reset when process conditions return 7 Automatic Silence A time delay device to silence the alarm
to normal. audible device after a set time of 30
seconds, without affecting the visual displays.
R — Ringback. Provides visual and
audible indications to alert operators 8 Common Ringback A common audible device to call attention to
both under alarm conditions and when both the alarm and ringback sequence states.
alarms return to normal.
10 No Ringback Audible The ringback audible device is deleted.
F1A — First-Out. Initial alarm is
highlighted by flashing and audible 11 Common Ringback The same type flashing indication is
indications. Subsequent alarms go into Visual used to indicate both the alarm and ringback
the acknowledged state and are not sequence states.
locked in if momentary.
12 Automatic Momentary Ringback sequence momentary alarms
F2M-1 — First-Out. Similar to F1A Ringback go to the ringback state without
except that the Silence pushbutton operation of the ACKNOWLEDGE
can silence the audible and retain the pushbutton.
First-Out flashing. Momentary alarms
are locked in and manual reset is
required. Basic
Sequence R—12
Letter Key Words Basic
FFAM2 — First-Out. Similar to F2M-1 Sequence Option
except that the First-Out alarm can A Automatic Reset Number
M Manual Reset Letter
only be reset after the process
condition has returned to normal. R Ringback
F2M — 1
F3A — First-Out. Similar to F1A First Out First Out
except that two visual flash rates are Designation Key Words Designation
provided, one for First-Out and one for F1 No Subsequent Alarm
State Option
subsequent alarms. A First-Out Reset Basic Number
pushbutton is required. F2 No Subsequent Alarm Sequence
Flashing Letter
F3C — First-Out. Dual color red/white F3 First Out Flashing and
sequence, red on first-out, white on Reset Pushbutton
subsequent.
R-12C — Ringback. Dual color

sequence, white on alarm, green on
visual ringback.
LEGEND
P Process
Multiple First-Out Groups. Optional S Sequence
up to four separate first-out groups per V Visual
annunciator. A Audible LAMP OFF LAMP LAMP ON HORN OFF HORN ON
FLASHING
2.15
AMETEK
AN-3100C Operational
Sequences
Sequence “A” Features: Standard Sequence “A”
• Acknowledge and Test
push buttons NORMAL P
• Alarm audible device NORMAL S
• Lock-in of momentary alarms OFF V
until acknowledged
SILENT A
• The audible device is silenced and
Return to To Abnormal
flashing stops when acknowledged Normal
• Automatic reset of acknowledged
alarm indications when process ABNORMAL OR
ABNORMAL P NORMAL P
conditions return to normal Acknowledged
While Abnormal
• Operations test ACKNOWLEDGED S ALARM S
ON V FLASHING V
SILENT A AUDIBLE A
ISA RETURN TO RETURN TO

ALARM NORMAL NORMAL
REFERENCE DEVICE ALERT ACKNOWLEDGE NORMAL ACKNOWLEDGE RESET
BEFORE ACK.
VISUAL
ISA-A
AUDIBLE
Sequence “M” Features:

• Acknowledge and Test
push buttons
Standard Sequence “M”
• Alarm audible device
• Lock-in momentary alarms NORMAL P
until acknowledged NORMAL S
• The audible device is silenced and OFF V
flashing stops when acknowledged
• Manual reset of acknowledged SILENT A
Reset
While Normal
alarm indications when process To Abnormal
conditions return to normal

• Operational test ABNORMAL OR ABNORMAL OR
NORMAL P NORMAL P
ACKNOWLEDGED S ALARM S
ON V Acknowledge FLASHING V
SILENT A AUDIBLE A
ISA ALARM RETURN TO

RETURN TO NORMAL
REFERENCE DEVICE NORMAL ALERT ACKNOWLEDGE NORMAL ACKNOWLEDGE RESET
BEFORE ACK.
VISUAL
ISA-M
AUDIBLE
2.16
Sequence “R-12” Features: Standard Sequence “R-12”
• Acknowledge, Reset and Test NORMAL P
push buttons NORMAL S
• Alarm and ringback audible devices
• The audible device is silenced and OFF V
fast flashing stops when SILENT AA
acknowledged SILENT RA
• Ringback visual and audible Reset To Abnormal
indications when process conditions
Acknowledge
return to normal While
NORMAL P ABNORMAL OR P
• Manual reset of ringback indications Normal NORMAL
• Operational test RINGBACK S ALARM S
SLOW FLASHING V FAST FLASHING V
SILENT AA Return to Abnormal AUDIBLE AA
AUDIBLE RA SILENT RA
Return Acknowledge
ABNORMAL P While Abnormal
to Normal
ACKNOWLEDGED S
ON V
P Process A Audible SILENT AA
S Sequence AA Alarm Audible
V Visual RA Ringback Audible SILENT RA
ISA RETURN TO
ALARM NORMAL RETURN TO
REFERENCE DEVICE ALERT ACKNOWLEDGE NORMAL NORMAL ACKNOWLEDGE RESET
BEFORE ACK.
VISUAL
FAST SLOW SLOW SLOW
R-12
AUDIBLE
*A distinctly different ringback audible can be provided in most cases

* * *
Sequence “F2M-1” Features: First-Out Sequence “F2M-1”

• Silence, Acknowledge, Reset and NORMAL P
Test push buttons
NORMAL S
• Lock-in of momentary alarms until OFF V
acknowledged SILENT A
Reset
• Option 1: Silence push button to While Normal Subsequent
First to Abnormal
silence the audible device to
Abnormal
while retaining First-Out
ABNORMAL OR ABNORMAL OR ABNORMAL OR
flashing indication NORMAL P Silence NORMAL P NORMAL P
• Flashing indication for first alarm ACKNOWLEDGED S SUBSEQUENT
ALARM S FIRST ALARM S
only. New subsequent alarms have ON V Acknowledge ON V FLASHING V
the same visual indication as
acknowledged alarms SILENT A AUDIBLE A AUDIBLE A
• First-Out indication is reset when
acknowledged Acknowledge (First-Out Reset)
• Manual reset of acknowledged
alarm indications after process ABNORMAL P
conditions return to normal Acknowledge FIRST SILENCED S Silence

• Operation test (First-Out Reset) FLASHING V
SILENT A
ALERT ACKNOWLEDGE RETURN TO NORMAL RETURN TO NORMAL ACKNOWLEDGE

ISA ALARM BEFORE ACK. FIRST-OUT
REFERENCE DEVICE NORMAL RESET
INITIAL NEXT INITIAL NEXT INITIAL NEXT INITIAL NEXT INITIAL NEXT
VISUAL
F2M-1
† AUDIBLE
† Silence function not shown. See line diagram above.

2.17
AMETEK
AN-3100C Operational
Sequences First-Out Sequence “FFAM2”
Sequence “FFAM2” Features:
• Silence, Acknowledge Reset and NORMAL P
Test push buttons NORMAL S
• Alarm audible device OFF V
• Lock-in of momentary alarms until SILENT A
acknowledged Reset
While Normal First to Abnormal
• Option 1: Silence push button to Subsequent
to
silence the audible device while Abnormal
retaining First-Out flashing indication ABNORMAL OR
P Silence
ABNORMAL OR
P ABNORMAL OR
P
NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL
• Flashing indication for first alarm SUBSEQUENT
ACKNOWLEDGED S S FIRST ALARM S
only. New subsequent alarms have ALARM
the same visual indication as ON V Acknowledge ON V Reset

While
FLASHING V
acknowledged alarms SILENT A AUDIBLE A Normal AUDIBLE A
• First-Out point can only be reset
after it has returned to normal
ABNORMAL OR
• Manual reset of acknowledged NORMAL P
alarm indications after process FIRST SILENCED S
conditions return to normal FLASHING V Acknowledge or
• Operational test Silence
Reset While Normal SILENT A

SEQUENCE ALARM BEFORE ACK. FIRST-OUT
CODE DEVICE NORMAL RESET
VISUAL
FFAM2
AUDIBLE
Note: Silence function not shown. See line diagram above. Depressing Reset button will cause light to go Steady On.
Sequence “F3A”
Sequence “F3A” Features:
NORMAL P
• Acknowledge, First-Out Reset and
Test push buttons NORMAL S
• Alarm audible device OFF V
• Lock-in of momentary alarms until SILENT A
acknowledged Return
First to Abnormal
to Normal Acknowledge Subsequent
• First-Out flashing is different from While to
subsequent flashing Normal Abnormal
• First-Out reset push button to ABNORMAL P ABNORMAL OR

NORMAL P ABNORMAL OR
NORMAL P
change the First-Out visual SUBSEQUENT SUBSEQUENT FIRST ALARM
ACKNOWLEDGED S Acknowledge ALARM S First-Out S
indication to be the same as
ON V While SLOW FLASHING* V Reset INTERMITTENT V
subsequent visual indications Normal FAST FLASHING
• Automatic reset of acknowledged SILENT A AUDIBLE A AUDIBLE A
alarm indications after process First-Out Reset
conditions return to normal While Normal
First-Out Reset
• Operational test While Abnormal
Acknowledge
ABNORMAL OR
NORMAL P
FIRST
ACKNOWLEDGED S
FAST FLASHING* V * Slow and fast flashing can be
interchanged and customer selected by
jumper changes on the common module
SILENT A

VISUAL
INT. FAST SLOW FAST FAST INT. FAST SLOW FAST
F3A
AUDIBLE
2.18
Sequence “F1A” Features:
• Acknowledge and Test push
buttons
• Lock-in of momentary first alarm Sequence “F1A”
until acknowledged. No lock-in of
NORMAL P
momentary alarms
• Flashing and audible indications for NORMAL S
first alarm only. New subsequent OFF V
alarms go to the acknowledged SILENT A
state Return First to
to Normal Abnormal
• First-Out indication is reset and the
audible is silenced when Subsequent Acknowledge
to Abnormal While Normal
acknowledged ABNORMAL P (First-Out Reset) ABNORMAL OR
P
NORMAL
• Automatic reset of acknowledged
ACKNOWLEDGED S FIRST ALARM S
alarm indications after process
conditions return to normal ON V FLASHING V
• Operational test SILENT A Acknowledge AUDIBLE A
While Normal
(First-Out Reset)

ISA ALARM BEFORE ACK.
REFERENCE DEVICE NORMAL
VISUAL
F1A
AUDIBLE
Sequence “F3C” Features:

• Acknowledge, First-Out Reset and Sequence “F3C”
Test Pushbuttons
• Alarm audible device NORMAL P
• Lock-in of momentary alarms until NORMAL S
acknowledge OFF V
• First-Out color is different from
SILENT A
subsequent color Return
First to Abnormal
• First-Out Reset pushbutton to change to Normal Acknowledge Subsequent
While to
the First-Out visual indication to be Normal Abnormal
the same as subsequent visual ABNORMAL OR ABNORMAL OR
ABNORMAL P NORMAL P NORMAL P
indications
SUBSEQUENT SUBSEQUENT FIRST ALARM
• Automatic reset of acknowledged ACKNOWLEDGED S Acknowledge ALARM S First-Out S
alarm indications when process WHITE ON V While WHITE FLASHING V Reset RED FLASHING V
Normal
conditions return to normal SILENT A AUDIBLE A AUDIBLE A
• Operational test using sequence:
First-Out Reset
Test; First-Out Reset; Acknowledge While Normal
First-Out Reset Acknowledge
While Abnormal
ABNORMAL P
P Process
FIRST
S Sequence ACKNOWLEDGED S
V Visual RED ON V
A Audible
SILENT A

VISUAL
RED WHITE RED WHITE RED RED WHITE RED
F3A
AUDIBLE
2.19
AMETEK
Standard Sequence “R-12C”
AN-3100C Operational NORMAL P
Sequences NORMAL S
Sequence “R-12C” Features
OFF V
• Acknowledge, Reset and Test
Pushbuttons SILENT AA
• Alarm and ringback audible devices SILENT RA
• The audible device is silenced and Reset To Abnormal
flashing stops when acknowledged
Acknowledge
• Ringback visual and audible While ABNORMAL OR
NORMAL P Normal P
indications when process conditions NORMAL
return to normal RINGBACK S ALARM S

• Manual reset of ringback indications COLOR #2
FLASHING V COLOR #1
FLASHING V
• Operational test SILENT AA Return to Abnormal AUDIBLE AA
AUDIBLE RA SILENT RA
Annunciator sequences are from
ISA Standard S18.1.© Return ABNORMAL P Acknowledge
Instrument Society of America. to Normal While Abnormal
1979, reprinted with permission. ACKNOWLEDGED S
COLOR #1 ON V
P Process A Audible SILENT AA
S Sequence AA Alarm Audible
V Visual RA Ringback Audible SILENT RA
ISA RETURN TO
ALARM NORMAL RETURN TO
REFERENCE DEVICE ALERT ACKNOWLEDGE NORMAL NORMAL ACKNOWLEDGE RESET
BEFORE ACK.
VISUAL
COLOR #1 FLASH COLOR #1 ON COLOR #2 FLASH COLOR #2 FLASH COLOR #2 FLASH
R-12
AUDIBLE
*A distinctly different ringback audible can be provided in most cases

* * *
AN-3100C Ordering
The model number of the AN-3100C consists of twelve (12) items derived from the order codes listed below. When ordering a
system that includes any “intermix” options (e.g. more than one window color), an intermix order form should be completed to
fully define the annunciator. If you have any questions, contact your nearest Ametek representative for assistance.
AN-3100C - 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 – 6 – 7 – 8 – 9 – 10 – 11 – 12
_________ _________ _______ _____ _____ _______ _________ ___________ ____ _________ _______ ______
Number of Number of Common Window Active Window Operational Field Contact Prime Relay Per Standard Engraving
Cells High Cells Wide Module Size Points Color Sequence Voltage Power Point Options
ORDER CODE FOR EACH ENTRY

ITEM Item 3 Item 4
Each item has a unique order code Order Order
which must be entered in its specific Code Common Module Code Window Size
location in the model number sequence. INTB Integral with pushbuttons 4 Standard, 4 per cell
The following is a tabulation of the order (mounted in lower right cell) 3E Medium, 3 per cell, field
codes that must be used for each and INTO Integral without pushbuttons expandable
every item of the standard model (mounted in lower right cell — 2E Large, 2 per cell, field expandable
number. requires external pushbuttons) 1E Extra large, 1 per cell, field
RPB Remote, panel mount with expandable
Item 1 pushbuttons LED LED display, 4 per cell
The order code defines the number of RWO Remote, wall mount without FC Future cell, provided with an
cells high, not to exceed 12. pushbuttons (requires external extra large size, matching
pushbuttons) window (logic module and lamps
Item 2 not included)
The order code defines the number of IMW Intermix window size
cells wide, not to exceed 12. 1N Extra large, 1 per cell,
non-expandable
2N Large, 2 per cell
non-expandable
2.20
Item 5 Item 10 SCO/3 Three first-out groups
Active Point — define total number of Relay State SCO/4 Four first-out groups
equipped or active points. When Field STA Pulsing the alarm audible at the
Input Is In Its slow flash rate, not available
Item 6 Order Normal with first out sequences.
Order Code Relay Action Condition STB Pulsing the ringback audible at
Code Window Color NR No relays required the slow flash rate.
W White FOE Follows field contact Contacts open/ STC/1 Automatic alarm and ringback
R Red coil energized silence after 30 seconds
A Amber FOD Follows field contact Contacts open/ STC/2 Audible delay of automatic
G Green coil de-energized alarm and ringback silence
B Blue FCE Follows field contact Contacts closed/ adjustable up to 10 hours
LED LED coil energized (remote time delay relay)
IMC Intermix window color FCD Follows field contact Contacts closed/ STD/1 19 inch rack mounting
Refer to Intermix Matrix Order Form on coil de-energized STD/2 19 inch bezel rack mounting
page 2.23 for location. MOE Follows alarm memory Contacts open/ STE Rear terminal cover
coil energized STG/1** Steady Sonalert mounted in
Item 7 MOD Follows alarm memory Contacts open/ a cell (requires one extra cell)
A. Define the operational sequence coil de-energized STG/2** Pulsing Sonalert mounted in
by letter designation from the MCE Follows alarm memory Contacts closed/ a cell (requires one extra cell)
sequences shown on page 2.15 coil energized STI Critical/non-critical relays
and enter that designation in the MCD Follows alarm memory Contacts closed/ activated at the same time
model number format. coil de-energized STL Double intensity, available
IMR Intermix relays only with extra large (one per
B. For an intermix sequence, Refer to Intermix Matrix Order Form cell) and large (two per cell)
enter order code IMO in the model on page 2.23 for location. windows. Doubles power
number format. Note that all STK Additional Relay Per Point supply requirements.
points STM Moisture/fungus proof coating
in the same cell must have the Item 11 STN Status point indication in
same sequence. Order place of alarm point indication
Code Description STO Transistor and logic level
Item 8 SCA Auxiliary relay test inputs, specify exact type
Order RMD Auxiliary relays mimic visual STZ Increased input response in
Code Field Contact Voltage display place of (Fixed) standard 50 ms.
D 125 VDC SCC Common contact follower Specify one of the following with
X 24 VDC relay output (takes the place order: 70 ms, 120 ms, 200 ms,
T 48 VDC of the ringback audible relay) 500 ms, 700 ms, 1 sec, 2 sec
D/ISO 125 VDC, isolated, three SCD Power failure relay output (See SCI)
points per cell maximum SCE Loss of data buss relay output PORT/1 AN-3135 1-24 Inputs
Y/ISO 120 VAC, isolated, three SCF Common non-critical reflash Serial Modbus
points per cell relay output PORT/2 AN-3135 25-48 Inputs
maximum SCG Common critical reflash relay Serial Modbus
X/ISO 24VDC, isolated, three output PORT/3 AN-3135 49-64 nputs
points per cell maximum SCH No audible on test Serial Modbus
T/ISO 48 VDC, isolated, three SCI Adjustable time delay, in
points per cell, maximum specific ranges: **Location must be defined by com-
SCI/1 2 to 30 seconds pleting the intermix matrix form.
Item 9 SCI/2 1 to 14 seconds
SCI/3 0.4 to 6 seconds NOTE: Any model number containing
Order Prime Power/Power
SCI/4 .07 to 1 second IMW, IMC, IMO, or IMR designations
Code Supplies
SCJ Decreased response time. requires an intermix matrix order form.
F 24 VDC, non-isolated
With normally open field
supply
contacts. Captures alarms Item 12
E 48 VDC, isolated supply
down to 1 millisecond in
C 125 VDC, isolated supply Order
duration.
H 250 VDC, isolated supply Code Engraving
SCM Series contacts inputs
B 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Y Engraving provided by
SCN Blocking diodes. Allows
isolated supply Ametek
sharing of field contacts with
A 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, NR Engraving not required
other devices for DC FCV only.
isolated supply
SCO/2 Two first-out groups
2.21
AMETEK
AN-3100C
Intermix Matrix
The basic model number does not
provide the necessary information to
configure special intermix options WINDOW
(window size/color, sequence, relays). COLOR CODE
When intermixed codes are used, this WINDOW
form must accompany the order to SIZE CODE
allow us to properly configure the
system to the customer's require-
ments.
RELAY CODE
Step 1: If utilizing internal CSM, allow
one cell position. SEQUENCE FOR FIRST-OUT
SEQUENCE GROUP
Step 2: Define each cell’s require-
ments as shown: SEQUENCE CODE
(MARK FUTURE CELLS –“FC”).
Step 3: Make any appropriate notes

at the bottom of the form. (See next
page for reproducible form).
Example 1
WINDOW
COLOR CODE
WINDOW
SIZE CODE
4 W
4 R
N/A RELAY CODE
4 A
4 G
R-12 SEQUENCE FOR FIRST-OUT
SEQUENCE GROUP
SEQUENCE CODE
Example 2
WINDOW
COLOR CODE
WINDOW
SIZE CODE
2E R
FOD RELAY CODE
4 A
4 G
F3A 2 SEQUENCE FOR FIRST-OUT
SEQUENCE GROUP
SEQUENCE CODE
2.22
Intermix Matrix Order Form
(Reproduce as necessary)
COLUMNS
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F
ROWS
A
COMMON
MODULE
Additional Information ____________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________
2.23
AMETEK
AN-5131 Annunciator AN-5131 Windows

Display Unit & Engraving
Windows are available in five different Window Colors Available
The Ametek AN-5131 Annunciator solid colors to easily differentiate • White
Display is available in an unlimited groups of points by nature of the alarm. • Red
variety of configurations. This modular Operators quickly distinguish solid color • Amber
window annunciator is structured windows. • Green
around extruded aluminum cells. Each • Blue
cell can be divided to provide one, two,
The windows slide onto the front of the Engraving
three, or four windows and lamp
input card and can be quickly removed Fifteen different letter sizes are avail-
displays. This feature can also be used
and exchanged when you need to able. The chart below describes the
in the field to easily expand capacity by
internally expand the number of inputs or maximum number of lines and maxi-
changing per-cell displays to corre-
change your legend. mum number of characters per line for
spondingly smaller sizes. Windows are
available in an assortment of sizes and each letter size. The standard lettering
Each module has up to 8 bulbs to is in condensed gothic. Many other
colors that can be mixed or matched in
provide lighting redundancy in any types of lettering and symbols are
any combination. Bezels and mounting
configuration or density. Double available.
hardware are provided for panel
intensity lighting is optional with eight
mounting. AN-5131 input options
bulbs per point on single input and four
include terminals or connectors.
bulbs per point on dual input modules.
Engraving Guidelines
Maximum Number of Lines Per Window Approximate Total Number

Character Extra Large Large Medium Standard of Characters Available
Size Inches Window Window Window Window on any Line
02 1/16 33 15 10 5 37
03 3/32 22 10 7 4 28
04 1/8 16 7 5 3 21
05 5/32 13 6 4 3 17
06 3/16 10 5 3 2 13
07 7/32 9 4 3 2 11
Pushbutton Control Module 08 1/4 8 4 2 2 10
A Pushbutton Control Module is
09 9/36 7 3 2 1 9
available which controls the remote
annunciator electronics by providing 10 5/16 6 3 2 1 8
pushbuttons for TEST, ACKNOWL- 11 11/32 5 2 1 1 7
EDGE, SILENCE and RESET functions.
12 3/8 5 2 1 1 7
13 13/32 5 2 1 1 6
14 7/16 4 2 1 1 6
15 15/32 4 2 1 1 5
16 1/2 4 2 1 1 5
Pushbutton Control Module — with switch

pad and power on LED
The Pushbutton Control Module

mounts integrally to the AN-5131
Annunciator Display Unit, usually
occupying the lower right hand cell.
2.24
1.67"
(42.42mm)
3.34"
(84.48mm)
2.85" 2.85"
(72.39mm) (72.39mm)
Single-point window (extra large) Two-point windows (large)
.83"
1.11" (21.25mm)
(28.3mm)
2.85" 2.85"
(72.39mm) (72.39mm)
Three-point windows (medium) Four-point windows (standard)
2.25
AMETEK
AN-5131 Dimensions
& Connections
19" Rack Mounting
The standard configuration is 6 cells
wide. It is recommended that systems
less than 6 cells wide be ordered with Typical Rack Mounting Front View
.70
a bezel. (STD/2 Option) (17.8)
E
Mounting Depth: 4.5" (114.3 mm) D
Mounting Information
A B C D E F
.859 2.609 3.469
1H
(21.8) (66.2) (88.0)
C
1.484 5.434 6.969
2H
(37.7) (139.3) (177.0)
1.484 3.734 6.734 8.984 10.469
Number of Cells High
3H
(37.7) (94.8) (171.0) (228.2) (265.9) F
1.484 5.484 8.484 12.484 13.969

4H
(37.7) (139.3) (215.5) (317.1) (354.8)
1.484 5.484 11.984 15.984 17.469 B
5H
(37.69) (149.3) (304.4) (406.0) (443.7)
1.484 5.484 15.484 19.484 20.969 10.484
6H
(37.69) (139.29) (393.29) (494.9) (532.61) (266.29)
1.484 5.484 18.984 22.984 24.469 12.484
7H
(37.69) (139.29) (482.19) (583.79) (621.51) (317.09)
A
The mounting information shown above provides support
locations depending on the number of cells the system is high. O.O
(distance from 0.0 reference.)
Side View Rear View
WIRING
DUCT
Note: Wiring Duct

supplied on both
†→
sides for 3 cell high
systems and larger.
Optional
← Connector
Bracket 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2.26
Panel Mounting Panel Mounting
All mounting dimensions are based on Depth Behind Panel:
the number of cells, not windows. 4.5" (114.3 mm) maximum.
Each cell can be divided into up to 4
windows.
Dimensions are in inches with millime-

ters in parentheses ( ).
NUMBER OF CELLS WIDE
1W 2W 3W 4W 5W 6W 7W 8W 9W 10W 11W 12W 13W 14W 15W
Bezel 5.26 8.17 11.08 13.99 16.90 19.83 22.74 25.65 28.56 31.47 34.38 37.29 40.20 43.11 46.02
Width (133.6) (207.5) (281.6) (355.3) (429.3) (503.7) (577.6) (651.5) (725.4) (799.3) (873.2) (947.1) (1021.1) (1094.9) (1168.9)
Cutout 4.01 6.92 9.83 12.74 15.65 18.56 21.47 24.38 27.29 30.20 33.11 36.02 38.93 41.84 44.75
Width (101.9) (175.8) (249.7) (323.6) (397.5) (471.4) (545.3) (619.3) (693.2) (767.1) (840.9) (914.9) (968.8) (1062.7) (1136.6)
NUMBER OF CELLS HIGH
1H 2H 3H 4H 5H 6H 7H 8H 9H 10H 11H 12H 13H 14H 15H
Bezel 5.75 9.15 12.56 15.97 19.37 22.77 26.17 29.58 32.99 36.4 39.80 43.20 46.50 50.00 53.40
Height (146.0) (233.0) (319.0) (405.6) (492.0) (578.3) (664.7) (751.3) (837.9) (924.5) (1011.2) (1097.8) (1184.4) (1271.0) (1357.6)
Cutout 4.50 7.90 11.30 14.70 18.10 21.50 24.90 28.30 31.70 35.10 38.50 41.90 45.30 48.70 52.10
Height (114.3) (200.7) (287.0) (373.4) (459.7) (546.1) (632.5) (718.8) (805.2) (891.5) (978.2) (1064.8) (1151.4) (1238.0) (1324.6)
Note: Consult factory for displays beyond 15 high x 15 wide.
BEZEL WIDTH
CUTOUT WIDTH
CUTOUT BEZEL
HEIGHT HEIGHT
2.27
AMETEK
AN-5131 Dimensions
& Connections
General Outline — Front View
General Outline — Rear View
SHOWN WITHOUT
OPTIONAL DISPLAY
REAR COVER
Optional
← Connector
Bracket
2.28
Display Cell Input Wiring
Connections
TB1 TB1
1 INPUT 1 1 INPUT 1
2 2
3 3 INPUT 2
4 4
5 +24 VDC 5 +24 VDC
6 LAMP TEST OR DIMMING 6 LAMP TEST OR DIMMING
1 INPUT 2 INPUTS
TB1 TB1
1 INPUT 1 1 INPUT 1
2 INPUT 2 2 INPUT 2
3 3 INPUT 3
4 INPUT 3 4 INPUT 4
5 +24 VDC 5 +24 VDC
6 LAMP TEST OR DIMMING 6 LAMP TEST OR DIMMING
3 INPUTS 4 INPUTS
2.29
AMETEK
AN-5131 NEMA
Panel Covers
For applications where panel NEMA Front Cover (NFC) Options
mounted annunciation in hostile
Approximate Dimensions
environments is required, NEMA 4/
12 panel covers are recommended.
Cell Format H L
Many standard sizes are available.
To help choose the panel cover that
best meets your needs, please 1 high x 3 wide 8.94" (227.0 mm) 14.89" (378.2 mm)
consult the adjacent chart. x 4 wide 8.94" (227.0 mm) 17.80" (452.1 mm)
x 5 wide 8.94" (227.0 mm) 20.71" (526.0 mm)
x 6 wide 8.94" (227.0 mm) 23.62" (599.9 mm)
x 7 wide 8.94" (227.0 mm) 26.53" (673.8 mm)
x 8 wide 8.94" (227.0 mm) 29.44" (747.8 mm)
2 high x 2 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 11.98" (304.3 mm)
x 3 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 14.89" (378.2 mm)
x 4 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 17.80" (452.1 mm)
x 5 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 20.71" (526.0 mm)
x 6 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 23.62" (599.9 mm)
x 7 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 26.53" (673.8 mm)
x 8 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 29.44" (747.8 mm)
x 9 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 32.35" (821.7 mm)
3 high x 3 wide 15.74" (399.8 mm) 14.89" (378.2 mm)
x 4 wide 15.74" (399.8 mm) 17.80" (452.1 mm)
x 5 wide 15.74" (399.8 mm) 20.71" (526.0 mm)
x 6 wide 15.74" (399.8 mm) 23.62" (599.9 mm)
x 7 wide 15.74" (399.8 mm) 26.53" (673.8 mm)
x 8 wide 15.74" (399.8 mm) 29.44" (747.8 mm)
x 12 wide 15.74" (399.8 mm) 41.08" (1043.4 mm)
4 high x 2 wide 19.14" (486.1 mm) 11.98" (304.3 mm)
x 3 wide 19.14" (486.1 mm) 14.89" (378.2 mm)
x 4 wide 19.14" (486.1 mm) 17.80" (452.1 mm)
x 6 wide 19.14" (486.1 mm) 23.62" (599.9 mm)
x 8 wide 19.14" (486.1 mm) 29.44" (747.8 mm)
x 9 wide 19.14" (486.1 mm) 32.35" (821.7 mm)
x 12 wide 19.14" (486.1 mm) 41.08" (1043.4 mm)
5 high x 3 wide 22.54" (572.5 mm) 14.89" (378.2 mm)
x 4 wide 22.54" (572.5 mm) 17.80" (452.1 mm)
Standard depth is 1.60" (40.6 mm)
NOTE: Please consult factory for certified drawings and for other available sizes.
1.60"
(40.6mm)
H
Hinged NEMA 4/12
Panel Mount Covers
The panel cover is constructed of 16
gauge, cold-rolled steel with a textured
black finish. The corners are sealed by
a neoprene sponge gasket and the L
window is 1/8" thick plexiglass.
Adjustable grip latches secure the
hinged cover to the mounting plate.
2.30
AN-5131 For Harsh
Environment 11.75"
(298.4mm)
NEMA Enclosures
Three standard NEMA 4/12 type
surface mount enclosures are available:
a 12 cell model (3H x 4W), an 8 cell
model (4H x 2W) and a 4 cell model
(4H x 1W). All housings are oil-tight,
water-tight, weather resistant and can
be equipped for purge applications.
Standard features include door- 20.00"
mounted pushbuttons. Available (508.0mm)
options include external audibles and
pushbuttons, and a common-alarm
rotating dome light. The rotating dome
light is designed to alert operators of
alarms in conditions where noise may
drown out audibles. It can be specified
in red, blue, amber, or green for either
integral or remote mounting.
16.00"
(406.4mm)

Enclosure - 4H x 1W and 4H x 2W
12.68"
(322.1mm)
24.00"
(609.6mm)
20.00"
(508.0mm)

Enclosure - 3H x 4W
2.31
AMETEK
AN-5131 Specifications AN-5131 Ordering Each item has a unique order code
Input Signals (Alarm Signals): The model number of the AN-5131 which must be entered in its specific
Lamp inputs provided by remote consists of seven (7) items derived from location in the model number se-
annunciator electronics assembly, such the order codes listed below. When quence. The following is a tabulation of
as Ametek AN-6100R remote annun- ordering a system that includes any the order codes that must be used for
ciator system. “intermix” options (e.g. more than one each and every item of the standard
window color), an intermix order form model number.
Power Requirements: should be completed to fully define the
24 volt lamps, powered by remote annunciator display. If you have any
annunciator electronics system. questions, contact your nearest
Ametek sales office for assistance.
Controls (Integral or Remote):
A. Acknowledge pushbutton.
B. Silence pushbutton. AN-5131 - 1 x 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 – 6 – 7
C. Test pushbutton. Number of Number of Window Active Window Standard Engraving
D. Reset pushbutton. Cells High Cells Wide Size Points Color Options
ORDER CODE FOR EACH ENTRY ITEM

Packaging:
Extruded aluminum cell with inter-
changeable plug-in modules. Item 1 Item 6
The order code defines the number of Order
Ambient Temperature Range: cells high. Code Standard Options
32°F to 140°F, 0°C to 60°C. NR None required
Item 2 STD/1 19" rack mounting,
Humidity: 0-95% non-condensing. The order code defines the number of 1 - 12H x 6W only
cells wide. STD/2 19 inch bezel rack
Window Sizes: mounting
A. 0.83" x 2.85" (21.25 x 72.39mm), Item 3 STE Cover for rear terminals
standard. Order STG-1* Sonalert (steady)
B. 1.11" x 2.85" (28.3 x 72.39mm), Code Window Size mounted in a cell
medium. 4 Standard, 4 per cell STG-2* Sonalert (pulsing)
C. 1.67" x 2.85" (42.42 x 72.39mm), 3E Medium, 3 per cell, field mounted in a cell
large. expandable STH* Silence/acknowledge/rest/
D. 3.34" x 2.85" (84.84 x 72.39mm), 2E Large, 2 per cell, field expandable test pushbuttons
extra large. 1E Extra large, 1 per cell, field mounted in a cell
expandable NFC Reference page 2.53 for
Weight: 1.68 lbs (0.76 kg) per cell. LED LED display, 4 per cell dimensions
FC Future cell, provided with an STY Integral plug connector -
extra large size, matching up to 32 points per plug
window (module and lamps DMR Dim resistors -
not included) applied per cell only
IMW Intermix window size TSD Test diodes -
applied per cell only
Item 4
Active Point — define total number of * Location must be defined by complet-
equipped or active points. ing the intermix matrix form.
Item 5 NOTE: Any model number containing

Order IMW or IMC designations requires an
Code Window Color intermix matrix order form.
W White
R Red Item 7
A Amber Order
G Green Code Engraving
B Blue Y Engraving provided by
LED LED Ametek
IMC Intermix window color NR Engraving not required
Refer to Intermix Matrix Order Form on
page 2.23 for location.
2.32
AN-6150 Modular
Annunciator
Display Unit
• Low Cost Visual Display
• Configurable in 4 Standard
Window Sizes
• Laser Printed Legends
• Easy Installation and

Maintenance.
The Model AN-6150 is a compact,

cellular display unit which allows a
wide variety of customer
configurations. Any combination of AN-6150 Specifications
four standard window sizes can be
accommodated in each cell. These Construction Connections
cells can be configured in any matrix Modular interlocking matrix configuration, Ribbon cable or Terminal Block
up to 4 high and 4 wide. The single multiples of standard DIN size 72mm x accepting maximum wire size 16 AWG.
module is designed to DIN 2.84" x 144mm (2.83 in. x 5.67 in.) cells up to 4
5.67" standard. cells high by 4 cells wide. Ambient Working Temperature
14ºF to 122ºF ( -10ºC to 50ºC)
The AN-6150 Modular Display Unit is Mounting
suitable for panel mounting. Six Flush panel mount or standard 19 inch Recommended Working Voltage
window colors are available which can rack panel mount for 3 cell wide 24 volts ±10% for increased lamp life
be back lighted by incandescent display only. with 28 volt lamp.
lamps. Alternatively, LED cluster lamps
are available to meet long life require- Window Sizes Power Requirements
ments. Legends are laser printed on Four standard sizes. Each cell has a total of 8 plug-in filament
clear transparencies to allow changes Small 0.98" x 1.14" (25mm x 29mm) lamps or LED clusters.
to be done by the customer. Medium 0.98" x 2.40" (25mm x 61mm)
Pushbutton membrane switches can Large 2.13" x 2.40" (54mm x 61mm) Power required per cell: 28 volt lamp
also be added for Silence, Test, Ex Large 2.13" x 4.96" (54mm x 126mm) working at 24 volts – 0.5 Amp, 12 watts
Acknowledge and Reset functions.
Window Colors 24 Volt LED cluster working at 24 volts –
These units come standard with flush Red, Amber, Yellow, Green, Blue, White 0.2 Amp, 4.8 watts
panel mounting brackets and terminal illuminated by incandescent lamps.
block connections. Please refer to Control Module
ordering information for additional Red, Amber, Green illuminated by LED SILENCE, TEST, ACKNOWLEDGE and
options. clusters. RESET membrane pushbuttons within a
large size window (54mm x 61mm – 1/2
Legends cell size) (2.13 in x 2.40 in) including
Laser printed on clear film or engraved internal audible device and visual power-
filters. Secret window until lit and secret on indicator.
legends optional.
Weight
Illumination 0.48 lbs (0.22 Kg) per cell.
#656 wedge type bulb, long life, 28 volt,
0.06 Amp filament lamp or equivalent. Maintenance
Dual lamps in all window sizes. Dual Access to all window elements is
lamps are optional in small window size. available from the panel front using only a
small screwdriver.
Optional illumination by LED cluster each
24 volt, 0.025 Amp with limited colors
Agency Approvals
(see Window Colors).
CSA approved for ordinary locations. FM
approval for ordinary locations pending.
2.33
AMETEK
AN-6150 Dimensions
Legend Lettering Sizes
Window Size
25 x 29mm ÷ 8 25 x 61mm ÷ 4 54 x 61mm ÷ 2 54 x 126mm÷1
Size 2 no. of lines 6 6 14 14
chars per line 14 30 30 62
Single Unit and

Window (Actual
Sizes)
SIZE 7
SIZE 6 ÷4 .98" x 2.40"
(25mm x 61mm)
SIZE 5
SIZE 4
SIZE 3 ÷8
SIZE 2 ÷2 .98" x 1.14"
(25mm x 29mm)
2.13" x 2.40"
(54mm x 61mm)
2.84" x 5.67"
(72mm x 144mm)
DIN Unit
BEZEL WIDTH W
Number of Cells Wide “W”
1 2 3 4 4 WIDE
Bezel 5.67 10.79 5.91 21.02 3 WIDE HIGH
Width (144) (274) (404) (534)
2 WIDE
Cutout 5.43 10.55 15.67 20.79
Width (138) (268) (3980 (528) 1 WIDE
Number of Cells High “H”

1 2 3 4 4 HIGH
Bezel 2.83 5.12 7.40 9.68
Height (72) (130) (188) (246)
3 HIGH
Cutout 2.60 4.88 7.17 9.45 BEZEL
Height (66) (124) (182) (240) HEIGHT
H 2 HIGH
1 HIGH
2.34
AN-6150 Dimensions (standard rack mounting adapters)
Overall Depth: 2.24" (57mm)
19.02"
.35" (483mm)
(9mm) 18.31"
1.67" (465mm)
(42.5mm)) 15.67"
(398mm)
1.48" 1.31"
(37.7mm) (33.2mm)
2.25" 5.22"
(57.2mm) 1 HIGH 2.60"
(66.0mm) (132.5mm)
WIDE SLOTS (TYP)

.28" (7.0mm)
19.02"
.35" (483mm)
(9mm) 18.31"
1.67" (465mm)
(42.5mm) 15.67"
(398mm)
1.50" 1.04"
(38.0mm) (26.5mm)
3.98"
(101.0mm)
2 HIGH 4.88"
(124.0mm) 6.97"
(177.0mm)
WIDE SLOTS (TYP)

.28" (7.0mm)
19.02"
.35" (483mm)
(9mm) 18.31"
1.67" (465mm)
(42.5mm) 15.67"
(398mm)
1.48" 1.65"
(37.7mm) (42.0mm)
7.17"
7.5"
(190.5mm) 3 HIGH (182.0mm)
10.47"
(266.0mm)
WIDE SLOTS (TYP)

.28" (7.0mm)
19.02"
.35" (483mm)
(9mm) 18.31"
1.67" (465mm)
(42.5mm) 15.67"
(398mm)
1.48" 1.38"
(37.7mm) (35.1mm)
3.5"
(88.9mm)
2.25"
(57.2mm) 4 HIGH 9.45"
(240.0mm)
10.47"
3.5" (266.0mm)
(88.9mm)
+.010
xx =
-.000
WIDE SLOTS (TYP)
.28" (7.0mm)
2.35
AMETEK
AN-6150 Ordering
Information
AN-6150 1— 2 — 3 — 4 — 5 — 6 — 7
Item 7
Item 1 Standard Options. Indicates require-
Defines number of cells high. Not to ments of any additional options. Please
exceed 4. specify from list below.
NR None Required
Item 2 STD 19" rack mount panel
Defines number of cells wide. Not to (3 cell wide only)
exceed 4. 1 cell high
2 cells high
Item 3 3 cells high
Defines the window size. Enter one of 4 cells high
the following: STH Integral pushbuttons for
S Small 0.98" x 1.14" SILENCE, TEST,
(25mm x 29mm) ACKNOWLEDGE, and RESET,
M Medium 0.98" x 2.40" located in bottom right hand
(25mm x 61mm) cell.
L Large 2.13" x 2.40" RCA Ribbon cable assembly, 6 ft. long
(54mm x 61mm) (medium window size only)
EL X Large 2.13" x 4.96"
(54mm x 125mm) Notes:
IMW Intermixed window formats* 1. LED option not available with secret
window option.
Item 4 2. Integral pushbutton assembly not
Indicates type of lens assembly available with Extra Large (full cell)
VW Visible Window laser printed window.
SW Secret Window laser printed 3. Ribbon cable assembly not available
(Not available with LED with 1 cell wide array with or without
illumination) pushbuttons or 1 x 2 cell array with
VL Visible Legend engraved* pushbuttons.
SL Secret Legend engraved*
Item 5
Indicates type of illumination.
24C Incandescent lamps (24V)
24R LED array red (24V)
24A LED array amber (24V)
24G LED array green (24V)
Item 6
Indicates window color.
R Red
Y Yellow
G Green
A Amber
W White
B Blue (Not available with LED)
IMC Intermix colors*
*Specify
2.36
AN-3196B LED Stand Alone Annunciator Panel
The AN-3196B is a self-contained Mount
Annunciator 12-point annunciator that can alert
personnel locally through both flashing
12 INPUTS
• 12 Point, Fully Self-Contained LED's and external audible devices.
Annunciator This annunciator is a low cost method
of providing annunciator benefits to
• CSA Approved, remote locations.
Ordinary Locations
• FM Approved, Ordinary and

Division 2 Locations Annunciator Expansion Additional Points For Existing
(AC horn only) The reflash output relays on the Annunciator Systems
AN-3196B can be used to combine
• Expands Existing Annunciators up to 12 new inputs to alarm a
Through Two Reflash Outputs single full-size window of an
existing annunciator. Reflash UP
• Isolated Inputs RO
can be used to add additional
G
12 INPUTS
H
AS
points to non-expandable
FL
RE
• Fully Field Switch Programmable annunciators and when it is
undesirable to reduce the MAIN PANEL ANNUNCIATOR
• AC/DC Field Contact Voltage window size on an internally
expandable annunciator.
• Available in Panel Mount,
Surface Mount or NEMA
Enclosure
• MODBUS Communications Remote Monitoring with Reflash Multiple Remote Units With Output
Option The AN-3196B can provide detailed To Main Panel Annunciator
alarm data to local personnel
The AN-3196B is a self contained, and reflash the alarms to a
compact LED annunciator with control room annunciator. The CRITICAL REFLASH GROUP
reflash capability. It can be used as a reflashed data often provides NON-CRITICAL REFLASH GROUP
stand-alone annunciator or to sufficient general information

enhance or expand other about alarms occurring at
annunciators. remote locations for operators MAIN PANEL ANNUNCIATOR
to react properly, and detailed
This model offers dependable indica- alarm data is available on the REMOTE
ANNUNCIATOR #1
tion of alarms via red LEDs with AN-3196B LED display if
adjacent descriptive legend plates. required. Cost savings are
Each unit comes complete with 12 realized through the reduction
inputs, integral control push buttons, in wiring and control room REMOTE
power supplies, output relays for annunciator size. ANNUNCIATOR #2
reflash to another annunciator, and

audible alarming capabilities.
Multiple Remotes With Outputs To
Multiple Remotes to One One Common Annunciator Window
Common Window
Multiple AN-3196Bs
can be linked together
by using a reflash
output from one unit
A A A
as an input to another. B B
OUTPUT TO
B COMMON
IINPUTS
INPUTS
INPUTS
The last AN-3196B ANNUNCIATOR

can reflash the alarm WINDOW
data from all of the

units to a single
window in a control
room annunciator.
2.37
AMETEK
AN-3196B Dimensions
& Connections
Panel Mount TOP VIEW
.62"
(15.7mm)
3.48" 3.73"
(88.4mm) (94.74mm)
PANEL CUTOUT FRONT VIEW

5.87"
(149.1mm) 3.80" 4.00"
±.03 (101.6mm)
(96.5mm)
13.96"
13.12" (354.6mm)
±.12
(333.3mm)
12.95"
(329mm)
.50"
SIDE VIEW (12.7mm)
(TYP.)
Surface Mount
0.75"
(19.1mm)
4.00" 8.90"
(101.6mm) (226.1mm)
9.00"
(228.6mm)
15.88"
(403.4mm)
.125" R. TYP.
(3.2mm)
.343" TYP.
(8.71mm)
4.40"
.437" DIA. TYP. (111.8mm)
(11.1mm)
2.40" 0.80" SIDE VIEW

(60.9mm) (20.3mm)
BACK VIEW
2.38
AN-3196B Dimensions
& Connections
NEMA 4/12 Enclosure
.437" DIA., TYP.

(11.1mm) SECTION B-B
.62" 10.00" 3.00" TYP.

(15.75mm) (254.0mm) (76.2mm) 11.75"
1.25" (298.45mm)
B
(31.75mm)
10.00"
(254.0mm)
TEST
OPTIONAL
RELAY
SIL 22.50"
(571.5mm)
21.25"
20.00" (539.8mm)
(508.0mm)
ACK
RESET
.437" (254.0mm) B OPTIONAL

(2 PLS.) AUDIBLE DEVICE
16.00"
(406.4mm)
2.39
AMETEK
EXTERNAL TB 2 TB 1
REMOTE FIELD CONTACT CONNECTIONS
PUSHBUTTONS INTERNALLY SUPPLIED FCV
SIL 1 SILENCE 1
FC 1
ACK 2 ACKNOWLEDGE 2 FC 2
FCV
RES 3 RESET VA
+24 VDC
250 mA 4 PUSHBUTTON/AUDIBLE VOLTAGE 3
FC 3
TEST 5 TEST 4 FC 4
FCV
CRIT 6 VB
CRITICAL
REFL 7 REFLASH 5
OUT FC 5
OUT 8 6 FC 6
* AUDIBLE FCV
DEVICE NON-CRIT 9 VC
FOR 24 VDC NON-CRITICAL
REFL 10 REFLASH 7
OUT FC 7
OUT 11 8 FC 8
FCV
AUD COM 12 AUDIBLE OUT COMMON VD
CRIT AUD 13 CRITICAL AUDIBLE OUT 9

FC 9
14 24V RETURN 10 FC 10
RBK/ 15 RINGBACK/ FCV

VE
NON-CRIT NON-CRITICAL AUDIBLE
L (+) PWR 16 POWER (+ FOR DC, L FOR AC) 11
FC 11
N (–) PWR 17 POWER (– FOR DC, N FOR AC) 12 FC 12
FCV
18 VF
BOTH AUDIBLES
SHOWN TIED TOGETHER.
MAY BE EITHER/OR. NOTE: FIELD CONTACTS MAY BE ANY
COMBINATION OF NO OR NC.
* FOR OTHER AUDIBLE DEVICES
REF DWG 1072-030
TB 1
FIELD CONTACT CONNECTIONS
EXTERNALLY SUPPLIED FCV
CONNECTIONS TB 2 FC 1
FOR OPTIONAL AUTOMATIC
1
REFLASH (AR) OPERATION**
2
SIL 1 SILENCE FC 2
VA
ACK 2 FC 3
3
3
4
+24 VDC 4 PUSHBUTTON/AUDIBLE VOLTAGE FC 4
VB
FC 5
5
AUD COM 12 AUDIBLE OUT COMMON
6
CRIT AUD 13 CRITICAL AUDIBLE OUT FC 6
VC
FC 7
7
RBK/ 15 RINGBACK/
NON-CRIT NON-CRITICAL AUDIBLE 8
FC 8
VD
FC 9
9
10
CUSTOMER WIRING VE
FC 10
FC 11
INTERNAL WIRING
11
12
FC 12
– +
RET
NEUTRAL LINE
** Recommended configuration for remote AN-3196B reflash output to main

annunciator, where audible function in remote location is not required. This NOTE: OTHER CONFIGURATIONS AVAILABLE.
hook-up is not compatible with audible device hook-up shown in above CONTACT FACTORY OR LOCAL REP FOR MORE
diagram. INFORMATION.
2.40
AN-3196B Specifications Sequence Selection:
Input Signals: Chose from 9 available sequences by
NO or NC contacts, switch selectable DIP switch selection. Only one se-
quence can be selected at any given
Output: time for all 12 alarm points. The 9
A. LED indicator per point available sequences are listed under
B. Audible and Reflash Output Relay Ordering, Item 1 and are defined on
Contacts rated at: Page 2.15.
5 amperes at 24 VDC or
120 VAC resistive
3 amperes at 120 VAC resistive
Legend Plate
C. Optional remote mounted audible Engraving Sizes
devices
D. 24 VDC @ .25 A available for Maximum # Maximum # of
driving audible device Letter Size of lines characters per Line
Ambient Temperature Range: 1/8" (3.2mm) 3 22
5/32" (4mm) 3 18
32°F to 140°F (0°C to 60°C)
3/16"(4.8mm) 2 14
Relative Humidity: 1/4" (6.4mm) 1 11
0% to 95% (non-condensing) Other sizes available upon request.
Power Source and Requirements:
A. 120 VAC: 120 VAC ± 10%, 50-
60Hz at 100 mA maximum AN-3196B Ordering
B. 240 VAC: 240 VAC ± 10%, 50-60Hz The AN-3196B is supplied in the following versions, stocked and immediately
at 50 mA maximum available from the factory. Individual model numbers are defined by the following fill-
C. 125 VDC: 105 VDC to 140 VDC at in items:
100 mA maximum
D 24 VDC: 20 VDC to 28 VDC at AN-3196B- 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 – 6 – 7
400 mA maximum Sequence Prime Field Contact Audible Reflash Enclosure Communications
E. 48 VDC: 44 VDC to 52 VDC at Power Voltage Options
250 mA maximum
Item 1 Sequence
Terminals: Chose from these available sequences: Item 4 Audible Options
Screw Barrier type A FFAM2 *SNS Sonalert Steady Tone
12 AWG wire maximum F2M-1 A-4 Remote Mount
Controls: M R12 *SNP Sonalert Pulsing
Integral Test, Acknowledge, Silence F1A F2A Remote Mount
and Reset pushbuttons F3A A4 HAC 120 VAC Remote Horn
R HDC 24 VDC Remote Horn
Field Contact Voltage:
HDH 125 VDC Remote Horn
A. Isolated, internally supplied 125 VDC
Item 2 Prime Power NR Not Required
or 24 VDC for 48 VDC, 125 VDC,
F 24 VDC *Audible device not integrally mounted
120/240 VAC Prime Power
E 48 VDC in NEMA 4/12 enclosure.
B. Non-isolated, internally supplied
C 125 VDC
24 VDC for 24 VDC prime power or
B 120 VAC Item 5 Reflash Option
48 VDC for 48 VDC prime power
A 240 VAC AR Automatic Reflash
C. Isolated externally supplied 125 VDC,
MR Manual Reflash (Standard)
48 VDC, 24 VDC, 120 VAC
Item 3 Field Contact Voltage
Enclosures: Internally Supplied Item 6 Enclosure
General purpose standard panel or D 125 VDC PM Panel Mount
surface mount enclosures. X 24 VDC SM Surface Mount
Labeling: T 48 VDC 4WM Wall mount, NEMA 4
Black lamacoid legend plates with Customer Supplied SCM Series Contact Monitor Inputs
white lettering for each point, plus one D/C 125 VDC Isolated
for unit identification (see engraving X/C 24 VDC Isolated Item 7 Communications
information) T/C 48 VDC Isolated Port 1 Serial Modbus
Y/C 120 VAC Isolated
Isolation: 1700 VDC
Surge Withstand Capability (SWC):
Test conforms to ANSI /IEEE C37.90.1-
1989 (oscillatory) and IEC 801-4 Level 2
Weight: 9 lbs. (4.09 kg) Panel Mount
53 lbs. (24 kg) in NEMA Enclosure
2.41
AMETEK
SM-100U Substation SM-100U Connections
Monitor
• 12 Point Annunciator
ON TB 2 ON TB 2
• High Reliability in Severe TB 1 OFF
TEST 1
TB 1 OFF
1
TEST
Temperature Conditions 1 1
2 2
• Simple Operation 2
3
2
3
4 4
• Individual Reset Per Point
• 125 VDC or 48 VDC 23 23

12 12
24 24
The SM-100U is a compact, self- 13

STANDARD
13
contained substation annunciator MODEL MODEL 8752

providing 12 points of alarms. This + 14 + 14
model is supplied with all lamps and POWER POWER

name plates, operation control – 15 – 15
switches, and an output for
communicating to a SCADA system.
Automatic locking of alarm

conditions along with complete
ON TB 2
redundant output relays provide the TB 1
ON
OFF
TB 2
TB 1 OFF
1
optimum in remote substation 1
TEST 1
1
TEST
annunciator applications. 2 2
3 3
2 2
4 4
23 23
12 12
24 24
13 13
MODEL 9191 MODEL 0724
+ 14 + 14
POWER POWER RESET

– 15 – 15
ON TB 2
TB 1 OFF TB1=12 Normally Open Alarm
TEST 1
1 Contacts
2
2
3 Relay Contacts Are Shown In
4 De-Energized (Normal) State
TB2=12 Normally Open Auxiliary

23 Contacts For Use With Supervisory,
12
24 Audible, Or Visual Indicator
13
MODEL 9600
+ 14
POWER RESET
– 15
2.42
SM-100U Dimensions Ambient Temperature Range: SM-100U Ordering
-30°F to 140°F (-34°C to 60°C) Specify each item:
KNOCKOUT
FOR 1"
CONDUIT 5.31 Humidity: 0 to 95% non-condensing
(ONE EACH 5.00
Item 1 – Model Number
END) 1.50
4.20 Isolation : 600 VAC or 1000 VDC SM100U for 125 VDC power
1.00
Input to case, output to case, input to SM100UA for 48 VDC power
PANEL CUT-OUT OPTIONAL
DIMENSIONS 4.00 ANGLE
CLAMPS
output.
(1/8 ANGLE BRACKET) Item 2 – Legends
_ 1/64
17 5/16 x 5 3/8 + Surge Withstand Capability (SWC):
Specify legends engraved or blank, and
PANEL Conforms to ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1-
options as desired.
.254 DIA. (4 HOLES)
7.00
5.625
1989
(FOR WALL MOUNT) BEZEL
1/8 TYP. Field Connections: Item 3

Terminal block with #6 screws. Optional Operation Sequences
12 AWG wire maximum. STD Auxiliary contacts latched until
reset
Dimensions:
17.00
5.625"W x 17.00"H x 4.00"D 8752 Auxiliary contacts follow field
19.00
PANEL (14.29 cm x 43.18 cm x 10.16 cm) contacts
15.00 MOUNT
(RMA 9191 Auxiliary contacts latched until
4.656
STANDARDS)
Weight:: 9 lbs. 13 oz. ( 4.45 kilos) reset and alarm clears
17.375
WALL Mounting: 9600 Common reset, auxiliary
MOUNT
Wall mount or panel mount is available contacts latched until reset,
auxiliary contacts activated
6.171
Labeling: on test
Black lamacoid legend plates with 0724 Common reset, auxiliary
TEST OFF ON white engraved lettering. Each plate is contacts latched until reset,
1" x 2.5" overall. Up to 5 lines with 24
characters per line is possible using 1/
SM-100U Specifications 8" engraving. Please consult factory for
Input Signals: other various options on engraving
Normally open alarm contacts supplied sizes.
with voltage from the positive side of
the station battery.
Output Signals:
Lighted lamps upon alarm status until
manually reset. Individual auxiliary relay
contacts.
Operating Voltage: 125 VDC or 48

VDC
Power Dissipation:
6 Watts @ 125 VDC per point
2.2 Watts @ 48 VDC per point
0 Watts during standby
Lamps:
Telephone type 24 ESB, operated at
reduced voltage for 50,000 hour life.
Relays:
Contact rating is 5A at 24 VDC, 0.1A
at 125 VDC
Sequence of Operation
Field Alarm
Condition Contacts Switch Lamp Auxiliary Contacts
Normal Open On Off Open

Alarm Closed On On Closed
Return to Normal Open On On Closed
Reset Open Off Off Open
2.43
AMETEK
AN-6100R Remote Modules Available
Outputs can be wired to the Ametek 8 point I/O module – 8 contact inputs
Annunciator display units, AN-5131 or AN-6150 and 8 lamp driver outputs.
(see separate display section for the 16 point input module – 16 contact inputs.
benefits of each of these) or can be 8 point AC input module – 8 AC
wired direclty to any existing annuncia- contact inputs.
tor display. The electronics can be 8 point line monitor – 8 contact
located up to 100 meters from the inputs and verifies condition of
display. input wiring.
8 point analog module – 8 each 4-20
Configuration ma inputs.
• Remote electronics The AN-6100R can consist of almost 16 point output module – 16 open
• User configurable any point definition and window display collector outputs (NPN sink).
• Field expandable requirement. Simply choose the proper 16 point output modules – 16 open
• Full ISA sequences number of modules to perform all of collector outputs (PNP source).
• Analog and contact inputs the input, grouping, audibles, repeat 16 point output module – 16 reed relay
• Full grouping capabilities relays, first out groupings, and window contacts NO or NC.
• MODBUS Serial Output display drivers to fulfill the application. 8 point output module – 8 reed relay
• OPC Server contacts NC or NO.
Almost any combination of modules
5 point output module – 5 power
This annunciator provides the maximum can be used to perform the following
in system flexibility and user controlled relay outputs.
on a per chassis basis:
configuration packaged in rack or panel
mount chassis. All functional electronics – 128 contact inputs or 32 analog inputs Remote Unit Specifications
are enclosed in these chassis supporting – combinations of contact and digital Electrical Characteristics
true remote applications where the (1 analog = 4 contact) Power Requirements:
electronics must be separate from the – 128 individual lamp driver outputs 24 VDC, 48 VDC, 125 VDC ± 12%
annunciator window displays. The – 112 individual repeat relay outputs 115/230 VAC ± 10% 50/60 Hz
electronics is so versatile that it can – 16 individual audible outputs
also be mounted directly at the display – 16 separate first out groupings Input Current:
location supporting almost any – 16 separate reflash grouping outputs approximately 2 mA per input
annunciator application. – 16 separate voting/logic grouping
outputs Environmental
The AN-6100R electronics can be used Operating Temperature:
in conjunction with existing displays, or Larger systems are accomplished by 32º to 140ºF (0º to 60ºC)
a full line of Ametek annunciator simply combining multiple chassis
together. Storage Temperature:
displays can be provided.
-13º to 185ºF (-25 to 85ºC)
System Operation Configuration is accomplished via a
The AN-6100R utilizes remote electron- DOS or Windows™ based PC through Humidity: 0-95% non-condensing
ics packaged in a compact rack mount a standard RS232 port. The onboard
Contact Inputs: NO or NC, field
or panel mount chassis. Each chassis program allows updating the
selectable by DIP switch on a per point
includes a CPU which controls all of the configuration directly in the field.
functionality per chassis. There are two basis.
chassis available; single unit which Typical System Field Contact Voltage:
accepts up to 10 I/O modules and a 24, 48, 125 VDC, isolated and non-
dual chassis which accepts up to isolated, 120 VAC isolated
23 I/O modules.
LOCAL Analog Inputs: 4-20 mA
System configuration can be customized ANNUNCIATOR
PANELS
at the factory and can be easily edited in INPUTS
UP TO 128 DIGITAL Input Capacity: 128 digital inputs per
the field using a DOS based PC through UP TO 32 ANALOG
AND COMBINATIONS RU or 32 analog inputs per RU or
a standard RS232 port. Almost any UP TO
UP TO 100
1500METERS
METERS (PER REMOTE)
combinations of both.
configuration can be accomplished
including single point windows, multiple
REMOTE UNIT Response Time: 40 millisecond.
window displays, first out groupings and
reflash groupings plus more.
Outputs
Inputs can be either contact or 4-20ma Lamp Drive: 200 mA @24 VDC, 5 watts
analog with 128 contact inputs per
chassis, or 32 analog inputs per RS 232 CONFIGURATION
Reed Relay: 100 VDC @ 0.25 A max.
chassis, or a combination of both. One (Also serves as ASCII SPST, volts free NO/NC
text input from
analog replaces 4 contact inputs. remote devices such
as PLC or DCS). Power Relay:
24 VDC @ 2.0A
240 VAC @ 1.0 A
2.44
Alarm Sequence – Annunciator Flash Rates: on/off time adjustable Auto Delete from Scan:
Functions Any input can be removed from service
All ISA Sequences. Two sequences Push-button Controls: a total of 64 manually or automatically after a
per CPU available. Either sequence programmable as a combination of: predetermined number of alarms in a
can be assigned to any input point. Acknowledge set period of time occurs, preventing
First Out Acknowledge nuisance alarms.
Mechanical Characteristics Lamp Test
Single Chassis: Group Lamp Test Audibles:
5.5″H x 7.25″D x 19″W Full Functional Test 16 Alarm Audibles
Reset 1 Alarm Return to Normal
Double Chassis: Audible Silence
11.5″H x 7.25″D x 19″W Groups:
Output Capacity: up to 224 digital 16 Control Groups
Chassis Mounting: surface or rack outputs 16 Audible Groups
mount capability 16 Group Lamps
Output Assignment: 16 Group Relays
Terminals: all input/output modules All inputs can be assigned to any 16 Group Inhibits
have gold plated terminals. output, open collector, reed relay or 16 First Out Groups
power relay, or multiples of the same by 16 Voting Groups
Programmable Features use of the configurator program. 16 Logic Groups
Input Time Delay: 0.04 sec to 40 min Individual Point Inhibit:
(approx.) in 40 millisecond increments Software inhibit available for any alarm
point.
Single Chassis Block Diagram Boolean Logic:

Groups of inputs can activate an alarm
after certain and/or conditions are met.
MOTHER BOARD
Alarms can activate lamps or relay
outputs.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Voting Logic:
R
C
INPUT / OUTPUT MODULES E Groups of inputs can activate an alarm
OR G
P
U RELAY MODULES U after voting conditions (2 out of 3, 4 out
L
AS REQUIRED A of 6, etc.) are met. Alarms can activate
T
O lamps or relay outputs.
R
Double Chassis Block Diagram
MOTHER BOARD
E
X
T
E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 N
R D
INPUT / OUTPUT MODULES E E
C G R
P OR
RELAY MODULES U
U B
L
AS REQUIRED A U
T S
O
R
MOTHER BOARD
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
INPUT / OUTPUT MODULES

OR
RELAY MODULES
AS REQUIRED
2.45
AMETEK
Mounting & Dimension
Single Chassis
7.025"
(178.4mm)
MIN. CLEARANCE FOR
MODULE WITHDRAWAL
7.40" SEE NOTE 19.00"
(188.0mm) (482.6mm)
7.283"
(185.0mm) 18.312"
(465.13mm) .344"
.098" (8.7mm)
(2.5mm)
5.126"
(132.5mm)
2.250"
(57.17mm)
1.483"
(37.68mm)
.71"
(18.0mm)
Double Chassis
7.025"
(178.4mm)
MIN. CLEARANCE FOR
MODULE WITHDRAWAL
7.40" SEE NOTE 19.00"

(188.0mm) (482.6mm)
7.283" 18.312"
(465.13mm) .344"
(185.0mm) (8.7mm)
.098"
(2.5mm)
2.250"
(57.15mm)
7.500"
(190.5mm)
10.468"
(265.9mm)
2.250"
(57.17mm)
1.483"
(37.68mm)
.71"
(18.0mm)
2.46
AN-6100R Ordering
Codes:
AN-6100R – 1 - 2 - 3 - 4(I/0) - 5 - 6 - 7 - 8 - 9
Item 1 Remote Units = # of chassis required and size of each.
Remote unit - includes CPU & power regulator
available
description slots order code qty req.
single chassis rack mount 10 SR
single chassis panel mount 10 SP
dual chassis rack mount 23 DR
dual chassis panel mount 23 DP
Item 2
(Defined by the # of outputs) Prime power = level and quantity of supplies required.
order code qty req.
125 vdc C
115 vac B
24 vdc F
48 vdc E
100 watts = 30 outputs & 180 watts = 60 outputs
125 vdc and 115 vac provided in separate assembly.
Item 3
Field contact voltage (FCV) =# of supplies required if Ametek supplied and level for input
modules.
description order code qty req.
customer supplied 24 vdc CS24
customer supplied 115 vac CS115
AMETEK supplied 24 vdc X
AMETEK supplied 48 vdc T
AMETEK supplied 125 vdc D
Item 4 Modules = listing of all types of modules required

Input /output modules required
description order code qty req.
8 point I/O (DC only) A
8 point input (AC or DC) B
8 point input and line monitor (24 vdc) C
16 point input D
8 point analog input E
16 output - screw term, NPN sink F
16 output - ribbon, NPN sink G
16 output - screw term, PNP source H
8 output reed relay, NO, screw term I
8 ouptup reed delay, NC, screw term J
16 output reed relay, NO, ribbon K
16 output reed relay, NC, ribbon L
5 output power relay M
Note: total output points must equal system outputs including special relays and audibles.
Total number of inputs must equal system inputs plus four (test, ack, reset, silence) for control
pushbutton module required and one for power monitor. (Note: model # must show # of
input/outputs where I/O is shown.
2.47
AMETEK
Item 5 Sequences
Chose any two ISA Sequences: A, A4, M, R, F1A, F2M-1, F3A, R12.
Item 6 Cable = # of cables, termination, and length of cables (remote to display)

Cables required - remote unit to display
cable type order code qty feet
point - to - point with connector STY
point - to - point pig tail PT
Specify if more than one cable is required. List all cable distances.
Item 7 Control pushbutton module = determines if test, ack, reset, silence pushbuttons are
provided by Ametek.
Control Pushbutton Module Requirement
description order code qty
remote Ametek supplied STH
customer supplied CS
cable
Specify N/A if STH option is specified with individual displays provided by Ametek.
The same length cable will be supplied as specified above.
Item 8 Display = determines if a display is required. If yes then display model # must be provided.
Display (from AN6150 or AN5131 catalog section) use separate sheet if necessary, giving
description number.
Item 9 Miscellaneous
Example: Requirement calls for 28 contact inputs with individual windows in existing display. Prime
is 125vdc as is Ametek provided FCV. Push button panel should also be provided. No displays are
to be provided. Also requires one first out grouping and 4 separate group outputs plus 1 audible.
Appropriate model # AN6100R - 1SR - 1C - 1D - 5A (33/33) - F1A - NA - STH - N - N/A
1SR = 1 each single chassis

1C = 1 each 125vdc prime power supply
1D = 125 vdc Ametek supplied FCV
5A = 5 each 8 I/O modules (this includes the 4 inputs needed for test, ack, reset, silence and 1
input for power monitor).
33 inputs = 28 contact inputs + 4 for CSM and 1 for power monitor
33 outputs = 28 lamp drivers and reed relay outputs for groups and 1 audible
F1A = first out sequence, factory programmed
NA = no cables required
STH = Ametek provided common service module
N = no displays needed
N/A = no special notations
2.48
ISM-1
Integrated System
Monitor
Ametek Power Instruments, Inc.

— the pioneer in sequential
events recorders — proudly
presents the standard of excel-
lence and reliability: the ad-
vanced Integrated System
Monitor (ISM-1).
ISM-1. So advanced it’s simple!

Based on extensive interviews
with professionals in the electric
power industry RiS has utilized
advanced technology to design
this state-of-the-art system to
meet the four most important
needs in event recording sys-
tems: reliability, ease of service,
data integrity, and compact
design. The ISM-1, minimizes the
number of components and uses
low-power circuitry, redundant
logic power supplies, fiber optic Features and Benefits: • variety of Input Termination
interfaces, and redundant • fewer components to maximize Configurations, from 32 up to
reliability, save space, simplify 128 inputs or rack mounting for
connections. This achieves not higher density applications,
only unprecedented levels of service, and reduce retrofitting costs.
include optical isolators, initial
reliability, accuracy and efficiency input conditioning, and input
• integral, redundant logic power
but also simplifies installation and supplies are interchangeable between check circuitry.
maintenance to save considerable ECU and CIU and easily accessible
time and costs. (as are all circuit boards) for quick • modbus interface selectable as
replacement to save time and costs. RS-232 or RS-485
Significant retrofit savings in time,
material and manpower! Retrofit • hardware/software filters minimize
savings are significant with the false signals from noise and bounce, Cost-saving design meets the
ISM-1, which consists of: an Event eliminate false printouts, and improve industry’s four most important
Capture Unit (ECU), Communica- accuracy. needs in event recording systems.
tions Interface Unit (CIU), Field
• fiber optic links between ECU and • Unprecedented reliability
Contact Voltage power supply CIU eliminate ground loops, remove ECU Mean Time
(FVC), and Input Modules in a electromagnetic interference, Between Failures: 115 years
variety of mounting configurations. improving data integrity, saving wiring CIU MTBF: 67 years
time and costs. Input Board MTBF: 127 years
• CIU time sync capability accepts • Simplified Design for Easy

IRIG-B, pulse per time unit, or 50/60 Service fewer components, easy
Hz signals. access to plug-in modules
• CIU has optional status contacts, • Precise Data Integrity

communication ports, fiber optic “noise” filters and fiber optic
links. communications
• ECU and CIU have complete self- • Compact Versatility

diagnostics with system status microprocessor-based recorder
visible on front panel LEDs. only 1.75" x 19"
2.49
AMETEK
ISM Specifications
Input Signals Normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC) contacts can be set on a per point
or group basis via remote printer/keyboard or computer.
Clock Accuracy 100 milliseconds per day typical with software correction, 100 milliseconds per day
with TCXO option over entire temperature range; ± 1 millisecond with IRIG-B.
Time Synchronization (CIU only) IRIG-B, AC-line, pulse per unit time standard.
Isolation Via optical couplers to provide isolation from input to output and power.
An optional isolated module provides isolation from input-to-input and accepts AC inputs.
RFI Tested per SAMA standards to PMC 33.1C-1978 class 2, band A, B, & C.
Di-electric Strength Conforms to IEEE/ANSI 313-1971/C37.90, 1500V DC input to ground.
Operating Temperature Range 0° to 60° Centigrade.
Field Contact Voltage (FCV) 24,48, 125, 250 volts DC, RiS or customer supplied —
or 120, 240 volts AC customer supplied; negative fcv also available.
Logic Power 20-60 or 95-300 VDC and 120/240 VAC 50/60 Hz. 10 watts maximum per ECU or CIU.
Surge Withstand Capacity (SWC) Conforms to IEEE/ANSI 472-1974/C37.90a.
Humidity 0 to 95% non-condensing.
Input/Output ECU:
Dual RS-232 ports, independently configured for baud rate, parity, X-ON/X-OFF,
and other parameters to support a wide variety of standard serial printers and keyboards.
The same data is sent to both ports.
CIU:
Selection of up to 14 of the following:
• SCM-P fiber optic module for interfacing with an ECU (up to 1000M).
• Relay Driver Module (RDM) provides four software-driven relay drivers (1 per system max).
• Dual RS-232 provides redundant and/or primary and backup output ports.
• IBM Interface provides a fixed-protocol interface for remote or local communication
to an IBM or compatible PC for in-depth data analysis using RiS software.
• CRT Annunciator provides interface and control for CRT annunciator
in control room applications.
• Distributed Control Systems provide fixed-protocol interface for a variety
of distributed control systems.
• Modbus interface to output to PLCs, AN-3100, RiSCue, or other devices.
2.50
Input Module
Compact, simple and advanced,

the Input Module saves installa-
tion/retrofit costs.
These compact Input modules

offer the widest alternatives, and
simplify installation to save time
and costs. The Input Termination
Panel (ITP) consists of an input
module and a choice of terminal
blocks. Panels (21"H x 19"W)
accommodate 32 or 64 inputs.
The standard input module includes

optical isolators, initial input condi-
tioning, and input check circuitry. Logic Power Supply
The input check function is a
detailed system test that verifies Redundant power, detailed visual watts, there is very little heat
both the on and off operation of the indicators, quick and easy module dissipation and heat stress on the
optical coupler and correct signal replacement. Here again is unsur- electronics, so reliability is im-
flow through the entire system. passed reliability. The Logic Power proved. And since no special
Supply includes redundant power cooling fans or vents are required,
Two other input modules are supplies with automatic bumpless problems associated with dust and
available. One is an AC input transfer. It also provides fast, debris are minimized.
module — which also accepts DC accurate diagnostic information
inputs — that provides isolation shown on the front panel LEDs. Visual control
from input to input utilizing two Dual sources, AC and DC, increase
terminals per point and indepen- reliability. Front panel indicators include four
dent optical isolators. The second LEDs that monitor input from each
is a negative Field Contact Voltage Simplicity power supply — giving you a quick
(common positive) board to indication of where any problem
compliment the standard common If either power supply fails, replace- may be. The front panel also holds
negative input board. ment is fast and simple. The power four quick-change fuses that
supply module is accessible from independently protects both power
A typical application using a stan- the front panel and can be re- supplies from each power source.
dard input panel allows 384 inputs in moved simply by loosening two
a single cabinet, or 768 inputs using thumb screws. Just slide out the Interchangeable
the high-density panels. For retrofit failed module and slide in a new
applications, there is a rack mount one. The same supply module is used in
card cage for the input module to both ECU and CIU, reducing spare
handle up to 512 inputs. Reliability parts stocking requirements.
Simple installation. For retrofit The power supply operates in a

applications, the input boards can variety of configurations, including
be connected to existing field AC/DC and DC/AC. Just select the
terminal blocks via ribbon cable operating range, from 20-60V or
connector at one end, and discrete 95-300V DC, along with 120/240V
wires at the other end. Other AC, 50/60Hz. Each of the two
options are available so existing power inputs is distributed to both
field wiring and terminal blocks can of the power supplies for added
be used, thus reducing installation reliability. Since the power supplies
time and manpower requirements. generate a maximum of only 10
2.51
AMETEK
ECU
Event Capture Unit
Unprecedented speed,
accuracy, reliability and
compact versatility.
The Event Capture Unit can be a
stand-alone sequence of events
recorder, or the front end of larger
systems. Since it is microprocessor
based and utilizes advanced technol-
ogy, it requires only 1.75" of standard
19" rack space and consumes less
than 5 watts of power.
The ECU supplies the required logic needed for each ECU. Fiber a personal computer, stored on
for either 128 or 256 inputs. All inputs optics also eliminate problems disk as an ASCII file, and down-
are simultaneously sampled every with ground loops, electromag- loaded to the ECU/CIU if desired
millisecond and can be configured for netic interference, and other — or they can be entered from a
normally open or normally closed. All “noise.” Links can be up to keyboard.
data is stored with one-millisecond 1000 meters, allowing remote
resolution regardless of how the mounting of ECUs and Terminal
system or per-point parameters are Panels. This can save thousands Dual Ports
configured. of dollars in material and labor
costs involved with laying The ECU includes a dual RS-232
The ECU samples the inputs and copper wire for each input, and port for both the input and output
controls the digital filtering. This using available equipment of data. Both ports can be
eliminates excessive recording caused space in various locations. configured for their own baud
by contact bounce, false recording rate, parity, and other parameters
caused by noise,and other problems. to support a variety of standard
In addition to a system “first hit” filter, Non-volatile memory printers and other output devices.
a per-point filter that can be set for 1 These ports, used with a key-
to 255 milliseconds is added to the After an input change-of-state is board/printer or terminal, can be
system-wide filter. To further eliminate recorded to 1 millisecond used to enter legends and access
nuisance or oscillating alarms, the resolution, it is stored in a non- the historical memory. To prevent
operator can program, on a per-point volatile, 1000-level (per ECU) unauthorized access, the user can
basis, to automatically delete points historical circular memory. This program a password to the
from scan, and automatically re-insert provides a buffer for the printer configuration commands to limit
them at a later time. and allows detailed analysis at a access to critical parameters.
later date. In addition to the
Fiber optic links are used to communi- historical memory, there is
cate from the ECU to the Communica- sufficient memory for 119
tions Interface Unit (CIU). These links are characters per point descrip-
serial data communications to reduce tion, that can be split into any
physical connections, which means combination of alarm and
major savings over copper-wired return-to-normal legends. The
systems. Only a single pair of fibers are legends can easily be typed into
2.52
CIU
Communications
Unit
Simple, compact,
efficient — with
advanced capabilities.
The CIU performs three major
functions: 1) communicates with
and time-sorts data from multiple
ECUs in systems with more than
256 inputs; 2) acts as a “smart”
interface to a variety of peripheral
devices; and 3) accepts external
time-synchronization signals. Versatility LED visual indicators
The CIU uses only 3.5 inches of The CIU has 14 card slots For a quick visual indication of
rack space and uses an identical controlled by the Master system operations, the CIU has
power supply as the ECU — thus Communications Processors. six front panel LEDs. The
reducing spare parts requirements. Additionally, there is a time indicators are for proper
To reduce downtime, its power keeper processor to provide operation of the internal clock,
supply is easily accessible. Power precise time synchronization. data transmitted and data
consumption is less than 10 watts, The slots can be used for any received, presence of external
so there is little heat dissipation for combination and type of modules time synchronization, and status
improved reliability. Also, all the offered. These include a Systems indicators for Alert conditions
connectors are either gold plated or Communications Module (SCM) and Fault conditions. The Alert
gas tight to minimize contact failure. for communicating to ECUs up to LED indicates low-level
1000 meters away. malfunctions, and the Fault
To output data to peripheral LED indicates a problem that
devices, a variety of modules are Multiple diagnostics may affect system operation or
available, including: RS-232 data integrity.
modules for printing, CRT or The CIU has both on-line
Lightbox Annunciators, Modbus, automatic and operator-initiated
IBM computers, and various diagnostics, and is constantly
distributed control systems; dual running a diagnostic routine to
RS-232 modules for redundant locate possible failures. Detailed
applications and cost-saving; and a diagnostics can be manually
relay driver module to expand the initiated or programmed to occur
number of relay driven outputs. on a selected time basis.
This relay module allows the Whatever routine is used, failures
operator to program up to four are output to the printer in plain
relays to trip when user-defined language descriptions; there are
conditions occur. no error codes to look up.
The CIU accepts any combination

of these modules with no
modification to its internal program.
This makes expansion and
changes as easy as adding
modules and configuring new
interfaces.
2.53
AMETEK
FCV
Field Contact
Voltage
The Field Contact Voltage (FCV)
power supply provides wetting
voltage for dry contact inputs and
performs input check and ground
detection. To support the wide
range of possible combinations,
this FCV power supply can be
configured for your powered
contacts, thereby supplying only
input check and ground detection.
It can be configured to supply
24, 48, 125 or 250V DC wetting Modbus Interfacing Reliable, Versatile, High
voltage for either 256 or 512 points,
MTBF
or 256 points with redundant power With the Modbus interface module,
the ISM-1 can interface with plant Reliability is the number one criteria in
supplies.
computers or PLCs to provide the design of Ametek Power
contact status information, Instruments’ events recorder. Every
The input check function, available
millisecond time tag data and system component, every connector, and
only with the DC input module, is a
date and time. This reduces the every piece of hardware was selected
detailed diagnostic routine that
need to wire the same contact into with the goal of achieving reliability
turns the optical coupler on and off
multiple systems reducing the overall orders of magnitude higher than any
to verify the proper operation of all
cost. Additionally, the system can be other events recorder. Virtually all
logic circuits and optical couplers.
interfaced to an RiS AN-3100 system operating parameters are
The ground detector provides an
equipped with a Modbus interface to programmable in the ISM-1, to tailor
LED and relay driver for indication
provide light box annunciation with the alarming and reporting to the
of ground faults. Plug-in connection
programmable sequences, reflash needs of different applications.
reduces the time needed to locate
capability and all the other features of Interfaces to printers, DCS systems,
ground faults.
the AN-3100. As with PLCs or plant CRT annunciator, and PC computers
computers, this provides overall provide the necessary data for
savings in reduced wiring. prompt response or analysis. A
variety of input filtering options
Included with the RiSCue software is reduces false reports from sensitive
the ability to take data from the ISM- or noise-generating equipment.
1 Modbus module and convert it to
standard OPC format. This simplifies
the process of getting the data from
the ISM-1 to your plant computer or
other OPC compliant systems.
2.54
DMS-2000
Distributed
Monitoring System
The DMS-2000 is a distributed Alarm Features • Group Inputs and Outputs (any
Monitoring System with all of the group of inputs can activate any
features of a Visual Annunciator • Field Contact Inputs (normally output lamp, relay, audible, etc)
System combined with the time open or closed) • Boolean Logic Outputs
tagging of events to 1 msec. One • Analog Inputs AND Voting Logic Outputs
wired input connection is all that you (4 adjustable trip points) • Selectable Input Filter Delay
need to gain both visual display and • Pushbutton Controls • Automatic delete from scan
sequence of events recording, (test, acknowledge, silence, • IRIG-B Time Synchronization
eliminating costly wiring and system reset) • 1000 Event Storage
maintenance. The DMS-2000 • Lamp Outputs per Remote Unit
presents your alarm information into for Annunciator Displays • All input, output and group
open interfaces, such as Serial • Repeat Relay Outputs configurations are factory
Modbus and OPC. This provides • Audible Alarm Relays configured and easily changed
instant connectivity into many different • All ISA Alarm sequences through our Windows based
applications, including PLC’s, DCS available, including First-Out configuration tool.
and HMI Software packages.
Get the Best of Both Worlds
1msec Sequence of Events Recording

Visual Annunciation
Instant Alarm Notification

2.55
AMETEK
System Architecture Annunciator Annunciator
Display Display
The DMS-2000 offers a flexible

building block design that can be
distributed throughout your plant. The
system consists of multiple Remote Horn
Units that provide input terminations
and logic for all analog and digital
inputs as well as lamp and relay
outputs. Each Remote Unit can be
installed wherever convenient; close to
the input wiring or close to the visual Outputs Outputs
Inputs
displays. We offer a full selection of
visual displays making it easy for you
to pick one that fits your application.
The Data Concentrator collects all of Remote Unit #1 Remote Unit #2 Remote Unit #16
the alarm information from up to16
Remote Units providing one common Up to 1200M
data source to your own application or
our Alarm Management Software,
RiSCue. The Data Concentrator
provides a common clock Time Stamped
External
synchronization to all Remote Units Serial Data
Time Sync
and can be located up to 1200 meters
away from any Remote Unit. Data Concentrator
Serial Modbus
Time Stamped Data
Network
RiSCue Alarm Connections
Management to other
Software applications
using OPC
2.56
DMS-2000 Remote Unit Single Chassis Block Diagram
Chassis Dimensions &
Connections
The chassis are standard depth single
or double 19" wide card racks. The MOTHER BOARD
boxes contain the CPU, the I/O, the
relay cards and the power supply. The
size of the chassis is dependent on the
system size, the number of alarms to 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
be monitored, the number of control R
INPUT / OUTPUT MODULES E
switches and the number of lamp C
OR G
outputs etc. The chassis motherboards P U
have predetermined positions for the U RELAY MODULES
L
CPU and regulator, while the I/O and AS REQUIRED A
relay cards can be located in any other T
O
slot. The chassis can be ordered front R
or rear mounted — the angle brackets
are simply reversed from back to front
as necessary.
Double Chassis Block Diagram
MOTHER BOARD
E
X
T
E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 N
R D
INPUT / OUTPUT MODULES E E
C R
P OR G
RELAY MODULES U
U L B
AS REQUIRED A U
T S
O
R
MOTHER BOARD
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
INPUT / OUTPUT MODULES

OR
RELAY MODULES
AS REQUIRED
2.57
AMETEK
Dimensions
Single Chassis
7.025"
(178.4mm)
MIN. CLEARANCE FOR
MODULE WITHDRAWAL
7.40" SEE NOTE 19.00"
(188.0mm) (482.6mm)
7.283"
(185.0mm) 18.312"
(465.13mm) .344"
.098" (8.7mm)
(2.5mm)
5.126"
(132.5mm)
2.250"
(57.17mm)
1.483"
(37.68mm)
.71"
(18.0mm)
Double Chassis
7.025"
(178.4mm)
MIN. CLEARANCE FOR
MODULE WITHDRAWAL
7.40" SEE NOTE 19.00"

(188.0mm) (482.6mm)
7.283" 18.312"
(465.13mm) .344"
(185.0mm) (8.7mm)
.098"
(2.5mm)
2.250"
(57.15mm)
7.500"
(190.5mm)
10.468"
(265.9mm)
2.250"
(57.17mm)
1.483"
(37.68mm)
.71"
(18.0mm)
2.58
DMS-2000 Remote Units Annunciator Displays Data Concentrator
The Remote Unit is a The DMS-2000 Remote Units The Data Concentrator is the central
microprocessor based input/ provide lamp driver outputs for collection unit for up to 16 Remote
output device that collects both connection into any variety of Units. Multiple Data Concentrators
analog and digital inputs. It time Lamp Displays. Ametek’s AN-6160 can be used for un-limited size
and date stamps the alarms, and AN-5131 are compact systems. The Data Concentrator
activates lamps, relays or audible displays that take less than 5 also provides connections for
devices and accepts control inches of depth behind the panel. external clock synchronization and
inputs from your The AN-6150 is a modular display sends the same time reference to all
pushbuttons.(test, acknowledge, that can be configured into any remote units, so the entire system
reset, etc.) Each Remote Unit size from 4 cells high by 4 cells maintains a 1msec time stamp
supports up to 128 inputs and wide. Each ‘window cell’ can regardless of how many inputs there
outputs, all time tagged to the display 1, 2, 4 or 8 separate alarms are. The Data Concentrator comes
millisecond. The Remote Unit depending on your size availability. with a standard Serial Output for
communicates to the Data Window legends are laser printed connection into the RiSCue Alarm
Concentrator using a high speed on standard transparencies by the Management Software. The DMS-
RS-422 serial communication link, user, providing a quick and 2000 also comes with our OPC
that can be as long as 1200 economical solution especially for Server, (version 1 & 2 compliant), for
meters. (longer distances available changes or additions. The AN- connection into any OPC Client
through fiber optics) 5131 is a modular display that can Application.
be configured into any size from 15
cells high by 15 cells wide. Each RiSCue Alarm
‘window cell’ can display 1, 2, 3 or Management Software
4 separate alarms depending on
your size availability. All lamps are The RiSCue Alarm Management
front accessible, and a variety of Software provides the alarm display,
window colors are available to intelligent reports and instant
highlight your most critical alarms. notification of alarms using phone,
fax, pager, email, marquee or PA
System.
DMS-2000 System Features DMS-2000 System Benefits

Annunciation and Events Recording combined Reduces wiring costs, and system maintenance
Up to 2048 Inputs per each Data Concentrator Large system capacity, meets most requirements
Serial Communications, Modbus & OPC Share alarm information with many applications,
at minimal cost
1 Millisecond Resolution Needed for accurate process fault diagnosis

System fault diagnostics Always know the status of your system
First-out indication of alarms Aids in failure diagnosis, identify what the initial cause is
Analog and Digital Inputs Accepts full complement of alarm input types
Modular system architecture Low cost expansion, easily changed
and adapted to the application
Windows Configuration utility Easy to setup, configure and make changes
Environmental noise immunity Operates in all environments
2.59
AMETEK
DMS-2000 Specifications Mechanical Characteristics
Single Chassis: 5.5"H x 7.25"D x 19"W
Electrical Characteristics Power Requirements: Double Chassis: 11.5"H x 7.25"D x 19"W
24 VDC, 48 VDC, 125 VDC ± 12%
120/240 VAC ± 10% 50/60 Hz Chassis Mounting: surface or rack mount capability
Alarm Input Current: Terminals:

approximately 2 mA per input all input/output modules have gold plated
terminals.
Contact Inputs:
NO or NC, field selectable by DIP switch Input Time Delay:
on a per point basis 0.04 sec to 40 min
in 40 millisecond increments
Field Contact Voltage:
24, 48, 125 VDC, isolated and non-isolated, Flash Rates: on/off time adjustable.
120 VAC isolated
Push-button Controls:
Analog Inputs: 4-20 mA and 1-5 VDC Acknowledge
First Out Acknowledge
Capacity: Lamp Test
128 digital inputs per RU or Group Lamp Test
32 analog inputs per RU or combinations of both. Full Functional Test
2048 inputs per data concentrator. Reset
Audible Silence
Analog Input Response Time: 40 millisecond.
Output Assignment:
Digital Input Response Time: 20 millisecond. All inputs can be programmed to any output:
lamp, reed relay or power relay, or multiples of
Resolution: 1 millisecond. the same by use of the configurator program.
Outputs Audibles:
Lamp Drive: 200 mA @24 VDC, 5 watts 16 Alarm Audible Groups
Reed Relay: 100 VDC @ 0.25 A max., SPST, 1 Alarm Return to Normal Group
volts free NO/NC
Power Relay: 24 VDC @ 2.0 A, 240 VAC @ 1.0 A Groups:
16 Control Groups
Capacity: up to 224 digital outputs per RU 16 Audible Groups
16 Group Lamps
Data Transmission 16 Group Relays
Data Concentrator To Computer – 16 Group Inhibits
Remote To Data Concentrator – up to 9600 baud 16 First Out Groups
Type Distance
RS-232C 50ft/15m Individual Point Inhibit:
RS-422 4000ft/1200m Software inhibit available for any alarm point.
Alarm Sequence — Annunciator Functions Environmental

All ISA Sequences. Two sequences per CPU Operating Temperature: 32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
available. Either ISA sequence can be
assigned to any input point. Storage Temperature: -13° to 185°F (-25 to 85°C)
Humidity: 0-95% non-condensing
2.60
RiSCue
Innovative Alarm
Management MARQUEE
Through Intelligent
Messaging FAX
PA SYSTEM
EMAIL
Effectively Monitor Your Entire Plant or
Process with the Dynamic Functions of VIDEO PHONE
RiSCue. This versatile open solution
provides seamless integration into any
control or information environment!
RiSCue™ is an innovative PC-based

alarm management system with an 2 WAY PAGER
unprecedented capability to accurately
detect, present, notify and respond to WEB
abnormal conditions. RiSCue™’s open
technology provides direct connectivity
to plant floor data, using non-propri-
etary protocols like DDE and OPC. The
advanced alarm detection methods
provide 16 limit tests on each input, RiSCue™ serves as the front-end for all of alarm information, even internet
adding unparalleled preciseness. Auto- of Ametek’s alarm monitoring products, compatible through a web browser.
configuration of alarm inputs eliminates providing a turn-key solution for all your
difficult startups by importing the tag monitoring needs. RiSCue™’s OPC
information instantaneously. Server also provides direct connectivity RiSCue™ Providing the
to OPC compliant devices, and DDE
Your plant response time is improved information exchange opens up many
New Standard In
with the instant notification of alarms by other possibilities to centralize your alarm Messaging
phone, pager, two-way radio, fax, management. Whether you’re measuring
email and local announce, reaching you temperature, pressure, flow, or discrete Activate every emergency response
anywhere at anytime. Powerful, yet contacts, putting RiSCue™ in charge of from one system!
secure; RiSCue™’s fully distributed all of your alarms will save you time and
client-server architecture provides key money. RiSCue™ Alarm Management
personnel with on-line information of Plant Alarm Notification
will reduce the labor required to process
plant conditions. Productivity is alarms, provide greater consistency in
enhanced while maintaining safety and • Announce alarm through
the methods used to handle alarms and
regulatory compliance. existing plant communication
provide a quick response to the problem
systems
at hand.
Accurate and efficient alarm manage- • Distribute information
ment with distributed notification everywhere it is needed
become a reality with the advanced • Alert operators at connected
features of RiSCue™. Using RisCue™
Powerful and Secure computers
for total plant solutions will improve • Live video feed of process
consistency in the methods used to • 32 Bit Native NT, conditions
process alarms, and open gateways for multi-threaded design
information sharing. • Intelligent distribution of Any plant alarm can initiate the
information to anyone, notification system. You could notify a
anywhere supervisor of an event by cell phone
during evening hours, then print a
Open Connectivity RiSCue™ takes advantage of report on his fax machine or send an
Windows NT™’s enhanced perfor- email for review the following morn-
• Provides Alarm Management mance, security, and server-client ing. Plant personnel could be reached
Systems with direct access to architecture. Multiple clients can be by pager, detailing the exact nature
plant floor data allowed partial or full access to the and location of the problem. You
• Replaces labor-intensive alarm information and configuration receive the information instanta-
interfaces currently used to features. LAN, WAN compatibility neously and you are guaranteed your
exchange data provides local or remote distribution best people will always be notified of
and respond to critical alarms,
regardless of date and time.
2.61
AMETEK
These agents can be activated alone

or in any combination.
PHONE: RisCue™ will dial, connect

and transmit a voice message of the
alarm, time and date of occurrence,
process values and any custom Configure all actions,
message. Remote acknowledgement including video, by simply
ensures the call was received correctly. selecting the action and
RiSCue™’s text-to-speech technology recipient from the pull-down
options.
provides the quickest set-up, eliminat-
ing the need to record custom voice
messages. Sound the Alarm for RiSCue™ uses a highly accurate,
sophisticated means of setting alarm
PAGER: Worldwide numeric and Advanced Monitoring set-points and limits through boolean
alphanumeric pages are supported. equations, rate of change and deviation
Numeric will display a phone number, Dramatically increase productivity and tests. RiSCue™ provides the capability
while alphanumeric can display the regulatory compliance! to perform 16 separate limit tests for
same text message sent by voice, fax each analog input, allowing the closest
or e-mail. examination of your most critical
Ease of Use alarms. RiSCue™ can also use
E-MAIL: RisCue™ can send and preselected alarm set-points from
receive e-mail messages. Alarm • Easy to configure, you can be existing applications, bringing in the
information is integrated into the up and running in less than information automatically. Real time
message headers to allow recipient to an hour alarm information can be transferred
see information quickly. When • Simple day to day operations, from the external application
RiSCue™ receives an e-mail, it will with a natural and intuitive
initiate any desired sequence of software configuration (Annunciator, Sequence of Events
additional actions. • Locates data sources Recorder, etc.,) or can be time and date
automatically and imports the stamped directly at the RiSCue™ PC.
VIDEO: RisCue™ supports both fixed tag information seamlessly
and remote control cameras. At any
time, the cameras can pan and zoom For an alarm management system to Intelligent Notification
to any preset area, providing the detail be truly effective, it has to be easy to
you need. The live video feed can be configure and easy to use for day-to-
Options
stored and replayed whenever needed. day operations and RiSCue™ is just
• Selectable alarm and action
that. RiSCue™ offers an Auto-Configu-
FAX: RiSCue™ will send a fax and delays
ration feature which locates data
confirm receipt. Fax banner, to and • Delay on acknowledge
sources automatically and imports the
from fields and message are automati- • Built-in notification schedule
tag information almost instantaneously.
cally created. Special programming of drivers, adding
Alarm and instant notifications can be
large databases, and bringing in alarms
2-WAY RADIO/ PLANT PAGING & delayed to give plant personnel time to
from a variety of equipment is done
ANNOUNCEMENT SYSTEMS: react, or to prevent nuisance alarms.
effortlessly by searching the network
Analog audio signal is generated Delays on acknowledgement provide
for data sources like Annunciators,
through a sound card for 2-way radio, plant personnel a reasonable time to
Events Recorders, DCS & PLC
paging and announcement systems. act on the alarm before activating the
Systems, or HMI Systems.
Audio consists of an introductory tone notification system. RiSCue™’s
followed by any text-to-speech Contact Editor stores phone numbers,
message. pager numbers, email addresses, etc.
Advanced Alarm and the Schedule Editor indicates
MARQUEE: Standard ASCII messag- Detection when these numbers can be reached.
ing output is provided for overhead Contacting anyone at any location at
marquees. Flashing and scrolling are • 16 limit tests per process input anytime is possible.
supported. • Boolean, rate of change,
and deviation alarm tests
• Reads raw analog or digital
values
• Time and date stamp added
to all alarms
2.62
Intelligent Alarm &
Action Display
• Alarm and Action Summary, Alarm
and Action History
• Built-in Active X controls for
Annunciator Graphics
• Configurable Alarm Zones and
Priorities
• Advanced sorting and querying
• Auto-Archival of alarms
RiSCue™ displays alarm and actions

using separate windows for current
events and historical storage. Auto-
matic archiving of alarms for permanent
storage unclutters your history Reports
for easy viewing.
RiSCue™’s built-in Active X controls

provide Annunciator Graphic Displays
with selectable grid sizes to mimic
alarm panels. Window colors and alarm
set-up is easily configurable. To further
simplify your alarm viewing, all alarms
can be configured with their own alarm
zone and priority. RiSCue™ user
access can be limited to specific Alarm
Zones, enhancing security and
usability. Unlimited Flexibility
RiSCue™’s open connectivity to OPC (version 2.0 compliant,) DDE and ODBC information
exchange opens up many other possibilities to centralize your alarm management.
Distributing Plant Alarm

Information
• Alarm information at your
fingertips
• Share information across
your company’s existing
open network
RiSCue™’s alarm and event informa-

tion can be made available to multiple
users and plant management through a
company’s existing open network.
RiSCue™ requires only a network card
and cable for connection to your open
network.
2.63
AMETEK
RiSCue™ Features RiSCue™ System Requirements
Open Connectivity and Data Sharing Server:
• Direct connectivity to Ametek’s Windows NT™ 4.0 or later version
Alarm Annunciator and Sequence 66 MHz 486 processor (100 MHz Pentium™ recommended)
of Events Recorder products 16 MB RAM (32 recommended)
• OPC compliant, DDE, InTouch, 30 MB free disk space
and FIX data connectivity VGA monitor, mouse, CD ROM drive
• Fully functional OPC Server
(version 2.0)
Clients:
Instant Alarm Notification (can also run on same processor as Server)
• Phone, fax, pager, two-way radio, Windows 95™/Windows NT™ 4.0 or later version
email, local PA announce, display 66 MHz 486 processor
marquee 16 MB RAM
• Live real-time video feed 10 MB free disk space
and remote control capability VGA monitor, mouse, CD ROM drive
• Simultaneous and back-up
notifications
• Text-to-speech engine for natural Instant Notification System (Action Agents)
voice annunciation
Action Agent Hardware Requirement
Fully Distributed Design
• 32 bit native NT, multi-threaded Local announce through PC speaker PC Sound Card
design or plant paging system, two-way radio
• Fully distributed server-client
architecture Phone and numeric paging NT modem with Unimodem V driver
• Alarm information shared with supports, or Dialogic telephone board
anyone, anywhere, using existing
LAN/WAN Alphanumeric paging Standard modem
• Advanced security restricts
unauthorized access Fax Standard modem with fax capability
(a single modem will support
Advanced Alarm and Event numeric paging and alphanumeric
Processing paging and fax
• Comprehensive alarm
configuration, up to 16 limit tests Email Connection to POP server using
per input SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
• Boolean, rate of change and
deviation test Display marquee Serial Com Port
• Reads raw analog or digital values
• Time and date stamp added to Video NT compatible video capture board
all alarms and B/W camera having standard
1V peak-peak output. A CD
Ease of Use recorder, or other tape drive is
• Auto-configuration allows direct recommended for long term video
import of alarm tags storage.
• Configurable alarm zones and
priorities
• Advanced sorting and querying
• Auto-archival of alarms
• Import/export alarm database
Intelligent Display
• Alarm and action summary, alarm
and action history
• Built-in Active X controls for
annunciator graphics
2.64
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
Machine monitoring used on the front end of our monitoring
equipment is essential systems.
in today’s industrial
The following sections detail the
market place. It offers different types of Machine Monitoring
customers added safety equipment and related products. Each
for their machines, section includes complete specifica-
tions and ordering. Dimensional
plants, and personnel. drawings are included for all products
When used properly, and accessories.
machine monitoring
can be the first warning
of an impending
“un-safe” condition,
**Obsolete**
so breakdowns can be
averted. The system can
also be used to monitor
a machine’s condition,
so preventative
maintenance can be
scheduled.
• Monitor Process and Key
Machine Parameters
➤ Temperature
➤ Thrust
➤ Seismic
➤ Displacement
➤ Tachometer
➤ Eccentricity
• Continuous Monitoring
• Dual and Triple Channels
• Complete Accessories
• FM/CSA Approval for Div 2 areas

Ametek offers a complete line of Machine
Monitoring equipment, from single
channel Vibration switches to multi-
channel Systems. The VT-3360 Vibration
Transmitter are recommended for single
channel vibration monitoring of non-
critical applications.The VT-2490
Machine Monitoring System is recom-
mended for critical applications that
require multiple channels of temperature,
process, and vibration variables. The TM-
2480 Temperature Monitoring System is
recommended for all applications that
require multiple channels of temperature
and process variables only. The monitor-
ing systems are configurable to the
application using plug-in modules for
Temperature, Thrust, Seismic, Displace-
ment, Tachometer, and Eccentricity
measurements. Ametek also offers a
complete line of probes and sensors
3.1
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
Two Wire Vibration
Transmitter VT-3360 VT-3360 Specifications Isolation: 1000V rms to housing.
Operating Temperature Range:
-22° to +185°F (-30° to +85°C) Wire Size: AWG #12 maximum.
Mounting: 1/2-14 NPT stud, any axis
Enclosure: NEMA 4, weatherproof (sensitive axis parallel to stud center line).
Agency Approvals: FM & CSA Case Material: Cast aluminum, low

(Explosion proof): copper content.
FM Class I: Div. 1 (Groups C & D)
FM Class II: Div. 1 (Groups E, F,, G) Overrange Capability:
FM Class III: Div. 1 150% of range, I max = 1.5 IFS (DC only)
Div. 2 Class I (Groups A, B, C, D) 140% of range, I max = 1.4 IFS (DC and
I.S. Class I, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D AC signals combined)
with Barriers Where IFS is full scale output current.
Weight: 3 lbs. (1.4 Kg.) Note: That to maintain linearity under
The Ametek Model VT-3360 Vibration overrange conditions RL must be less
Transmitter is a totally solid-state RFI/EMI Immunity: Tested to SAMA than or equal to:
device providing vibration monitoring Standard PM33.1C.1978. Class (Vs-12) Volts
for non-critical rotating machinery. It 2-ABC-3% Max, lid on and metal 0.03 Amps
combines a vibration sensor and conduit shielding wires, 20MHz to 1GHz
electronics that provide for input @ 10V/Meter
power, 4-20 mA analog vibration VT-3360 Ordering
output signal, and 0-1.0 mA vibration Repeatability: +2% of reading Model Description
wave form output signal-all on just two VT-3360-05 0-0.5 ips/4-20 mA (05)
wires. Various adjustments, sensing Outputs: (0-12.5mm/sec)
ranges and other features make the a. 4-20 mA DC proportional to (4-750Hz, 240-45000RPM)
VT-3360 suitable for many vibration vibration level.
monitoring applications. b. User-selectable instantaneous Model Description
vibration wave form signal from VT-3360-10 0-1.0 ips/4-20 mA (10)
Power for the VT-3360 is from a user 0-1.0 mA peak A.C. (0-25mm/sec)
supplied unregulated DC power-supply (4-750Hz, 240-45000RPM)
with a maximum voltage of 50 volts. Power (V/S): 12 to 50 VDC,
The proper voltage of the power-supply unregulated Vs = RL x IFS + 12: Model Description
is calculated from the equation. RL = ohms; IFS = amps VT-3360-20 0-2.0 ips/4-20 mA (20)
(0-50mm/sec)
Transverse Sensitivity: Less than (4-400Hz, 240-24000RPM)
10% of sensitive axis.
VT-3360 Outline
& Dimensions
5.66"
(143.76mm)
3.56"
(88.90mm)
1.32" 3.69"
(33.53mm) (93.73mm)
3/4-14 NPT 1/2-14 NPT

.69"
(17.53mm)
3.2
TM-2480 Temperature/ Each model in the series has five
Process Monitors different outputs associated with its Three High-Density Models
Ametek Series TM-2480 monitoring capability. Each tempera- The Series TM-2480 is available in
Temperature Monitors are complete ture variable, with its associated alarm three different models/capacities,
integral systems designed for the and shutdown trip levels, can be using dual or triple input modules.
continuous monitoring of selected and digitally displayed. Point The TM-2481 model includes a meter/
temperature points whose primary status indication is provided by light common service module and the
sensors are resistance temperature emitting diodes (LED) mounted on the capability for up to two modules. The
detectors (RTD) and/or front panel of each module. Integral TM-2482 includes a meter/common
thermocouples, and they provide facilities for reflashing group alarms into service module and capability for up to
both alarm and shutdown functions the control room annunciator are 4 modules. The TM-2485 is available to
when preset levels are exceeded. furnished. Finally, an analog output monitor up to 10 modules of either the
Three standard models are signal is available on each point for dual or triple input variety, providing up
available, all of which utilize high- driving external indicators and/or to 30 channels per system. This unit
density, two or three channel, plug- recorders. has an expandable capacity beyond
in modules. the 10 modules through the use of one
All TM-2480 models include one or more chassis of an additional 10
common trip and one common alarm modules each, including auxiliary
relay in a meter/common service power supply. The only limitation to
module. Should any of the individual system size is the visual readout
alarm or trip set points be exceeded, distance between detector modules
one or both of these common relays on the furthest slave chassis and the
will operate. Additionally, individual per- common digital display on the master
point relays can be provided. chassis.
On triple input modules, the per-point All three TM-2480 modules are
relay can be jumper selected to supplied with integral detector mod-
operate either the alarm or trip set ules, meter/common service module,
point. As an alternative, these per-point operator display panel, power supply,
relays on triple input modules can be and field wiring termination. All mod-
linked to provide a group alarm and ules, in turn, are standardized, front
group trip per module. Sectionalized removable, plug-in type with two or
grouping of three-point modules within three-channel circuits. Field wiring
one system is, therefore, easily connections are made via high-density,
accommodated by wiring module clamp-style terminals. System power is
group alarm or trip relay contracts in 115 or 230 volts AC, 50/60 Hz, as
parallel or series. This dramatically standard. DC powered systems for 24,
reduces customer relay logic wiring 48, and 125 volts fully isolated supplies
and installation costs. are available as an option on all
systems.
On dual input modules, two relays
per input are provided – one for the
alarm set point and one for the trip
set point. Output relays are environ-
mentally sealed (nitrogen filled) to
ensure reliable operation in dusty or
corrosive environments.
3.3
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
and set points. Selection of these Burden:

Available Models a. TM-2481-less than 23 VA,
Series TM-2480 Temperature Monitors readouts is made by means of solid-
state, interlocked, push-button circuits fully equipped
are available in the following standard b. TM-2482-less than 32 VA,
configurations: with LEDs, to acknowledge parameter
selection. fully equipped
c. TM-2485-less than 60 VA, per
a. TM-2481– two module system 10 module chassis
comprised of two dual or triple input Push-button and circuits for selecting
detector modules, plus meter/ in-service meter calibration checks are Power Interruption: up to 150 rms
common service module. Suitable also located here. without spurious alarms/trips
for panel mounting. RFI Immunity: Test classification-
Additionally, a common group reflash
SAMA Standard: PMC 33.1C.1978,
b. TM-2482 – four module system indicator and reset push-button are
located on the meter/common service Class 2—ABC—2.5% max with sensor
comprised of four dual or triple input leads shielded and twisted core input
detector modules, plus meter/ module. This push-button will be
wiring utilized: max error of 1.0% at
common service module. Suitable illuminated if one or more points within
the system are in an alarm or trip 27 MHz, 150 MHz, and 470 MHz at a
for panel mounting. field strength of 10 volts per meter
condition. Pressing this push-button
c. TM-2485 – a 10 module system will clear alarm and trip circuits on all Customer Terminals: clamp-style
comprised of ten dual or triple input channels that are jumpered for manual terminals with wire protection on 0.2"
detector modules, plus meter/ reset, providing the channel input (5 mm) centers; maximum conductor
common service module. Suitable conditions have returned to normal. size 10 AWG (2.5 mm2)
for 19-inch rack mounting; optional Details of the indicator annunciator Dimensions and Weights
bezel for panel mounting available. sequence are defined in “General a. TM-2481: 12.5 lbs (5.8 kg)
Specifications.” b. TM-2482: 14.5 lbs (6.6 kg)
For systems greater than 10 modules, c. TM-2485: 30.0 lbs (13.6 kg)
additional 10 module chassis can be The meter/common service module
provided complete with 10 dual or triple includes a common alarm relay and a Approvals
input detector modules and integral common trip (shutdown) relay. Alarm CSA and FM approved for Division 2
auxiliary power supply. Connections outputs from each individual temperature locations
between 10 module chassis are made by channel are bused to the common alarm
a plug-in cable slave harness. Standard reflash relay. (As an option, the reflash relay
length is 39 inches (1 meter). can be jumpered to serve as an audible TM-2480 Ordering
warning relay without reflash.) Similarly, all To order a TM-2480 System
Special Enclosure Options trip outputs from each channel are bused to –Specify the chasis/CSM model
Series TM-2480 Temperature Monitors the common trip relay. number, as shown below
are available with the following special –Specify the detector module model
enclosure options: TM-2480 Specifications number(s), as shown on pages
Operating Temperature Range: 4.12 and 4.13.
a. Weatherproof enclosures for surface -4° to 140°F (-20°C to +60°C) maxi- TM-2480 Chassis/CSM Ordering
mounting with protection to NEMA 4 mum operating temperature [storage -
or IP55 requirements. 22° to 167°F (-30°C to +75°C)] TM248 1– 2–3–4–5–6–7–8–9
Ambient Temperature Effects: Item 1 System Size
b. Weatherproof with viewing window a. Span-less than 0.02%/°C Code Description
for panel mounting. b. Zero-less than 0.05%/°C 1 2 Input modules
2 4 Input modules
c. Terminals are available at the rear Relative Humidity: 10% to 60% for 5 10 Input modules
of the chassis for customer wiring to basic accuracy; 10% to 90% with
remote read push-buttons when reduced accuracy of ± 0.4% for set Item 2 Range Number 1 Linear RTD
the TM-2480 is mounted in a points and readout. Code Description
sealed enclosure. Environmental Protection: optional P 100Ω Pt RTD
conformal circuit board coating; all C 10Ω Cu RTD
relays are sealed, nitrogen filled, and V DC Voltage*
TM-2480 Common have gold plated contacts I DC Current*
Service Module System Power: O Not fitted
a. Standard 117/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, *Consult Factory for ranging in engi-
+10% to -20% limits neering units. Insert value per instruc-
Each TM-2480 system is equipped
b. Optional 24, 48, or 125 VDC, tions in next section (SCALING).
with one meter/common service
module (CSM) which supplies power to isolated, +20% to -20% limits
the detector modules and provides (Continued on page 3.5)
Power Supply Effects: less than
digital readout of channel temperatures ±0.1% of span for a ±10% variation
from nominal voltage
3.4
TM-2480 Dimensions Item 3 Range Number 1 Scaling
Insert range code 01 to 29. See Input
module specifications on page 4.13.
TM-2481 For analog inputs, insert desired
Panel Mounting readout.
9.4" Example: I23 (0-600 PSI)
(238mm) 4-20 mA=0-600 PSI
10.6" 0-100% Readout
(268mm)
Item 4 Range Number 2 T/C or Ni RTD
Code Description
N 120Ω Ni RTD
K Type K T/C
BEZEL
14.0" DEEP T Type T T/C
(356mm) 7.0"
(177mm) J Type J T/C
8.2"
E Type E T/C
(208mm) O Not Included
Item 5 Range Number 2 Scaling
Insert range code 01 to 29, See Input
module specifications on page 4.13.
TM-2482
Panel Mounting Item 6 System Power
Code Description
P1 220 V/240 VAC
9.4"
(238mm) P2 110 V/120 VAC
10.6"
P4 24 VDC Isolated
(268mm) P5 48 VDC Isolated
P6 125 VDC Isolated
Item 7 System Common Relays
Common trip relay provided as standard.
BEZEL Code Description
14.0" DEEP
(356mm)
9.4"
(238mm)
A Audible warning relay
R Reflash relay
10.6"
(268mm) Item 8 Relay Status
Code Description
E Energized for normal
(Both relays)
D De-energized for normal
TM-2485 Rack Mounting (Both relays)
A Alarm energized/trip
de-energized
R Alarm de-energized trip
8.75"
energized
(223mm)
Item 9 Special Options
Code Description
BO Panel-Mounting Bezel,
TM-2485
19.0" Panel Mounting SS Sealed surface-mounting
14.0" DEEP
(483mm) Enclosure
(356mm) HW Hinged panel mount window
EX Expanded System Above
10 Input Modules
9.4" CC Conformal Coating
(283mm)
00 No Special Options
D2 Div 2, CSA, FM Cert.
19R 19" Rackmount adapter
2481/82 only
14.0" DEEP 17.8"

(356mm) (452mm)
BEZEL OPTION PANEL CUTOUT
3.5
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
VT-2490 Machine In component terms, a complete or other emergency action: GROUP

Monitoring System VT-2490 system consists of a base unit ALARM, GROUP TRIP, and Probe OK
chassis with rear panel I/O terminals, relays. The VT-2495 offers even more—
detector modules, and a common the capability to distinguish between
• Vibration, Temperature, and control/display/power supply module. vibration and temperature/process
Process Monitoring in a Single The VT-2490 system will accept most problems in a large system. Thus, critical
Integrated System standard field sensors such as proxim- temperature and/or process ALARMS
ity probes, accelerometers, velocity (and similarly TRIPS) can be given special
• High-Density, Plug-In Chassis in pickups, thermocouples, RTDs and attention. The VT-2495 has up to five
Three Standard Capacities process transmitters. separate relays: GROUP ALARM and
GROUP TRIP relays for selected
• Easy-To-Read Display in
Three different size systems are available, temperature and process alarms;
Engineering Units
all of which have a common service GROUP ALARM and GROUP TRIP
• Local and Remote Display of module and which accept any combina- relays for vibration channels; and Probe
Key Data tion of plug-in detector modules. OK to warn of any vibration sensor faults.
Each channel can be individually
• Unique Common System Relays The VT-2491 system, designed for interfaced with these system relays using
panel mounting, provides for up to field-selectable jumper links. On all three
• Field Selectable Operation of two detector modules. The VT-2492 systems, the GROUP ALARM(s) also
Key Features system, also designed for panel serve as GROUP REFLASH(es) to flash
mounting, includes up to four monitor- both the lighted reset push-button and a
• RFI Immunity ing modules. The VT-2495 system remote annunciator. The reset button
accepts up to 10 detector modules permits reset of all relay circuits that are
• A Choice of AC and DC
and is designed for 19-inch rack jumpered for manual reset, provided
Power Supplies
mounting, with an optional bezel for conditions have returned to normal. It
• Easy System Expansion panel mounting. This unit is expandable also permits acknowledgment of
in the Field beyond 10 modules through one or abnormal circuits. It can be activated
more slave chassis of 10 modules remotely, and serves as a unique built-in
• FM/CSA Approval for Division 2 each. For intermediate size systems, annunciator. It lights and flashes (and the
Locations blank cover panels are available. relay changes state) whenever one
channel (or other subsequent selected
Ametek VT-2490 high-density ones) goes to ALARM or TRIP. REFLASH
VT-2490 machine monitors provide
systems monitor all key machine permits the grouping of many channels
unique system relay capability for
parameters: vibration, position, into one remote annunciator point
maximum safety and flexibility. The
temperature, speed and process without loss of pre-channel warning and
VT-2491 and VT-2492 have up to three
variables such as flows, pressure acknowledgment capability.
separate, sealed relays for annunciation
and levels.
3.6
All models feature a choice of AC VT-2490 Specifications Customer Terminals: Clamp style
(standard) or DC (optional) power. Operating Temperature Range: terminals with wire protection on 0.2"
Field wiring connections are made on -20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F) (5 mm) centers; maximum conductor
the chassis exterior system backplane size 10 AWG (2.5 mm2).
via high-density DIN clamp-style Storage Temperature Range:
terminals. -30°C to +75°C (-22°F to +167°F) Mounting:
a. VT-2491 & VT-2492 : panel
A number of valuable system options System Power: mounting with integral bezel.
are available, including RFI/EMI a. Standard 117/240 VAC 50/60 Hz, b. VT-2495: standard 19-inch rack
immunity, conformal coating of all 10% to -20% variation mounting; optional panel mounting
circuit boards, an extender module for b. Optional 24/48, 125 ±20% VDC with bezel.
calibration/troubleshooting, various isolated
weatherproof and waterproof enclo- Weights (dependent on system):
sures for surface (wall) mounting, and Power Supply Effects: a. VT-2491: 13 lbs (6 kg)
flush panel mounting and hinged < ±0.1% of span (FS) for 10% variation fully equipped.
window assemblies for waterproofing b. VT-2492: 15 lbs (7 kg)
on the face of the monitor in a panel. Burden: fully equipped.
All enclosures contain viewing windows a. VT-2491: less than 28 VA fully c. VT-2495: 31 lbs (14 kg)
eliminating the constant need to open equipped fully equipped.
the enclosure. A remote selection b. VT-2492: less than 38 VA fully
option is also offered to allow any equipped For additional data, see Ordering
system to be mounted in a purged or c. VT-2495 : less than 70 VA fully Section.
weatherproof enclosure and viewed equipped
through a window. Readout selection is
achieved by using customer supplied RFI/EMI Immunity:
remote push-buttons wired to terminals a. Temperature process modules:
at the rear of the chassis. SAMA Standard PMC33.1C.1978,
Class 2 — ABC — 2.5% maximum
For hookup of portable vibration with sensor leads shielded and
analysis equipment, one output jack twisted covers; maximum error 1.0%
for shaft phase reference is provided at 27 MHz, 150 MHz and 470 MHz
on the front of the VT-2490-CSM at field strength 10 V/Meter.
module. Two timing mark output jacks Standard on all models.
for different shaft speeds are provided b. Vibration modules: dependent on
on the VT-2495-CSM module. type of sensor and sensitivity (consult
factory). Typical maximum 5%.
3.7
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
VT-2490 Common VT-2490 Common
Service Module Service Module
The Common Service Module (CSM) Specifications
supplies power to the detector modules System Input Range and Parameter
and sensors for increased reliability. The ∂ Combinations:
CSM’s digital display provides precise VT-2490-CSM (VT-2491, 92 systems):
readout on-demand of all channels in 3 standard; 6 optional.
easy-to-understand, customer-selected VT-2495-CSM (VT-2495 system):
engineering units, such as mils, in/sec, π ∏ 6 standard.
°F, °C, %, psig, mm/sec and others. All ∫
Notes:
channel parameters are individually ➏ 1. One non-linear input (T/C or 120 Ohm
selectable: input, ALARM and TRIP set Ni RTD) per system is standard.
points, GAP/BIAS, zero point and full ➐ Several ranges (up to system
scale deflection (span). Proximity probe maximum) can be specified for one
gap clearance and seismic transducer type of sensor.
bias are accurately displayed in volts on 2. Minimum span for T/C inputs: 8 mV;
the common service module for calibra- ∑ minimum span for RTD inputs: 25mV
tion purposes, as well as for in-service
checks. Digital Meter Readout:
Maximum Scale : 1000 to +1999 with
Due to the precise nature of the digital full floating decimal point and resolution
readout, the critical accuracy of the of ±1 digit to display the following in
ALARM and TRIP set points is ±0.1% FS Common Service Module Features engineering units:
or 1 digit. The machine’s monitored 1. Digital LED Display: provides a. Channel input
condition is also displayed on the common readout of all channel parameters b. Channel ALARM set point
service module with high resolution. and set points in customer selected c. Channel TRIP set point
Display selection is made by lighted, engineering units, with fully floating d. Gap Bias Voltage: for vibration inputs
interlocked, common push-buttons and decimal point. e. Meter range calibration check: zero
per-channel, momentary-contact push- 2. Digital Display Readouts: common and FSD
button on each detector module. service modules provide display of Engineering Units Display:
Optional outputs can duplicate the call- customer-selected engineering units. a. 3 standard or 5 optional parameters
up and display of all selectable functions 3. Common System Push-button: (in addition to “gap” volts) for
on a remote separate meter or CRT. lighted, interlocked buttons, each VT-2491 and VT-2492 systems.
with an adjacent LED, allow operator b. 6 standard parameters (one of which
Ametek offers two different common selection for display of: input is volts) for VT-2495 system.
service modules. The VT-2490-CSM is (machine’s monitored condition);
Relay Contact Outputs:
used in both the VT-2491 and the VT- ALARM set point; TRIP set point; gap
Common service module relays environ-
2492 systems and accepts up to three (for sensor voltage gap or bias level);
mentally-sealed (nitrogen-filled) to avoid
different input range and parameter zero; and FSD (full scale deflection).
contamination:
combinations, with an option of three 4. Zero and Span Potentiometer:
a. AC–240 VAC maximum, 3 A
more. The VT-2495-CSM, which is calibrate readout of individual input
maximum, or 300 VA maximum.
designed for the VT-2495 system, ranges.
b. DC–up to 30 VDC maximum at 3 A
accepts up to six input range and 5. Reset Push-button (with reflash
maximum or 90 watts maximum,
parameter combinations. indicator): for manual reset of
resistive load; 30 VDC to 220 VDC
ALARM and TRIP circuits once
maximum, 50 watts switching
The CSM incorporates front panel set channel conditions return to normal.
maximum (resistive load only).
points for fine-calibrating the readout of 6. Front Panel Test Jacks: for in-service
c. VT-2491-CSM and VT-2492-CSM:
the span and zero points for all ranges. check of internal calibration source
up to three system relays–GROUP
In-service verification of the five volt using digital volt meter.
ALARM (Reflash), GROUP TRIP,
reference calibration source is also 7. Timing Mark Output Jack: for
Probe OK (optional).
available on the front panel. Start-up hookup of portable vibration analysis
d. VT-2495-CSM:
inhibit and x2 or x3 start-up multiplication equipment; provides shaft phase
1. Standard: same as above.
of all selected ALARM and TRIP circuits reference output (two different
2. Optional: five system relays:
are offered to facilitate normal run-ups outputs available on VT-2495-CSM).
(a) Temperature/process:
and protect during abnormal ones.
GROUP ALARM (Reflash),
Individual channels may be included (or
GROUP TRIP.
not) by a field-selectable jumper link. This
(b) Vibration: GROUP ALARM
permits special system control. The relay
(Reflash), GROUP TRIP,
“over-ride” is made known by a front
Probe OK.
panel LED, so that monitoring protection
is not inadvertently by-passed. Calibration Accuracy: Digital readout
±0.25% FSD or 1 digit (if greater).
3.8
VT-2490 Dimensions VT-2490 Ordering
To order a VT-2490 system
VT-2491Panel Mount –Specify the chassis/CSM model
number, as shown below.
–Specify the detector module model
9.4" number(s) as shown on pages
(238mm) 4.12 through 4.24
10.6"
(268mm)
VT-2490 Chassis/CSM Ordering
VT-249 1–2–3–4–5–6
14.0" DEEP BEZEL Must use one option from each group.
(356mm) 7.0"
(177mm)
Item 1 Rack Size
8.2" Code Description
(208mm)
1 2 module rack
2 4 module rack
5 10 module rack
VT- 2492 Panel Mount
Item 2 System Power
Code Description
1 220/240 VAC
2 110/120 VAC
9.4" 4 24 VDC isolated
(238mm)
5 48 VDC isolated
10.6"
(268mm) 6 125 VDC isolated
Item 3 CSM Relays

Code Description
A Audible warning relay (group alarm)
14.0" DEEP BEZEL R Reflash relay
9.4"
(356mm) (238mm) Note: Group Trip is standard.
10.6" Item 4 Optional CSM Relays
(268mm)
Code Description
K Probe OK (VT-2491, VT-2492)
R Probe OK, group alarm and trip
VT-2495 Rack Mount (VT-2495)
X No extra relays
(VT-2491, VT-2492, VT-2495)
Item 5 CSM Relay Status

8.75" Code Description
(223mm)
E Normally energized
D Normally de-energized
Item 6 Options
19.0" Panel Mount Code Description
(483mm) BO VT-2495 panel mount bezel
14.0" DEEP
(356mm) SS Surface mount weather-proof
cabinet
HW Hinged window cover, water-
9.4"
(283mm) proof
EX 10 module expansion chassis,
aux. p.s. per 10 extra modules
D2 Division 2 approval, CSA, FM
CC Conformal coating, CSM and
motherboard
14.0" DEEP 17.8" 00 No options
(356mm) (452mm) 19R 19" Rackmount adapter,
2491/92 only
BEZEL OPTION PANEL CUTOUT
3.9
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
Detector Modules for from the system chassis’ rear terminal, Each channel of a dual channel module
TM-2480 and VT-2490 including a per-channel, filtered analog has adjustable ALARM and TRIP set
signal for data processing or strip chart points, which activate LED indicators and
Systems recording. relays when pre-set limits are exceeded.
The thermocouple and analog modules
TM-2471/2/3 Triple Field Selectable Relay Modes have input circuits that are fully floating
Each channel on any of these modules with 500 VDC channel-to-channel
Channel Temperature features a DPDT sealed relay. By means isolation, to ensure high rejection of
& Process Modules of jumpers on the module, these relays common mode ripple and noise and to
(For use with can be assigned to an ALARM function allow sensors to be grounded. The RTD
TM-2480 per point, TRIP function per point, or module incorporates a constant-current,
and VT-2490 Typical group alarm and group trip per module. three-wire compensated bridge circuit
systems) TM/VT This latter feature allows flexible grouping connected to the remote three-wire RTD
Detector of module relay alarm and trip contact sensor. All modules have automatic built-
Module outputs with a minimum of external in sensor failure detection. This feature
wiring, thus reducing system installation will cause an alarm (but will inhibit
costs. Jumpers are also provided on all shutdown) for sensor failure (see
TM-2471/2/3 high-density, triple channel circuits to allow in-service change of trip
modules provide continuous monitoring Specifications, Note 4). Up to five
mode (high or low), sequence (manual or different outputs per module are available
of RTDs, thermocouples, and process automatic reset), and relay state (normally
variables. These modules provide both from the system chassis’ rear terminal,
energized or de-energized). In addition, including a per-channel, filtered current or
alarm and shutdown functions per each channel may be jumpered to the
channel when pre-set limits are ex- voltage analog signal for data processing
system’s group alarm/reflash and group or strip chart recording.
ceeded and digital readout on demand, trip relays.
via the display on the system’s Common Field Selectable Relay Modes
Service Module.
TM-2474/5/7 Dual Each of the two channels per module
feature an alarm relay with SPDT
One range and sensor type can be Channel Temperature contacts and a trip relay with DPDT
specified per module, with the maximum
number of ranges and sensors deter-
& Process Modules contacts. Jumpers are provided to allow
mined by the monitor system. The triple (For use with in-service per-channel change of trip
channel thermocouple module (TM- TM-2480 mode (high or low), sequence (manual or
2471) accepts types K, T, J, and E and VT-2490 automatic reset) and relay state (normally
grounded and ungrounded thermo- systems) energized or de-energized.)
couples. The triple channel process Standard Analog Input Ranges:
module (TM-2472) accepts process Input Input
analog signals proportional to a wide Code Range Impedance
range of variables (pressure, flow, level, 22 1 to 5 mA 200Ω
etc.) in any of seven standard instrument 23 4 to 20 mA 50Ω
TM-2474/5/7 high-density, dual channel
ranges (six current and two voltage 24 10 to 50 mA 20Ω
modules provide continuous and process
ranges). The triple channel RTD module 25 0 to 1 mA 1K
variables. These modules provide both 26 0 to 10 mA 100Ω
(TM-2473) accepts platinum, copper, or
alarm and shutdown functions per channel 27 0 to 20 mA 50Ω
nickel RTD sensors.
when pre-set limits are exceeded and digital 28 0 to 1 V 5M
Each channel of a triple channel module readout on demand, via the display on the 29 1 to 5 V 5M
has adjustable ALARM and TRIP set system’s Common Service Module. Note: Consult factory for other input
points which activate LED indicators and ranges, non-linear analog inputs, or for
One range and sensor type can be
relays when pre-set limits are exceeded. meter display scaled in engineering units.
specified per module, with the maxi-
The thermocouple and analog modules
mum number of ranges and sensors Input Impedance: greater than 5
have input circuits that are fully floating
determined by the monitor system. megohms for thermocouple inputs
with 500 VDC channel-to-channel
isolation to ensure high rejection of The dual channel thermocouple module Outputs:
common mode ripple and noise and to (TM-2474) accepts types K, T, J, and E a. Meter Range: (readout on
allow sensors to be grounded. The RTD grounded and ungrounded thermo- Common Service Module)
module incorporates a constant-current, couples. The dual channel process 1. Temperature: linearized in °C or
three-wire compensated bridge circuit module (TM-2475) accepts process °F, maximum scale -150° to
connected to the remote three-wire RTD analog signals proportional to a wide +1999° with resolution of
sensor. All modules have automatic built- range of variables (pressure, flow, level, ±1 degree
in sensor failure detection. etc.) in any of eight standard instrument 2. Process: consult factory for
ranges (six current and two voltage specific variables and ranges.
This feature will cause an alarm (but will ranges). The dual channel RTD module b. Calibration Accuracy: ±0.25% FS
inhibit shutdown) for sensor failure (TM-2477) accepts platinum, copper, or 1 digit if greater
(see specifications, Note 4). Up to five or nickel RTD sensors or selected
different outputs per module are available thermistor sensors.
3.10
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
c. Relays: environmentally-sealed TM-2471/2/3/4/5/7 Input

(nitrogen-filled): 240 VAC, 3 A, or 300 Modules Specifications
VA maximum AC rating; 30 VDC at 3 A
or 90 W, or 30-to-220 VDC at 50 W Standard Temperature Input Ranges & Sensors:
switching maximum resistive load. Input/Display RTD Sensors Thermo-
d. Analog Outputs (rear terminal): Range 100Ω 10Ω 120Ω Couples
voltage or current ranges available; Code °C Code °F Pt Cu Ni K T J E
accuracy ±0.25% FSD (proportional 01 0 to 100 — — X X X X
to sensor response characteristics.) 02 0 to 150 12 0 to 300 X X X X X X X
Output Table 03 0 to 200 13 0 to 400 X X X X X X X
Analog 04 0 to 300 — — X X
Outputs Output 05 0 to 400 14 0 to 750 X X X X X
Code Range Load (Ω) — — 15 0 to 1000 X X X
01 0 to 1 mA 12 K max 06 0 to 600 16 0 to 1100 X X X
02 0 to 5 mA 24 K max 07 0 to 1000 17 0 to 1800 X X X
03 0 to 10 mA 1.2 K max 08 -100 to 200 18 -150 to 400 X X X X X
04 0 to 20 mA 600 max 09 -100 to 400 19 -150 to 750 X X X X X
05 1 to 5 mA 2.4 K max 10 -100 to 1000 20 -150 to 1800 X X
06 4 to 20 mA 600Ω max
07 0 to 5 VDC 25 K min
11 -100 to 1100 21 -150 to 2000 X
08 0 to 10 VDC 25 K min
09 1 to 5 VDC 25 K min Note: 1. All 100Ω Platinum RTDs calibrated using DIN standard values R212/R32F and
R100/ROC = 1.2850. All other standards must be requested.
General Performance: 2. Maximum number of ranges per systems: See VT-2490 CSM and VT-2490
a. Set points: two per channel, product descriptions.
0-100% minimum adjustment; 3. For greater resolution of analog output, input range may be reduced.
Accuracy will be ±0.25% ±1°C (°F) of range.
± 0.5°C over the range by blind-set 4. Sensor failure detection: high, high/high mode initiates alarm (not shutdown)
multi-turn potentiometers. for RTD open or short and T/C open circuit, and live zero analog inputs.
b. Deadband: 0.5% standard
(other values optional)
c. Channel Isolation: K Type K T/C Item 7 Relay Designation
1. Thermocouple and analog input T Type T T/C For triple modules only
circuits fully floating, 500 VDC J Type J T/C Code Description
channel-to-channel isolation. E Type E T/C A Alarm relay per point
2. RTD sensor inputs common to V DC Voltage T Trip relay per point
internal system 0 volts; grounded I DC Current G Group alarm and trip per module
RTDs are not recommended for
use with the VT-2490 system. Item 3 Input Range For dual modules only
3. Meter outputs common to Insert range code 01 to 29, See input R Alarm and trip relay per module
internal system 0 volts Tables, Insert ‘SS’ for Special; Two
d. Temperature Effect: span, <0.02% Ranges Maximum Per System; For
of reading/°C; zero, <0.05% degree/°C analog inputs, write in desired readout** Item 8 Relay Status
e. RFI Immunity: 27, 150, 470 MHz Code Description
max. error, 1% at 10 volts per meter. Item 4 Alarm Sequence Status E Energized for normal
Code Description D De-energized for normal
M Latching manual reset A Alarm energized/trip de-energized
TM-2471/2/3/4/5/7 A Auto reset when return to normal R Alarm de-energized/trip energized
Ordering H High for alarm
L Low for alarm
TM-247 1–2–3–4–5–6–7–8–9–10–11 Item 9 Output Signal
Item 5 Trip Sequence Status Code Description
Item 1 Module Type Code Description
Code Description V Voltage, dual & triple modules
M Latching, manual reset I Current, dual modules only
1 Triple T/C A Auto reset when return to normal
2 Triple Analog H High for trip Item 10 Output Range
3 Triple RTD L Low for trip Insert Range Code 01 to 09, See
4 Dual T/C Output Table, General Specifications
5 Dual Analog Item 6 Alarm Trip Delay
7 Dual RTD Item 11 Options
Code Description Code Description
8 Blank DA 1 Sec. delay on alarm 00 None
Item 2 Sensor Type DT 1 Sec. delay on trip CC Conformal coating
Code Description DB 1 Sec. delay on both alarm
P 100Ω Pt RTD and trip relay **Example:I23 (0-600 PSI)
N 120Ω Ni RTD 00 Standard time delay 4-20 mA=0-600 PSI
C 10Ω Cu RTD (see specifications) 0-100% Readout
3.11
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
Thrust Modules (increasing positive or negative check of the input prevents intermittent
VT-2461-T & VT-2462-TT displacement between the probe and sensor failures from falsely shutting down
(For use with VT-2490 systems) the target) activates the GROUP machinery. The associated Probe OK
ALARM relay. Similarly, a TRIP in either LED flashes and TRIP is inhibited for 10
The single-channel VT-2461-T thrust direction activates the GROUP TRIP seconds following correction of a circuit
module monitors the axial position of a relay. Factory-set relay time delays are fault condition. Proper operation is thus
rotating shaft or thrust bearing. A dual available for the ALARM and TRIP ensured. To maintain protection if AND
channel module (VT-2462-TT) is also circuits on each channel to minimize voting is selected, the VT-2462-TT
available for sophisticated monitoring of false shutdowns. automatically reverts back to OR voting
turbomachinery and for petrochemical given a sensor failure.
and refinery applications involving All relays on the module are field-
API-670 specifications. selectable for normally energized or Field-selectable “Dual Fault Shutdown
de-energized, manual or auto-reset, Protection” is also available to safe-
Common Features and system relay interfacing. Each guard machinery during rapid thrust
Many features are common to both channel can be designated to interface bearing failure. If both channels
thrust modules — for instance, two with the CSM’s GROUP ALARM and experience circuit fault within 10
fully-adjustable ALARM and TRIP set GROUP TRIP relays. For example, any seconds of each other (indicative of a
points, one for normal (active) and channel’s ALARM can also actuate the sudden thrust collar failure), TRIP will
another for counter (inactive) thrust. CSM GROUP ALARM relay if desired. be automatically initiated. No TRIP will
They activate LEDs and sealed relays More critical channels can, therefore, occur if the time interval is greater than
when pre-set limits are exceeded. The be grouped for special annunciation 10 seconds between the two faults. As
set points are arranged for easy and attention. an alternative, the module may be
operator understanding with color- jumpered to inhibit TRIP if both
coded LEDs, ID tag, and push-to-read VT-2462-TT Dual Thrust Module channels experience circuit fault.
push-button. Digital readout of thrust in A dual thrust module (VT-2462-TT)
engineering units (mils or µM) is featuring two proximity probe channels VT-2461-T & VT-2462-TT
for dual thrust monitoring. There are
supplied on demand, via the display on
four set points common to both
Specifications
the system’s common service module For the complete specifications of each
(CSM). A jumper allows field selectable channels — two (GROUP ALARM and
GROUP TRIP) for active axial position model, refer to both “General Specifi-
inversion of the sense of the probe (to cations” and the corresponding section
provide positive readout for either and two for inactive position. Conse-
quently, Channel A’s and Channel B’s of “Individual Module Specifications.”
normal or counter thrust).
ALARM set points for positive displace-
ment (active thrust) are always the Specifications
Each module also includes a module ID Inputs:
tag plus Probe OK status LED to warn same. Channel A’s and B’s TRIP set
points are also shared in this manner. a. Sensitivity: 200 mV/mil (8mV/µM)
of circuit fault. A sensor failure is or 100 mV/mil (4 mV/µM).
indicated by activating the channel’s Two group relays are offered: a
GROUP ALARM relay for an ALARM in b. Impedance: 20K ohm (single-ended,
ALARM relay and LED and the CIR- one side to system common).
CUIT-FAULT relay in the CSM, turning either direction on either Channel A or
off the channel OK LED, and disabling Channel B; and a GROUP TRIP relay
for a TRIP in either direction on Outputs:
the TRIP circuit (to prevent false a. Meter Output to CSM Display:
shutdowns). The operator can interro- Channel A AND/OR Channel B.
The GROUP TRIP relay thus provides (see Ordering section for ranges).
gate the channel through the common b. Calibration Accuracy: ±0.25% FS
service module to determine the nature field-selectable AND/OR voting logic
between the two channels. or 1 digit if greater.
of the fault. A wide selection of per c. Sensor Signal (front panel):
channel outputs are available from the buffered, 2K ohms.
system chassis’ rear terminal, including As an option, the VT-2462-TT can
be used as two single thrust channels d. Relays: gold-plated, environmen-
the “raw” signal and a standard analog tally-sealed (nitrogen-filled); one
signal for data processing or strip chart with the probes installed in two
different thrust bearings. In such cases, DPDT for ALARM and TRIP;
recording. Also an AC output of 240 VAC, 3 A or 300 VA maximum
the “raw” sensor signal is provided by the set points and relays are still shared
as described above. AC rating; 20 VDC at 3 A or 90 W,
a front panel jack with buffered short- or 20-to-220 VDC at 50 W switching
circuit protection. maximum resistive load.
Unique, field-selectable First-Out
annunciation is also available on the e. Relay Response Time: standard 1
VT-2461-T Single Thrust Module second for ALARM and 3 for TRIP.
The single thrust module (VT-2461-T) VT-2462-TT to assist in post-fault
diagnosis. f. Analog Outputs (rear terminal):
features one channel, which accepts voltage or current ranges available
the output signal from one proximity (see Ordering Section); accuracy
probe and driver. It provides four set The relay time delays on the VT-2462-TT
are fully field-selectable. In addition, this ±0.25% of span.
points — two (ALARM and TRIP) for
active axial position and two for inactive module has a unique circuit fault
position. An ALARM in either direction protection. A “delayed return-to-normal”
3.12
General Performance: 2. Module may be jumpered to Item 6 Dual Fault Shutdown
a. Set Points: two for normal and two inhibit TRIP if both channels Code Description
for counter thrust; 0-100% mini- experience circuit fault. X VT-2461-T, not available
mum adjustment; ±0.1% resolution; h. Analog Meter Panel: Either one or I Dual Fault inhibits trip,
±1 digit readout accuracy both channels can be continuously VT 2462-TT
b. Deadband: 0.5% standard displayed on the analog meter panel. P Dual Fault provides trip,
(other values optional). VT-2462-TT
c. Frequency Response: DC to 1 Hz I and P options are field selectable.
d. Channel Separation: 40 dB
minimum crosstalk DC to 1 Hz; Item 7 AND/OR Voting Trip CKT
sensor power supplies are buffered Code Description
and limited to 50 mA VT-2461-T & VT-2462-TT X VT-2461-T, not available
e. Temperature Effect: span, Thrust Modules Ordering A “AND”, VT-2462-TT only
< 0.03% of reading/°C; zero, O “OR”, VT-2462-TT only
< 0.03% of span/°C VT-246 1–2–3–4–5–6–7–8–9–10–11– A and O options are field selectable.
12–13–14
Item 8 CSM Group Relay Service
Individual Module Specifications Must use one option from each group. Code Description
VT-2461-T A All relay outputs interface to
a. Relays: one DPDT for ALARM, Item 1 Module Type CSM relays VT-2461-T
one for TRIP Code Description Y “Yes”, VT-2462-TT alarm to
b. Relay Time Delays: optional 1-T Single Thrust CSM alarm
factory-set, 1-10 seconds for 2-TT Dual Thrust, API-670 N “No”, VT-2462-TT alarm to
ALARM and TRIP Conformance CSM alarm
c. Set Points: four
Item 2 Module Range Item 9 Relay Status
1. Two (ALARM and TRIP) for
active axial thrust
33 15-0-15 mils E Normally energized
2. Two for inactive thrust
34 25-0-25 mils D Normally de-energized
35 30-0-30 mils A Alarm energized/trip
VT-2462-TT
36 40-0-40 micrometers de-energized VT-2462-TT only
a. Relays: one DPDT per channel; a
37 400-0-400 micrometers R Alarm de-energized/trip
GROUP ALARM for an ALARM in
38 600-0-600 micrometers energized VT-2462-TT only
either direction on either Channel A
39 750-0-750 micrometers
or Channel B; and GROUP TRIP for Item 10 Relay Time Delay
40 1000-0-1000 micrometers
a TRIP in either direction on VT-2461 Only
41 Unlisted ranges
Channel A AND/OR Channel B. Code Description
Consult Factory
b. Relay Time Delays: field selectable 01-10 Alarm time delay in seconds
ALARM, 0.5-8.0 seconds in 0.5 Item 3 Analog Output (ex: 01) VT-2461-T (01 sec. std.)
second intervals; field-selectable Code Description 01-10 Trip time delay in seconds
TRIP, 1-16 seconds in 1 second 01 Current analog 0-1 mA (ex: 03) VT-2461-T (03 sec. std.)
intervals. 02 Current analog 0-5 mA Delay is factory set only.
c. Set Points: four common to both 03 Current analog 0-10 mA
channels. 04 Current analog 0-20 mA Item 11 Relay Time Delay
d. First-Out (field-selectable): the LED 05 Current analog 1-5 mA VT-2462 Only
of the first channel to ALARM (or to 06 Current analog 4-20 mA Code Description
TRIP) flashes. 07 Voltage analog 0-5 VDC 0.5-8.0 Alarm in 0.5 second intervals
e. Voting Logic (TRIP circuit): field- 08 Voltage analog 0-10 VDC 01-16 Trip in 1.0 second intervals
selectable AND/OR voting. 09 Voltage analog 1-5 VDC Delay is field alterable for VT-2462-TT.
f. Circuit Fault Protection: a “delayed
return-to-normal” check of the input Item 4 Relay Designation Item 12 Input Sensitivity
prevents intermittent sensor failures Code Description Code Description
from falsely shutting down machin- G Group alarm & group 1 100 mV/mil
ery. trip per module 2 200 mV/mil
g. Dual fault shutdown protection (field Item 5 Relay Sequence Item 13 Probe Drive Voltage
selectable): Code Description Code Description
1. If both channels experience M Latching, manual reset 1 -24 VDC at 40 mA
circuit fault within 10 seconds of A Auto reset when return 2 -18 VDC at 40 mA
each other, TRIP will be auto- to normal
matically initiated. No TRIP will Item 14 Options
occur if time interval is greater Code Description
than 10 seconds. 00 None
CC Conformal coating
3.13
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
Seismic Modules employed with the measured acceleration General Specifications
VT-2463-SS & VT-2464-SS monitored in “g’s” (or M/S2) on one channel Inputs:
(For use with VT-2490 systems) and velocity in “in/sec” (or mm/sec) on the a. Sensitivity: accelerometer (or
other, using integration. charge amplifier): 100 mV/g
Common Features (10mV/M/S2) or 10 mV/g (1 mV/M/S2).
Many features are common to both seismic All relays on both modules are field- Velocity pickup: 100 mV/in/sec
modules. There are two separate monitor- selectable for normally energized or de- (3.94 mV/mm/sec) or 195 mV/in/sec
ing channels, each with two fully-adjustable energized, manual or auto-reset, system (7.68 mV/mm/sec).
set points, ALARM and TRIP, grouped for relay interfacing, and system Start-up b. Impedance: 20 K ohm nominal
easy operator understanding with color- Control interfacing. These last two (single-ended, one side to
coded LEDs, ID tag, and push-to-read features provide special system flexibility. system common).
engineering units (g, M/S2, in/sec, or mm/ Each channel can be designated to
sec) on the digital display of the system interface with the CSM’s GROUP Outputs:
common service module (CSM). ALARM and GROUP TRIP relays. For a. Meter Output to CSM Display:
example, a channel’s ALARM can also (see Ordering section for ranges).
Each module also includes a module ID actuate the GROUP ALARM relay. More b. Calibration Accuracy: ±0.25% FS
tag plus Probe OK status LEDs to critical channels can, therefore, be or 1 digit (if greater).
indicate circuit fault. A sensor failure is grouped for special annunciation and c. Sensor Signal (front panel):
indicated by the OK LED off and the attention. Similarly, each channel’s relays buffered, 2K ohms.
ALARM LED on. The defective channel’s can be linked to the system Start-up d. Relays: gold-plated, environmentally-
TRIP relay (if any) is disarmed to prevent Control (x2, x3, or Inhibit) to ensure sealed (nitrogen filled), 240 VAC,
false shutdowns while the ALARM relay maximum protection during run-ups 3 A or 300 VA maximum AC rating;
and/or CIRCUIT FAULT relay in the without false shutdowns. 30 VDC at 2 A or 90 W or 30 to
common service module activates to 220 VDC at 50 W switching maximum
warn of the fault. The channel can then VT-2463-SS Module resistive load.
be interrogated via the CSM to verify On the VT-2463-SS, one sealed relay is e. Start-up Control: voltage free
sensor failure and assist in troubleshoot- supplied per channel, assignable to operator contact on rear of CSM for
ing. Two front panel jacks with buffered channel ALARM or TRIP or GROUP x2, x3, or Inhibit of ALARM and TRIP
sensor signal outputs are offered for ALARM and GROUP TRIP. Factory-set f. Relay Response Time: 1 second
interfacing with portable analyzers. In relay time delays are available for the for ALARM and 3 for TRIP, standard.
addition, each channel has a wide ALARM and TRIP circuits on each g. Analog Outputs (rear terminal):
selection of voltage and current analog channel to minimize false shutdowns. voltage or current ranges available
outputs available on the rear of the VT-2464-SS Module (see Ordering Section); accuracy
system chassis. The seismic module (VT-2464-SS) ±0.25% of span
features two sealed relays per channel h. Transducers Power Supply:
A number of different transducers can be
(one for ALARM and one for TRIP). +24 VDC compliance at 2 or 4 mA
used with SS modules, including
First-Out annunciation is provided to constant current for 2- or 3-wire
integrated accelerometers (for tempera-
make post-fault diagnosis easier — the input; also +24, -24, and -18 VDC at
tures less than 250°F/120°C), charge
LED of the first channel to go into 50 mA maximum.
accelerometers with charge amplifiers or
line-drivers (for temperatures higher than ALARM (and similarly into TRIP) flashes, Transfer Performance:
250°F/120°C) and any type of velocity while subsequent alarms will have a. Set Points: two per channel,
pickup. Power for each sensor is continuously lit LEDs. 0-100% minimum adjustment;
provided on its one input/output cable. The relay time delays on the per-channel ±0.1% resolution; ±1 digit readout
ALARM and TRIP circuits are fully field- accuracy.
Each channel also offers a choice of
selectable. In addition, VT-2464 modules b. Deadband: 0.5% standard (other
vibration detection and display options:
have a unique form of circuit fault values optional).
for rub and imbalance problems, peak
protection. A “delayed return-to-normal” c. Frequency vs. Amplitude
detection and display of the vibration are
check of the input prevents intermittent Response: ±2% 7.5 Hz to 6 kHz;
standard; for anti-friction bearings and
sensor failures from falsely shutting down sensor power supplies are buffered
where noise or turbulence is present, true
machinery. The associated Probe OK and limited to 50 mA.
RMS detection and display (or average
LED flashes and TRIP is inhibited for 10 e. Parameter Selection: peak, true
detection and peak display) are standard.
seconds following correction of a circuit RMS, or average detection and
Sharp, precision filtering (low, high and
fault condition, which indicates proper display of g, in/sec, M/S2, mm/sec;
bandpass) is available to focus the
operation. peak detection with peak-to-peak
monitoring protection on specific problems
display of mils and µM.
occurring at particular frequencies.
f. Integration: acceleration to velocity,
Both modules are capable of either single or Seismic Module velocity to displacement.
dual-path monitoring. In dual path monitor- Specifications g. Filter: 24 dB/octave roll-off, low,
ing, a single sensor provides inputs to both For the complete specifications of each high and band-pass.
channels with different ranges and/or model, refer to both “General Specifica- h. Temperature Effect: span, <0.03%
parameters. An accelerometer is usually tions” and the corresponding section of of reading/°C; zero, <0.03% of
“Individual Module Specifications.” span/°C.
3.14
Individual Module Specifications 72 0 to 2000 M/S2 Item 11 Integration Channel B
VT-2463-SS 73 0 to 0.3 in/sec Code Description
a. Relays: one DPDT per channel 74 0 to 0.5 in/sec X None
75 0 to 1.0 in/sec V Acceleration to velocity
b. Relay Time Delays: optional 76 0 to 3.0 in/sec D Velocity to displacement
factory-set, 1-10 seconds for 77 0 to 8 mm/sec
ALARM and TRIP. 78 0 to 12.5 mm/sec Item 12 Sensor Sensitivity Channel A
79 0 to 25 mm/sec Code Description
VT-2464-SS 80 0 to 50 mm/sec 1 100 mV/g
a. Relays: one SPDT and one DPDT 81 Unlisted ranges (C/F) 2 50 mV/g
per channel. ALARM is field 3 10 mV/g
*For peak-to-peak displacement, see 4 100 mV/in/sec
selectable to be either the SPDT or Displacement Module PDB, Codes 42-54 5 195 mV/in/sec
the DPDT relay (with TRIP being the 6 Other inputs (consult factory)
other). Other relay voting available. **Available only with 10 mV/g or special sensor.
Please consult the factory. Item 13 Sensor Sensitivity Channel B
Code Description
b. Relay Time Delays: field selectable Item 3 Channel B Range 1 100 mV/g
ALARM, 0.5-8.0 seconds in 0.5 Code Description 2 50 mV/g
second intervals; field selectable 42-80 See listing in Item 2 3 10 mV/g
TRIP, 1-16 seconds in 1 second 81 Unlisted ranges (C/F) 4 100 mV/in/sec
intervals. Item 4 Analog Output 5 195 mV/in/sec
Code Description 6 Other inputs (consult factory)
c. First-Out: the LED of the first D Dual path, one sensor input to both
channel to go into ALARM (and 01 0-1 mA
02 0-5 mA channels A and B
similarly into TRIP) flashes.
03 0-10 mA Item 14 Sensors Power Supply
d. Circuit Fault Protection: a “delayed 04 0-20 mA Code Description
return-to-normal” check. 05 1-5 mA 0 Velocity pick-up
e. Analog Meter Panel: either or both 06 4-20 mA 1 -24 VDC at 40 mA
channels can be continuously 07 0-5 VDC 2 -18 VDC at 40 mA
displayed on the analog meter panel. 08 0-10 VDC 3 4 mA compliance at +18 VDC
09 1-5 VDC 4 Non-Ametek sensors
Item 5 Relay Designation Item 15 Detection/Display Mode
VT-2463 only 1 Peak detection and display
A Alarm relay per channel 2 True RMS detection and display
VT-2463-SS and VT-2464- T Trip relay per channel 3 Average detection and display
G Group Alarm/Trip per module 4 Special
SS Seismic Modules VT-2464 only
Ordering 1 SPDT alarm, DPDT trip per channel Item 16 Filter
(–3dB Frequencies in Hz Listed–consult
VT-246 1–2–3–4–5–6–7–8–9–10–11–12– 2 DPDT alarm, SPDT trip per channel factory for additional frequencies)
13–14–15–16–17–18–19 Low Pass 50, 75, 100, 250, 500, 1000,
Item 6 Relay Sequence 2500, 20,000, x (none)
Must use one option from each group. Code Description High Pass 3, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, 250, 2500,
M Latching, manual reset x (none)
Item 1 Module Type A Auto reset when return to normal Band-Pass (List both above, 1:10
Code Description
Item 7 Relay Time Delay ratio of Low/high recommended)
3 1 relay per channel, factory set
relay time delays VT-2463 Only Item 17 Start Up Control Selection
4 2 relays per channel, API-670 Code Description Code Description
conformance 01-10 Alarm, factory set (01 sec. std.) 1 Inhibit alarm and trip relay
01-10 Trip, factory set (03 sec. std.) 3 x3 increase in set point levels
Item 2 Channel A Range
Item 8 Relay Time Delay 4 None
Code Description
Range* VT-2464 Only Item 18 CSM Group Relay Interface
55 0 to 3g Code Description Code Description
56 0 to 5g 0.5-8.0 Alarm 0.5 second intervals, A All relay drive outputs
57 0 to 10g field alterable interface to CSM relays
58 0 to 15g 01-16 Trip 1.0 second intervals, VT-2463-SS only
59 0 to 20g field alterable Y Alarm to CSM alarm
60** 0 to 30g N No alarm to CSM alarm
61** 0 to 50g Item 9 Relay Status
Code Description Y Trip to CSM trip
62** 0 to 75g N No trip to CSM trip
63** 0 to 250g E Normally energized
64 0 to 30 M/S2 D Normally de-energized Item 19 Options
65 0 to 50 M/S2 A Alarm energized/trip de-energized Code Description
66 0 to 100 M/S2 R Alarm de-energized/trip energized 00 None
67 0 to 150 M/S2 Item 10 Integration Channel A CC Conformal coating
68 0 to 200 M/S2 Code Description
69 0 to 300 M/S2 X None
70 0 to 500 M/S2 V Acceleration to velocity
71 0 to 750 M/S2 D Velocity to displacement
3.15
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
Displacement Modules All relays on Ametek displacement modules Outputs:
VT-2463-XY & VT-2464- are field-selectable for normally energized or a. Meter Output to CSM Display: (see
XY; VT-2463-PP & de-energized, manual or auto-resent, system Ordering section for ranges).
relay interfacing and system start-up control b. Calibration Accuracy: ±0.25% FS
VT-2464-PP interfacing. Each channel can be designated or 1 digit (if greater).
(For use with VT-2490 systems) to interface with the CSM’s GROUP ALARM c. Sensor Signal (front panel): buffered.
Ametek has several different modules and GROUP TRIP relays. For example, any d. Relays: gold-plated, environmen-
that monitor vibration displacement. channel’s ALARM can also actuate the tally-sealed (nitrogen filled), 240 VAC,
The VT-2463 modules are available in GROUP ALARM relay. More critical channels 3 A or 300 VA maximum AC rating;
either XY or PP versions. The XY can, therefore, be grouped for special 30 VDC at 3 A or 90 W or 30-to-220
modules are for X-Y proximity monitor- annunciation and attention. Similarly, each VDC at 50 W switching maximum
ing, using two proximity probes 90° channel’s relays can be linked to the system resistive load.
apart. AND/OR channel voting logic is start-up control (x2, x3, or Inhibit) to ensure e. Start-up Control: voltage free
supplied on the TRIP circuits for maximum protection during run-ups without operator contact on rear of CSM for
minimizing false shutdowns. The PP false shutdowns. x2, x3, or Inhibit of relays.
versions are for two channels of single- f. Relay Time Delays: standard 1
VT-2463-XY and -PP Modules
axis proximity monitoring. They are second for ALARM and 3 for TRIP.
On the VT-2463s, one sealed relay is
identical to the XY modules, except that g. Analog Outputs (rear terminals):
supplied per channel, assignable to
they utilize normal OR voting logic (not voltage or current ranges available
channel ALARM or TRIP or module
AND/OR) on the TRIP circuits. Ametek also (see Ordering Section); accuracy
GROUP ALARM and GROUP TRIP.
offers another module series (VT-2464) in ±0.25% of span.
Relay time delays are available for the
XY and PP versions with two sealed relays ALARM and TRIP circuits on each Transfer Performance:
per unit. channel to minimize false shutdowns. a. Set Points: two per channel,
Common Features The delay time is factory-set. 0-100% minimum adjustment;
There are two separate monitoring ±0.1% resolution; ±1 digit readout
VT-2464-XY and -PP Modules
channels per module and each channel accuracy.
The VT-2464-XY and -PP feature two
can accept one sensor input with b. Deadband: 0.5% standard
sealed relays per channel (one for
power for the sensor supplied from the (other values optional).
ALARM and one for TRIP). First-Out
system chassis. The peak-to-peak c. Frequency vs. Amplitude
annunciation is provided to make post-
vibration level is shown on demand in Response: ±2% 7.5 Hz to 5 kHz;
fault diagnosis easier — the LED of the
easy-to-read engineering units (mils or ±10% 3.5 Hz to 10 kHz; -3 dB 16 kHz.
first channel to go into ALARM (and
µM) on the digital display of the system d. Channel Separation: 40 dB
similarly into TRIP) flashes, while
common service module (CSM). Also minimum crosstalk DC to 20 kHz;
subsequent alarms will have continu-
provided on a per-channel basis are sensor power supplies are buffered
ously lit LEDs.
two fully-adjustable set points, ALARM and limited to 50 mA.
and TRIP, arranged for easy operator The relay time delays on the VT-2464’s e. Temperature Effect: span, <0.03%
understanding with color-coded LEDs, ALARM and TRIP circuits are fully field- of reading/°C; zero, <0.03% of
ID tag, and push-to-read push-button. selectable. In addition, these modules span/°C.
have a unique form of circuit fault
Each module also includes a module ID Individual Module Specifications
protection. A “delayed return-to-
tag plus Probe OK status LEDs to VT-2463-PP
normal” check of the input prevents
indicate circuit fault. A sensor failure is a. Relays: one DPDT per channel
intermittent sensor failures from falsely
indicated by the OK LED going out and b. Relay Time Delays: optional
shutting down machinery. The associ-
the ALARM LED coming on. The factory-set, 1-10 seconds for
ated Probe OK LED flashes and TRIP is
defective channel’s TRIP relay (if any) is ALARM and for TRIP.
inhibited for 10 seconds following
disarmed to prevent false shutdowns correction of a circuit fault condition, VT-2463-XY
while the ALARM relay and/or CIRCUIT which indicates proper operation. a. Relays: one DPDT per channel.
FAULT relay in the common service b. Relay Time Delays: optional
module activates to warn of the fault. factory-set, 1-10 seconds for
The channel can then be interrogated Displacement Modules
ALARM and for TRIP.
via the CSM to verify sensor failure and Specifications c. Voting Logic: TRIP circuits are
assist in troubleshooting. XY versions For the complete specifications of each factory-set to either OR or AND
set for AND voting of the TRIP circuits model, refer to both “General Specifi- voting logic.
automatically revert back to the OR cations” and the corresponding section
mode in the event of a sensor failure. of “Individual Module Specifications.” VT-2464-PP
Two front panel jacks with buffered a. Relays: one SPDT and one DPDT
sensor signal outputs are offered for General Specifications per channel. ALARM is field-
interfacing with portable analyzers. In Inputs: selectable to be either the SPDT or
addition, each channel has a wide a. Sensitivity: 200 mV/mil (8 mV/µM) the DPDT relay (with TRIP being the
selection of current or voltage analog or 100 mV/mil (4 mV/µM). other).
outputs available on the rear of the b. Impedance: 20 K ohm (single- b. Relay Time Delays: field-selectable
system’s chassis. ended, one side to system 0 V). ALARM, 0.5-8.0 seconds in 0.5
3.16
second intervals; field-selectable Item 2 Proximity Monitoring Item 7 Relay Sequence
TRIP, 1-16 seconds in 1 second Code Description Code Description
intervals. XY X-Y proximity modules M Latching, manual reset
c. First-Out: the LED of the first PP 2 channels of single axis A Auto reset when return to normal
channel to go into ALARM (and proximity monitoring
similarly into TRIP) flashes.
Item 3 Module Range Item 8 Relay Status
d. Probe OK: the associated Probe
OK LED flashes and TRIP is inhibited
Range Peak-to-Peak E Normally energized
for 10 seconds following correction
42 0 to 3 mils D Normally de-energized
of a circuit fault condition.
43 0 to 5 mils A Alarm energized/trip
e. Analog Meter Panel: either or both
44 0 to 10 mils de-energized
channels can be continuously
45 0 to 15 mils R Alarm de-energized/trip
displayed on the analog meter panel.
46 0 to 20 mils energized
VT-2464-XY 47 0 to 30 mils
Item 9 Relay Time Delay
a. Relays: one SPDT and one DPDT 48 0 to 80 µM
VT-2463 Only
per channel. ALARM is field- 49 0 to 125 µM
Code Description
selectable to be either the SPDT or 50 0 to 400 µM
01-10 Alarm, factory set in seconds,
the DPDT relay (with TRIP being the 52 0 to 600 µM
VT-2463 only (01sec. std.)
other). 53 0 to 750 µM
01-10 Trip, factory set in seconds,
b. Relay Time Delays: field selectable 54 Special ranges (C/F)
VT-2463 only (03 sec. std.)
ALARM, 0.5-8.0 seconds in 0.5
second intervals; field-selectable Item 4 Analog Output
Item 10 Relay Time Delay
TRIP, 1-16 seconds in 1 second (Rear Terminal)
VT-2464 Only
intervals Code Description
Code Description
c. First-Out: the LED of the first 01 0-1 mA
0.5-8.0 Alarm, field alterable, .5
channel to go into ALARM (and 02 0-5 mA
second interval, VT-2462 only
similarly into TRIP) flashes. 03 0-10 mA
01-16 Trip, field alterable 1 second
d. Probe OK: the associated Probe 04 0-20 mA
interval, VT-2464 only
OK LED flashes and TRIP is inhibited 05 1-5 mA
for 10 seconds following correction 06 4-20 mA Item 11 Input Sensitivity
of a circuit fault condition. 07 0-5 VDC Code Description
e. Analog Meter Panel: either or both 08 0-10 VDC 1 100 mV/mil
channels can be continuously 09 1-5 VDC 2 200 mV/mil
displayed on the analog meter panel. Item 5 Relay Designation Item 12 Probe Driver Voltage
f. Voting Logic: the TRIP circuits have Code Description Code Description
field-selectable AND/OR voting logic. VT-2463 Only 1 -24 VDC at 40 mA
A Alarm relay per channel, 2 -18 VDC at 40 mA
VT-2463-PP only
T Trip relay per channel, Item 13 Start Up Control Selection
VT-2463-PP only Code Description
R Alarms “OR” voting/trips 1 Inhibit alarm and trip relay
“OR” voting 2 x3 increase in set point levels
N Alarms “OR” voting/trips 4 None
“AND” voting Item 14 CSM Group Relay Interface
Displacement Modules VT2464 only Code Description
B Alarm and trip relay per A All relay drive outputs
VT-2463-XY, VT-2464-XY, channel interface to CSM relays,
VT-2463-PP, VT-2464-PP R Alarms “OR” voting/trips VT-2463-SS only
Ordering “OR” voting Y Alarm to CSM alarm,
N Alarms “OR” voting/trips VT-2464 only
VT-246 1–2–3–4–5–6–7–8–9–10–11– “AND” voting N No alarm to CSM alarm,
12–13–14–15 VT-2464 only
Item 6 Relay Selection
Must use option from each group. VT-2464 Only Y Trip to CSM trip, VT-2464
Code Description only
Item 1 Module Type 1 SPDT alarm, DPDT trip N No trip to CSM trip,
Code Description 2 DPDT alarm, SPDT trip VT-2464 only
3 One relay per channel, X Not available for VT-2463
factory set relay time delays Item 15 Options
4 2 relays per channel, 1st out Code Description
indication, field selectable 00 None
delay, API-670 conformance CC Conformal coating
3.17
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
Tachometer Module Outputs: Speed set point must be above the
VT-2466-TK a. Integral Displays minimum pulses per second input
(For use with VT-2490 systems) 1. Displays revolutions per minute. rate (0.2 pps). The Zero-Speed LED
Displays set points when set (yellow) will be ON when the input is
point select button is pushed. below the set point.
2. Red LED digits 0.4" (10 mm) d. Analog Outputs
high. 1. Non-isolated.
3. Fullscale is 19,999 RPM (rev/ 2. Fullscale RPM can be selected at
min.). 1,000, 2,000, 3,000, 4,000,
4. Accuracy is ±0.1% of fullscale 6,000, 10,000, 15,000, 20,000.
±1 digit. Note: Fullscale for 3. Accuracy — ±0.1% of fullscale.
analog outputs and set points is 4. Outputs — 4-20 mA; 1-5 V (500
adjustable, but fullscale of display ohm impedance); etc.
is always 19,999 with a 5% 5. Overrange — analog output can
overrange capability. exceed fullscale value by 5%.
b. Alarm Trip Output Contacts e. Other Outputs
1. Four set points available. 1. A conditioned input signal (12 V
2. Individual settings for abnormal through 1 K ohm) is available on
state to be above or below the front panel jack.
set point. 2. For certain types of inputs, a
VT-2466-TK tachometer modules
3. Two form C contacts per set point. Probe OK signal is generated.
provide continuous monitoring of shaft
4. Output relays can be individually This controls a green front panel
speed (RPM) when used in Ametek
selected to be normally energized LED. When not OK, ALARM #1 is
Series VT-2490 machine monitoring
or normally de-energized. forced to abnormal state and all
systems. Each features its own indepen-
5. An LED per point is provided to other set point outputs are
dent, continuous digital display of shaft
indicate that output is in the inhibited. Probe Not OK can be
speed from 0.1 to 19,999 RPM in large
abnormal state. Two yellow and connected to the Not OK bus.
easy-to-read digits. A Ametek tachom-
two red LEDs are standard. 3. When probe Not OK is detected,
eter module accepts an input from a
6. Each set point can be individually the last reading will be held on
proximity probe, magnetic pick-up or a
selected to drive the Reflash bus display until Probe OK is
fiber optic light source and provides
and the GROUP TRIP or the restored.
power to the sensor as needed.
GROUP ALARM bus.
7. Each set point can be latched in Temperature Range
The VT-2466-TK plugs into any two
the abnormal state, requiring a. Storage:
adjacent VT-2490 chassis spaces. Four
manual reset or it can automati- -20 to +65°C (-4° to 149°F)
independent set points and relays are
cally reset when input returns b. Operating: -20 to +60°C
available for ALARM or TRIP of under
to normal. (-4° to 140°F)
or over speed conditions. A fifth set
8. Set point accuracy is the same c. Accuracy Effects:
point with relay is dedicated to Zero-
as display accuracy. 1. Display: 0.005%/°C
Speed detection.
9. Resolution of set point is 0.5% 2. Analog Output: 0.15%/°C
of fullscale selected for 3. Set Points : -0.01%/°C
Tachometer Module analog output.
Specifications 10. The set point is the input value
where output changes state Pulse Input Range
Inputs:
when input is going from low to a. The selected fullscale, the pulses
a. Rate: pulse rate, 0.2 to 10,000 per
high. When input goes from high per revolution, and the zero speed
second; pulses per revolution, 1 to
to low, output will change state at per point must be selected to be
255.
a point 0.5% below set point. within the 0.2 to 10,000 pulse per
b. Sensitivity: 0.5 V to 24 V; sensitivity
c. Zero-Speed: A fifth set point is second operating range. The
is automatically adjusted as a
provided and is dedicated to the following equations are useful for
function of the amplitude of the input
Zero-Speed function. It has all of the checking these values:
signal.
c. Shape: sine, square, triangle, or features of the other set points
except for the set point range. The max. no. of pulses per rev. =
1% duty cycle pulse. (10 microsec-
Zero-Speed can be set from 0.1 to 600,000 Fullscale RPM min.
onds minimum pulse width.)
25.5 RPM in 0.1 RPM steps. The set RPM = 12 pulses per revolution
d. Offset: from +15 to -24 VDC.
e. Impedance: greater than 10,000 point is the input value at which the
Zero-Speed output changes state b. Display will show actual RPM
ohms.
when the input is going from high to regardless of fullscale setting as
f. Probe drive: +15, -18, -24 V.
low. When going from low to high, long as input rate is within the
the Zero-Speed will change state at 5 allowable range (0.2 to 10,000
times the set point. Note: The Zero- pulses per second) and display
capacity has not been exceeded (1
to 21,000 RPM).
3.18
Optional Sensor Sensitivity VT-2466-TK Tachometer
A differential input preamplifier can be Module Ordering Items 8, 9, 10, 11 (Pick ABCDE for
used when the input signal is expected each setpoint)
to be less than 0.5 V. This amplifier is Set Point Configurations
provided as an independent circuit. The VT-2466-TK —1—2—3—4—5—6— A Set point number
input signal is connected to the rear ØALDN (7)— ABCDE (8)— ABCDE (9)— Code Description
terminal designated as pre-amp inputs. setpoint setpoint (1, 2, 3, 4)
The pre-amp output is brought to the 1 2
rear terminals and can be wired to the B Relay Sequence
conventional input terminals. ABCDE (10) – ABCDE (11) – 12–13–14 Code Description
setpoint setpoint N Latching, manual reset
3 4 A Auto reset when return to
normal
Must use one option from each group.
C Set Point Level Status
Item 1 Pulse Per Revolution Code Description
Code Description H Over speed relay act.
1-255 Pulse Rate L Under speed relay act.
Item 2 Sensor Input D Relay Status

1 -24 VDC proximity probe E Normally energized
2 -18 VDC proximity probe D Normally de-energized
3 Magnetic pickup
4 Fiber optic light source E CSM Relay Designation
5 Special inputs Code Description
A S.P. actuates CSM reflash
Item 3 Sensor Sensitivity group alarm
Code Description R S.P. actuates CSM group trip
1 0.5-24 V peak relay
2 0.05-0.5 V peak N S.P. does not actuate CSM
relay
Item 4 Pulse Trigger Designation
Code Description Item 12 (no choice)
N Negative Code Description
P Positive 1 Probe failure actuates setpoint
1 relay
Item 5 Full Scale Range
(RPM x 1000) Item 13 CSM Probe OK
Code Description Relay Designation
(1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 15, 20) Code Description
(Max. display: 19,999 RPM) A Probe failure actuates CSM
probe OK relay
Item 6 Analog Output Item 14 Options

01 0-1 mA 00 None
02 0-5 mA CC Conformal coating
03 0-10 mA
04 0-20 mA
05 1-5 mA
06 4-20 mA
07 0-5 VDC
08 0-10 VDC
09 1-5 VDC
Item 7 Zero Speed (no choice)

Zero speed Set Point is
factory set + ØALDN
3.19
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
VT-2479 Dual VT-2469 Dual VT-2479 & VT-2469
2-Wire Transmitter 2-Wire Transmitter Specifications
Detector Modules Detector Modules Number of Channels: Two
(For use with VT-2490 systems) (For use with VT-2490 systems) Supply to 2-Wire Transmitter
+25 VDC ±1 V Current limited at 40 mA
Module VT-2479 Module VT-2469 ±4 mA Ripple and noise 50 mV PK to PK
VT-2479 is a general purpose 2-wire VT-2469 is a variant of the VT-2479
transmitter dual channel detector specially intended for use with the Inputs from 2-Wire Transmitter
module. It provides stabilized, current- Ametek VT-3360 Vibration Transmitter. VT-2479: 4-20 mA DC terminated into
limited 24 volt DC supplies suitable for In addition to the features of the VT- 100 ohm input monitoring resistor with
powering 4-20 mA electrical loops. 2479, the VT-2469 separates the AC scaled readout in engineering units
current analog of the vibration (if on CSM.
Each channel has adjustable ALARM selected on the VT-3360), conditions
and TRIP set points, which activate and amplifies it to a standardized VT-2469: 4-20 mA DC terminated into
LED indicators and relays when the sensitivity of 1 V/inch per second (80 100 ohm input monitoring resistor.
pre-set limits are exceeded. Built-in mV/mm per second) and presents it as (Optional — 0-800 µA AC vibration
loop failure detection inhibits trip action a buffered output to the miniature BNC analog signal (if selected from VT-3360))
if the loop current falls below 1.4 mA. jacks on the front panel, for signal
(Loop failure is indicated by operation analysis purposes. Corresponding to range: 0.5, 0-1.0, or
of the alarm indicator and relay.) All 2.0 in/sec (0-12, 0-25 or 0-50 mm(sec))
relays are field selectable for normally Individual green “OK” LEDs are used to
energized or de-energized, manual or indicate a healthy loop circuit and these Output sensitivity: 1.0V = 1.0 in/sec =
auto-reset and system relay interfacing. are extinguished if a fault is detected. In 25 mm/sec
The latter feature enables individual this case the TRIP relay is inhibited,
channels to be designated to be while the group “OK” relay in the CSM Outputs
interfaced with the CSM’s GROUP is activated. This sequence of opera- a. Meter Output to CSM Display:
ALARM and GROUP TRIP relays, thus tion is designed to conform with that of (calibration accuracy 0.25% FS or
allowing critical channels to be grouped other Ametek vibration detector ±1 digit)
for special annunciation and action. modules which might be installed in the b. ALARM (SPDT) and TRIP (DPDT)
system. Relays: optional DPDT contact
• Inputs from standard 2-wire for ALARM if remote select feature
transmitters • All VT-2479 features, plus not used.
• 24V loop supply and self-check inputs from VT-3360 2-wire c. Relay Contact Rating: gold plated
• Two set points LEDs and relays vibration transmitter environmentally sealed (nitrogen filled)
(ALARM and TRIP) per channel • “OK” LED (loop healthy) 240 VAC 3A or 300 VA max AC
• Choice of analog outputs • Readout in velocity units rating: 30 VDC 3A or 90W or 30 to
• System readout in engineering (in/s or mm/s) 220 VDC 50W switching max DC
units • Buffered normalized vibration rating (resistive load) contact
signal on front panel configuration.
• Choice of analog outputs d. Relay Response Time: 100 mS for
ALARM 250 mS for trip (for other
delays contact factory)
e. Sensor Signal (VT-2469): buffered
1 V/inch per sec (80 mV/mm
per second)
f. Analog Outputs: rear terminals (see
OUTPUT TABLE) accuracy ± 0.25%
of span.
General Performance
a. Set Points: two per channel 0-100%
minimum adjustment, ±0.1%
resolution, ±1 digit readout accuracy.
b. Deadband: 0.5% standard (others
optional)
c. Frequency response: (VT-2469)
3 Hz to 20 kHz
d. Temperature effect: span 0.01%
reading/°C, zero 0.01% of span/°C
3.20
VT-2479 & VT-2469 Item 10 Item 3 Relay Time Delay (seconds)
Ordering Code Description Code Description
Y/N Alarm CSM alarm relay 00 Standard
DA 1 Sec Alarm
VT-2479 Ordering Item 11 Output Range DT 1 Sec Trip
See DB 1 Sec Alarm & Trip
VT-2479 I — 1— 2— 3 — 4 —5— 6 Table Insert range code 01 to 09
— 7 —8—9— 10— 11—12— 13 Item 4 Relay Designation
Item 12 Code Description
Code Description R Alarm and trip relay per point
Item 1 Input Range (4-20mA) CC Conformal Coating
Code Description Item 5 Relay Status
23 Insert range Item 13 Engineering Unit Code Description
Readout Range E Energized for normal
Item 2 Alarm Sequence (max. full scale ± 1999.) D De-energized for normal
Code Description Note: For engineering unit readout, A Alarm energized/trip de-
M Latching, manual reset state overall range and units of energized
A Auto reset when return to measure (i.e. 0-2000 PSIG, 0-200 R Alarm de-energized/trip
normal GPM etc.) energized
Item 3 Alarm Level Status Item 6
Code Description VT-2469 Ordering Code Description
H High for alarm Y/N Trip to CSM trip relay
L Low for alarm
VT-2469 TW–VT-2479—I—1—2—3—
Item 7
Item 4 Trip Sequence 4—5—6—7—8—9
Code Description
Code Description Y/N Alarm to CSM alarm relay
M Latching, manual reset
A Auto reset when return to Item 1 Input Range
Item 8 Output Range
normal Code Description
Code Description
74 0-0.5 in/sec
See
Item 5 Trip Level Status 75 0-1. in/sec
Table Insert range code 01 to 09
Code Description 76 2.0 in/sec
H High for trip 78 0-12.5 mm/sec
Item 9
L Low for trip 79 0-25.0 mm/sec
Code Description
80 0-50.0 mm/sec
CC Conformal coating
Item 6 Relay Time Delay (seconds)
Code Description Item 2 Relay Sequence
00 Standard (see specifications) Code Description
DA 1 Sec Alarm M Latching, manual reset
DT 1 Sec Trip A Auto reset when return
DB 1 Sec Alarm & Trip to normal
Item 7 Relay Designation

Code Description
R Alarm and trip relay per point
Item 8 Relay Status

Code Description Output Table
E Energized for normal
D De-energized for normal Code Analog Outputs Range Output Load (Ω)
A Alarm energized/trip de-
energized 01 0 to 1 mA 12 K max
R Alarm de-energized/trip 02 0 to 5 mA 2.4 K max
energized 03 0 to 10 mA 1.2 K max
04 0 to 20 mA 600 max
Item 9 05 1 to 5 mA 2.4 K max
Code Description 06 4 to 20 mA 600 Ω max
Y/N Trip to CSM trip relay 07 0 to 5 VDC 25 K min
08 0 to 10 VDC 25 K min
09 1 to 5 VDC 25 K min
3.21
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
VT-2467-EC Circuit Fault/Probe OK Item 5 Relay Status
Eccentricity Module a. Probe OK LED (Green) will go off Code Description
(For use with VT-2490 systems) upon detection of input circuit fault. E Normally energized
The Single Channel Module provides Associated OK relay will actuate in D Normally de-energized
true peak-to-peak eccentricity monitor- the CSM. Probe OK relay in CSM A Alarm energized/trip ener-
ing of rotor/shaft bow at slow roll can be disabled for this module by gized
conditions. It measures bent or bowed removal of jumper. R Alarm re-energized/trip
shafts rotating at speeds as low as 1/2 energized
Optional Analog Meter Panel
RPM. It is designed so that only one The output of the module can be Item 6 Relay Time Delay
proximity probe is required for its use. displayed on a continuous analog (Factory set in seconds)
meter (optional) Code Description
01 - 03 (std. 01) Alarm
VT-2467-EC Probe Driver Power Supply: -24 VDC 01 - 03 (std. 03) Trip
Specifications or -18 VDC source, current limited
Item 7 Input Sensitivity
Inputs: one per module. Start-Up Control Code Description
a. Sensitivity: 200 mV/mil (8 mV/µM) No alarm action until 1.5 revolutions have 1 100 mV/mil
or 100 mV/mil (4 mV/µM) been completed. Group inhibit may be 2 200 mV/mil
b. Impedance: 100K ohm bypassed by jumper.
(single-ended, one-side to 0V) Item 8 Probe Driver Voltage
c. Time Constant Input Filter: Time out clear: 2.25 minutes. Code Description
2.5 seconds 1 -24VDC @ 40 mAC
2 -18 VDC @ 40 mA
Outputs:
a. Meter Output to CSM Display:
VT-2467 Eccentricity Item 9 L. P. Filter
(calibration accuracy 0.25% fullscale Module Ordering Code Description
or ±1 digit). 1 600 rpm cutoff
b. Sensor Signal: (front panel/rear VT-2467—1—2—3,4,5—6—7—8— 2 5000 rpm cutoff
terminals), buffered, 2K ohms
9—10—11—12—13—14—15 Item 10 Start-up Inhibit
c. Relays: one DPDT for ALARM,
one DPDT for TRIP Code Description
Item 1 Module Range Peak to Peak Y Yes
d. Relay Time Delay: Factory set, 1
Code Description N No
second ALARM 3 seconds TRIP
43 0 - 5 mils
e. Analog Outputs (rear terminals): Item 11 Group Trip to CSM
44 0 - 10 mils
Voltage or current ranges (see Code Description
45 0 - 25 mils
Ordering section)—accuracy Y Yes
± 0.25% of span Item 2 Analog Output N No
(rear terminals)
Set Points: Item 12 Group Alarm to CSM
Code Description
a. Two: Alert (Yellow LED) Code Description
01 0 - 1 mA 12 K max.
Danger (Red LED) Y Yes
02 0 - 5 mA 2.4K max.
b. Adjustment: 0-100% of span 20-turn N No
03 0 - 10 mA 1.2 K max.
front accessible potentiometer
04 0 - 20 mA 600 max.
c. Resolution: ±0.1%, ±1 digit Item 13 Reflash to CSM
05 1 - 5 mA 2.4K max.
readout accuracy Code Description
06 4 - 20 mA 600 max.
07 0 - 5 VDC 25 K min. Y Yes
Transfer Performance N No
a. Frequency Response: 45 - 4500 08 0 - 10 VDC 25 K min.
RPM, ±0.2% 0.5 - 450 RPM, ±0.5% 09 1 - 5 VDC 25 K min.
Item 14 Probe OK
b. Deadband: 0.5% standard Code Description
Item 3 Relay Designation
(other values optional) Y Active
Code Description
c. Isolation/Channel Specification: N Disabled
R Alarm and Trip per point
40 dB minimum Crosstalk,
0.5 – 4500RPM; sensor power Item 15 Conformal Coating
Item 4 Relay Sequence
supplies are buffered and limited Code Description
Code Description
to 50 mA CC Required
M Latching manual reset
d. Response Time: 2 cycle update 00 Not Required
A Auto reset on normal
e. Temperature Effect: Span, 0.03% of
reading/°C Zero, 0.03% of span/°C
f. Low Pass Filter: 4-Pole, choice of
600 or 500 RPM cutoff
3.22
SENSORS FOR ALL Proximity (Eddy Current) Mechanical:
CRITICAL VIBRATION Probes a. Input Connection: SMA Coaxial
socket, stainless steel (1/4-36)
PARAMETERS Ametek proximity probes are non-
b. Output and Supply Connections:
contacting displacement transducers
powered by a matching driver (Model 6-32 screw terminal barrier
• Proximity Probes c. Construction: Potted in heavy
1148) and interconnect cable of
specific length. They measure the aluminum base
• Velocity Pickups d. Weight: 230 grams/8.11 ounces
distance between the probe tip and the
machine part being monitored, usually e. Operating Temperature Range:
• Accelerometers -20°C to +70°C.
the shaft. The unique epoxy tip design
of the Ametek probe minimizes the f. Calibration for Cable Length: The
• Complete with Hardware, probe driver is ranged and calibrated
Cabling & Signal Conditioners possibility of probe damage, as well as
protection against corrosive liquids. for total electrical cable length, i.e.:
Total Electrical Cable Length =
Extension cables (for the distance from
Electrical Length of Proximity Probe Cable
the probe driver to the probe) are + Electrical Length of Extension cable
available to 20 feet (or more) with
optional armor shielding. The measur- For the 1113/1114/1115 proximity
able frequency range is from DC to probe “pigtail” cable and the extension
over 600,000 cpm. cable, the electrical and physical cable
lengths are equal.
Probe Model 1113/1114/
1115 Specifications
Input:
a. Probe type: Inductive proximity
1113/1114/1115 Standard Probe Bodies
b. Probe Tip Dia.: 0.25 in /6.35mm
Length Part
c. Supply Voltage: -24VDC nominal
d. Supply Current: 10mA maximum (in inches) Number
at -24VDC 1 1040-134
1.5 1040-135
Output: 2 1040-136
a. Scale Factor: 200mV/mil (DA) 2.5 1040-137
Standard (1 mil=0.001 in/25.4µm) 3 1040-138
b. Impedance: 50 ohms 4 1040-139
6 1040-140
Performance: 8 1040-141
(Figures in brackets for I.S. application 10 1040-142
with zener safety barrier)
a. Gap Range: 3 to 100 mils
(3 to 90 mils).
b. Linear Range: 5 to 95 mils
(5 to 90 mils).
c. Linerarity: ±1 mil from best straight
line from 5 to 100 mils (5 to 90 mils).
e. Static Accuracy: ± 1 mil
f. Dynamic Accuracy: ±5% of
200 mV/mil
g. Frequency Range: DC to 10 kHz
h. Probe Cable Electrical Length:
10 meters maximum.
i. Sensitivity to Interchangeability:
±2 mils static or ± of 200 mV/mil
dynamic
j. Calibration: Slope, offset and bias
field adjustable
k. Calibration Target:
4140 Steel-Standard material
3.23
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
Proximity Probe Driver

Model 1148 Probe Driver Order/Identification
Code: Example: 1148 – 5 – 250 – 200
Specifications 1148 = Model
5 = Total Electrical Cable Length (meters)
Electrical: 250 = 0.25 inch Diameter Probe Tip
a. Input: 200 = 200mV/mil Output Scaling Factor
1. Probe type: inductive proximity
1113/1114/1115.
2. Probe tip diameter: 0.25 in. / 6.35
mm. Proximity Probes Dimensions
3. Supply Voltage: -24V DC Nominal
4. Supply Current: 10mA Maximum at
JAM NUT
-24V DC. Proximity Model 1113 SUPPLIED WITH
PROBE SMA CONNECTOR
b. Output: Full Thread TIP .312" (7.92) WRENCH FLATS
STAINLESS
STEEL
1. Scale factor: 200 mV/mil (DA) 3 -24 UNC -2A

8
HI-TEMPERATURE COMPLETE
Standard (1 mil = 0.001 in/25,4µm). .250"
TEFLON COAX
CABLE
MODEL
NUMBER
(6.35mm) TAG
2. Impedance: 50 ohms
c. Performance:
1. Gap Range: 3 to 100 mils .215"
(5.46mm)
2" CLEAR
UNSHRUNK
2. Linear Range: 5 to 95 mils FIRST DASH # TUBING .312" (7.92) HEX
3. Linearity: ±1 mil from best straight SECOND DASH #
line from 5 to 100 mils.

4. Static Accuracy: ± 1 mil. Proximity Model 1114
5. Dynamic Accuracy ± 5% of With Relief SMA CONNECTOR
200m V/mil. JAM NUT .312" (7.92) WRENCH FLATS
STAINLESS
STEEL
SUPPLIED WITH
6. Frequency Range: DC to 10 kHz PROBE
TIP 3 -24 UNC -2A
8
7. Probe Cable Electrical Length: .250"
TEFLON COAX
CABLE
MODEL
NUMBER
10 meters maximum. (6.35mm) TAG
8. Sensitivity to Interchangeability: ± 2
mils Static or ± 2% of 200mV/mil .215"
(5.46mm)
SECOND DASH #
2" CLEAR
UNSHRUNK
Dynamic. FIRST DASH # TUBING .312" (7.92) HEX
9. Calibration: Slope and offset and THIRD DASH #
bias field adjustable

10. Calibration Target: 4140 steel –
standard material. Proximity Model 1115 .94" (23.9mm) WIDE THD RELIEF
#60 Ø FOR LOCKING WIRES
Reverse Mount .43" (10.9mm) SMA CONNECTOR
(FOR "A" = .215: STAINLESS STEEL
Mechanical: .31 (7.92mm)
a. Outline dimensions and mounting: 3 -24 UNF-2A

8
as shown .250" .312"
TEFLON COAX
CABLE
MODEL
NUMBER
(7.92mm)
b. Input Connections: SMA coaxial (6.35mm) TAG
socket, stainless steel (1/4 - 36).

c. Output and Supply Connections: "O" RING 2" CLEAR
.215" UNSHRUNK
6 – 32 screw terminal barrier. (5.46mm) TUBING .312" (7.92) HEX
"A" "B"
d. Construction: Potted in heavy .40"
(10.2mm)
aluminum base. "C"

d. Weight: 230 grams/8.11 ounces.
Environmental:
a. Operating Temperature Range: Probe Driver
-20°C to +70°C Model 1148
Calibration For Cable Lengths: The
probe driver is ranged and calibrated for
total electrical cable length, i.e.: –
Total Electrical Cable Length
= Electricial Length of Proximity Probe
Cable + Electrical Length of Extention
Cable.
(For the 1113/1114/1115 Proximity
Probe “Pigtail” Cable and the Extension
Cable, the Electrical and Physical Cable
Lengths are equal).
3.24
Proximity Probe Model Notes: Extension Cable Model
1113/1114/1115 1. Body lengths other than shown can
1331 Ordering
Ordering be supplied (consult factory).
2. Overall lengths other than shown are
available (consult factory). Model 1331 —1—2
Proximity Probe Model 1113 Ordering 3. Cable length is adjusted for electrical
characteristics.
Model 1113 —1—2—3—4 4. Proximity probes use stainless steel Description: SMA-SMA (M-F) for
SMA connectors to conform to proximity probes
API-670.
Item 1 5. Shrink tubing available-polyolefin or Item 1
Probe Length (in inches) teflon — (consult factory) Cable Length (meters)
Standard: 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 4.0, 4.5, 8.0, 8.5 (specify one)
Proximity Probe Model 1115
Item 2 Item 2
Overall Length (in meters) Model 1115 —1—2—3—4—5 Cable: C=Cable
Standard: 0.5, 1.0 A=Armor over cable
Item 1 “A” (in inches) (Specify one)
Item 3 Standard = 0.215, 0.5, 1.125, 1.625, 2.0
Cable Type Note:
L=95 ohms 0.15 (3.8) Dia. Item 2 “B” (in inches) 1. Cable length adjusted for electrical
Standard = 1.0 characteristics.
Item 4
Cable Item 3 “C” (in meters) Example : 1331-4.5-C
C=Cable Standard = 0.5,1.0
A=Armor over cable
AT=Teflon shrink tubing over armor Item 4 Cable Type
(consult factory) L = 95 ohms 0.15 (3.8) dia.
AP=Polyolefin shrink tubing over armor
(consult factory) Item 5 Cable
C=Cable
Notes: A=Armor over cable
1. Body Lengths other than shown can AT=Teflon shrink tubing over armor
be supplied (consult factory). (consult factory)
2. Overall lengths other than shown are AP=Polyolefin shrink tubing over armor
available (consult factory). (consult factory)
3. Cable length is adjusted for electrical
characteristics. Note:
1. SMA connector shipped loose for
Proximity Probe Model 1114 Ordering installation purposes.
2. Body lengths other than shown can
Model 1114 —1—2—3—4—5 be supplied (consult factory).
3. Overall lengths other than shown are
Item 1 Probe Length (in inches) available (consult factory).
Standard: 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 4. Cable length is adjusted for electrical
characteristics.
Item 2 Threaded Length (in inches)
Standard: 1.0–8.5 in 0.5 increments
Item 3 Overall Length (in meters)

Standard: 0.5, 1.0
Item 4 Cable Type

L=95 ohms 0.15 (3.8) dia.
Item 5 Cable
C=Cable
A=Armor over cable
AT=Teflon shrink tubing over armor
(consult factory)
AP=Polyolefin shrink tubing over armor
(consult factory)
3.25
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
Velocity Pickups Velocity Pickups Dimensions
Ametek velocity pickups are self-
generating devices that measure
“seismic” motion, usually at the bearing B
housing. They are rugged units with Velocity Pickup Model 1716 A
high noise immunity and long signal C
transmission capability. Their low

impedance AC output signal is
proportional to vibration velocity, CONNECTOR MS3102A-10SL-3P
PIN: A–COIL + 1/4–28 UNF x .31
VERTICAL
making them ideal for many applica- B–CASE (SHIELD)
C–COIL –
tions. Both low and high temperature, 0°
as well as low frequency axis sensitive

90° 90° HORIZONTAL
models are available.
180°
3.50" 1.50"
Velocity Pickups ORIENTATION (88.9mm) (38.1mm)
Specifications 4.15"
(105.4mm)
1.62"
(41.1mm)
Velocity Pickup Model 1716/1718 6.25"

(159.0mm)
MINIMUM 90° BEND LENGTH
WITH 1338 CABLE
Frequency: 900 to 60000 RPM (-3db)
Output:
7.7mV/mm/sec±5% at 6000 RPM
195mV/in/sec±5% at 6000 RPM
Impedance: 88Ω Velocity Pickup Model 1718 CLEAR

SHIELD
BLACK
Displacement: ≥2.5 mm/0.1 in. INTEGRAL CABLE

2-CONDUCTOR, SHIELDED
#20AWG
2" CLEAR UNSHRUNK
Weight: 397 gms/ 140 oz. VERTICAL TUBING
CLEAR - COIL +
BLK - COIL –
SHLD - N/C
1/4–28 UNF x .31
COMPLETE MODEL
0° NUMBER TAG
Temperature: 130°C/266°F (1716) 90° 90° HORIZONTAL

BLK
204°C/400°F (1716T) SHLD
180°
Orientation: All Axis ORIENTATION .90" .60"

1.50"
(38.1mm)
(22.9mm) (15.2mm)
x 3.50" 1.62"
(88.9mm) (41.1mm)
Material: Aluminum
4.75"
(120.0mm)
Velocity Pickup Model 1719H/1720/ MINIMUM 90° BEND LENGTH
1721H/1722V
Frequency: 270 to 60000 RPM (-3db)
Output: B
7.7mV/mm/sec±5% at 6000 RPM Velocity Pickup Model 1719H A
C
195mV/in/sec±5% at 6000 RPM
Impedance: 88Ω
CONNECTOR MS3102A-10SL-3P
Displacement: ≥2.5mm/.1 in. VERTICAL PIN: A–COIL +
B–CASE (SHIELD)
1/4–28 UNF x .31
C–COIL –
Weight: 397 gms/14 oz. 0°
Temperature: 130°C/266°F 90° 90° HORIZONTAL
Orientation: All axis 180°
Material: Aluminum ORIENTATION

3.50"
(88.9mm)
1.50"
(38.1mm)
4.15" 1.62"
(105.4mm) (41.1mm)
6.25"
(159.0mm)
WITH 1338 CABLE
3.26
Velocity Pickups
Velocity Pickup Model 1720V
B
A
Ordering
C Velocity Pickup Model 1716
Model 1716 – (T)
Temperature Range
CONNECTOR MS3102A-10SL-3P
PIN: A–COIL + 1/4–28 UNF x .31
VERTICAL
B–CASE (SHIELD)
C–COIL –
Velocity Pickup Model 1718
0°
Model 1718 —1—2

180°
Item 1 Cable Length
ORIENTATION
3.50"
(88.9mm)
1.50"
(38.1mm)
3M=3 meters
4.15" 1.62"
10F=10 feet
(105.4mm) (41.1mm)
Other Lengths optional
6.25"
(159.0mm)
WITH 1338 CABLE
Item 2 Cable
C=Cable
A=Armor cable
(limit 25 ft./7.5 meters)
Velocity Pickup Model 1719H

Model 1719H
Velocity Pickup Model 1721H
SHIELD
CLEAR Velocity Pickup Model 1720V
BLACK
Model 1720V
INTEGRAL CABLE
Note: 1. Mates with 1388 cable.
#20AWG
2" CLEAR UNSHRUNK CLEAR - COIL + 1/4–28 UNF x .31
VERTICAL TUBING BLK - COIL –
SHLD - N/C Unit Axis Description
COMPLETE MODEL
0° NUMBER TAG 1716 Horz/Vert Top Connector,
BLK
195 mV/in/sec,
SHLD
15-1000 Hz, 260°F
180°
(130°C) limit
ORIENTATION .90" .60"
(22.9mm) (15.2mm)
1.50"
(38.1mm) 1718 Horz/Vert Same as 1716
x 3.50"
(88.9mm)
1.62"
(41.1mm)
except with
4.75"
integral cable,
(120.0mm)

no connector
1719H Horz Top Connector,
195 mV/in/sec,
5-1000 Hz, 260°F
(130°C) limit
1720V Vert Top Connector,
195mV/in/sec,
Velocity Pickup Model 1722V 5-1000 Hz, 260°F
CLEAR
SHIELD (130°C) limit
BLACK 1721H Horz Same as 1719H
except with
INTEGRAL CABLE
#20AWG
integral cable,
VERTICAL
2" CLEAR UNSHRUNK
TUBING
CLEAR - COIL +
BLK - COIL –
1/4–28 UNF x .31 no connector
SHLD - N/C
0°
COMPLETE MODEL
NUMBER TAG
1722V Vert Same as 1720V
BLK
except with
SHLD integral cable,
180° no connector
1.50"
ORIENTATION .90" .60"
x
(22.9mm) (15.2mm)
3.50"
(38.1mm)
1.62"
Velocity Pickup
(88.9mm) (41.1mm)
4.75"
Cables Ordering
(120.0mm)

Unit Description
1338 Use with 1716, 1719H, 1720V
Specify length in feet.
Example: 1338-50F
3.27
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
Accelerometers Accelerometer Model 2076 Accelerometer Model 2079
Accelerometers are seismic motion Electrical: Electrical:
sensors with an output proportional to a. Sensitivity: 100 mv/g ±5% a. Charge Sens: 25pc/g
acceleration. Ametek offers low, b. Frequency Response: b. Frequency Response: 5Hz-
medium, and high frequency models to 5 Hz to 10 kHz ±5% 5kHz±5%
meet most industry requirements and c. Equivalent Noise: 001g c. Temperature: -50°C to 260°C
standards. All are rugged and transmit d. Power: Constant current 4mA -58°F to 436°F
a high output, noise-free signal over Compliance voltage 24V d. Transverse Sens: <5%
long distances. e. Output: Impedance <100 Ω e. Case: Isolated
Two types of accelerometers exist: f. Transverse Sens: <5% Mechanical:
“charge” units for operation above g. Temperature: -40°C to 121°C a. Mounting Stud: 1/4-28 UNF
250˚F, using a charge amplifier or -40°F to 250°F b. Weight: 85gms/3 oz.
impedance cable; “low impedance” h. Case: Isolated c. Material: Stainless Steel Type 304
units with integrated electronics for Mechanical: d. Case: Hermetically Sealed
operation below 250˚F, free from any a. Mounting Stud: 1/4-28 UNF-2A
cable length considerations. b. Weight: 85 gms/3.0 oz. Velocity Sensor Model 2083
c. Material: Stainless Steel Type 304 Electrical:
d. Case: Hermetically Sealed a. Sensitivity: 100mV/in/sec±5%
Accelerometer Max Velocity: 50 in/sec
Specifications Accelerometer Model 2077 b. Frequency Response:
Accelerometer Model 2073 Electrical: 4.0 Hz to 2.0 kHz±5%
Electrical: a. Sensitivity: 100mV/g ±5% at 100 Hz c. Equivalent Noise: 0.005 in/sec
a. Sensitivity: 100mV/g ±5% b. Frequency Response: 5 Hz to d. Power: Constant Current 4mA
b. Frequency Response: 1000 Hz ±5% Compliance Voltage 24V
3 Hz to 10 kHz±5% c. Equivalent Noise: 0.001g e. Output Impedance: < 100 Ω
c. Equivalent Noise: 0.0005g d. Power: Constant Current 4mA f. Transverse Sen: < 5%
d. Power: Constant current - 4mA (Bias 11 +4/-6VDC) g. Temperature: -50°C to 121°C
Compliance voltage - 24V Compliance Voltage 24V -58°F to 250°F
e. Output Impedance: <100 Ω e. Output Impedance: <100 Ω h. Sens Change: -10% to +10%
f. Transverse Sensitivity: <5% f. Transverse Sens: <7% i. Case: Isolated
g. Temperature: -40°C to 121°C g. Temperature: -58°C to 121°C Mechanical:
-40°F to 250°F -50°F to 250°F a. Mounting Stud: 1/4-28 UNF-2A
h. Case: Signal isolated h. Case: Signal Isolated b. Weight: 133 gms/4.7 oz.
Mechanical: Mechanical:
a. Mounting Stud: 1/4-28 UNF-2A a. Mounting Stud: 1/2 NPT Velocity Sensor Model 2085
b. Weight: 80 gms/2.8 oz. b. Weight: 420 gms/15 oz. Electrical:
c. Material: Stainless Steel Type 303 c. Material: Stainless Steel Type 303 a. Sensitivity: 100mv/in./sec±5%
d. Case: Hermetically sealed d. Case: Hermetically sealed Max velocity 50 in./SEC
e. Terminals: Epoxy Sealed b. Frequency Response:
Accelerometer Model 2075 f. Type: Compression 4.0 Hz to 2.0 KHz ± 5%
Electrical: g. Max Wire: 14 AWG. c. Equivalent Noise: 0.0005 in./SEC
a. Sensitivity: 100 mV/g ±5% d. Power: Constant Current 4mA
b. Frequency Response: 3 Hz to (Bias12±2VDC) Compliance
10 kHz±5% Voltage 24V
c. Equivalent Noise: 0.0005g e. Output Impedance: <100 Ω
d. Power: Constant Current f. Transverse Sens: <5%
4mA (Bias12±2VDC), Compliance g. Temperature: -50°C to 121°C
Voltage 24V -58°F to 250°F
e. Output Impedance: <100 Ω h. Sens Change: -10% to ±10%
f. Transverse Sensitivity: <5% i. Case Signal: Isolated
g. Temperature: -40°C to 121°C Mechanical:
-40°F to 250°F a. Mounting Stud: 1/4-28 UNF-2A
h. Case: Signal isolated b. Weight: 133gms/4.7 oz without
Mechanical: cable
a. Mounting Stud: 1/4-28 UNF-2A c. Material: Stainless Steel 303
b. Weight: 80gms/2.8 oz. (consult factory-316 stainless steel)
(without cable) d. Cable: Type Belden 8402. Environ-
c. Material: Stainless Steel Type 303 mentally sealed for splash resis-
d. Cable: Type Belden 8402. Environ- tance. Length (7.6 meters) 25 feet,
mentally-sealed for splash resis- Conductors 20AWG.
tance. Length (7.6 meters) 25 feet
Conductors 20 AWG.
3.28
Charge Amplifier Accelerometers Dimensions
Model 2144
Specifications Accelerometer Model 2073
Electrical:
a. Input: Signal source accelerometer 4.50" MIN.
(114mm) N/C A CASE (NOTE 1)
piezoelectric CABLE BEND CLEARANCE
.175"
(4.44mm)
.875"
(22.2mm)
C (+)SIGNAL
B (–)COMMON
b. Charge Sensitivity: 25pc/g standard
16 to 1600 pc/g available
c. Supply Voltage: up to -32 Volts DC C A
.875"
(22.2mm)
d. Supply Current: 15 mA (typical) B 1/4–28 UNF-2B x .18 DP
at -24VDC (REMOVABLE SET SCREW)
.25"
(6.4mm)
Output: 2.12"
(53.8mm)
a. Scale Factor: 100 mv/g (50,10 mV/g
available)
b. Impedance: 50 ohms
c. Voltage Swing: Maximum peak-to- Accelerometer Model 2075
peak range in 2 Volts less than
supply voltage
d. Bias: -12V±VDC 2.75" MIN.
SHIELD
(69.85mm)
CABLE BEND CLEARANCE WHITE (+)SIGNAL
.175" .875"
Performance: (4.44mm) (22.2mm)
BLACK
(–)COMMON
a. Frequency Response: 2% Down
at 6Hz, upper frequency set .875"
by accelerometer (22.2mm)
b. Noise: 25 UV RMS RT1 (Typical) .263" OD

(6.68mm)
1/4–28 UNF-2B x .18 DP
(REMOVABLE SET SCREW)
c. Calibration: Field adjustable .25"
(6.4mm)
2.12"
Mechanical: (53.8mm)
a. Input Connection: coaxial 1/4-36,

stainless steel
b. Output and Supply Connections:
Barrier, 3 screw terminals 6-32 Accelerometer Model 2076
c. Construction: Potted in heavy
aluminum case, stainless steel
4.75" MIN.
case available (120mm) C OPEN
CABLE BEND CLEARANCE
d. Environmental Operation Tempera- .25"
(6.35mm)
.875"
(22.2mm)
A (+)SIGNAL
B (–)COMMON
ture Range: -34°C to + 85°C
e. Storage Temperature Range:
-55° C 60 +125°C C A
.875"
(22.2mm)
B 1/4–28 UNF-2B x .18 DP

Charge Amplifier Model .30"

(7.6mm)
2144 Ordering 2.04"

(51.8mm)
Model Description
2144-25-100 Charge amplifier:
API-678 format, for
use with charge Accelerometer Model 2077
accelerometer
(eg. Model 2079) ≈ 6.25"
(158.7mm) 2 (+) SIGNAL
(ASSEMBLED)
≈ 3.25" 1 (–) COMMON
(82.5mm)
4.95"
(125.73mm)
PIN 2
PIN 1
3/4 NPT 1.25" HEX 1/2 NPT

(31.7mm)
≈
(5
2. 1m
7.
25 m
" )
OPTION –01
(ACCESS ELBOW)
(3/4 NPT - 3/4 NPT)
3.29
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
Accelerometers Ordering
Model
Accelerometer Model 2079 2073
Note: 1. Serial numbers prior to 308
have pin A connected to case.
C
.25" .875" B
(6.35mm) (22.2mm) A
Model
2075
C A
.875"
(22.2mm) 2076
B 1/4–28 UNF-2B x .18 DP
2077
.30"
2079
(7.6mm) 2083
2.04"
(51.8mm)
2085
Accelerometer Cables
Model Description
1332 Use w/2073, 2083
Velocity Sensor Model 2083
1333 Use w/2076
N/C A
1334 Use w/2079 LoTemp
C (+)SIGNAL
1336 Use w/2079 HiTemp
B (–)COMMON
4.68" MIN.
(118mm)
.875"
.175"
(4.44mm)
Specify cable length in feet with
(22.2mm) ACROSS FLATS model number.
Example: 1332-50F
C A
1.00" DIA.
(25.4mm)
50 ft. cable for 2073/2083
B 1/4–28 UNF-2B x .18 DP
2.30"
(58.4mm) Mounting Hardware
A wide range of accessories exist for
mounting Ametek probes. Depending
on whether the probe is a contacting or
Velocity Sensor Model 2085 non-contacting type, it can be mounted
directly on the equipment by means of
an angle bracket. Ametek mounting
3.5" MIN.
(89.0mm)
SHIELD hardware makes probe installation easy
.175" WHITE (+)SIGNAL and in-place probe adjustments
.875" (4.44mm)
(22.2mm) ACROSS FLATS
BLACK
(–)COMMON possible. Contact the Ametek factory
for assistance in choosing the suitable
A
1.00" DIA.
(25.4mm)
hardware for your application.
.263" OD 1/4–28 UNF-2B x .18 DP
(6.68mm) (REMOVABLE SET SCREW)
2.30"
(58.4mm)
Charge Amplifier Model 2144

.17"
(43.0mm)4 HOLES
2.50" #6-32 UNC.
(63.5mm) BARRIER SCREW, TYP.
2.00"
(50.8mm)
CALIBRATION
CONTROL
–V COM OUT 1.88"
(47.8mm)
2.50"
(63.5mm)
SERIAL NO.
1.25" IDENTIFICATION
2.12" (31.8mm) TAG
(53.8mm) INPUT PC/G
MODEL 2144 OUTPUT mV/G

CHARGE
ACCELEROMETER AMPLIFIER
MINIATURE STAINLESS
STEEL COAX CONNECTOR
3.30
AMETEK
Recorders
Ametek provides event • Sequential Events
and waveform recording Recorders
for power generation, The ISM-1 is fully user-configurable
transmission and to record contact sequences for 1
to 6656 points with 1 millisecond
distribution system resolution. A wide variety of input
analysis. These recorders termination and output options
are widely used in power allow easy application to most
processes and electric utility plants
utilities, from large and substations.
investor-owned business
to small co-generators, • Digital Transient
rural electric Recorders
cooperatives, and The TR-100, TR-2000 and new
industrial electrical P&QR Series are the most cost
systems. effective products of their kind.
Bulk consumers of electric power,

• Portable Units
manufacturing plants, power substa- Available as a DL-8000 (TR-100),
tions, and process equipment users DL-9000 (TR-2000) and P&QR-P.
also can monitor critical operations for
rapid diagnosis and restoration of
service.
Ametek’s recorders also provide

logging and recording of steady-state
values to aid in understanding of load
conditions, with fault detection and
long term monitoring capability.
All Ametek Transient Recorder prod-

ucts provide for data transmission to
PC computers, which allows complete
analysis using Ametek's Windows™-
based packages.
4.1
AMETEK
Event
Recorders
Recorders
The Ametek Integrated

System Monitor, ISM-1,
is a modular contact
sequence of events
recorder system offering
the flexibility and
reliability to tackle any
application from several
to several thousand
points with confidence.
• Reliable
• Versatile
• High MTBF
• Optional Modbus Interface
• Optional RiSCue Alarm

Management Software
Reliability was the number one criteria

in the design of the ISM-1. Every
component, every connector, and
every piece of hardware was selected
with the goal of achieving reliability
orders of magnitude higher than any
other events recorder.
Virtually all operating parameters are

programmable in the ISM-1, to tailor
the alarming and reporting to the needs
of different applications. Interfaces to
printers, DCS systems, CRT
annunciator, and PC computers
provide the necessary data for prompt
response or analysis. A variety of input
filtering options reduces false reports
from sensitive or noise-generating
equipment.
The ISM-1 is the only sequence of

events recorder designed to last as
long as the facility in which it is installed
— with minimal service or
maintenance!
4.2
Event Capture Unit Communications Field Contact Voltage
The Event Capture Unit or ECU is the Interface Unit Power Supply
heart of the ISM-1 System. Each ECU The Communications Interface Unit The Field Contact Voltage (FCV) power
supplies the logic required to monitor (CIU) interfaces with single or multiple supply provides wetting voltage for dry
either 128 or 256 inputs and can ECUs as well as CIUs to provide a contact inputs and performs input
function as a stand alone events more advanced recording system. check and ground detection functions.
recorder. Each input is sampled every Each CIU constantly runs a self
millisecond and can be configured for
normally open or normally closed
diagnostic routine and provides error FCV Specifications
messages with clear visual indication of Inputs: 256 or 512 contact inputs per
contacts. system status. supply
The design of the ECU virtually
eliminates the nuisance of false alarms. Wetting Voltage: 24, 48, 125, or
Digital filters are available on a system 250 VDC.
wide and per input channel basis. The
ECU can be configured to automati-
cally delete noisy points from scan and
reinsert them at a later time. Each CIU performs the following
general functions:
• Communicates with, and time sorts
data from, multiple ECUs in the
system
Configurations Available:
• Acts as a smart interface to a variety (1) Single 256 point supply
of Inputs/Outputs. (2) Dual 512 point supply
ECU Specifications – 4 User programmable function (3) Redundant 256 point supply
Inputs: 32-256 contacts per ECU contact inputs (4) Two different FCV voltages, 256
N.O./N.C. per input – 2 User programmable relay points each
outputs
Power: Redundant 20-60 or 90-260
VDC and/or 120/240 VAC 50/60Hz • Selection of up to 14 of the following:
– SCM fiber optic module for
Outputs: (2) RS-232 ports for local interfacing with remote ECU up
terminal I/O and printer, (1) Fiber Optic to 500 meters away (up to 1000
port for interface to CIU. Specify meters optional)
distances up to 1000 meters between – RDM relay driver module provides
ECU and CIU. four additional software driven
relay outputs
MTBF: 115 years – Dual RS-232 module provides
redundant and/or primary and
Legends: 119 characters per input; backup output ports for termi-
divisible in any combination of alarm nals, printers, and other RS-232
and return-to-normal descriptor compatible devices including
Modbus and other DCS
Event Memory: Minimum of 1000 protocols
events per ECU in system. – Parallel Output Port provides
interface for high speed parallel
printers
ISM-SX – Fiber Optic Port provides a high
By addition of Input Isolation Modules, speed data output for interfacing
FCV power supply, and user input/ with other CIUs in very large
output devices, a complete recording systems
system is created for up to 256 points. – IBM Interface provides an error
This is available as the ISM-SX. corrected binary interface for
high speed, reliable remote or
local communication to an IBM
or compatible PC
• Power: Same as ECU
4.3
AMETEK
Event
Recorders
Recorders
A wide selection of Input Assemblies to meet any application
Input Options
Compact, simple and advanced to save Height Width Depth Maximum Terminations
installation/retrofit costs. These simple Behind Panel Number
termination options offer the widest (Not Including Of Inputs
alternatives and simplify installation to save Wiring)
time and costs. The standard input module,
used in all of these options, includes optical Input Terminal 7.0" 19.0" 22.0" 128 compression
isolators, initial input conditioning and input Shelf (ITS) terminal blocks
check circuitry.
High Density 27.75" 19.0” 8.4" 512 compression
Input Card terminal blocks
Rack or interface to
existing RiS
AN-4100/RA-3800
Input Panels
(AN-4190)
DC Input 19.25" 19.0" 0.0" 64 compression
Terminal terminal blocks
Panel (ITP-C)
DC Input 19.25" 19.0" 0.0" 32 uses GE or States
Terminal terminal blocks
Panel (ITP-TB)
Fully Isolated 24.46” 19” 0.0” 32 2 terminals
ITP per input,
AC/DC uses GE or
States blocks
Applications All modules isolated input to output; AC/DC to isolated input-to-input.

ISM-SX Block Diagram Standard Systems
(Up to 256 points) (Up to 3328 points)OUTPUT DEVICES – PRINTERS
– MASTER STATION
(OPTIONAL) (OPTIONAL) – TERMINALS
– DCS
KEYBOARD/ RS-232 RS-232
TERMINAL
PRINTER CIU
FIBER OPTIC
PRIME FCV SUPPLY UP TO

POWER ECU 13 FCV
(OPTIONAL) ECU ECU (PER ECU)
RIBBON
RIBBON (OPTIONAL)
UP TO 8 INPUT MODULE INPUT MODULE INPUT MODULE

MODULES INPUT MODULE
(8 PER ECU)
FIELD INPUTS
(32-256 INPUTS) FIELD INPUTS
(32-3328 INPUTS)
OUTPUT DEVICES
Large Distributed
ISM-1 System
(Up to 6656 points) MASTER FIBER OPTIC
CIU
SUB- SUB-
CIU CIU
FCV
(PER ECU) ECU ECU ECU ECU
INPUT MODULES
(8 PER ECU) UP TO 13
4.4
ISMCOMM Software ISM System Clock Accuracy: 100 milliseconds per
day typical with software correction,
Specifications 100 milliseconds per day with TCXO
• Automatic Retrieval of Data Inputs: 1 — 6656 inputs option over entire temperature range; ±
1 millisecond with IRIG-B (CIU only).
• “Multi-Site Analyzer’’ Input Resolution: 1 millisecond
system wide, regardless of number of Logic Power: 20-60 or 90-260 VDC
The ISMCOMM software is a inputs and 120/240 VAC 50/60 HZ 10 watts
program used to automatically or maximum per ECU or CIU.
manually retrieve data recorded by Isolation: Via optical couplers to
the ISM-1 to a computer via an RS- provide isolation from input to output Operating Temperature Range:
232 link and selected modems. and power. An optional isolated 32° to 140°F (0 to 60°C)
module provides isolation from input-
Once the data is stored at the com- to-input and accepts AC inputs. Humidity: 0 to 95% non-condensing
puter, files can be merged, a time
window can be extracted, selected Input Normal State: Normally open Surge Withstand Capacity (SWC):
points can be extracted and any (NO) or normally closed (NC) can be set Conforms to IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1-
information can be printed out in true on a per point or group basis via 1989
sequential order. Even data from printer/keyboard or remote computer.
different recorders! RFI: Tested per SAMA standards to
Field Contact Voltage (FCV): PMC 33.1c-1978 class 2, band A, B
Requirements: IBM-PC/XT or Wet or dry contacts 24, 48, 125, and C
compatible with 640K RAM, DOS 3.1 250 VDC, Ametek or customer
or later, monitor, hard disk drive, printer supplied, or 24, 48, 120, 240 VAC Dielectric Strength: Conforms to
and serial port. customer supplied. Negative FVC is IEEE C37.90-1978, 1500 VDC input to
also available. ground
CIU Time Synchronization: IRIG-B, Output Format: ASCII serial text in the
AC-line, pulse per unit time selectable following order: point status, point
by the user, with crystal clock backup. number, date and time, legend
CRT Annunciator:
Typical Computer Screen for ISMCOMM A CRT color annunciator option
provides control room operators with
dynamic alarm displays as they
Event File: C:\RIS\ISM-1\DATA.EVT Total Events = 27 happen. The display can be pro-
Event Type Point Time Date Station grammed for alarm grouping, color
coding, and several types of se-
18 A - 00005 at 16:34:04.348 on 07/31/91 from Northside Station quences. A custom control keyboard
Loss of Station Service provides direct access to current
19 A - 00001 at 16:34:05.771 on 07/31/91 from Northside Station alarms and recent status changes.
Loss of DC/Breaker Control
Modbus:
20 A - 00002 at 16:34:05.794 on 07/31/91 from Northside Station Using a dual serial port, the ISM can
Hot Oil output all recorded data on request to
21 A - 00004 at 16:34:07.662 on 07/31/91 from Northside Station a Modbus master. This is also used to
Hot Spot interface the ISM-1 to our RiSCue
22 A - 00003 at 16:34:07.890 on 07/31/91 from Northside Station Alarm Management Software.
LTC Backup Alarm
23 N - 00002 at 16:34:08.312 on 07/31/91 from Northside Station
Oil Temp. OK
DC on Line
Service OK
Hot Spot OK
LTC Normal
F1 - Display Help Screen ESC - Quit Legend Offset = 0
4.5
AMETEK
Event
Recorders
Recorders
ECU Dimension &
Connections
Event Capture Unit (ECU)
EVENT CAPTURE UNIT (ECU)
J5 J6 J7 J8 J9
1.718"
(43.64mm) J20
J13 J14
J1 J2 J3 J4
0.856"
(21.82mm)
REAR VIEW
(ROTATED 180° FOR CLARITY)
22.00"
(558.8mm)
11.75"
(298.45mm)
1.87"
(47.50mm)
FRONT VIEW
1.718" 1.25"
(43.64mm) (31.75mm)
18.34"
(465.84mm)
19.00"
(482.60mm)
4.6
CIU Dimensions &
Connections
Communication Interface Unit (CIU)
COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE UNIT (CIU)
3.234" FRONT/REAR
(82.14mm) SLIDE MOUNTING
DIMENSIONS ARE
THE SAME
2.014"
(51.16mm)
J15 J0
1.454" J20
(36.93mm) J14 J13 J12 J11 J10 J9 J8 J7 J6 J5 J4 J3 J2 J1
0.234" REAR VIEW

(5.94mm) RETAINER CARD, BOARD,
(ROTATED 180° FOR CLARITY) AND CONNECTOR ARE
SHOWN FOR REF. ONLY
22.00"
(558.8mm)
15.05"
(382.52mm)
1.87"
(47.50mm)
FRONT VIEW
3.47" 3.00"
(88.08mm) (76.20mm)
18.34"
(465.84mm)
19.00"
(482.60mm)
4.7
AMETEK
Event
Recorders
Recorders
FCV Dimensions &
Connections
Field Contact Voltage (FCV) Power Supply
FIELD CONTACT VOLTAGE (FCV) POWER SUPPLY
3.47" OUTPUT POWER OUTPUT POWER

(88.08mm)
3.234" 3.31"
(82.14mm) (84.07mm)
SUPPLY B SUPPLY A
REAR VIEW
(ROTATED 180° FOR CLARITY)
22.00"
(558.8mm)
15.05"
(382.52mm)
1.87"
(47.50mm)
FRONT VIEW
FIELD CONTACT VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY ISM–1

FCV
POWER
3.47" SUPPLY
(88.08mm)
3.00" SUPPLY A GROUND FAULT SUPPLY B

(76.20mm) OUTPUT PRIME FUSE NEGATIVE POSITIVE OUTPUT PRIME FUSE
ON POWER POWER 1 2 ON POWER POWER 1 2
ADJ ADJ
1 2 FAULT FAULT 1 2
OFF OFF
18.34"
(465.84mm)
19.00"
(482.60mm)
4.8
Input Module Dimensions
17.00 (431.8) .50
(12.7)
.50
OUTPUT (12.7)
CONN.
POWER 8.36
CONN. (212.34)
INPUT MOD. & CARRIER

CARD ASSEMBLY
19.00 (482.6)
RIBBON CABLE GUIDES
FOR OUTPUT CONNECTOR
CABLE TIE PLATE
FOR OUTPUT CABLE
DISCRETE WIRE GUIDES 19.218

FOR PWR. CONN. (488.1)
18.25
(412.7)
5.25 27.82
(133.4) (701.55)
INPUT
TERM. 11.00
BLOCKS 20.97 (279.4)
(532.64)
7.50
(190.5)
5.25
INPUT
(133.5)
TERM.
BLOCKS
5.25
(133.4)
1.48 (37.6)
.125 1.48
(3.18) (37.59)
TYP.
3.48
(88.39) .42 TYP
(10.67)
DISCRETE WIRE GUIDES 19.00 (482.6)
FOR INPUT TERM. BLOCKS
RIBBON CABLE GUIDES DIMENSIONS: IN
FOR INPUT TERM BLOCKS (MM) DIMENSIONS: IN
.42 18.16 (461.26) (MM)
(10.67)
High Density Input Module Chassis Typical Input Termination Panel
18.25"
0.0
0.374
(9.50)
FRONT VIEW CUSTOMER WIRING - TERMINATED

TO MODULE MOUNTED COMPRESSION
19.00" TYPE TERMINAL BLOCKS, WITH REMOVABLE PLUGS WHICH HANDLE 19.00"
UP TO A 12 AWG WIRE WITHOUT A FERRULE
18.625
(473.07
19.0
(482.6)
6.969"
(SIDE VIEW)
6.969"
0.86
Input Terminal Shelf (21.84)
0.0
SIDE VIEW
4.9
AMETEK
Event
Recorders
Recorders
ISM-1 Integrated System
Monitor Ordering
ISM –1 1 — 2 — 3 — 4 — 5 — 6 — 7 — 8 — 9 — 10
Item 1. System Wired Capacity — XG Non-redundant 24 VDC D Other

Total # of wired points (1-6656) Item 8. Input Terminations — Divide Item 10. Options
the number of wired points by 32 or 64, L Cabinet Mounting — 27"W x
Item 2. System Active Capacity — depending on the type of terminations 31"D x 90"H NEMA 1 Cabinet
Number of active points, in multiples required. Replace the X in the model J Portable keyboard
of 32. number with the quantity required. All *T TCXO 1 ppm high accuracy
Input Modules provide optical isolation clock
Item 3. Prime Input Power source with a common return. Isolated Input *DH Dual RS232 Port
A 125 VDC Modules provide an isolated return per *PO Parallel Port
B 48 VDC point. Input Terminal Shelves (ITS) are *FO Fiber Optic Output Port
C 120/240 VAC provided with chassis slides and are *RD Relay Driver Module
D 250 VDC designed for 19" rack mounting. for CIU
E 24 VDC *CI/XXX Computer Interface—Specify
Input Termination Panel (ITP) IBM-PC, Bailey, Fox 1A, Fox
Item 4. Communication Interface XA Lo density States Sliding Links (32) 300, Modbus
Unit (CIU) — required for Smart Interface XB Lo density EB-25 (32) +M IBM-PC compatible Master
or if multiple ECUs are utilized. XC Lo density CR-151 (32) Station Software (ISMCOMM)
0 Not required XD High density Phoenix *K1 Color CRT Annunciator with
1 One required compression (64) Control keyboard
XN High density compression (32)
Item 5. Event Capture Unit (ECU) — XE Lo density isolated States *Requires a CIU
128 point unit. Divide the # of active +One time fee per customer
Sliding Link (32)
points by 128 to determine the # of XF Lo density isolated EB-25 (32)
ECUs required. Replace the X in the XG Lo density isolated CR151 (32)
model number with the quantity required. XH High density isolated Phoenix
XS Short range compression (64)
(20 meters maximum)
XL Long range Input Termination Shelf (ITS)
(500 meters maximum) XI High density Phoenix
0 None required compression (32)
(Use 256 Point) XJ High density Phoenix
compression (64)
Item 6. Event Capture Unit (ECU) — XK High density Phoenix
256 point unit. Divide the # of active compression (96)
points by 256 to determine the # of XL High density Phoenix
ECUs required. Replace the X in the compression (128)
model number with the quantity required.
0 None required (use 128 point) Input Rack
XS Short range XR Input Card Rack — Capacity of
(20 meters maximum) 8 modules not included (256
XL Long range points)
(500 meters maximum) XRD Input Modules — 32 points
XRA Isolated Input Modules — 32
Item 7. Field ContactVoltage (FCV) points
— The # of FCV units typically equals
the number of ECU’s. Replace the X in Item 9. Printer type
the model number with the quantity A None required
required. Specify positive or negative. B 40 column Red/Black printer
XA Customer supplied mounted on a 19" shelf suitable
(requires Input Check Module for rack mounting.
— Specify Voltage) C 40 column Red/Black printer
XB Redundant 125 VDC and keyboard mounted on a 19"
XC Redundant 48 VDC shelf suitable for rack mounting.
XD Redundant 24 VDC
XE Non-redundant 125 VDC
XF Non-redundant 48 VDC
4.10
ISM-SX Stand Alone
ECU System Ordering
ISM –SX 1 — 2— 3 — 4 — 5 — 6
Item 1. System Wired Capacity Item 6. Options

128 128 Point Event Capture Unit Item 5. Input Terminations B Shelf Mounted Printer
256 Point Event Capture Unit The terminal blocks and input module (with shelf)
are mounted on an Input Termination C Printer/Keyboard and Shelf
Panel (ITP). Replace the X in the model
Item 2. System Active Capacity # with the quantity required. Input J Portable Keyboard
Specify the number of active points Terminal Shelves (ITS) are provided Extra Manual
in multiples of 32. with chassis slides and are designed
for 19" rack mounting. A standard 10
Item 3. Input Power ft. ribbon cable is provided to connect
A 125 VDC the input termination panel(s) to the
B 48 VDC ECU.
C 120/240 VAC
D 250 VDC XA States sliding links ITP (32 inputs)
E 24 VDC XB EB-25 ITP (32 inputs)
XC CR-151 ITP (32 inputs)
Item 4. Field Contact Voltage XD Compression ITP (64 inputs)
(Specify positive or negative.) XN Compression ITP (32 inputs)
A Customer Supplied — Specify XE Isolated States ITP (32 inputs)
voltage XF Isolated EB-25 ITP (32 inputs)
B Redundant 125 VDC XG Isolated CR-151 ITP (32 inputs)
C Redundant 48 VDC XH Isolated Compression ITP
D Redundant 24 VDC (64 inputs)
E 125 VDC Non-redundant XI Compression ITS (32 inputs)
F 48 VDC Non-redundant non-isolated
G 24 VDC Non-redundant XJ Compression ITS (64 inputs)
non-isolated
XK Compression ITS (96 inputs)
non-isolated
XL Compression ITS (128 inputs)
non-isolated
XR 256 pt. Input Card Rack
(Rack only)
XRD Input Cards (32 inputs — for
Card Rack)
XRA Isolated Input Card (32 inputs)
Others available Consult Factory
Note: All inputs are optically isolated

from input-to-output. The isolated input
options also provide input-to-input
isolation.
4.11
AMETEK
Transient
RecordersRecorders
TR2000 Series
Multi-Function
Recorders
Be prepared in today’s increasingly
competitive and dynamic industry. The
Multi-Function Recorder (TR2000) series
was designed to be at the leading edge
of technology. These recorders represent
the next generation of utility analysis
monitoring. A farsighted product, which
uses the most advanced technology
available, yet remains fully compatible
with the successful TR-100 and DL-8000
series recorders. models, allowing the customer to
choose that which best meets techni-
Today’s customers expect superior cal requirements and budgetary
solutions for their needs. Concerned constraints. Applications for use
with obtaining optimal power flow via The TR2000 has a wide variety of
the network, while still retaining control The TR2000 is a dynamic monitoring functions; and is particularly suitable for
and reliability, they are demanding not system, producing information in an use in all of the following applications:
only increased, but integrated function- accessible format to enable direct action • Generation
ality to be provided in a cost effective to be taken, sometimes even before a • Transmission
product. Such a product aids asset potential problem becomes a reality. • Distribution
management and planning, while Communication with the recorder can be • Laboratories
remaining fully flexible and compatible both local and remote allowing for • Thyristor stack monitoring
with existing systems and producing flexibility of response and the ability to • Flexible ac transmission
real time answers. The total package is obtain real time information. system (FACTS) monitoring
not complete without the superior, • Static VAr compensators
reliable support and after sales service, A major benefit of the TR2000 is that it monitoring
which one can expect from Ametek. aids real time monitoring of a power • Geomagnetically induced
system. This could enable the in- currents (GIC)
Such solutions can only be met by creased loading of transmission lines, • DC links
listening to the customer and utilizing so a greater amount of control could • Lightning studies
advanced technology in a variety of be obtained over the transmission • General power system research
unique and important applications. The networks producing substantial
bottom-line is that our customers wish resultant savings. In a deregulated
to obtain a greater degree of useful environment the TR2000 provides the Key Functions
information to gain a competitive necessary data to increase revenues. • Very high speed recording
advantage, retain their customers and sampling at up to 195 kHz
lower operational costs. (optional)
Software Overview • Transient fault recorder
The TR2000 performs Transient up to 384 samples per cycle
Recording, Phasor Measurement, The TR2000 is enhanced with a wide • Disturbance recorder
Disturbance Recording, Sequence of range of application software, utilizing (2 samples per cycle)
Events Recording, Power Quality Windows95™, Windows98™ and • Disturbance logger
Monitoring, and Data Logging, WindowsNT™ and includes functions for (1 sample per 2 cycles, optional)
simultaneously. communicating, configuring, download- • Trend recording
ing, displaying and analyzing the TR2000 • Power quality monitor
The TR2000 has many functions aimed itself and its records. Special applications • Stability monitor (optional —
at obtaining not just standard data, but are used to report on a range of param- Synchrophasor measurement)
more useful information and presenting eters that define power quality. Auto- • Fault locator
it in such a way as to aid engineering mated processes include an Expert • Real time monitor
personnel making rapid decisions. For System to minimize the amount of • Sequence of events recorder
a relatively small capital outlay the engineering time needed to process the • On line switchgear and battery
recorder can have a big impact on the data records. A flexible reporting scheme monitor
effectiveness of the power system, via enables the right information to be sent • Energy meter with peak demand
protection, monitoring, minimal to the right person at the right time and • Plant commissioning and
maintenance and asset management. enables the selling of data to Energy diagnostic tool
The TR2000 family has a range of Service Providers. • Electronic chart recorder
4.12
Very high speed Triggers for the Disturbance Recorder
include low frequency oscillation on the
Transient Recorder power & frequency signals.
The high speed option allows for all
analog inputs to be sampled synchro-
nously up to 195,000 times per second. Disturbance Logger
Digital inputs can also be sampled at this
rate although in most cases they would As an option all of the RMS and phasor
be recorded at an integer submultiple. quantities can be recorded continuously
in a 2 week circular buffer. Very subtle
The high speed recorder is ideally suited events, which do not trigger the Distur-
to special applications such as lightning bance Recorder, can be recovered and
studies, monitoring high speed switching analyzed from the Disturbance Logger.
in Static VAr compensators (SVCs) and
Flexible AC Transmission Systems (FACTS).
Trend Recording
Transient Fault Recorder The input and computed quantities are
logged as maximum, minimum and
Analog inputs are sampled at up to 384 average quantities every minute. One
samples per cycle with a maximum years worth of data is saved by the
record length of 30 seconds. The VT & system. This enables historical data at
CT waveforms and auxiliary protection a reduced sampling rate, to be
contacts are recorded before, during and retrieved for trend and power quality
after a fault clearance. Expert System analysis. The data can be used to
software is used to analyze this data and replace circular chart recorders to verify
report on any abnormalities. Other voltage regulation and balancing.
information can be extracted for fault
impedance calculations, power quality
and system maintenance. Power Quality Monitor
The transient fault recorder is used for Power quality can be determined by a
post fault analysis in verifying protection set of parameters. Those recorded by
and circuit breaker operations and also the TR2000 series include:
fault clearance times. Information about • Voltage and frequency profiles
fault type, fault levels and duration are an • Voltage dips and surges
aid to fault location and clearance. • Loss of supply
Transient and incipient faults are also • Harmonic content
quantified, to allow improvements in • Flicker
supply security to be made. • Imbalance (voltage)
• Watts
Disturbance Recorder Voltage dips are stored in a database

and are classified by severity and
Analog inputs are stored at 2 samples duration. A 3-D plot identifies any
per cycle with a maximum recording problem equipment or sites. Compari-
length of 30 minutes. The disturbance sons of different sites or improvements
recorder provides information which in performance are possible following
enables improved understanding of the system reinforcement or changes in
power network. protection settings.
Longer term events are monitored by the Flexible display options allow this
Disturbance Recorder. RMS and phasor information to be shown in a wide
information are stored per channel, along range of styles: text or graphics,
with frequency from 2 channels. These histograms, scatter plots, etc. Mea-
are used to compute a wide variety of surements can be compared with
power system quantities. This function is standard values, such as IEEE519.
particularly useful in recording reclose
sequences and power and frequency
stability events. Additionally, it can be
used to extend the pre and post fault
times of a transient record.
4.13
AMETEK
Transient
RecordersRecorders
Stability Monitor
Sequence of Events On-line Switch Gear
A very powerful feature of the TR2000
Recorder and Battery Condition
series is the ability to trigger on and
record differential phasor measurements.
Monitoring
Because the inputs are sampled at very All transitions on the digital inputs of
regular intervals, the absolute angle of the the TR2000 are recorded and can be Circuit breaker operations are recorded
positive sequence voltage vector can be displayed independently or with a and then analyzed by the Expert
computed very accurately. This value is disturbance or logger record. The time System. The measurements from each
compared with the angle from a remote resolution is 1 ms. Input point and time operation are stored in a database and
location, normally the far end of a filtering are available to limit the number can be used in a number of program-
transmission line. Since the two TR2000s of events displayed. mable contact wear formulas.
are effectively time locked together via an
internal GPS receiver or external PPS The accumulated number of operations,
and serial time code the difference in arcing current and arcing time all
phase angle is used as a measure of contribute to wear of the main contacts.
system stability. An added feature of the TR2000 is that
by selecting one of the three standard
formulas the optimum service time for
each of switchgear can be determined.
Fault Locator
The TR2000 series can also monitor
Based on the information in a transient the breaker coil currents and battery
record of a line fault and a model of the voltage. Trip coil profiling is a diagnos-
transmission line impedance the distance tic tool used to highlight any degrada-
to fault can be calculated. Source and tion in the operation of circuit breakers.
remote end impedances, remote end
infeed and mutual coupling are used to
compute a more accurate distance.
Energy Meter
The source, remote and line impedances
may be entered in sequence component, The power values from the logger are
per phase or per unit form. The fault used to compute energy demand
distance is computed several times over a variable interval. Peak demand
during the period of the fault and the and power factor can be tracked to
results averaged. The fault impedance is help minimize energy cost for large
also returned. This can be used with a consumers.
complex impedance model to locate the
source of a fault in a distribution network.
Real Time Monitor

As well as triggering and logging the
TR2000 series includes the ability to
view analog and digital inputs and
computed values in near real time.
Measured values and waveforms can
be seen remotely. These can replace or
act as backup systems for:
• Waveform oscilloscope
• Panel meters
• Annunciator panel
• Vector display
4.14
Plant Commissioning and Purchasing Information
Diagnostic Tool
User Programmable
The extensive set of functions within Sampling up to 384 samp/cyc
MODEL DESCRIPTION
Display Station Analysis (DSA) allow it to
be used in the installation and commis- TR-2108 8 Analog / 16 Digital Inputs
sioning of power equipment. Test TR-2116 16 Analog / 32 Digital Inputs
records can be taken either manually or TR-2124 24 Analog / 48 Digital Inputs
automatically and analyzed with DSA to TR-2132 32 Analog / 64 Digital Inputs
check for correct operation of
switchgear, transformers, etc. These User Programmable
records can be archived and used for Sampling up to 195 kHz
MODEL DESCRIPTION
comparison during future diagnostic
checks. TR-2208 8 Analog / 16 Digital Inputs
TR-2216 16 Analog / 32 Digital Inputs
Effective Solutions
Effective solutions to potential sources
of measurement error are incorporated
in the design of the TR2000 series.
Possible errors and their related
solution are shown below:
PROBLEMS
SOLUTIONS
4.15
AMETEK
Transient
RecordersRecorders
TR2000 Series Specifications RECORDING (DISTURBANCE LOGGING) – OPTIONAL
sample rate 1/2 x supply frequency (25/30 Hz)
INPUTS recording time 2 weeks (circulating buffer)
no. of channels 8, 16, 24 or 32 Analog
16, 32, 48 or 64 Digital computed values As above
larger systems available
Recording (trend)
voltage inputs 63 - 120V RMS typical sampling interval 1 minute – data can be retrieved at
up to a 60 minute interval
current inputs 1A or 5A RMS nominal
typical record length 52 weeks (circulating buffer)
over range 212 Vrms (voltage) stored parameters Maximum, minimum & average voltage,
Selectable for current (x1 –x20) current, frequency (2), power, flicker,
harmonics & imbalance. Digital data in SER
frequency response DC – 1/2 sampling rate format at user defined time resolution.
accuracy Better than 0.1% of full scale @25°C. Inputs
can be temperature compensated and are TRIGGERING (TRANSIENT)
software calibrated (no pots required) analog channels Over/under RMS level (or DC),
Rate-of-Change and THD per analog input.
digital inputs 24 / 48 / 125 / 250 V dc, normally open 2 positive, zero and negative sequence
or closed, wetted contact triggers per 8 analog inputs. 2 over, under
and R-o-C frequency triggers per chassis.
digital debounce 0 – 10ms in 1ms increments 1 differential frequency trigger per chassis
(for trigger validation only)
accuracy 0.5%
RECORDING (TRANSIENT)
recording resolution 16 bits. 65536 levels (15 plus sign) digital channels Normal to alarm state and return to normal
state. Edge or level sensitive
sample rate TR2100 – up to 384 samples per cycle
COMTRADE rates supported programmability Triggering on any number of analog
TR2200 – up to 195 kHz or digital channels
Analog and digital can have different rates cross trigger Allows unlimited number of recorder
pre-fault time 2 – 500 cycles channels with precise time sync
From disturbance triggers
post-fault time Fault length will extend as long as a trigger
condition exists. Minimum is 8 – 100 cycles TRIGGERING (DISTURBANCE)
analog channels Under/over level of fundemental and R-o-C
safety window Recording time after active trigger: Power & frequency oscillation
4–16 cycles Imbalance & impedance
Cross trigger from transient recorder
maximum length Maximum record size: 1 – 30 sec.
This prevents memory filling with a SYSTEM TIMING
continuous trigger time source Internal GPS receiver (antenna included)
synchronization All analog channels sampled together and accuracy Normally better than +/- 60 ns
time tagged to better than +/- 100 ns.
back up clocks Dual, 32,768 Hz. crystal oscillators
RECORDING (DISTURBANCE)
sample rate 2 x supply frequency (100/120 Hz) range Time and date. Year 2000 compliant.
(including leap year and day of year)
pre-fault 10 sec. to 10 min.
synchronization 1 pulse per second on optical port. Any
post-fault time Fault length will extend as long number of systems can be linked together
as a trigger point condition exists
Minimum value is 30 sec. – 5 min. serial time code Time code input or output for
synchronization of linked systems
maximum record Absolute maximum size 1 – 30 min. length.
computed values Voltage & current, real power, reactive

at PC power, apparent power, power factor,
total harmonic distortion and frequency (x2)
Positive, negative & zero sequence
components
4.16
COMMUNICATIONS VOLTAGE WITHSTAND
serial ports Up to 4 x RS232 type isolation Channel to channel
Channel to ground
default setting 57.6K baud, 8 bits, 1 stop, no parity (as per IEC 255-5, IEEE C37.90)
modem Hayes compatible type internal or external, impulse voltage 5 kV
fax compatible withstand 1.2/50 ms. 0.5 Joule
(as per IEC 255-5, IEEE C37.90)
phone line sharing External unit to share a single phone line
with a station phone or other IEDs surge withstand 2.5 kV, 1 MHz
damped sine wave
network connection 10Base2 (50 Ω coax & BNC) or 10BaseT (as per IEC 255-22-1, IEEEC37.90)
network protocol TCP IP RFI as per IEC
801-3, IEC
DATA STORAGE 801-6 and IEEEC37.90 (10V/M)
buffer storage 32 MB RAM
ESD as per IEC
program storage 4 MB flash ROM 801-2
permanent storage 3.5" hard disk – 13 Gbytes
ENCLOSURE
Front Panel Display cabinet Steel 19" rack mounting cabinet
LED indicators Power OK (Green) 8 & 16 channel – 6U
Battery OK (Green) 24 & 32 channel – 8U
System on line (Green) Wall mount and portable options
Data available (Amber) weight 15 kg
Communication in progress (Amber)
Communication failure (Red) ENVIRONMENT
Loss of time sync (Red) operating temperature -10 to 55°C
Disk fault (Red) 14 to 131°F
Temperature fault (Red)
Attention (Red) relative humidity 0 – 97% non condensing
STATUS RELAYS
max. number of outputs 32 (1 per analog in)
OPTIONS
contact rating 10 W max.
0.5 A max. internal
300 V dc / 240 V ac max. Modem card
N/O contacts available Network card
Synchrophasor software (Differential Phasor Measurements)
Power Supply Disturbance Logger software
input voltage options 100-300Vdc/120/24oVac external
or 88-164DC Range of wall mounting enclosures
Interface equipment for current channels
power requirement 60VA (16 channel) (wedding ring CTs, clamp CTs, shunt resistors)
70VA (32 channel) Telephone line sharing unit
Hall effect CTs for DC battery supply
modem
software
Display Station (required)
Expert System
Voltage Dip database
Switchgear Maintenance database
Distance to Fault
4.17
AMETEK
Recorders
Transient Recorders
TR100 Series The TR’s unique dynamic post fault
length optimizes data memory usage
Transient Recorders • 8 to 32 Analog Channels by terminating the recording of a
record once a steady state has
• 16 to 64 Digital Channels returned for a predefined period. Short
• Simple-to-Service Plug-in faults generate short records while a
Circuit Card Design longer fault will cause the fault
recording period to be extended.
• Substation Environment
Qualified Local parameter setting and record
transfer is performed simply by
• Extensive, Flexible Remote- plugging in a portable computer
Controlled Triggering running Ametek’s Windows™ based
software into the port on the front
• Full 12-Bit A/D With
panel of the TR-100. One computer
Simultaneous Sampling
can be used for many
The Transient Recorder is an essential • DC Coupling Standard TR-100’s, thereby reducing costs
monitoring requirement for transmis- and making the parameter and fault
• Standard ISA Bus record data more secure.
sion, distribution, generation or any
Architecture For Easy
major user of power.
Upgrades The TR-100 is typically part of an
Ametek’s years of application knowl- integrated monitoring network with
• Simple Point-And-Click multiple TR’s located within substations
edge and experience, together with our Windows Interface
versatile product range, can meet the over a region, and a Windows™ based
requirements of markets demanding • Full Context-Sensitive Help Master Station normally located in the
anything from a small low cost TR up engineering department or in a control
to the needs of a large distributed • Waveforms Displayed At center running Ametek’s Communica-
network of TR’s. Highest Resolution Possible tion, Configuration and Analysis
On Your Monitor software. Communications between
The TR-100 Series introduces to the the Master Station and the TR’s is
• Fault, Trend, Flicker and normally by plug-in data modems using
market a Transient Fault Recording Harmonic Recording
System with unparalleled levels of the local telephone exchange,
Simultaneously but other networks can be supported.
flexibility, while providing the user with
the worlds most user friendly • Traditional Fault Recording
TR available today. Any number of TR-100 recorders can
• Optimize Switchgear be cross-triggered together to extend
Two 19” rack mounting units are Maintenance the number of analog and digital
available with up to 32 analog/64 digital channels forming a single system.
input channels on the TR-132 and up • Long-Term Load Data For
to 16 analog/32 digital input channels Planning
on the TR-116. The TR will operate as • Harmonic Recording
a stand-alone system or link to a PC-
based Master Station. In terms of • Voltage Quality Monitoring
performance, the system has a sample
rate of up to 192 samples per cycle, • Windows™ Based Graphical
with a vast selection of standard User Interface (GUI) For
triggers simultaneously available on Ease Of Use
each channel or on a system basis,
including over and under limit violation
with adjustable hysteresis, rate of
change, zero and negative sequence,
sub-cycle drop out (sinewave quality)
and frequency.
The high speed, high resolution

recording and flexible triggering modes
make the Ametek TR ideal for
capturing all forms of line transients
from conductor clashes and lightning
strikes to spikes and sub-cycle
distortion. It can be used for verifying
protection/breaker operation as well as
monitoring power quality.
4.18
Features Printing of Fault Records
HEADER
■ 486 industrial grade CPU Fault records may be printed
TR-100 locally by the TR-100 or TR-2000
TRANSIENT RECORDER
as shown in the sample on the
■ Downloadable firmware left, or remotely at the Master
Location
Machine Name
:
:
Dartford
Demo 1 Station using Ametek Analysis
■ 16 Mbytes of RAM memory Recorder Number
Trigger
:
:
2
Analogue under on channel 1 'VRed'

software. Every record has the
(optional internal hard disk drive) Trigger time : 14 Aug 1995 11:42:50.481 location of the recorder, the time
Analogue channels
and date of the record and the
Channel Definition Triggering source of the trigger.
■ Up to 192 samples per cycle Channel Nominal F.S.D Units Over Under SubC ROC
sample rate 1
2
VRed
VYellow
132.2
132.2
176.2
176.2
kV
kV
98%, 0%
98%, 0%
CONFIGURATION
3
4 -
VBlue 132.2
0.0
176.2
0.0
kV 98%, 0%
The names, scales and trigger
5 IRed 700.0 14000.0 A
6 IYellow 700.0 14000.0 A levels of each analog and digital
■ Real time graphical display and 7
8
IBlue
INeutral
700.0
700.0
14000.0
14000.0
A
A 110%, 0%
channel are shown next.
numeric measurement for easy Phase Groups
and accurate trigger level setting Phase Group Definition Triggering

PHASE GROUP
Channels Zero seq. Neg. seq.
CONFIGURATION
1 1,2,3 Phase group 1
2 4,5,6 Phase group 2 Two phase groups are available
■ Software triggers available per every 8 inputs.
simultaneously Digital Channels
Channel Definition Triggering
• Under limit violation with Channel Normal Profile
adjustable hysteresis per input 1 Digital 1

2 Digital 2
3 Digital 3
Open
Open
Open
Yes
Yes
Yes
Edge
Edge
Edge
(real time display/ 4 Digital 4

5 Digital 5
Open
Open
Yes
Yes
Edge
Edge
6 Digital 6 Open Yes Edge
measurement available) 7 Digital 7
8 Digital 8
Open
Open
Yes
Yes
Edge
Edge
9 Digital 9 Open Yes
• Over limit violation with 10 Digital 10
11 Digital 11
Open
Open
Yes
Yes
adjustable hysteresis per input 13 Digital 13
14 Digital 14
Open
Open
Yes
Yes
(real time display/ 15 Cross Trigger

16 Digital 16
Open
Open
No
Yes
measurement available) Digital debounce : 10 ms
• Rate of change trigger per Fault profile
input Fault Level - RMS
• Sub-cycle drop out (sinewave Analogue Channel Pre-fault Immediate Final Post-clearance Units
Min. Max Units
RECORD PROFILE
1 VRed 132.1 127.6 105.4 132.5 kV kV The configuration is followed by a
distortion) trigger per input 2
3
VYellow
VBlue
132.7
132.8
132.0
132.1
132.0
131.8
132.0
132.1
kV
kV
kV
kV
profile of the record with actual
4 - 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
• Negative sequence component 5
6
IRed
IYellow
710.9
704.1
1401.4
697.3
2802.7
697.3
690.4
717.8
-
A
A
-
A
A signal levels, durations and digital
7 IBlue 704.1 690.4 710.9 697.3 A
(real time display/ 8 INeutral 0.0 1045.9 2795.9 0.0 A
A
A
transition times measured from
measurement available) Digital Transitions
the data.
• Zero sequence component Digital Channel
1 Digital 1
State
Alarm
Time (ms)
(real time display/ 2 Digital 2 Normal 46
measurement available)
• Over, Under and Rate-of- Fault Duration : 70 ms Time markers: 10 ms
8
Change of Frequency (1 per GRAPHICAL PLOT

chassis) The analog and digital inputs are
• Digital Inputs; level, or edge then displayed in graphical form
with horizontal lines indicating the
with selectable return-to-
start and end of the trigger
normal triggering
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
condition.
■ DC pulse or optional IRIG-B (time

code) time synchronization
4.19
AMETEK
Recorders
Mechanical SERIAL STATUS RELAYS

OperatingVoltage: 24, 48, 125 or 250V DC external
COMMUNICATIONS
Specifications Port Types: 2 x RS-232, one local, one coil supply
remote. Contact Rating: 125V DC/380V AC, 5A max.
Programming: Recorder identification. Indication: Power OK.
(Location/Name) Armed/ready.
Channel parameters and labels. Attention.
INPUTS System triggered
Trigger levels and enables.
Voltage Inputs: 69-120V rms nominal, (minimum on time 500mS).
Sample rate and fault capture
212V rms full scale
times.
Current Inputs: Typically 1 or 5A rms selected
Memory operation
by external shunt or CICT. OPERATING VOLTAGES
(Stop/Overwrite).
Input Coupling: DC (0) to 3,000Hz, (+0dB, -3dB),
Accuracy: Better than 0.5% F.S.
Time and Date Prime Power: 88 to 300V DC, 85 to 264V AC
Printer setup standard. 24 or 48V DC
Digital Input FCV: 24, 48, 125 or 250V dc wetted
Modem setup optional.
contact NO/NC.
Digital Input Debounce: Modem: Hayes compatible, internal or Burden: <20 VA load (8 channels)
0 to 10mSec selectable in 1mS
external type. Backup Battery: Internal battery for real-time
clock and parameter memory.
steps (for triggering only)
Capacity:
TR-116 Max.: 16 analog (V or I selectable), PRINTING (Local to Recorder)
32 digital. Printer Port: Standard Centronics type. ENVIRONMENTAL
TR-132 Max.: 32 analog (V or I selectable), 64 Printer Selection: Consult factory for latest list of Operating Temperature:
digital. laser, inkjet and dot matrix -10˚C to 55˚C.
Input Expansion: In increments of 8 analog and 16 printers. Humidity: 0 to 95% RH non condensing.
digital. Systems to 128 analog Output Reports: System configuration. Isolation: 2kV rms for 1 minute (channel
inputs or more are available. Fault record header. to channel and channel to
Fault record profile comprised ground).
of measured values for … 1.5kV rms on power supply
RECORDING Fault duration and faulted Impulse Withstand:
Resolution: 12 bit A/D (1:4096). channel. 5kV, 1.2/50µSec, 0.5 joule.
Media: 16 Mbytes RAM, optional Pre, during and post Surge Withstand: 2.5kV, 1MHz damped sine wave
internal hard disk drive. fault values per analog per standards …
Sampling Rate: User selected channel. IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1-1989.
(24-192 samples/cycle) Digital channel timing. IEC 255-4.
Total Recording Time Plot of fault record IEC 255-5.
RAM: 16 Mbytes (approx. 37 seconds Diagnostics and error log. RFI Protection: Per IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2-1987.
at 96 samples/cycle with 32
channels)
Hard Drive: Up to a maximum of 1024 records. TIME BASE MECHANICAL DETAILS
Pre-fault Time: 2 to 100 cycles. Resolution: 0.1mSec. TR-116 Rack: 19” wide rack, 30lbs (13.7 Kg)
Post-fault Time: 8 cycles to 10 Sec. Fault length Internal Clock Accuracy: 7U high (12.23”).
can optionally extend for as Better than 1 Sec. per day. TR-132 Rack: 19” wide rack, 60lbs (27.4 Kg)
long as a trigger condition Synchronization: 11U high (19.23”).
exists to a max. limit. DC (std.): 1 pulse per second, minute or Mounted: 19” rack mounted.
Maximum Record Length: 15 sec. hour on digital input 16. Terminals: Rear access screw compression
Synchronization: All channels sampled IRIG-B (opt.): From station clock. type - up to 14ga.
simultaneously. DL8000 Size: 21 1/8”W x 11 3/4”H x 21 3/4”D
Multi-Recorder Synchronization: 541.7mm x 301.3mm x
Channels between cross FRONT PANEL 557.7mm
triggered recorders are timed Weight: 50 lbs (22.7Kg)
to within 1 sample. STATUS DISPLAY
LED Indicators: Power on (green).
Armed/ready (green).
TRIGGERING New events (amber).
Communications (amber).
Analog: Over limit violation with
Attention (red).
hysteresis
Push Button: Test, disarm and rearm
Under limit violation with
recorder.
hysteresis
Options: Hard drive
Rate of Change
Trend recording
Zero sequence
Harmonic recording
Negative sequence
DNP 3.0
Sub-cycle drop out
Fax output
(Sinewave Quality)
Flicker Recording
Frequency
Ethernet
Accuracy: Better than 2%.
Digital: Alarm and return to normal,
edge or level sensitive.
4.20
SPECIFICATIONS
FILE: TR116.1 FH
27.000 (685.80)
21.000 (533.40)
TR-116 and TR-132

TOP AND BOTTOM BOLT PLAN
27.500 (698.50)
CABLE CUTOUTS W/ REMOVABLE COVERS

30.000 (762.00)
6.000 (152.40)
10.000 (254.00)
TR-116 DIGITAL
TRANSIENT
RECORDER
MODEM
TR-116 DIGITAL
TRANSIENT
RECORDER
85.837 (2180.27)
TR-116 & TR-132 TOP VIEW
TS1 TS1
90.25 (2292) TS2 TS7 TS7 TS2
TS3 TS8 TS8 TS3
TS4 TS9 TS9 TS4

22.00
(558.80)
TS5 TS10 TS10 TS5
TS6 TS11 TS11 TS6

FILE: TR116.2 FH
FRONT / REAR
FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW
DOOR DETAIL
(DOORS REMOVED) (DOORS REMOVED)
12.50
(317.50)
TR-116 FRONT VIEW TR-116 REAR VIEW
TRANSIENT RECORDER
ROCHESTER INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS
TR-116 PHONE COMM MODEM/ IRIG-B
LINE LINE PRINTER RS-232 INPUT
10.460 POWER ON
(265.68) BACKUP BATTERY

POWER
ARMED/READY
NEW EVENTS F2 F1 (-) (+) (G)
7.5 COMMUNICATIONS 1
ANALOG INPUTS
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4
DIGITAL INPUTS
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 SUPPLY
STATUS
1 2 3 4
(190.50) ATTENTION
+ - + - +
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+ - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1.17
TEST ANALOG INPUTS DIGITAL INPUTS
(29.72)
HOLD FOR 3 SECONDS LOCAL
TO DISARM
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
PRESS AND RELEASE
RS-232
+ - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + -
2.571
TORE-ARM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(65.31)
1.480 18.260 (463.80)

1.POWER
(37.59) 2.011 2.ON LINE
18.900 (480.06) (51.09) 3.ATTENTION
4.TRIGGERED
TR-132 REAR VIEW
TR-132 FRONT VIEW

ROCHESTER
TRANSIENT RECORDER
ROCHESTER INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS TR-132

PHONE COMM MODEM/ IRIG-B
LINE LINE PRINTE RS-232 INPUT
5.250
(133.35) POWER
F2 F1 (-) (+) (G)
POWER ON
BACKUP BATTERY
ANALOG INPUTS DIGITAL STATU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 SUPPL 1 2 3 4
ARMED/READY + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5.750 NEW EVENTS
(146.05)
COMMUNICATIONS
ANALOG INPUTS DIGITAL
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
ATTENTION
9.581
+ - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TES
HOLD FOR 3 SECONDS
(243.37)
19.220 TO DISARM
PRESS AND RELEASE
TO RE-ARM
LOCAL
RS-232 ANALOG INPUTS
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
DIGITAL
43 44 45 46 47 48
(488.19) 9.021
+ - + -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+ - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - +
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + -
(229.14)
ANALOGINPUT DIGITALINPUTS
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
5.250 + - + -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+ - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - +
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + -
(133.35)
WIRING HARNESS 1. POWER

18.260[463.80]
18.900[480.06]
SUPPORT HARDWARE 2. ON LINE
3. ATTENTION
4. TRIGGERED
TR-132
4.21
AMETEK
Transient
RecordersRecorders
Master Station Analysis File Features:
Software
• Full support of the Comtrade file
After retrieving the necessary fault format
records using the communications
software, the analysis package allows
the Master Station to display fault
records, analyze them and print to any
Display Features:
Windows™ supported printer.
Analog Trigger Settings Window, where the
• Add, remove or rearrange
This analysis software provides a Real Time Values for each Voltage and waveforms on screen
complete set of functions for complete Current Input can be read. • Place waveform cursors to read
power system fault analysis with built in time and amplitude
tools to simplify the setup of displays • Select channels and time range
and printer functions. The user for display, printing or
interface follows the recommended modification of display
Windows conventions and gives parameters
several options to manipulate wave- • Dynamic scaling of waveforms
forms through keyboard and/or mouse
operation.
Analysis Features:
• Reports channel that triggered

each fault record
• Instant graphic measurements of
time and amplitude differences
between two points on waveform
Main Operating Parameters are set up from
this window.
Printing Features:
• Works with nearly all Windows™
supported printers
• High-resolution printing
• Color printing
Zero and Negative Sequence Component

Trigger Settings Window, where three
channels make up a Phase Group. The Real
Time Sequence Components are displayed.
Color coding allows user to verify proper
channel selection and wiring.
4.22
Expert System Software
The suite of Expert System Software

consists of three separate packages
that are linked together by a shared
database created by the user in the
Automated Analysis portion of the
software.
The three packages are the Expert

System (Automated Analysis), Voltage
Dip Analysis, and Breaker Performance
Monitor.
Basic Substation Configuration
Manual Analysis Output
This screen is used to configure each
circuit being monitored and the “filters” Above are the results from manually
used to create reports. Thereby calling up the automated analysis.
increasing the efficient utilization of Below is an Explanation Window that
data while reducing workload. can be accessed for a summary of
why the program reached the
conclusion it did.
Automated Analysis Results
Above is a sample of the automated

analysis results obtained automatically
during Auto-poll or Auto-call. This text
can be viewed without having to open
and view the waveform data. The full
waveform/fault data is still available for
analysis if needed.
4.23
AMETEK
Recorders
Voltage Dip Analysis Breaker Performance
Monitor
Below is a sample plot from the After each fault has been analyzed by
Voltage Dip Analysis software package. the Expert System, the results can be
This shows the ability to take a series passed to the Breaker Performance
of faults from a specific location and Monitor software (BPM). At the bottom
plot the voltage retained against the is the BPM setup screen.
duration of the faults, showing the
quantity of faults for each interval/ The BPM software uses the data for
retention. This is useful for comparing each breaker operation to track
voltage quality at different locations or breaker wear 3 different ways: the
at the same location after changes to cumulative current interrupted (shown
the power system have been made. at top right), the duty interrupted by the
This can also be used to show breaker based in int (where n is user
variations in the voltage retained as defined) or the number of operations
faults propagate through the various for a breaker (shown at bottom right).
voltage levels. Plots can be custom-
ized for time interval, magnitude and Since the information is kept in a
voltage drop. This allows users to database, it is easy to switch between
customize the plots shown to manage- the 3 methods eliminating the need for
ment or users of electrical power. stand-alone devices.
Using the Voltage Dip Analysis soft-

ware, the same series of faults can be
plotted against standard limit curves
such as CEBEMA or other user created
curves as shown below.
4.24
Power Analysis Tools Distance-To-Fault
Ametek’ Power Analysis Tools (PAT) is The Distance-To-Fault (DTF) program
a set of mathematical calculations uses user-entered line parameters to
which can be applied to waveforms analyze fault data and calculate
displayed using Display Station distance to the fault from the recorder
software. PAT contains 3-phase which saw the fault. DTF is accurate to
calculations for lines or circuits, yielding 2% when untapped 2-terminal trans-
peak, RMS, per unit values, power mission lines are analyzed. It cannot be
quantities (MVA, MW, MVAR, X/R), used on tapped or multi-terminal lines.
frequency, distortion and sequence The user must have some knowledge
components. of line characteristics as computed by
Event Waveform Display Window, with the EMTP or similar computer simulations
It also provides phasor display and Power Analysis Toolkit active. Single to use DTF.
harmonic analysis. PAT is used by Channel Calculations made on any channel
calling the set of tool ICONs to the over a selected time frame. Even if DTF isn't used for new-real time
screen, then selecting a waveform and fault location and crew dispatch, it is a
tool to be used. PAT will then display useful tool for verifying power system
the resulting graphical and tabular models used for relay settings.
data.
The use of color and graphics

enhances the understanding of the
power system situation.
For added enhancement to analyzing

data, there are now a variety of
calculations that can be done to create
vrtual channels.
Event Waveform Display Window, with the

Power Analysis Toolkit active. Sequence
Components calculated on a Phase Group
basis. A Phasor Diagram is also displayed Event Waveform Display Window, with fault
with the angle based on the start of the location results identified.
selected region.

Power Analysis Toolkit active. Harmonic
Analysis on any channel over a selected
time frame.
4.25
AMETEK
Recorders
Recording Simultaneous Harmonix

Faults, Trend Data,
Harmonic Profiles,
Flicker, and other power
parameters
The Ametek recorders have the ability

to record faults, trend data and
harmonic profiles simultaneously
eliminating the need for circular chart
recorders or other IED’s.
The trend duration varies by recorder

and the storage interval varies by Recording Harmonic Spectrum
parameter. Custom Limits
The TR-100, TR-2000 and PQR all
This Trend Data can be used for load have the ability to periodically record a This plot shows the same data plotted
balancing, voltage regulation verifica- harmonic spectrum from channels in against a standard limit such as
tion, equipment sizing and many other the recorder. A variety of plotting IEEE519 or EN50160 (EN is shown
applications. methods are available to the user. above). Custom limits can be created
Above is a sample file showing a 12- by the user. The green portion of the
hour interval at a 10 minute sample plot show the % samples (over the time
rate. The magnitude is plotted as a % window plotted) that were between 0-
of the fundamental frequency (50/60Hz) 5% of the maximum recorded value for
input magnitude. It can also be plotted that harmonic. The blue portion is the
as an absolute magnitude. This shows relative number of samples that were
all of the odd harmonics plus THD as between 5-95% of the maximum
an average of all phases of the circuit. recorded value and the red is the
Additional plot options include compar- relative number of samples in the 95-
ing the minimum, maximum and 100% range. Additionally, single
average magnitudes of various sample intervals for the harmonics for
harmonics recorded for the time all 3 phases can be displayed.
window selected.
4.26
Optional Hardware
Resistive Current Shunt Current Isolator CT All CICT’s connect safely and easily to
existing CT secondary wiring without
The Resistive Current Shunt is The clip-on Current Isolator CT (CICT) alteration, shunts or test switches. So
designed for permanent applications is ideal for monitoring current channels you’ll save on expensive installation
as an interface from the CT second- when it is not possible to interrupt the time and hardware.
ary wiring to the Ametek family of CT circuit to install a resistive shunt.
recorders. You can also use the CICT’s for They can be mounted up to 2,000 feet
temporary/portable installations. from the recorder, using standard
The shunt’s compact design make it shielded cables.
ideal for mounting within fault recorder
panels. DNP 3.0 Protocol
Being resistive rather than inductive, The Ametek recorders have the ability
greater levels of accuracy in terms of to communicate to the SCADA/EMS
phase angle and magnitude are system using the DNP 3.0 protocol.
possible. Thus, Ametek recommends Data available includes magnitudes
the use of this type of shunt, from any channel, frequency, or profile
particularly in applications where from the most recent event and
Distance to Fault calculations are to be diagnostic data.
made or knowing DC off-sets during
the fault is critical. Ranges: 1.0A up to 12.5A nominal. Full
scale is 20 times nominal
4.27
AMETEK
Recorders
Ametek Customer
Support
Factory Acceptance Ametek encourages customers to visit
the factory at any time. As part of the
Testing system purchase, you can send
personnel in to witness our standard
testing of the recorders. An added
benefit is the exposure your personnel
will get to the basic operation of the
recorder and associated software. This
considerably reduces the learning
curve in most situations for those that
have not used the software or record-
ers previously.
Ametek offers a full compliment of

Training Training Courses for both the recorders
and software. Most effective after the
systems have been installed and in use
for a period of time, the classes range
from Familiarization Training to Re-
corder Operation, Software Operation
and System Troubleshooting. These
courses can be held either at your site
or at the factory – whatever is most
convenient for your personnel.
Installation and To assist in starting up the systems,

Ametek can supply a qualified Field
Start-up Services Service Technician to verify system
configuration, settings and field wiring.
At the same time, your technicians get
additional exposure to both the
hardware and software making future
operation easier for them. Additional
services may be contracted to do
complete installation including laying
field wiring for the inputs. Ametek also
provides a toll-free number (for the US
and Canada) for technical support any
time you have questions.
4.28
DL-8000 and
DL-9000 Portable
Recorders
The DL-8000 and DL-9000

are advanced power
monitoring systems in a
rugged portable package.
The DL-8000 and DL-9000 portable

systems are equipped to support a
range of measurement transducers and
connection options providing an
attractive and flexible monitoring The DL-8000 and DL-9000 portables The DL8000 and DL-9000 portables
system for both the power utility and have been designed to be easily have identical technical specifications
industrial user. installed on-site, vastly reducing any to the TR-100 and TR-2000 recorders
commissioning time. The system with some additional features and
An extensive suite of Windows™ based includes optional push-fit (shrouded) accessories to enhance portability and
software is available with the portable protective rear panel connections to simplify equipment installation.
system for local (lap-top PC) or remote analog and digital measurement points
setup, data retrieval, analysis and using fused jaw-clips, pigtail leads and
reporting via modem or network non-invasive CT clamps.
communications.
• Motor Starts
• Relay, Fuse and recloser
coordination and optimization
• Load Balancing
• Harmonic magnitudes
• Co-gen plant monitoring
• Motor control center monitoring
• Sags and Swells
• Steady-State Voltage Compliance
• Surges and transient changes
• Equipment Sizing
• Data for K-Factor calculations
needs
• Flicker
4.29
AMETEK
Recorders
Features:
• Rugged Enclosure with Carry
Handle
• Fault Recording using a Wide
Range of Programmable Triggers
• Power Quality Event Capture and
Analysis
• Provides 8 Analog/16 Digital Input
Channels or optional 16 Analog/
32 Digital Input Channels
• Uses a Range of CT Clamps
for Non-Invasive Connection
• Supports ∆–Y (3 or 4 wire) VT
Connections
• Extensive Windows™ based
Applications Software
• Universal AC/DC Supply
• Logged Recording of Voltage,
Current, Harmonics, Flicker Harmonics Logging Comparing Same
and Frequency using Integral Location at 2 Different Times
Hard Disk
Options:
• Cellular Modem for Remote
Communications
• Ethernet Card for Network
Support
• Push-fit Rear Panel Connectors
and Test Leads for Simple
Installation
• Voltage Divider for 600, 480
and 277V Systems
• CT Interface Unit supporting a
Wide Range of CT Ratios and
scaling
Waveform Capture (simultaneous on up to

16 analog and 32 digital inputs)
4.30
Voltage Fault Propagation Comparing
Voltage Dip Severity at Different Power
System Voltage Levels
Voltage Dip Profiles for Power Quality

Assessment Comparing 2 Sites Over Same
Time Interval
4.31
AMETEK
Recorders
Power and Fault Recorders
P&QR128 and
P&QR256
Comprehensive Power
and Fault Recorders
with Advanced Features
Identify power and fault data with

the affordable P&QR series power
and fault recorders.
Whether you are a utility identifying

power and fault problems on the power
grid, or a facilities manager monitoring
power quality concerns in your plant…
the P&QR Series offers the perfect,
affordable solution you’ve been looking
for.
For Utilities
Deregulation means increased compe-
tition for utilities. Providing affordable Economic Incentives!
power quality affirmation to your key
customers is critical to keep customers One of the biggest reasons to buy your problems using the fault
from migrating away, and to win new new P&QR128 or P&QR256 is purely recording and waveform capture
customers. The P&QR128 and economic! We’ve packed many high capabilities.
P&QR256 are useful for troubleshootin end fault recording functions into a well • The low cost P&QR128 and
relay misoperation. The P&QR Series built unit that is offered at a very low P&QR256 offer great flexibility to
offers utilities incredible flexibility, ease cost. The P&QR Series has many of the Power Quality professional.
of use, durability, and perhaps most the functions that you would expect in For instance, you can take
importantly, dramatic cost savings! a fault and power quality recorder. advantage of its multiple-voltage
However, we would like to point out ranges and selectable CT scaling
many features that are rare for a unit at to obtain improved accuracy by
For Customers this price, and even some features that optimizing your A to D
are not available on other units at any measurement.
For even modest sized power price! • Best of all, these units have
customers, doing business in this optional ethernet or modem
newly deregulated environment, a • First, these Power Quality connectivity so you can get the
power quality monitor is one of the Recorders have enormous data data you need without having to
best investments your company can storage capacity. They come leave your chair.
make! Your power and fault monitor with a standard 6 gigs of storage. • The dynamic P&Qs software will
will help you take surveys of sufficient This gives you plenty of flexibility quickly and easily help you get
length and provide the information for long measurement surveys, or the most out of your P&QR. A
you need to decide exactly how to short highly concentrated data more complete explanation of
best buy your power: spot, flat rate, collection. P&Qs follows.
time of use, seasonal. Your P&QR128 • The units are phase locked • Check out the technical
or P&QR256 can easily pay for itself looped to offer you extraordinary specifications chart to see all the
in a short period of time. Providing sampling accuracy even if the terrific features offered by the
answers about your power consump- frequency you are monitoring P&QR128 and P&QR256.
tion is only the beginning, many shifts. Most competitive
additional benefits are yours with a products don’t have this Whether it’s avoiding a costly plant
P&QR128 or P&QR256 from Ametek capability. shut down, finding power quality
Power Equipment. • Ametek Power Equipment P&QR problems or just making sure that you
Series has excellent RFI rejection, are paying the lowest possible price for
minimizing the unwanted effects your electricity usage… the Ametek
of cell phones, computers, Instrument System P&QR is the right
broadcast, or hand-held radios. solution for you!
• You can identify and isolate
4.32
• Determine the lowest possible
price for power
• Pays for itself in savings
• Large memory capacity allows for
long surveys or short
concentrated data collection
• Extraordinary sampling accuracy
• RFI rejection minimizes the
effects of outside interference
• Isolates problems with waveform
recording
• Optimizes A to D measurements
• Optional internet transports data
to you
• Enclosed unit can be used outdoors
Features
• 8 channel input:
4 voltage, 4 current
• 14 bit recording
• 8 Mbytes internal memory
• 6.4 Gbytes hard disk
• Sample rate 128/cycle
(optional 256/cycle)
• Relay input
• Real time clock
• Measures waveform faults
• Measures voltage dips and
surges
• Measures harmonics
• Measures flicker and imbalance
• Records voltage and current,
frequency and real power
• Computes demand, phase angle, P&Qs
power factor, and sequence This basic communications and Auto-event retrieval
components at PC configuration software provides • The recorder sends data
• Event triggering accuracy is autopoll and autocall support with automatically to the PC where it is
better than 2% auto-event retrieval for the P&QR. As most useful. Retrieval of profile,
• RS232 serial port part of the polling process, the cameo and/or fault data minimizes
• Internal modem option available recorder clock can be updated and time to retrieve data in critical
• Ethernet network option available events can be retrieved. P&Qs is an situations.
• Free phone support abbreviated version of Display Station
• Powerful P&Qs software for and Display Station Analysis. Configuration control
communications and analysis • Recorder configurations for up to
Autopoll/call 10 P&QRs are stored at the PC.
• Operates in a totally automatic P&Qs flags the user if there are
Benefits mode if configured; operating differences for better control.
both in parallel provides added
• Affordable fault recording reliability in detecting problems in 32-bit Windows software
• Provides power quality affirmation communication and minimizing • Operates on the most common
• Simple to use communication expenses. operating systems in use.
4.33
AMETEK
Recorders
Power and Fault Recorders
RiS P&QR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

INPUTS POWER SUPPLY
No. of channels 8 (4 voltage, 4 current) Input voltage range 88–300V dc, 85–264V ac, 50/60Hz
consult factory for other configurations 24 or 48Vdc optional
Voltage inputs (options) 150 V RMS maximum Power requirement 20 VA
300 V RMS maximum Battery Optional 12V for recorder operation
600 V RMS maximum
Star (wye) or delta connections REAL TIME CLOCK
Current inputs (options) 1/5A RMS nominal Clock source 32,768 Hz. crystal oscillator
100/200/500/1000 A RMS nominal Resolution 1 ms.
(1.4V fsd. Int. or ext. burden)
Range Time and date (including leap year
Designed to record to 40% overrange and day of the year).
Frequency response P&QR128 40Hz – 3kHz. (+0dB, -3dB for voltages) Synchronization 50/60 Hz from voltage input
DC – 3kHz (+0dB for currents)
Frequency response P&QR256 40Hz – 6kHz. (+0dB, -3dB for voltages) COMMUNICATIONS
DC – 6kHz (+0dB, -3dB for currents)
Serial port RS232 type.
Accuracy Better than 0.2% of full scale Speed up to 57 kBaud
Modem (optional) Hayes compatible type internal.
RECORDING (up to 57.6 kBaud)
Recording resolution 14 bits. Network (option) TCP/IP 10Base2 or 10BaseT
Recording accuracy +/- 1 lsb.
Sample rate 128 samples per cycle VOLTAGE WITHSTAND
6.4/7.68k samples per second Isolation Channel to channel (voltage)
option for 256 samples per cycle Channel to ground.
2 samples per cycle for high-speed 2 kV RMS for 1 minute
RMS envelope capture (as per IEEE C37.90-1987/IEC 255-5)
Impulse voltage withstand Channel to channel (voltage)
DATA STORAGE Channel to ground
Internal memory 8 Mbytes 5 kV, 1.2/50 ms. 0.5 Joule
Hard disk 6.4 Gbytes (minimum) (as per IEEE C37.90-1987/IEC 255-5)
Electrical fast transient (EFT) 4 kV, 5/50 ns. 15 ms burst length
RECORDED DATA non-maloperate (as per
IEEE C37.90-1987/IEC 255-22-1)
Waveform Capture 4 cycles pre, 12 cycles post
Option for up to 2 seconds Surge withstand (SWC) 2.5 kV, 1 MHz HF burst disturbance
Up to 1 minute of RMS data non-maloperate (as per
IEEE C37.90-1987/IEC 255-22-1)
Trending – (16 weeks) Voltages: 1 minute min/max/avg
Currents: 1 minute min/max/avg RFI immunity 10 V/m 20 MHz – 1 GHz (80% AM
Frequency: 1 minute min/max/avg @ 1 kHz). Non – maloperate (as per
Watts: 1 minute min/max/avg IEEE C37.90-1987/BS EN 50082)
Harmonics: 10 minute RFI emission — radiated 40 dB mV/m (27 – 130 MHz)
min/max/avg/angle 47 dB mV/m (130 MHz – 1 GHz)
to the 50th harmonic EN 55022B (class ‘B’ limits)
Imbalance: 10 minute min/max/avg (as per BS EN 50081-1)
Flicker: 10 minute Pst — conducted (150 kHz – 30 Mhz)
Metered values kVAh EN 55022B (class ‘B’ limits)
±kWh — harmonics (100 Hz – 30 MHz)
±kVArh (as per IEC 555 class ‘A’ limits)
Computed (at PC) Phase angle, power factor, demand Electrostatic discharge (ESD) 8 kV contact, 15 kV radiated
(sliding or fixed window) and discharge. Non-maloperate
sequence components (as per IEC 801-2)
EVENT TRIGGERING ENCLOSURE

Trigger parameters Over/under level with hysteresis. Mounting Wall
ROC & THD
Size 200 x 300 x 120 mm
Accuracy Better than 2% (7.87 x 11.8 x 4.7 in.)
Pre-fault time 4 cycles (128 or 256 samp/cyc); Optional 300 x 400 x 210 mm
1-10 sec. (2 samp/cyc) (11.75 x 16 x 8.25)
Post-fault time 12 cycles (128 or 256 samp/cyc); Weight 6 Kg. (13.2lbs.)
1-59 sec. (2 samp/cyc) Optional 8kg (17.6 lbs)
External trigger Relay contact (24-120Vdc nominal)
ENVIRONMENT
Operating temperature -10 to 50 °C 14 to 122 °F
Storage temperature -40 to 70 °C -40 to 158 °F
Humidity 5 – 95% RH (non condensing)
4.34
Communications, mathematical functions. There are two
major modules of Ametek software
standard level or rate of change
triggering can be recorded by the TR-
Analysis and available. 100, TR-2000 or P&QR.
System Communications Sets of three analog channels can be

This provides communication to, and defined as phase groups. For each
Configuration configuration of, the TR-100, TR-2000 group, zero and negative sequence
and P&QR series either (1) remotely via component trigger levels can be set.
Software a modem link to a Master Station Again, the display of near real time data
A single communication and anaylis normally located in central engineering ensures correct values are used and
package is used for the TR-100, TR- or at a control center, (2) locally via a inputs are wired in properly (see next
2000 and P&QR series recorders. direct connection on site or (3) via an page). Two phase groups are available
Additionally, when RVComms is used, Ethernet link. per 8 inputs.
the powerful analysis software can be
used for the older TR-1600 series The communications software has a The recorders can be set to dial up the
recorders. unique feature that allows the user to Master Station when a fault is recorded
set over and/or under trigger levels with (Auto Call) and the Master Station can
Ametek’s software programs provide hysteresis on the analog channels with be programmed to contact each
advanced fault analysis, communica- the actual signal displayed in near real recorder in a region at regular intervals
tion and configuration functions in a time. This waveform is overlaid with the to check for new records (Auto Poll). A
486 based PC-compatible (minimum) equivalent trigger levels which improves communications log records any
computer. The programs have a very the ease and accuracy of trigger problems incurred during auto polling.
flexible graphical user interface which settings (see next page).
uses Windows 95™,98™, NT or Unauthorized parameter updates and
Windows 2000™. Many fault analysis Sub cycle drop out or THD triggers record downloading can be protected
features are provided and there are measure the quality of a voltage or by passwords. A recorder may be
optional programs for additional current waveform. Small perturbations remotely triggered from the Master
which would not be detected by Station to generate test records.
Architecture
Centronics
(not available
Typically 69 or on P&QR)
120 VAC nominal Transient
Fault Recorder DNP (optional TR-100,
TR-2000)
Resistive
Typically 1 or Current Local Modem
5A AC nominal Shunt
RS-232 Internal
or
External
Split Core
Current TR-100 Series
Typically 1 or Transformer TR-2000 Series Fax
5A AC nominal with built-in P&QR Series Machine
Terminating
Resistor
Multi-recorder cross trigger
System status relays Remote Master

Evaluation Station
DC pulse time sync. (TR-100 only)
Portable Master
Optional IRIG-B time code (TR-100 only) Evaluation Station
GPS (TR-2000 only) RS-232

Direct
50/60 Hz line synch (P&QR only) Connection
(optional Ethernet)
4.35
AMETEK
Recorders
4.36
AMETEK
Power Quality
Deregulation means Ametek ACE 4000

increased competition. Fully integrates an industrial grade
Pentium™ PC with a high speed DSP
For even modest sized based power quality analyzer in a
power customers, an portable package.
investment in power
quality monitoring is one Ametek ACE 2000
of the best a company This permanent or portable unit
measures all aspects of power
can make. Ametek consumption and performs the tasks of
Power Instruments over 100 instruments.
offers an array of
accurate, flexible and Ametek ACE Quatro
High resolution cycle-by-cycle power
easy to use power analysis from a smart portable featuring
quality equipment and advanced single & three-phase power
software. quality monitor/recorder and simulta-
neous sampling of 4 voltages, 4
currents.
PQRx
Innovative, comprehensive and Ametek Power Instruments: providing
affordable, the PQRx is a permanently answers about your power consump-
mounted recorder that provides the tion is only the beginning.
information you need to decide exactly
how to buy your power and looks at
key power quality parameters.
AmetekPQSystem
A complete, fully automated system
which uses the power of the internet
for everything from data collection to
comprehensive report generation.
AmetekPQService
Provides continuous monitoring and
analysis and data collection, generates
reports and supplies answers.
DL-8000/DL-9000
Advanced power monitoring systems
based on our fault recorder technology
in portable packages.
Display Station Software

Ametek’s software packages provide
complete control of power quality
monitors and recorders, extensive sets
of data viewing tools and a variety of
communications options for the PQRx,
DL-8000 and DL-9000.
AmetekAiPower
Data monitoring and analysis software
that expertly reads your power quality
recorder data, analyzes it and recom-
mends solutions.
5.1
AMETEK
Power Quality
PQRx
Power Quality
Recorders
Comprehensive Power
Quality Recorders with
Advanced Features
“Check up” on power quality data
with the affordable PQRx Power
Quality Recorder.
Whether you are a utility diagnosing a

power quality problem on the power
grid, or a facilities manager performing
a scheduled check up on power quality
concerns in your plant… the PQRx is
the perfect, affordable remedy you’ve • Ametek Power Instruments
been looking for. PQRx has excellent RFI
rejection, minimizing the
unwanted effects of cell
For Utilities phones, computers,
broadcast, or hand-held
Deregulation means increased compe- radios.
tition for utilities. Providing affordable • You can identify and isolate
power quality affirmation to your key problems using the fault
customers is critical to keep customers recording and waveform
from migrating away, and to win new capture capabilities.
customers. The PQRx offers utilities • The low cost PQRx offers great
incredible flexibility, ease of use, flexibility to the Power Quality
durability, and perhaps most impor- Economic Incentives! professional. For instance, you
tantly, dramatic cost savings! can take advantage of its
One of the biggest reasons to buy your multiple-voltage ranges and
new PQRx is purely economic! We’ve selectable CT scaling to obtain
For Customers packed many high end recording improved accuracy by optimizing
functions into a well built unit that is your A to D measurement.
For even modest sized power custom- offered at a very low cost. The PQRx • Best of all, these units have
ers, doing business in this newly has many of the functions that you optional internet connectivity so
deregulated environment, a power quality would expect in a power quality you can get the data you need
monitor is one of the best investments recorder. However, we would like to without having to leave your
your company can make! Why just spot point out many features that are rare chair.
check? The PQRx is an affordable for a unit at this price, and even some • The dynamic Ametek PQSystem
monitor which allows continous monitor- features that are not available on other software will quickly and easily
ing, reducing and even eliminating the units at any price! help you get the most out of your
odds of missing a PQ event. Further, you PQRx. A more complete
collect important trend information, which • First, this Power Quality Recorder explanation of PQSystem LE
indicates if problems are getting worse, has enormous data storage software follows.
better, or are just a one-time anomaly. capacity. It comes with a • Check out the Technical
Your power quality monitor will help you standard 6 gigs of storage. This Specifications chart to see all the
take a survey of sufficient length to gives you plenty of flexibility for terrific features offered by the
provide the information you need to long measurement surveys, or PQRx.
decide exactly how to best buy your short highly concentrated data
power: spot, flat rate, time of use, collection. Whether it’s avoiding a costly plant
seasonal. Your PQRx can easily pay for • The units are phase locked shut down, finding power quality
itself in a short period of time. Providing looped to offer you extraordinary problems or just making sure that you
answers about your power consumption sampling accuracy even if the are paying the lowest possible price for
is only the beginning, many additional frequency you are monitoring your electricity usage… the Ametek
benefits are yours with an PQRx from shifts. Most competitive products Power Instruments PQRx is the right
Ametek Power Instruments. don’t have this capability. prescription for you!
5.2
PQRx Features
• Relay input
• Real time clock
surges
frequency, and real power
• Computes demand, phase angle,
power factor, and sequence
components at PC
• Event triggering accuracy is
better than 1%
• RS232 serial port
• Internal modem option available
• Ethernet network option available
• Free phone support
• Ametek PQ System software
PQRx Benefits
• Provides complete range of
power quality events
• Simple to use
price for power
• Large memory capacity allows for PQSystem Software Automation
long surveys or short • Automated data collection and
concentrated data collection Automated data gathering and compre- analysis
• Permits longer survey periods hensive report generation for the PQRx • Automatically generated reports
than traditional power quality are provided by the PQSystem software.
studies This software uses the power of the Warning System
• Extraordinary sampling accuracy internet to provide instant analysis and • Avoid power quality problems
• RFI rejection minimizes the solutions to reduce downtime, prevent with continuous analysis and
effects of outside interference equipment damage and monitor energy trend information
• Isolates problems with waveform costs. • Identify problems before damage
recording occurs
• Optimizes A to D measurements Answers, not just data
• Optional internet transports data • Instant, automated analysis and Open Architecture
to you solutions • No compatibility limitations
• Enclosed unit can be used • Continuous review and • Interfaces with most monitors
outdoors interpretation of data • Stores data in ODBC compliant
• Low maintenance • Reduces downtime from PQ database
• Artificial intelligence in software problems
provides answers and solutions, • Manages energy costs
not just data Auto-call and paging
• Unique to PQSystem and PQRx,
The power of the web the recorder auto-transfers data to
• Easy access to analysis reports a PC and the PC pages appropriate
• Download reports to your word personnel for near instantaneous
processor notification of problems
5.3
AMETEK
Power Quality
RiS PQRx TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INPUTS REAL TIME CLOCK
No. of channels 8 (4 voltage, 4 current) Clock source 32,768 Hz. crystal oscillator
consult factory for other configurations Resolution 1 ms.
Voltage inputs (options) 150 V RMS maximum Range Time and date (including leap year
300 V RMS maximum and day of the year).
600 V RMS maximum
Synchronization 50/60 Hz from voltage input
Star (wye) or delta connections
Current inputs (options) 1/5A RMS nominal
100/200/500/1000 A RMS nominal
COMMUNICATIONS
(1.4V fsd. Int. or ext. burden) Serial port RS232 type.
Designed to record to 40% overrange Speed up to 57 kBaud
Frequency response 40Hz – 3kHz. (+0dB, -3dB for voltages) Modem (standard) Hayes compatible type internal.
DC – 3kHz (+0dB for currents) (up to 57.6 kBaud)
Accuracy Better than 0.2% of full scale Network (option) TCP/IP 10Base2 or 10BaseT
RECORDING VOLTAGE WITHSTAND

Recording resolution 14 bits. Isolation Channel to channel (voltage)
Recording accuracy +/- 1 lsb. Channel to ground.
2 kV RMS for 1 minute
Sample rate 128 samples per cycle
(as per IEEE C37.90-1987 IEC 255-5)
6.4/7.68k samples per second
2 samples per cycle for high-speed Impulse voltage withstand Channel to channel (voltage)
RMS envelope capture Channel to ground
5 kV, 1.2/50 ms. 0.5 Joule
(as per IEEE C37.90-1987 IEC 255-5)
DATA STORAGE
Internal memory 8 Mbytes
non-maloperate (as per
Hard disk 6.4 Gbytes (minimum) IEEE C37.90-1987 IEC 255-22-1)
Surge withstand (SWC) 2.5 kV, 1 MHz HF burst disturbance
Waveform Capture 4 cycles pre, 12 cycles post IEEE C37.90-1987 IEC 255-22-1)
Option for up to 2 seconds RFI immunity 10 V/m 20 MHz – 1 GHz (80% AM
Up to 1 minute of RMS data @ 1 kHz). Non – maloperate (as per
Trending – 16 weeks Voltages: 1 minute min/max/avg IEEE C37.90-1987 BS EN 50082)
Currents: 1 minute min/max/avg RFI emission — radiated 40 dB mV/m (27 – 130 MHz)
Frequency: 1 minute min/max/avg 47 dB mV/m (130 MHz – 1 GHz)
Watts: 1 minute min/max/avg EN 55022B (class ‘B’ limits)
Harmonics: 10 minute (as per BS EN 50081-1)
min/max/avg/angle
— conducted (150 kHz – 30 Mhz)
to the 50th harmonic
EN 55022B (class ‘B’ limits)
Imbalance: 10 minute min/max/avg
Flicker: 10 minute Pst — harmonics (100 Hz – 30 MHz)
(as per IEC 555 class ‘A’ limits)
Metered values kVAh
±kWh Electrostatic discharge (ESD) 8 kV contact, 15 kV radiated
±kVArh discharge. Non-maloperate
(as per IEC 801-2)
EVENT TRIGGERING
Trigger parameters Over/under level with hysteresis.
ENCLOSURE
ROC & THD Mounting Wall
Accuracy Better than 1% Size 300 x 400 x 210 mm
(11.75 x 16 x 8.25)
Pre-fault time 4 cycles (128 or 256 samp/cyc);
1-10 sec. (2 samp/cyc) Weight 8 Kg. (13.2lbs.)
Post-fault time 12 cycles (128 or 256 samp/cyc);
1-59 sec. (2 samp/cyc) ENVIRONMENT
External trigger Relay contact Operating temperature -10 to 50 °C 14 to 122 °F
POWER SUPPLY Humidity 5 – 95% RH (non condensing)
Input voltage range 88–300V dc, 85–264V ac, 50/60Hz
24 or 48Vdc optional
Power requirement 20 VA
Battery Optional 12V for recorder operation
5.4
AmetekPQSystem AmetekPQSystem is a complete
web-based system which includes:
• Analyzes and uploads trend
analysis to the web
Total Monitoring/ • Power quality monitors • Reduces downtime and equipment
• A communications system for damage from power quality
Analysis Solution collecting data from customer/ problems and manages energy costs
remote sites
Automated Data • A power family of fully integrated The power of the web
software applications. Your • Easy access to the analysis
Gathering and Report Ametek Sitemaster includes reports on the Internet
Delivery using the power Ametek Alarm, Ametek Pager, • Personal password-protected
of the internet Ametek Report Generator, web pages for customer
Ametek Ai Browser, • Customers can view their most
Given the greater range of energy Communications and Drivers recent power quality report,
choices and the complexity of diagnos- • Database, data graphing and download the report to their word
ing power quality problems, a utility- charting tools processor, view their energy and
operated power monitoring and • Analysis and reporting software demand trends (as well as other
analysis service is essential. • Paging and warning functions measurement parameters
• Web-based reporting including harmonics)
AmetekPQSystem allows energy • Can include installation and
training by Ametek technicians
providers to supply their customers The power of automation
with analysis services at a fraction of • Create a list of the jobs you want
the cost of a conventional power done, and the timing, then
monitoring and analysis system. For Total Solution for Utilities AmetekPQSystem does the rest.
commercial or industrial customers, a From trending harmonics to
smaller scale, fully automated monitor- • Provides a total solution for producing a complete power
ing and analysis system is available. utilities to serve customers quality analysis report,
• Competitive advantage in today’s AmetekPQSystem makes your life
deregulated market simple
• Proof of performance for quality • Automated data collection and
delivered automated data analysis
• Automatically generates reports
and makes them available to you
Total Solution for and/or your customers
Large Users
Power warning system
• Establish a reasonable cost of • Optional activation of a pager
power quality when a harmful power quality
• Monitor quality of incoming event is detected
power • Complete analysis of problem is
• Identify sources of power quality available on the customer’s
problems password-protected web page
• Provide solutions • Avoid power quality problems
Own your own complete with the continuous analysis and
trend information
custom Power Quality • Identify problems before downtime
System sized to your needs Benefits
• Provides answers, not just data or equipment damage occurs
and gain an edge in today’s with instant, automated analysis
deregulated market and solutions based on
sophisticated artificial intelligence
Utilities, multi-facility, single-point facility technologies
and large customers can own a com- • Continuously reviews data and
plete system and capitalize on today’s employs expert embedded
deregulated market. This complete reasoning to interpret information
system is fully automated — from data and generate executive analysis
collection to comprehensive reports. reports
AmetekPQSystem uses the power of the • Determines the severity of a
internet to deliver information where it is problem and its origin, along with
needed most. AmetekPQSystem is a a generally accepted solution to
complete turnkey package which the problem
includes installation and training by • Reports are output in word
Ametek engineers. processing format for ease of editing
5.5
AMETEK
Power Quality
The power of open
architecture
• A true open architecture system
without compatibility limitations
• Interfaces with many different
power monitors
• Ametek is committed to
developing communications
drivers for new monitors as they
are introduced into the market
• Choose the monitoring hardware
that best suits your needs
• Stores data in an ODBC Customers can view energy and demand on their web site.
compliant database with a
published schema
• Use widely available commercial
applications like EXCEL, or
AmetekPQSystem’s easy-to-learn
universal data viewing and
graphing software,
AmetekAi•Browser™
• AmetekAi•Browser™ includes all
of the charts you want, including
CBEMA, as well as time plots,
phasors, and harmonic distribution,
plot data from different
monitoring equipment all in the
same chart View and download measurement data in an
ODBC compliant database.
Why AmetekPQSystem?
Issue In-house PQSystem

Power Quality Monitoring for Customers Capital & Labor Intensive Affordable
Use of Customer’s Existing PQ Monitors Seldom Yes, many models supported
On-Staff Engineer Trained in Power Quality Analysis Highly Advised Optional
Outside Consultants to advise beyond basic PQ matters Often Required Never Required
Round the Clock Customer PQ Monitoring Capital & Labor Intensive Automated & Affordable
Data Collection Manual Automated
PQ Problem Analysis After the fact Instantly
PQ Problem Identification from Data Time intensive Automatic Expert System
Notification of Problem Often panic shut down Instantly
Off-premises Notification of PQ Problem Not likely Internet, optional pager
Reports Time Consuming Automated & Simple
Multiple Site Monitoring Difficult & Expensive Simple common database
Keep Customer’s monthly costs low Seldom Always
Information available 24 hours a day Unlikely Yes, on customer web page
5.6
AmetekPQService PQ Warning System
• optional service activates a pager
Affordable Power when a harmful power quality
event is detected
Quality Service • generates a new PQ report for
Over The Net analysis and answers
• continuous analysis and trend
information identifies problems
Automated power quality before your company experiences
service is now available a loss
for one low monthly fee...
with no capital
investment Put the Power of the Web
to Work for You
Getting the answers that you need with • easy access to and viewing of
AmetekPQService is simple. You do reports via the Internet
not need to select, purchase, operate • personal web pages are
and maintain power monitoring Here’s How It Works… password protected and can be
hardware and software. Everything is viewed with a standard browser
included. One monthly fee covers it all. 1. You get power power quality • reports and raw data
Continuous monitoring and analysis monitors installed and tested measurements can be
means that AmetekPQService is there downloaded to your PC
whenever you need it, collecting data, 2. You get data monitored at
generating reports and supplying frequent intervals
answers. Cash in on Deregulation
3. You get written reports with clear
• AmetekPQService provides
answers
energy consumption profiles that
Just buy the answers 4. You get instant internet reports,
help match your facility with the
and reduce your cost of best Energy Service Provider
answers anywhere, anytime
• AmetekPQService monitoring
power quality! ensures that your facility receives
5. You get cost saving demand and
acceptable levels of power
AmetekPQService is a comprehensive energy reports
quality at all times
service which provides commercial and • if power quality is compromised
industrial facilities with continuous 6. You get prompt problem and
AmetekPQService determines if
monitoring and analysis of their power alarm notification
the problem is in-house or with
systems. Reports are generated your ESP
around the clock and automatically 7. You Get Measurement Data: View
• disputes with your ESP can be
posted on your personal web page in and download raw measurement
quickly resolved
an easy-to-read format, making data in an ODBC compliant
information available for review at any database
time. AmetekPQService is there
whenever you need it. Professional Reports
AmetekPQService is simple. You do Simple Power Management • complete reports with color
not need to select, purchase, operate • web-based automated remote charts and graphs make
and maintain power monitoring analysis identifying problems easy
hardware and software. One monthly • includes a power quality monitor, • record power disturbances,
fee covers it all. Ametek offers an installation, monthly executive severity, and cause
optional service which activates a report and a password protected • record origination (whether within
pager when the system detects a web page your facility or from the
harmful power quality event. Other distribution grid), equipment
service options are available, and affected and possible solutions
Ametek Power Instruments can provide • separate reports are generated
custom support as needed. Around The Clock Analysis for each monitoring device
• continuous monitoring of power • energy reports chart usage,
system demand, and peak billing
• generates easy-to-read parameters
professional reports • track and analyze harmonics,
• supplies answers, not just data peak loading and other
• reduces need for outside parameters
consultants • verify IEC, ANSI and IEEE
compliance
5.7
AMETEK
Power Quality
AmetekPQService is a
complete system
which includes:
• power monitors
• a communications system for
collecting data from customer/
remote sites
• database, data graphing and
charting tools
• analysis and reporting software
• paging and warning functions
• web-based reporting
Why Is AmetekPQService Better?
Issue In-house PQService

Purchase Of Expensive PQ Data Collection Device(s) Yes No
Use Your Existing Monitors Yes Yes (most units supported)
On-Staff Engineer Trained In Power Quality Analysis Highly Advised Optional
Outside Consultants To Advise Basic PQ Matters Often Required Not Required
Round The Clock Monitoring Seldom Always
Data Collection Usually manual Automated
Prompt PQ Problem Analysis After The Fact Instantly
PQ Problem Identification from Data Time Intensive Automatic Expert System
Notification of Problem Often Shut Down Often Averts Shut Down
Off-premises Notification of PQ Problem Not Likely Internet and Optional Page
Multiple Site Monitoring Difficult, Expensive Simple Common Database
Low monthly costs Seldom Always
Money Saving Power Usage & Demand Information Unavailable Yes. Often Pays For Itself
5.8
AMETEK
Power Quality
DL-8000 and
DL-9000 Portable
Power Quality
Monitors
The DL-8000 and DL-9000
Power Quality Monitors
are advanced power
monitoring systems in a
rugged portable package.
The DL-8000 and DL-9000 portable

systems are equipped to support a
range of measurement transducers
and connection options providing an The DL-8000 portable has been
attractive and flexible monitoring designed to be easily installed on-site,
system for the power utility, vastly reducing any commissioning
commercial and industrial user. time. The system includes optional
push-fit (shrouded) protective rear
An extensive suite of Windows™ based panel connections to analog and digital
software is available with the portable measurement points using fused jaw-
system for local (laptop PC) or remote clips and non-invasive CT clamps.
setup, data retrieval, analysis and
reporting via modem or network
communications.
Data For:
• Motor Starts
• Relay, Fuse and recloser
coordination and misoperation
studies
• Load Balancing
• Harmonic magnitudes
• Co-gen plant monitoring
• Motor control center monitoring
• Sags and Swells
• Steady-State Voltage Compliance
• Surges and transient changes
• Equipment Sizing
• Data needed for K-Factor
calculations
• Automatic Transfer Switch
testing/monitoring
5.9
AMETEK
Power Quality
Features:
• Rugged Enclosure with Carry
Handle
• Fault Recording using a Wide
Range of Programmable Triggers
• Power Quality Event Capture and
Analysis
• Provides 8 Analog/16 Digital Input
Channels or optional 16 Analog/
32 Digital Input Channels
• Uses a Range of CT Clamps
for Non-Invasive Connection
• Supports ∆–Y (3 or 4 wire) VT
Connections
• Extensive Windows™ based
Applications Software
• Universal AC/DC Supply
• Logged Recording of Voltage, Harmonics Logging Comparing Same
Current, Harmonics and Location at 2 Different Days
Frequency using Integral Hard
Disk
Options:
• Cellular Modem for Remote
Communications
• Ethernet Card for Network
Support
• Push-fit Rear Panel Connectors
and Test Leads for Simple
Installation
• Voltage Divider box for 600, 480
and 277V Systems
• CT Interface Unit supporting a
Wide Range of CT Ratios
Waveform Capture (simultaneous on up to

16 analog and 32 digital inputs)
5.10
Voltage Fault Propagation Comparing
Voltage Dip Severity at Different Power
System Voltage Levels
Voltage Dip Profiles for Power Quality

Assessment Comparing 2 Sites Over Same
Time Interval
5.11
AMETEK
Power Quality
DL8000
Portable Power Quality Monitor
• 8 or 16 Analog Channels Features
(CONTINUED)
The DL-8000 Series brings to the
• 16 or 32 Digital Channels ■ 486 industrial grade CPU
market a Power Quality Recording • Simple-to-Service Plug-in
System with unparalleled levels of ■ Downloadable firmware
Circuit Card Design
flexibility, while providing the user with
the worlds most user friendly • Substation Environment ■ Internal hard disk drive
software available today. Qualified
■ Up to 192 samples per cycle
Two portable units are available with up • Extensive, Flexible Remote- sample rate
to 16 analog/32 digital input channels Controlled Triggering
on the DL-8000. The DL-8000 will ■ Real time graphical display and
• Full 12-Bit A/D With numeric measurement for easy
operate as a stand-alone system or link Simultaneous Sampling
to a PC-based Master Station. In terms and accurate trigger level setting
of performance, the system has a • DC Coupling Standard
sample rate of up to 192 samples per ■ Software triggers available
cycle, with a vast selection of standard • Standard ISA Bus simultaneously
triggers simultaneously available on Architecture For Easy • Under limit violation with
each channel or on a system basis to Upgrades adjustable hysteresis per input
initiate wareform capture. These (real time display/
include over and under limit violation • Simple Point-And-Click
Windows Interface measurement available)
with adjustable hysteresis, rate of
change, zero and negative sequence, • Over limit violation with
• Full Context-Sensitive Help adjustable hysteresis per input
sub-cycle drop out (sinewave quality)
and frequency. • Waveforms Displayed At (real time display/
Highest Resolution Possible measurement available)
The high speed, high resolution On Your Monitor • Rate of change trigger per
recording and flexible triggering modes input
make the Ametek DL-8000 ideal for • Fault, Trend, Harmonic,
capturing all forms of power quality and Flicker Recording • Sub-cycle drop out (sinewave
from sags, swells and lightning strikes Simultaneously distortion) trigger per input
to spikes and sub-cycle distortion. It • Negative sequence component
• Optimize Switchgear
can be used for verifying protection/
Maintenance (real time display/
breaker operation as well as many
measurement available)
types of power quality monitoring. • Long-Term Load Data For
Planning • Zero sequence component
The DL-8000’s unique dynamic post (real time display/
fault length optimizes data memory • Harmonic Recording measurement available)
usage by terminating the recording of a
problem once a steady state has • Voltage Quality Monitoring • Over, Under and Rate-of-
returned for a predefined period. Short Change of Frequency (1 per
• Windows™ Based Graphical chassis)
faults generate short records while a User Interface (GUI) For
longer fault will cause the Ease Of Use • Digital Inputs; level, or edge
fault recording period to be extended with selectable return-to-
normal triggering
Local parameter setting and record
transfer is performed simply by ■ DC pulse or optional IRIG-B (time
plugging in a portable computer code) time synchronization
running Ametek’s Windows™ based
software into the port on the front
panel of the DL-8000. One computer
can be used for many DL-8000’s,
thereby reducing costs and making the
parameter and fault record data more
secure.
5.12
Architecture
Typically 69 or
120 VAC nominal
(277, 480, 600V optional) Centronics
Power Quality Recorder

Local Modem
Spring loaded
CT connected CT RS-232 Internal
Sealing or
to secondary or Box External Fax
load level (optional)
currents
DL-8000 and DL-9000
System status relays

Remote Master
DC pulse time sync. Evaluation Station
(DL-8000)
Optional IRIG-B time code Portable Master

(DL-8000) Evaluation Station
GPS Antenna (DL-9000)

RS-232
Direct
Connection
(optional Ethernet)
5.13
AMETEK
Power Quality
DL-8000 inputs are wired in properly (see next to check for new records (Auto Poll). A
page). Two phase groups are available communications log records any
Power Quality Monitor per 8 inputs. problems incurred during auto polling.
Communications, The DL-8000 can be set to dial up the Unauthorized parameter updates and
Master Station when a fault is recorded record downloading can be protected
Analysis and (Auto Call) and the Master Station can by passwords. A DL-8000 may be
be programmed to contact each remotely triggered from the Master
System recorder in a region at regular intervals Station to generate test records.
Configuration
Printing of Fault Records
Software HEADER
Fault records may be printed
Ametek’s software programs provide
TR-100
DL-8000 locally by the DL-8000 as shown
TRANSIENT RECORDER
in the sample on the left, or
advanced data analysis, remotely at the Master Station
communication and configuration Location
Machine Name
:
:
Dartford
Demo 1 using Ametek Analysis software.
functions in a 486 PC-compatible Recorder Number : 2
Every record has the location of
Trigger : Analogue under on channel 1 'VRed'
(minimum) computer. The programs Trigger time : 14 Aug 1995 11:42:50.481 the DL-8000, the time and date
have a very flexible graphical user Analogue channels
of the record and the source of
interface which uses Windows 95™, Channel Definition Triggering the trigger.
Channel Nominal F.S.D Units Over Under SubC ROC
Windows 98™, NT™, or 2000™. 1 VRed 132.2 176.2 kV 98%, 0% CONFIGURATION
2 VYellow 132.2 176.2 kV 98%, 0%
Many fault analysis features are 3
4 -
VBlue 132.2
0.0
176.2
0.0
kV 98%, 0%
The names, scales and trigger
provided and there are optional 5
6
7
IRed
IYellow
IBlue
700.0
700.0
700.0
14000.0
14000.0
14000.0
A
A
A
levels of each analog and digital
programs for additional mathematical 8 INeutral 700.0 14000.0 A 110%, 0%
channel are shown next.
functions. There are two major Phase Groups
PHASE GROUP
modules of Ametek software available. Phase Group Definition Triggering
Channels Zero seq. Neg. seq.

CONFIGURATION
1 1,2,3 Phase group 1
2 4,5,6 Phase group 2 Two phase groups are available
Communications per every 8 inputs.
Digital Channels
Channel Definition Triggering

This provides communication to, and Channel Normal Profile
configuration of, the DL-8000 series 1 Digital 1

2 Digital 2
Open
Open
Yes
Yes
Edge
Edge
either (1) remotely via a modem link to 4 Digital 4
5 Digital 5
Open
Open
Yes
Yes
Edge
Edge
a Master Station normally located in 7 Digital 7
8 Digital 8
Open
Open
Yes
Yes
Edge
Edge
central engineering or at a control 10 Digital 10
11 Digital 11
Open
Open
Yes
Yes
center, (2) locally via a direct 12 Digital 12

13 Digital 13
14 Digital 14
Open
Open
Open
Yes
Yes
Yes
connection on site or (3) via an 15 Cross Trigger

16 Digital 16
Open
Open
No
Yes
Ethernet link. Digital debounce : 10 ms
Fault profile
The communications software has a Fault Level - RMS
unique feature that allows the user to Analogue Channel Pre-fault Immediate Final Post-clearance Units
RECORD PROFILE
1 VRed 132.1 127.6 105.4 132.5 kV The configuration is followed by a
set over and/or under trigger levels with 2 VYellow 132.7 132.0 132.0 132.0 kV
3
4 -
VBlue 132.8
0.0
132.1
0.0
131.8
0.0
132.1
0.0
kV
profile of the record with actual
hysteresis on the analog channels with 5
6
IRed
IYellow
710.9
704.1
1401.4
697.3
2802.7
697.3
690.4
717.8
-
A
A signal levels, durations and digital
the actual signal displayed in near real 7
8
IBlue
INeutral
704.1
0.0
690.4
1045.9
710.9
2795.9
697.3
0.0
A
A
transition times measured from
time. This waveform is overlaid with the Digital Transitions
the data.
equivalent trigger levels which improves Digital Channel
1 Digital 1
State
Alarm
Time (ms)
the ease and accuracy to trigger 2 Digital 2 Normal 46
settings (see next page).

Fault Duration : 70 ms Time markers: 10 ms
8
Sub cycle drop out triggering measures GRAPHICAL PLOT

the quality of a voltage or current The analog and digital inputs are
waveform. Small perturbations which then displayed in graphical form
would not be detected by standard with horizontal lines indicating the
start and end of the trigger
level or rate of change triggering can
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
condition.
be recorded by the DL-8000.
Sets of three analog channels can be

defined as phase groups. For each
group, zero and negative sequence
component trigger levels can be set.
Again, the display of near real time data
ensures correct values are used and
5.14
Master Station Software File Features:
After retrieving the necessary fault • Full support of the Comtrade file
records using the communications format
software, the analysis package allows
the Master Station to display fault
records, analyze them and print to any
Windows™ supported printer. Display Features:
This analysis software provides a • Add, remove or rearrange
complete set of functions for complete Analog Trigger Settings Window, where the
Real Time Values for each Voltage and waveforms on screen
power system fault analysis with built in Current Input can be read. • Place waveform cursor to read
tools to simplify the setup of displays time and amplitude
and printer functions. The user • Select channels and time range
interface follows the recommended for display, printing or
Windows conventions and gives modification of display
several options to manipulate wave- parameters
forms through keyboard and/or mouse • Dynamic scaling of waveforms
operation.
Analysis Features:
• Reports channel that triggered

each fault record
• Instant graphic measurements of
time and amplitude differences
between two points on screen
Main Operating Parameters are set up from

this window.
Printing Features:
• Works with nearly all Windows™
supported printers
• High-resolution color printing
Zero and Negative Sequence Component

Trigger Settings Window, where three
channels make up a Phase Group. The Real
Time Sequence Components are displayed.
Color coding allows user to verify proper
channel selection and wiring.
5.15
AMETEK
Power Quality
Expert System Software
The suite of Expert System Software

consists of three separate packages
that are linked together by a shared
database created by the user in the
Automated Analysis portion of the
software.
Automated Analysis Results
The three packages are the Automated
Analysis, Voltage Dip Analysis, and Above is a sample of the automated
Breaker Performance Monitor. To analysis results obtained automatically
create a variety of plots from the during Auto-poll or Auto-call. This text
harmonic trend data recorded by a DL- Basic Substation Configuration can be viewed without having to open
8000, the Harmonix software program and view the waveform data. The full
is used. This screen is used to configure each waveform/fault data is still available for
circuit being monitored and the “filters” analysis if needed.
used to create reports. Thereby
increasing the efficient utilization of
data while reducing workload.
RMS Envelope Manual Analysis Output
The Automated Analysis software Above are the results from manually
provides the ability to plot the recorded calling up the automated analysis.
data as an RMS envelope for the entire Below is an Explanation Window that
file. Above is a plot of the voltages for can be accessed for a summary of why
an 11Kv (p-p) circuit. Note the min/max the program reached the conclusion
values given in the lower left of the plot. it did.
5.16
Voltage Dip Analysis
To the right is a sample plot from the

Voltage Dip Analysis software package.
This shows the ability to take a series
of faults from a specific location and
plot the voltage retained against the
duration of the faults, showing the
quantity of faults for each interval/%
retention. This is useful for comparing
voltage quality at different locations or
at the same location after changes to
the power system have been made.
Plots can be customized for time
interval, magnitude and voltage drop.
This allows users to customize the
plots shown to management or users
of electrical power.
Using the Voltage Dip Analysis soft-

ware, the same series of faults can be
plotted against standard limit curves
such as CEBEMA or other user created
curves as shown to the right.
5.17
AMETEK
Power Quality
Breaker Performance
Monitor
After each fault has been analyzed by
the Expert System, the results can be
passed to the Breaker Performance
Monitor software (BPM). At the bottom
is the BPM setup screen.
The BPM software uses the data for

each breaker operation to track
breaker wear 3 different ways: the
cumulative current interrupted (shown
at top right), the duty interrupted by the
breaker based in int (where n is user
defined) or the number of operations
for a breaker (shown at bottom right).
Since the information is kept in a

database, it is easy to switch between
the 3 methods eliminating the need for
stand-alone devices.
5.18
Power Analysis Tools Distance-To-Fault
Ametek’ Power Analysis Tools (PAT) is The Distance-To-Fault (DTF) program
a set of mathematical calculations uses user-entered line parameters to
which can be applied to waveforms analyze fault data and calculate
displayed using DL-8000 series distance to the fault from the recorder
software. PAT contains 3-phase which saw the fault. DTF is accurate to
calculations for lines or circuits, yielding 2% when untapped 2-terminal trans-
peak, RMS, per unit values, power mission lines are analyzed. It cannot be
quantities (MVA, MW, MVAR, X/R), used on tapped or multi-terminal lines.
frequency, distortion and sequence The user must have some knowledge
components. of line characteristics as computed by
Event Waveform Display Window, with the EMTP or similar computer simulations
It also provides phasor display and Power Analysis Toolkit active. Single to use DTF.
harmonic analysis. PAT is used by Channel Calculations made on any channel
calling the set of tool ICONs to the over a selected time frame.
screen, then selecting a waveform and
tool to be used. PAT will then display
the resulting graphical and tabular
data.
The use of color and graphics

enhances the understanding of the
power system situation.
Event Waveform Display Window, with fault

location results identified.

Power Analysis Toolkit active. Sequence
Components calculated on a Phase Group
basis. A Phasor Diagram is also displayed
with the angle based on the start of the
selected region.

Power Analysis Toolkit active. Harmonic
Analysis on any channel over a selected
time frame.
5.19
AMETEK
Power Quality
Recording Simultaneous
Faults, Trend Data and
Harmonic Profiles
The DL-8000 has the ability to record

faults, trend data and harmonic profiles
simultaneously eliminating the need for
circular chart recorders or other IED’s.
The trend is 26 weeks of data stored

as 1 minute min/max/average for every
channel and 1 frequency channel as
shown on the right.
This Trend Data can be used for load

balancing, voltage regulation verifica-
tion, equipment sizing and many other
applications.
5.20
Harmonix
Recording Harmonic Spectrum
The DL-8000 has the ability to periodi-

cally record a harmonic spectrum from
3 channels in the recorder. A variety of
plotting methods are available to the
user. To the right is a sample file
showing a 12-hour interval at a 10
minute sample rate. The magnitude is
plotted as a % of the fundamental
frequency (50/60Hz) input magnitude.
It can also be plotted as an absolute
magnitude. This shows all of the odd
harmonics plus THD as an average of
all phases of the circuit. Additional plot
options include comparing the mini-
mum, maximum and average
magnitudes of various harmonics
recorded for the time window selected.
Custom Limits
This plot shows the same data plotted

against a standard limit such as
IEEE519 or EN50160 (EN is shown).
Custom limits can be created by the
user. The green portion of the plot
show the % samples (over the time
window plotted) that were between 0-
5% of the maximum recorded value for
that harmonic. The blue portion is the
relative number of samples that were
between 5-95% of the maximum
recorded value and the red is the
relative number of samples in the 95-
100% range. Additionally, single
sample intervals for the harmonics for
all 3 phases can be displayed.
5.21
AMETEK
Power Quality
AmetekAiPower As easy as 1, 2, 3.
How AmetekAiPower
Data Monitoring 1. Reads your power quality Works
recorder’s measurement data
and Analysis AmetekAiPower is a Windows™
Software 2. Uses Artificial Intelligence to
analyze this data
program that uses Artificial Intelli-
gence tools, such as Fuzzy Logic,
Simply and Automatically Neural Networks, and Expert Sys-
3. Produces complete and tems, to look deep into your power
Read, Analyze and Report professional reports, giving you quality measurement data. The
Power Quality Data... and the answers you need. program applies this knowledge to
Have Room To Grow your data and automatically gener-
ates a complete professional report.
Not only is AmetekAiPower Software
Our Experts Join Your Not only are hours saved in analysis
a stand-alone product, it is part of a Team and report creation, the
complete system. For instance, you AmetekAiPower Software user has
can obtain around-the-clock Power AmetekAiPower Software is like the embedded knowledge of a staff of
Quality monitoring and analysis for having a team of power quality experts behind him.
one or multiple sites using the experts on staff. Today’s multi-
Internet. AmetekPQService is our function data recorders can capture Examples of the embedded knowl-
new web based, PQ monitoring and data about significant power quality edge or “rules” are voltage waveform
analysis service. Your “answers” to problems. But companies may not patterns of motor starts and capaci-
Power Quality problems are just a have the available manpower or tor switching. Such a rule might be,
mouse click away with any standard expertise to sift through all the data “if a major current increase is re-
browser. There are also many collected. AmetekAiPower quickly corded during a voltage sag, then the
advanced notification services, such extracts and organizes the answers origin of the sag is downstream from
as paging, that let you know when you need. the monitoring location.” With
there is a PQ concern at your facility. hundreds of embedded waveform
For more information, request our patterns and rules, the ANSWERS
you are looking for, the ones that
AmetekPQService brochure. Compatible! could affect the continuous operation
Our AmetekAiPower software can of your facility are quickly in your
There are many Power Quality hands.
even expand to meet the needs of measurement devices on the market
utilities and large end-users. Our today. AmetekAiPower will work with
PQSystem offers a state-of-the-art many major data recorders!
power monitoring and analysis AmetekAiPower Software knows your
system for utility and ESP customer recorder's data format. So if you
service programs. Request our already own a power quality monitor-
PQSystem brochure to see how your ing device, you'll now be able to
firm can be more competitive in this realize the all the benefits you
deregulated era where “customer originally bargained for. If you're in
service” counts most. need of power quality recorders,
Ametek Power Instruments offers the
most advanced, yet affordable units
A Simple Answer for on the market today. Either way…
Expert Analysis AmetekAiPower software integrates
with your both your past and future!
For many companies, the promised
benefits of Power Quality technology
have gone unrealized. Despite
investing in expensive monitoring
equipment and manpower, the
answers to their power quality
problems remains locked within their
data. Until today! Ametek Power
Instruments new AmetekAiPower
software unlocks the answers hidden
within your Power Quality data!
5.22
Here are just a few examples
of the reports AUTOMATICALLY
generated by AmetekAiPower.
(For additional full size reports visit
www.rochester.com/pdf/pqreports.pdf)
• Site Summary
• Most Severe Event
• Statistical Analysis
• Disturbance Analysis
• Power and Harmonic Analysis
• Run Summary
• Plus many more
Why AmetekAiPower?
Issue Before AiPower AfterAiPower

Interpreting Data for PQ Monitor Required Extensive Review Automatic
On-Staff Engineer Trained in Power Quality Analysis Highly Advised Optional
Outside Consultants to advise beyond basic PQ matters Often Required Never Required
Use of multiple PQ Monitors from different manufacturers Various Software Needed Simple,
Single Analysis Software
Prompt PQ Problem Analysis After the fact Instantly
PQ Problem Identification from Data Time intensive Automatic Expert System
Notification of Problem Often shut down Often averts shut down
Off-premises Notification of PQ Problem Not likely Internet and optional page
Multiple Site Monitoring Difficult & Expensive Simple common database
5.23
AMETEK
Power Quality
Ametek ACE 4000 Features

Power Quality • Makes over 10,000 measurements
each and every cycle
Analyzer synchronously on 8 input channels
(4 voltage & 4 current) with
Specifically designed for power quality absolutely no sampling or
monitoring applications demanding high measurement gaps
measurement accuracy and flexible • Simultaneously measures power,
electronic data distribution, the Ametek harmonics, waveform, flicker and
ACE 4000 represents a two-generation transients … along with other data
leap in the design of Power Quality • Records, analyzes, reports and
Analyzers. Our smartest analyzer ever, the displays graphs with unequalled
Ametek ACE 4000’s ability to diagnose accuracy in monitor comparison
virtually any power problem quickly, simply, • Communicates through Internet,
and accurately makes it the best tool ethernet, serial, parallel, modem,
available for electric power quality analysis. RF or GPS
This PQA will give you full cycle-by-cycle • Lightweight and built into a
measurements on 8 channels (4 voltage The Ametek ACE 4000 can be oper- weather resistant, rugged casing
and 4 current); and one survey set-up ated as a portable stand-alone unit or • 1 MHz peak detector, 4 MHz high
captures it all: power, harmonic, waveform, used remotely with built-in Ethernet, speed transient analyzer (optional)
flicker, and transient, simultaneously. Internet via 56K modem, serial, or • 6.2 Gbytes data storage capacity
parallel ports. It can exchange data
with other ACE instruments, like the
Instant “On-The-Spot” Quatro using PowerACE software. In Benefits
fact, it can operate with just about any
Analysis and Reports network.
• Has a color LCD including Smart
The world’s first truly portable Pentium- Touch Opti View™ for ease of use
All measurements including transients,
based power recorder and analyzer. • Impressive number crunching
harmonics to the 63rd order, sags and
Replaces more than five separate capability provided by Pentium™
swells, as well as every power flow
instruments by incorporating Power processor
parameter and flicker measurement are
Quality, Power, Harmonics, High • Huge data storage capacity
simultaneously recorded onto the
Speed Recorder, Wattmeter, Logger • Requires no external computer
instrument’s high capacity hard drive with
and Flicker measurement. thanks to fully integrated Ametek
true cycle-by-cycle measurement. With a
PowerAce for Windows™ analysis
minimum sampling rate of 256 samples
The Ametek ACE 4000 packs all the power software
per cycle on every channel and an
and flexibility you will need for acquiring and • Fully compatible with Ametek
operating frequency range of dc, 45-65
processing data with absolutely no gaps in ACE Quatro
Hz and 400 Hz, all recorded data,
measurement, sampling, or recording. • Free lifetime software upgrade
samples, phasors, waveforms, harmonic
• Generates reports
spectra, and measurement text can be
The lightweight Ametek ACE 4000 is a • Communicates on LAN or by
displayed in real-time with readout of
precise high-speed DSP based analyzer modem, Ethernet, Internet, parallel,
cursor-selected waveform amplitude/
combined with an industrial grade serial and modem communications
time values.
Pentium PC laptop computer. It is built to are standard equipment
acquire and process all data simulta- • Unparalleled measurement accuracy
Once a measurement survey is
neously and cycle-by-cycle, making • Multi-tasking, multi-user
complete, the ACE 4000’s Automatic
more than 10,000 measurements each Report Wizard will allow you to create a
cycle. Absolutely no gap in measure- power quality report for rapid review
ment, sampling, or recording ever occurs and analysis. There is no need to Applications
in the performance of independent download data do do an analysis or
functions. Everything you need is built generate a report. Simple, elegant, and • On location analysis
right into a compact, weather resistant powerful, the Ametek ACE4000 is the • Load profiling
IP65 NEMA3R, scientifically designed state-of-the-art in power monitoring • Customer satisfaction
casing. today. • Proof of performance
• Harmonics analysis
Fully integrated software combines all • Power quality survey
the power and features of Windows™ • Power factor surveys
with new Ametek Power ACE software. • Demand studies
The Ametek ACE 4000 comes with • Flicker surveys
Smart Touch Opti View™ touch screen • Transient detection
technology for fast operation, and an • Waveform capture and analysis
enormous memory for storing data.
5.24
Ametek ACE 4000 Power Quality Analyzer Specifications
5.25
AMETEK
Power Quality
Ametek ACE 2000
Power Quality
Analyzer
The Ametek ACE 2000, a high-perfor-
mance, high-capacity tool performs the
tasks of five separate portable instruments.
Its DSP computing power allows for
simultaneous recording of voltage and
current channels in four modes. These
modes — a fully integrated wattmeter,
harmonic analyzer, transient analyzer and
flicker analyzer — can be configured for
Display and clear visual presentation long term severity flicker indicators
each application, thus ensuring maximum
provide a comprehensive view of such as (CPF, P50%S, P10%S,
versatility and flexibility. Analysis is then
spectra, waveforms, transient events, P3%S, P0,1%S, PMAX, PST, PLT)
provided by ACE for Windows software,
phase vectors, and more for easy with any voltage input frequency
complete with automatic report generation.
analysis. Thanks to its user-friendly from 50-60 Hz.
interface and advanced Ametek ACE for • Eight fully-isolated analog input
With eight fully-isolated analog input
Windows analysis software, data can be channels for simultaneous recording
channels, its dual-processor architecture
printed, analyzed, and exported in of voltage and current channels in
means high measurement accuracy, even
numerous file formats including Excel™, four modes
with extremely distorted waveforms. The
Windows Metafile, Lotus 1-2-3™, • Storage power of over 3.1 GB sets
Ametek ACE 2000 measures, displays, and
Bitmap, and more. The Ametek ACE no limits to power measuring surveys
records all aspects of power.
2000 package is also offered with • Recording rates anywhere from 20
automatic report generator. milliseconds to one hour
• Comes with advanced PowerAce
The Professional Choice analysis software so data can be
Features printed, analyzed and exported in
The Ametek ACE 2000 is a true stand- numerous file formats
alone electric power quality analyzer, • AC/DC WATTMETER • A real stand-alone instrument, comes
performing the tasks of five instru- The main measurement capabilities in three different package styles
ments, and providing easy analysis and of the wattmeter include RMS
display of spectra, waveforms, phase, voltage and RMS current; effective,
apparent and reactive power; true Benefits
vectors and more.
power factor; frequency; active and
• A Real-Time Display and clear visual
The Ametek ACE 2000 comes in three reactive energy; and minimum,
presentation provide a
different package styles, each an easily maximum and average values for
comprehensive overview of spectra,
transportable, all-in-one solution for meter readings.
waveforms, transient events, phase
your power quality analysis needs. • HARMONIC ANALYSIS
vectors, and more for easy analysis.
In harmonic analysis mode, the
• A functional keyboard, high-contrast
One of the Ametek ACE 2000’s main ACE2000 provides the user with
graphic display, and fully menu
advantages is that future upgrades can be simultaneous THD, spectrum (0-50th
driven environment make the Ametek
made simply by diskette, and those harmonic), module and angle (360˚),
ACE2000 a pleasure to program.
software upgrades are available for free. and direction reports. The phasor
• Data can be printed, or transferred to
The Ametek ACE 2000 has lots of space diagram also ensures that each
computer for further analysis.
for data storage — over 3.1 GB — so data phase is correctly connected.
• Provides extraordinary protection
and measurements captured can be stored • TRANSIENT ANALYSIS
against shock, vibration, and
(depending on user preference) in normal The ACE2000’s transient analyzer
temperature extremes
mode, at alarm thresholds, or by external captures all waveform disturbances
• Free lifetime software upgrade
trigger. No limits are placed on your power and displays them in graphic mode.
• Versatile, flexible and affordable
measuring survey. For maximum flexibility, The system can handle up to 16
the recording rate can be set anywhere configurable triggers and combine
between 20 milliseconds and one hour. In these into various logical expressions Applications
harmonic mode, wattmeter measurements according to application, for
may be carried out simultaneously. maximum flexibility. • Power quality survey
• THE NEW FLICKERMETER • Harmonic study
In addition to being an easily transport- The new IEC 868 normalized • Energy and demand survey
able, all-in-one solution, the Ametek flickermeter mode is designed to • Flicker survey
ACE2000 offers a functional keyboard, measure any quantity of flicker • Load profiling
high-contrast graphics display, and a fully sensation through statistical analysis • Transient detection
menu-driven environment. The Real-Time procedures to obtain short-term and • Waveform capture and analysis
5.26
Ametek ACE 2000 Power Quality Analyzer Specifications
5.27
AMETEK
Power Quality
Ametek
ACE Quatro
Power Recorder
The Ametek ACE Quatro is an ad-
vanced low-cost single- and three-
phase power quality monitor and
recorder, featuring simultaneous
wattmeter, harmonic, transient, and
flicker analysis capabilities. For cycle-
by-cycle power analysis, it offers high-
resolution 8 Khz sampling of 8
channels, 4 voltages, and 4 currents,
with a fast 16-bit digital processor. A
truly versatile tool, the Ametek ACE
Quatro is accurate and extremely
reliable. Best of all, the Ametek ACE
Quatro is extremely compact and very
lightweight. display and print a comprehensive Benefits
profile of an individual load or site.
• Advanced PowerAce software
The Easy-To-Use, Go Compact and designed to mount provides full compatibility with
Anywhere PQ Solution anywhere indoors or out, multiple the Ametek ACE 4000, or any PC
Ametek ACE Quatros can be installed • Free lifetime software upgrades
A powerful power monitor and truly within a facility or at several substations from web page
versatile tool for today’s power to monitor critical points comparing • Can be easily mounted anywhere,
quality technician. The Ametek ACE data gathered on the same time base. indoors or out
Quatro is the smallest and lowest The Ametek ACE Quatro can be line- • Infrared serial communication
cost power quality recorder to powered, or powered by an external port allows you to download data
include flicker and harmonics. supply for low voltage monitoring and it from as far as 30 feet away
is equipped with LEDs to provide visual • Wireless transfer saves time and
Ametek ACE Quatro can be installed confirmation of ‘power on’ and proper money
anywhere, indoors or out, comes with phase connections. The Quatro is • Firmware upgradeable in field
an infrared serial communications port shipped complete with mounting straps • Low-cost method to monitor
and most importantly, is easy to use. to attach the ACE Quatro to any pole, multiple points simultaneously
transformer, or panel.
The Ametek ACE Quatro is the
smallest, lowest-cost, most light- Applications
weight solution in PQA data record-
ing. It’s also the easiest to use. It can
• Power quality
be installed anywhere, indoors or out. Features • Load studies
It comes with an infrared serial • Flicker
communications port, which can • Small, low cost and lightweight • THD
communicate results to the Ametek • Highly accurate and extremely
ACE 4000, or any PC, with Ametek reliable
PowerACE software. The powerful • Provides advanced single- and
infrared interface allows you to three-phase power quality
download recordings wirelessly to monitoring and recording
your PC. • Simultaneous power, harmonic,
transient and flicker analysis
A power survey containing up to six capabilities … and much more
months’ data stored in flash memory • High-resolution sampling on 8
can be transferred to a PC via a RS- channels: 4 voltage and 4 current
232 infrared link or external modem for (V, A, W, Var, power factor, THD,
report generation and data analysis. energy, and more)
Ametek PowerACE software for • Equipped with an infrared serial
Windows™ supports communication communication port
and analysis of the recorded data. • Ships with Ametek PowerAce
Create complete reports including software
summaries, charts, and graphs to • NEMA 4x enclosure
5.28
Ametek ACE Quatro Power Recorder Specifications
5.29
AMETEK
Power Quality
Ametek PowerACE
Software
With Ametek PowerACE for Win-
dows™ software, and the Ametek ACE
family of power quality analyzers and
recorders, you never need to guess.
Every power and power quality
measurement is made simultaneously,
cycle-by-cycle so you need never
generator summarize all events, and
sacrifice one measurement parameter
supply charts and graphs for every
for another.
parameter measured simultaneously.
If you are concerned with current measure-
Ametek PowerACE provides a simplified
ments, why settle for less resolution on the
universal platform to record, measure,
load side than on the voltage? With
report and display all electrical parameters.
PowerACE™ load profiling, full resolution of
current and voltage measurements is
available simultaneously with complete Ametek PowerACE
trigger capability included for current and
voltage parameters. for Windows™
• Provides complete control of
Ametek ACE 4000 and Quatro
The Heart of our System • Full instrument setup capability
• Supplies an expandable set of
The fundamental reason to use any piece quick setups tailored to various
of test equipment is to verify the exist- PQ applications — for those who
ence of a problem, identify its source, want to “plug and play”
and report that information when and • Provides an extensive set of data
where you need it. PowerACE does all of viewing tools such as time plot,
that and more. text, CPF curve, CBEMA, phasor
diagram, harmonic and spectrum,
Ametek PowerACE software for Win- all of which you can customize
dows™ completes up to ten thousand architecture that allows access to all according to your wants or needs
measurements per cycle, so you will collected data for use in custom programs • Communicates through ethernet
never miss an electrical power event or data manipulation. But the real power of with any computer or with
again! Ametek PowerACE comes when you want Ametek ACE 4000 hooked up to
to customize measurements. Perhaps you your network
If the cost of power is an issue, Ametek need non-standard calculations, or want to • Access your data and control
PowerACE for Windows™ will show you process data with another piece of your instrument from virtually
how to achieve the lowest possible software. Ametek PowerACE for Win- anywhere
energy costs. Ametek PowerACE dows™ is fully compatible with all Win- • Exports data in CSV ASCII text,
includes everything you need to measure dows™ software, and downloading into and a range of industry standard
power factor, determine Peak Demand FoxPro, Excel, Lotus or any other spread- software formats such as Word,
and ultimately lower your costs. Why sheet is just the beginning. Fully integrated Excel, etc.
spend money and time on a dedicated within the Windows™ environment, • Displays data in real time — even
submetering installation when you can Ametek PowerACE will allow you to access waveforms! — directly on the
find ways to reduce energy costs with data, and transfer or transform it in just instrument as well as remotely
the Ametek ACE family of analyzers and about any way you need, all at the touch of from your PC
Ametek PowerACE? a shortcut key. • Has an on-line user manual to
guide you
Ametek PowerACE supports real time With Ametek PowerACE you won’t need • Free lifetime software upgrade
readings, reports, telephone, or Ethernet a dedicated predictive maintenance • Intuitive and easy to use
communications, and more. When used program. Ametek PowerACE for • Continuous simultaneous data
with the Ametek ACE 4000, the combi- Windows™ software is able to predict all acquisition
nation of powerful software and Pentium kinds of problems before they happen. • Variable recording rate selection
processor, allows you to communicate • Harmonic spectra analysis
and generate reports while continuing to The automatic report generator creates • Zooming and cursor tools
gather data. reports and eliminates extraneous data • Reporting tools
with a few keystrokes. If your report • Printer and peripheral support
Ametek PowerACE provides an open file requires all the data, simply let the report
5.30
AmetekACEPortables
Capability Ametek ACE 4000 Ametek ACE 2000 Ris ACE Quatro
Power Quality • • •
Load Profile • • •
Flicker (50 & 60 Hz) • • •
Power • • •
Power Factor • • •
Frequency • • •
Voltage Harmonics 63rd 50th THD only
Current Harmonics 63rd 50th
THD • • •
Lifetime Software Update • • •
Software PowerAce Ace for Windows PowerAce
Free Phone Support • • •
Portable • • •
Sample Rate 256/cycle 128/cycle 8KHz (Non Sync)
Inputs 4V/4I 4V/4I 4V/4I
Isolated Inputs • •
AC/DC Inputs • •
Waveform Capture • •
Relay Inputs optional •
Transients • • MAx/Min (>250µsec)
Demand • •
Real Time Display • • •
Display Type Color Touchscreen LCD PC
Simultaneous Power, Flicker, • •
and Harmonics
Computer Required for Set Up •
Computer Required for Analysis • •
Modem • • External
Infrared Data •
Ethernet •
8 Channel Osciliscope •
10,000 Measurements/cycle •
Built-In Pentium Processor •
On Board Analysis •
5.31
AMETEK
Power Quality
5.32
The Ametek Data from the Ametek
LoadLoggers*, Load Distribution Monitoring
Profilers* and P&QR are products can be used for:
non-invasive digital • Fault Analysis
recording loggers for
gathering data on • Improving power quality
distribution loads and
• Monitoring effectiveness of load
power quality. Whether tap changers/voltage regulators
the data is from a load
site or direct from the • Monitoring of peak transformer
loading
distribution system, the
Ametek Load Manage- • Monitoring effect of (or need for)
ment products are easy capacitors
to install, operate and • Load growth analysis
analyze.
• Recording peak load values and
times
• Distribution Line
• Analyzing time-of-day load
Loadloggers: fluctuations
LoadLogger is a primary side
(100V – 69KV) current recorder • Load imbalance studies (EMF
providing load profiles for and losses)
periods from 4.5 to 66 days.
• Accurate and complete data for
• Recording Ammeter: distribution modelling programs
The Load Profiler uses the same
technology as the LoadLogger • Fuse sizing
to record current on secondary
circuits (to 700V) or insulated • Theft-of-service studies
conductors.
• Evaluating circuits for DA/DSM
• P&QR:
The P&QR128 is a data • Replacing substation chart
logger and power quality recorders
recorder designed for
load side monitoring.
*LoadLoggers and Load Profilers are not available in Canada through Ametek.
6.1
11∏-
AMETEK
LOADLOGGER LL-230A LL-230A Specifications Computer Interface
The LOADLOGGER is a rugged Conductor Size: 0.2 to 1.093 inches Adapter Specifications
digital recording ammeter for non- diameter (Max. 795 MCM). A rubber
invasive recording of distribution line adapter is used for bare or insulated Computer Connector: Standard 25
currents. Using a hot stick, the conductor diameter 0.2 to 0.4 inches. pin D-type female connector. Connects
LOADLOGGER clamps onto to com 1, 2, 3 or 4 on PC. 9 pin
overhead lines up to 69 kV and can Maximum Conductor Voltage: 69 kV connector also available.
record up to 1000 amps with 1 amp
resolution. Current Range: 0-1000 amps Power:
AC adapter or 9 V alkaline battery
Up to 66 days of load data can be Battery Life:
stored by the LOADLOGGER and Lithium batteries: 1 year minimum AC Adapter: Standard AC adapter is
then downloaded to a personal Can be supplemented by a standard 9 alternative power source
computer where the data is analyzed V alkaline battery.
using our LOADSMART® software. Battery Check: Voltage level factory
Memory: set to 6.95 V to verify life of lithium
Recording memory is user selectable to battery in LL
stop when full or continuously record
on a first-in, first-out basis. LCD Module
Specifications
Data storage capacity is determined by
Display Type: Liquid Crystal – Display
averaging interval selected.
1" high digits
Averaging Maximum
Interval Storage
Update Frequency: Display is
15 min. 66 days
updated every 3 seconds.
5 min. 22 days
1 min. 4.5 days
Mounting: Attached to
LOADLOGGER at the serial interface
Resolution: 1 Amp
connector.
Accuracy: <5% of reading
Power Supply: Operates directly from
the LOADLOGGER’s battery.
Internal Clock Accuracy: One minute
per 2 weeks over specified temperature
Operating Temperature:
range.
0°C to +40°C
Dimensions: 5.84 x 2.5 x 1.3 inches
-40°C to +55°C
(150mm x 64mm x 34mm) nominal
Weight: 5.0 lbs. (2.3 kg) nominal
Environment:
Lifetime warranty for water-resistance
6.2
Load Profiler LP-260 LP-260 Specifications
Operating voltage: 0-700 volts on
non-insulated cables unlimited on
insulated cables
Current Range: 0-1000 amps
Resolution: 1 amp
Accuracy: ±3% of reading
Temperature Range:
-30°C to 55°C up to 800 amps
-30°C to 30°C up to 1000 amps
(Display operation is 0° to 40°C)
Cable: Up to 2" outside diameter
Memory:
Averaging Maximum
Interval Storage
15 min. 66 days
The Load Profiler is a rugged, non- 5 min. 22 days
invasive digital recording ammeter for 1 min. 4.5 days
simple, cost effective collection of load
data on your power circuits. Dimensions:
Housing: 3" x 2" x 6"
To monitor and record line currents, CT: 4" outside diameter
clip the split-core current transformer Cord: 6 feet long
(CT) to any conductor up to 700 volts, Weight: 1.7 lbs.
or any insulated cable under 2"
diameter—even underground
distribution cables.
The Load Profiler can be used as a

hand-held ammeter for instantaneous
current readings, or can be left on-site
to collect up to 66 days of data.
Current readings from 0-1000 amps,
are averaged and stored at a user
selected time interval. The recorded
data is then transferred to a computer
to generate current vs. time load
profiles for load management analysis.
6.3
33∏-
AMETEK
LOADSMART Software
LOADSMART Software is a powerful

tool for analyzing load data. The
software allows you to initialize each
recorder and then load data is trans-
ferred to a computer and time stamped
to real time using LOADSMART.
LOADSMART is used for both

LOADLOGGERs and Load Profilers
and performs the following functions:
• Initialize recorder
• Download recorded data to
personal computer
• Time stamp data to real time
• Obtain minimum and maximum
readings
• Add, subtract, or average time
coincident files
• Convert data values to spreadsheet
formats
Time of day load fluctuations

Hardware requirements:
Ordering
• IBM compatible computer
• Windows® 3.1, ‘95, ‘98 or NT Please specify the complete model
• RS-232 serial port number of the kit or single logger
required.
LOADLOGGERs
Model Description Peripheral Items and Spares

LL-230 single phase LOADLOGGER
module Model Description
LL-233 Computer interface adapter
LL-231 3 phase starter kit. Includes
the following as standard: LL-234 LCD display for use with
3 LL-230 single phase LL-230
modules
LL-235 Carry case for use with
LOADSMART software
LL-231 or LL-232
1 Computer Interface Adapter
1 LCD display Spare lithium battery pack for
Instruction Manual use with LL-230
Carrying case
LL-232 3 phase kit. Includes the
following as standard:
3 LL-230 single phase
modules
Carrying case
6.4
P&QR128 and
P&QR256
Comprehensive Power
and Fault Recorders
with Advanced Features
“Sniff Out” power and fault data with

the affordable P&QR series power
and fault recorders.
Whether you are a utility “sniffing out”

power and fault problems on the power
grid, or a facilities manager “sniffing
out” power quality concerns in your
plant… the P&QR Series offers the
perfect, affordable solution you’ve been
looking for.
For Utilities
Deregulation means increased compe-
tition for utilities. Providing affordable Economic Incentives!
power quality affirmation to your key
customers is critical to keep customers One of the biggest reasons to buy your • You can identify and isolate
from migrating away, and to win new new P&QR128 or P&QR256 is purely problems using the fault
customers. The P&QR128 and economic! We’ve packed many high recording and waveform capture
P&QR256 are useful for troubleshootin end fault recording functions into a well capabilities.
relay misoperation. The P&QR Series built unit that is offered at a very low • The low cost P&QR128 and
offers utilities incredible flexibility, ease cost. The P&QR Series has many of P&QR256 offer great flexibility to
of use, durability, and perhaps most the functions that you would expect in the Power Quality professional.
importantly, dramatic cost savings! a fault and power quality recorder. For instance, you can take
However, we would like to point out advantage of its multiple-voltage
many features that are rare for a unit at ranges and selectable CT scaling
For Customers this price, and even some features that to obtain improved accuracy by
are not available on other units at any optimizing your A to D
For even modest sized power price! measurement.
customers, doing business in this • Best of all, these units have
newly deregulated environment, a • First, these Power Quality optional ethernet or modem
power quality monitor is one of the Recorders have enormous data connectivity so you can get the
best investments your company can storage capacity. They come data you need without having to
make! Your power and fault monitor with a standard 6 gigs of storage. leave your chair.
will help you take surveys of sufficient This gives you plenty of flexibility • The dynamic P&Qs software will
length and provide the information for long measurement surveys, or quickly and easily help you get
you need to decide exactly how to short highly concentrated data the most out of your P&QR. A
best buy your power: spot, flat rate, collection. more complete explanation of
time of use, seasonal. Your P&QR128 • The units are phase locked P&Qs follows.
or P&QR256 can easily pay for itself looped to offer you extraordinary • Check out the technical
in a short period of time. Providing sampling accuracy even if the specifications chart to see all the
answers about your power consump- frequency you are monitoring terrific features offered by the
tion is only the beginning, many shifts. Most competitive P&QR128 and P&QR256.
additional benefits are yours with a products don’t have this
P&QR128 or P&QR256 from Ametek capability. Whether it’s avoiding a costly plant
Instrument Systems. • Ametek Instrument Systems shut down, finding power quality
P&QR Series has excellent RFI problems or just making sure that you
rejection, minimizing the are paying the lowest possible price for
unwanted effects of cell phones, your electricity usage… the Ametek
computers, broadcast, or hand- Instrument System P&QR is the right
held radios. solution for you!
6.5
55∏-
AMETEK
price for power
• Large memory capacity allows for
long surveys or short
concentrated data collection
• Extraordinary sampling accuracy
• RFI rejection minimizes the
effects of outside interference
• Isolates problems with waveform
recording
• Optimizes A to D measurements
• Optional internet transports data
to you
• Enclosed unit can be used outdoors
Features
(optional 256/cycle)
• Relay input
• Real time clock
surges
frequency and real power
• Computes demand, phase angle, P&Qs
power factor, and sequence This basic communications and Auto-event retrieval
components at PC configuration software provides • The recorder sends data
• Event triggering accuracy is autopoll and autocall support with automatically to the PC where it is
better than 2% auto-event retrieval for the P&QR. As most useful. Retrieval of profile,
• RS232 serial port part of the polling process, the cameo and/or fault data minimizes
• Internal modem option available recorder clock can be updated and time to retrieve data in critical
• Ethernet network option available events can be retrieved. P&Qs is an situations.
• Free phone support abbreviated version of Display Station
• Powerful P&Qs software for and Display Station Analysis. Configuration control
communications and analysis • Recorder configurations for up to
Autopoll/call 10 P&QRs are stored at the PC.
• Operates in a totally automatic P&Qs flags the user if there are
Benefits mode if configured; operating differences for better control.
both in parallel provides added
• Affordable fault recording reliability in detecting problems in 32-bit Windows software
• Provides power quality affirmation communication and minimizing • Operates on the most common
• Simple to use communication expenses. operating systems in use.
6.6
RiS P&QR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INPUTS POWER SUPPLY
No. of channels 8 (4 voltage, 4 current) Input voltage range 88–300V dc, 85–264V ac, 50/60Hz
consult factory for other configurations 24 or 48Vdc optional
Voltage inputs (options) 150 V RMS maximum Power requirement 20 VA
300 V RMS maximum Battery Optional 12V for recorder operation
600 V RMS maximum
Star (wye) or delta connections REAL TIME CLOCK
Current inputs (options) 1/5A RMS nominal Clock source 32,768 Hz. crystal oscillator
100/200/500/1000 A RMS nominal Resolution 1 ms.
(1.4V fsd. Int. or ext. burden)
Range Time and date (including leap year
Designed to record to 40% overrange and day of the year).
Frequency response P&QR128 40Hz – 3kHz. (+0dB, -3dB for voltages) Synchronization 50/60 Hz from voltage input
DC – 3kHz (+0dB for currents)
Frequency response P&QR256 40Hz – 6kHz. (+0dB, -3dB for voltages) COMMUNICATIONS
DC – 6kHz (+0dB, -3dB for currents)
Serial port RS232 type.
Accuracy Better than 0.2% of full scale Speed up to 57 kBaud
Modem (optional) Hayes compatible type internal.
RECORDING (up to 57.6 kBaud)
Recording resolution 14 bits. Network (option) TCP/IP 10Base2 or 10BaseT
Recording accuracy +/- 1 lsb.
Sample rate 128 samples per cycle VOLTAGE WITHSTAND
6.4/7.68k samples per second Isolation Channel to channel (voltage)
option for 256 samples per cycle Channel to ground.
2 samples per cycle for high-speed 2 kV RMS for 1 minute
RMS envelope capture (as per IEEE C37.90-1987/IEC 255-5)
Impulse voltage withstand Channel to channel (voltage)
DATA STORAGE Channel to ground
Internal memory 8 Mbytes 5 kV, 1.2/50 ms. 0.5 Joule
Hard disk 6.4 Gbytes (minimum) (as per IEEE C37.90-1987/IEC 255-5)
IEEE C37.90-1987/IEC 255-22-1)
Waveform Capture 4 cycles pre, 12 cycles post
Option for up to 2 seconds Surge withstand (SWC) 2.5 kV, 1 MHz HF burst disturbance
Up to 1 minute of RMS data non-maloperate (as per
IEEE C37.90-1987/IEC 255-22-1)
Trending – (16 weeks) Voltages: 1 minute min/max/avg
Currents: 1 minute min/max/avg RFI immunity 10 V/m 20 MHz – 1 GHz (80% AM
Frequency: 1 minute min/max/avg @ 1 kHz). Non – maloperate (as per
Watts: 1 minute min/max/avg IEEE C37.90-1987/BS EN 50082)
Harmonics: 10 minute RFI emission — radiated 40 dB mV/m (27 – 130 MHz)
min/max/avg/angle 47 dB mV/m (130 MHz – 1 GHz)
to the 50th harmonic EN 55022B (class ‘B’ limits)
Imbalance: 10 minute min/max/avg (as per BS EN 50081-1)
Flicker: 10 minute Pst — conducted (150 kHz – 30 Mhz)
Metered values kVAh EN 55022B (class ‘B’ limits)
±kWh — harmonics (100 Hz – 30 MHz)
±kVArh (as per IEC 555 class ‘A’ limits)
Computed (at PC) Phase angle, power factor, demand Electrostatic discharge (ESD) 8 kV contact, 15 kV radiated
(sliding or fixed window) and discharge. Non-maloperate
sequence components (as per IEC 801-2)
EVENT TRIGGERING ENCLOSURE

Trigger parameters Over/under level with hysteresis. Mounting Wall
ROC & THD
Size 200 x 300 x 120 mm
Accuracy Better than 2% (7.87 x 11.8 x 4.7 in.)
Pre-fault time 4 cycles (128 or 256 samp/cyc); Optional 300 x 400 x 210 mm
1-10 sec. (2 samp/cyc) (11.75 x 16 x 8.25)
Post-fault time 12 cycles (128 or 256 samp/cyc); Weight 6 Kg. (13.2lbs.)
1-59 sec. (2 samp/cyc) Optional 8kg (17.6 lbs)
External trigger Relay contact (24-120Vdc nominal)
ENVIRONMENT
Operating temperature -10 to 50 °C 14 to 122 °F
Humidity 5 – 95% RH (non condensing)
6.7
77∏-
AMETEK
Communications, mathematical functions. There are two
major modules of Ametek software
standard level or rate of change
triggering can be recorded by the TR-
Analysis and available. 100, TR-2000 or P&QR.
System Communications Sets of three analog channels can be

This provides communication to, and defined as phase groups. For each
Configuration configuration of, the TR-100, TR-2000 group, zero and negative sequence
and P&QR series either (1) remotely via component trigger levels can be set.
Software a modem link to a Master Station Again, the display of near real time data
A single communication and anaylis normally located in central engineering ensures correct values are used and
package is used for the TR-100, TR- or at a control center, (2) locally via a inputs are wired in properly (see next
2000 and P&QR series recorders. direct connection on site or (3) via an page). Two phase groups are available
Additionally, when RVComms is used, Ethernet link. per 8 inputs.
the powerful analysis software can be
used for the older TR-1600 series The communications software has a The recorders can be set to dial up the
recorders. unique feature that allows the user to Master Station when a fault is recorded
set over and/or under trigger levels with (Auto Call) and the Master Station can
Ametek’s software programs provide hysteresis on the analog channels with be programmed to contact each
advanced fault analysis, communica- the actual signal displayed in near real recorder in a region at regular intervals
tion and configuration functions in a time. This waveform is overlaid with the to check for new records (Auto Poll). A
486 based PC-compatible (minimum) equivalent trigger levels which improves communications log records any
computer. The programs have a very the ease and accuracy of trigger problems incurred during auto polling.
flexible graphical user interface which settings (see next page).
uses Windows 95™, 98™, NT or Unauthorized parameter updates and
Windows 2000™. Many fault analysis Sub cycle drop out or THD triggers record downloading can be protected
features are provided and there are measure the quality of a voltage or by passwords. A recorder may be
optional programs for additional current waveform. Small perturbations remotely triggered from the Master
which would not be detected by Station to generate test records.
Architecture
120, 208, 240, 277,

480, 575 VAC Transient
nominal inputs Fault Recorder
Resistive
1 or 5A AC Current Local Modem
nominal from CT Shunt
RS-232 Internal
or
External
Split Core
1 or 5A AC nominal Current
from CT or clip- Transformer Fax
on CT with mV with built-in P&QR Series Machine
or mA output Terminating
Resistor
System status relays Remote Master

Evaluation Station
50/60 Hz line synch (P&QR only)
Portable Master
Evaluation Station
RS-232
Direct
Connection
(optional Ethernet)
6.8
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
Signal Conditioning
Signal Conditioning Family Guide
The extensive line of
Ametek signal SC-7400 Family
conditioners provide Universal 4-wire transmitters and trips for mV, T/C, RTD, ohm, current, voltage
application flexibility in and slidewire applications. Hand-held configurator, or PC configuration
software.
installation, configuration • SC-7401 • SC-7402 • SC-7403 • SC-7404
and operation. Choose • SC-7405 • HHC-7400 • PC-7400
from 2- or 4- wire;
transmitter or trip; SC-4400 Family
surface, rail, head or Universal 2-wire transmitters for mV, T/C, RTD, and resistance applications.
Head or field mounted.
panel mount; analog or
• SC-4400 • HHC-4400 • PC-4400
digital electronics; and a
wide variety of inputs, SC-4300 Family
outputs and power 2-wire switch selectable transmitters.
supply options. • SC-4300L/U • SC-4300R • SC-4326 • SC-4372
This section of the catalog is divided Loop powered isolators

into several sub-sections. Each • SC-2302
sub-section describes a line of prod-
ucts and includes all drawings,
specifications and ordering information. Loop-powered indicators and meters
• SC-4300M • SC-4301M • SC-4302M • SC-4303M
Sections describing configuration kits
and accessories are also included. ET-1200 Family
4-wire trips for RTD, T/C, mA, mV, DC voltage/current and AC voltage/current.
Ametek signal conditioning products • ET-1200 L/U • ET-1202 L/U • ET-1205 • ET-1208 • ET-1214
continue a tradition of quality, reliability, • ET-1215 • ET-1218 • ET-1219 • ET-1228 • ET-1275
accuracy and repeatability. • ET-1278 • ET-Dimensions & Ordering
SC-1300 Family
4-wire transmitters, signal conditioners and computational devices.
• SC-1300 • SC-1300L • SC-1300R • SC-1300U • SC-1302
• SC-1320 • SC-1324 • SC-1326 • SC-1326W • SC-1330
• SC-1350 • SC-1352 • SC-1354 • SC-1356 • SC-1358
• SC-1362 • SC-1364 • SC-1372 • SC-1374 • SC-1380
• SC-1382 • SC-1390 • SC-1396 • SC-1398
• SC-Dimensions & Ordering
High Density Enclosures

• P-11 • A-12
7.1
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
Signal Conditioners - Transmitters - Electronic Alarms
Input/output Isolation Is Standard Unless Otherwise Stated
Resistance Inputs (RTD’s, Slidewire, Strain Gage)

2-wire RTD Transmitters
Switch Selectable SC-4372
Programmable SC-4400
4-wire RTD Transmitters
Single/Differential Inputs SC-1372
Single/Differential Inputs, Non-isolated SC-1374
Universal Input, Single Analog Output SC-7401
Universal Input, Dual Analog Output SC-7402
Universal Input, Analog And Relay Output SC-7405
High Density, Rack Mounted SC-8372*
High Density, Rack Mounted, Non-isolated SC-8374*
2-wire Slidewire/Potentiometer Transmitters
0-20,000 Ohms SC-4300R
0-500 Ohms SC-4400
4-wire Slidewire/Potentiometer Transmitters
0-10,000 Ohms SC-1300R
0-5,000 Ohms, Analog Output SC-7401
0-5,000 Ohms, Dual Analog Output SC-7402
0-5,000 Ohms, Single Analog And Relay Output SC-7405
0-20,000 Ohms, Rack Mounted SC-8300R*
Strain Gage Transmitters
120 Ohm or 350 Ohm Inputs SC-1390
Dual Input SC-8391*
Alarms/Trips - RTD Input
Single Trip With Adjustable Deadband ET-1278
Single Trip With Universal Input SC-7403
Single Trip, Analog Output, Universal Input SC-7405
Single Trip, High Density Rack Mount SC-8274*
Single Trip, High Density Rack Mount, No L.E.D. Option SC-8274A*
Dual Trip With Fixed Deadband ET-1275
Dual Trip, Universal Input SC-7404
Dual Trip, High Density Rack Mount SC-8275*
Dual Trip, High Density Rack Mount, No Led Option SC-8275A*
*Consult factory
7.2
Millivolt/Thermocouple Inputs
2-wire Transmitters
mV, Thermocouple, Switch Selectable SC-4326
Universal Input, Programmable SC-4400
4-wire Transmitters
mV SC-1326
mV Input, High Density, Rack Mount SC-8326*
Thermocouple SC-1326W
Thermocouple, High Density, Rack Mount SC-8326W*
Thermocouple, Linearized Output, High Density, Rack Mtd SC-8327*
Universal Input, Single Analog Output SC-7401
Universal Input, Dual Analog Output SC-7402
Universal Input, Analog And Relay Output SC-7405
Alarms/Trips - mV, Thermocouple Inputs
Single Trip With Adjustable Deadband ET-1208
Single Trip With Universal Input SC-7403
Single Trip, Analog Output, Universal Input SC-7405
Single Trip, mV Input, High Density, Rack Mount SC-8204*
Single Trip, mV Input, High Density, Rack Mount, No L.E.D. Option SC-8204A*
Single Trip, Thermocouple Input, High Density, Rack Mount SC-8204W*
Single Trip, Thermocouple Input, High Density, Rack Mount, No L.E.D. Option SC-8204WA*
Dual Trip With Fixed Deadband ET-1205
Dual Trip, Universal Input SC-7404
Dual Trip, mV Input, High Density, Rack Mount SC-8205*
Dual Trip, High Density, Rack Mount, No L.E.D. Option SC-8205A*
Dual Trip, Thermocouple Input, High Density, Rack Mount SC-8205W*
Dual Trip, Thermocouple Input, High Density, Rack Mount, No L.E.D. Option SC-8205WA*
Current/Voltage Inputs
2-wire Transmitters
AC Current/Voltage, Switch Selectable SC-4300L/U
4-wire Transmitters
DC Current/Voltage (Non Isolated) SC-1300
Signal Isolator, mV, mA, V Input SC-1302
Signal Inverter SC-1302S
mA/Voltage Input, High Density, Rack Mount SC-8302*
mA/Voltage Input, High Density, Rack Mount, 2-wire Xmtr P.S. SC-8302E*
DC Voltage, Universal Input, Single Analog Output SC-7401
DC Voltage, Universal Input, Dual Analog Output SC-7402
DC Voltage, Universal Input, Single Analog Output and Relay Output SC-7405
AC Current SC-1300L
AC Voltage SC-1300U
Loop Powered Isolator
4-20 mA Input, 4-20 mA Output SC-2302-1
10-50 mA Input, 10-50 mA Output, High Density SC-8502*
*Consult factory
7.3
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
Alarms/Trips
Single Trip, mV, mA, Voltage Input, Fixed Deadband ET-1214
Single Trip, mV, mA, Voltage Input, Adjustable Deadband ET-1218
Single Trip, DC Voltage, Bipolar Current Input SC-7403
Single Trip Plus Analog Output, DC Voltage, Bipolar Current Input SC-7405
Single Trip, mA/Voltage Input, High Density, Rack Mount SC-8214*
Single Trip, mA/Voltage Input, High Density, Rack Mount, No Led Option SC-8214A*
Dual Trip, mV, mA, Voltage Input, Fixed Deadband ET-1215
Dual Trip, mV, mA, Voltage Input, Adjustable Deadband ET-1219
Dual Trip, DC Voltage, Bipolar Current Input SC-7404
Dual Trip, mA/Voltage Input, High Density, Rack Mount SC-8215*
Dual Trip, mA/Voltage Input, High Density, Rack Mount, No Led Option SC-8215A*
AC Current/Voltage Input, Single Trip, Fixed Deadband ET-1200L/U
AC Current/Voltage Input, Dual Trip, Fixed Deadband ET-1202L/U
Deviation Alarm
mV, mA, Voltage Input, Single Trip, Adjustable Deadband ET-1228
mA/Voltage Input, High Density, Rack Mount, No L.E.D. Option SC-8228A*
4-Wire Signal Conditioners / Computational Devices/Special Application Transmitters

High-low Selector, 2,3,4 Inputs SC-1320
Median Selector, 3 Inputs SC-1324
Square Root Extractor SC-1330
Square Root Extractor, High Density, Rack Mount SC-8330*
Frequency Transmitter, 0-24 KHz SC-1350
Frequency Transmitter, High Density, Rack Mount SC-8350*
Multiplier/Divider, D=A*B/C SC-1352
Multiplier/Divider, High Density, Rack Mount SC-8352*
Adder/Subtractor, 2, 3, 4 Inputs, Y=A± B± C±D SC-1354
Adder/Subtractor, 2, 3, 4 Inputs, High Density, Rack Mount SC-8354*
Linear Integrator, mA, V Input; 0-64,000 Counts/hour Output SC-1356
Square Root Integrator, mA, V Input; 0-64,000 Counts/hour Output SC-1358
Signal Limiter, mA, V Input; mA, V, mV Output SC-1362
Lead Or Lag Transmitter, mA, V Input; mA, V, mV Output SC-1364
Pulse Duration Transmitter .6 - 2457.6 Seconds Output SC-1380
Pulse Duration Receiver .2 - 409.65 Seconds Pulse Input SC-1382
Rate-limited Transmitter, 3.6 - 3600 Seconds Output SC-1396
Scale And Bias Transmitter, .1 - 10 Ratio 50% Bias SC-1398
*Consult factory
7.4
Universal 4-wire
Transmitters and Trips
SC - 7400
• Universal input
• 0.1% Accuracy
• Optional built-in intrinsic safety
barriers.
• Quick and simple - No pots or
switches to set.
• Continuous Self-calibration
• High density - DIN mount
• Modular design
• Password Protection
The SC-7400 is an intelligent, universal With the SC-7400, one unit can be
input signal conditioner/alarm trip that programmed to meet numerous
isolates and transmits the status of applications ... and you may purchase
process signals on a single control loop it with optional intrinsic safety barriers
basis. It handles a variety of tempera- that meet CSA and FM agency
ture and process inputs and offers requirements. Functional benefits
combinations of analog and relay include detachable field wiring,
contact outputs. password protection, integrity diagnos-
All parameters - such as input and tics, full software programmability, high
output range, setpoints, deadband and packing density, low spare inventory,
burnout - are customer-selectable via and EMC immunity.
software. Fully trained Ametek representatives
Operate it on a PC with easy-to-use are equipped with demonstration units
Windows based software or with an for customer selection assistance.
optional hand-held configurator for
easy, on-site configuring and re- SC-7401 Single analog output
configuring of modules. Alternatively,
opt for the factory to perform a custom SC-7402 Dual analog output
configuration to meet your needs. SC-7403 Single alarm output
The SC-7400 series incorporates state- SC-7404 Dual alarm output
of-the-art technology to provide:
• safe, reliable monitoring of plant and SC-7405 Single analog and alarm
machinery output
• peak operation for your equipment
• reduced overall system cost and
calibration efforts
• the highest density available in smart
technology
• the highest level of operational
diagnostics and accuracy
7.5
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
Specifications T/C Type Range °C Accuracy Min/Max Span ±°C
Indicators NIST - J -180 to 760 ±0.3° C 110 to 940
Power Green LED
NIST - K -180 to 1300 ±0.5° C 140 to 1480
Input sensor Green LED (on = OK)
Module Operation Green LED (on = OK) NIST -E -150 to 1000 ±0.3° C 90 to 1150
Alarm 1 Red LED (on = alarm) NIST - R 0 to 500 ±1.0° C 450 to 1600
Alarm 2 Red LED (on = alarm) 500 to 1600 ±0.7° C
Power Supply NIST - S 0 to 500 ±1.0° C 480 to 1600
Jumper selectable for 24V DC, 48V 500 to 1600 ±0.7 C
DC, 110V DC, 120V AC 50/60 Hz NIST - T -200 to 0 ±0.4° C 160 to 600
nominal. 0 to 400 ±0.3° C
Input Signals NIST - B 300 to 500 ±2.0° C 650 to 1500
DC Volt (Non IS Models only): 500 to 1800 ±1.0° C
0 to 1V, 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 1 to 5V, 0 to
BS* - N 0 to 800 ±0.3° C 140 to 1300
XV (special factory configuration X=20
to 200V (30 V maximum for CSA)) 800 to 1300 ±0.5° C
DC Current (Non IS Models only): DIN - J -200 to 900 ±0.3° C 110 to 1100
0 to 1 mA, 0 to 5mA, 1 to 5mA, 0 to DIN - T -200 to -100 ±0.4° C 160 to 800
10mA, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, 10 to -100 to 600 ±0.3° C
50 mA, 0 to 5 mA Bipolar, 0 to 10 mA * British Standard
Bipolar Cold Junction Error: ±0.5° C
DC mV (All models): Non-Linearized T/C:
-15 to +85 mV absolute operating ±0.02% of reading ±0.005 mV plus
range. Zero and span may be set cold junction accuracy
anywhere within range. 4 mV minimum
span. Analog output signals
T/C (All models): Software configurable Voltage outputs configurable
Software configurable for linearized or current outputs: through software and external
non-linearized output terminal block wire jumper:
Ohms - 3 or 4 wires (All models): Range Max load Range Impedance
0 to 500 Ω absolute operating range.
0 - 1mA 1600 k Ω 0 - 1V 1kΩ
Zero and span may be set anywhere
within range. 50 Ω minimum span 0 - 5 mA 3200 k Ω 0 - 5V 1kΩ
RTD (All models) - 2, 3 or 4 wire, 3 0 - 10 mA 1600 k Ω 1 - 5V 1kΩ
wire differential for Pt and Ni RTD, 2 0 - 20 mA 800 Ω 0 - 10V 1kΩ
wire only for Cu RTD: 4 - 20 mA 800 Ω
100 Ω Pt α= 0.003850, -200 to
+850°C, Min span 50°C Relay output set to zero the trip will occur within 0.5
100 Ω Pt α= 0.003916, -200 to Contact Rating (trip outputs): second.
+850°C, Min span 50°C 3A, 250V AC resistive or 3A, 30V DC, Input Impedance:
100 Ω Pt α= 0.003923, -200 to 30W max., SPDT T/C, mV: Greater than 2 MΩ
+650°C, Min span 50°C Trip Range: 0.5 to 100% of span in mA: 50 Ω ±5%
120 Ω Ni, -80 to +320°C, Min span 0.15% increments V: 500 K Ω ±5%
50°C Deadband: 0 to 20% of span in 1% RTD Excitation:
10 Ω Cu, -200 to +260°C, Min span increments 165 µA ± 10%
460°C Analog Output Accuracy: RTD Failure:
Slidewire (Non IS Models only): 0 to 5mA, 0 to 5V, 1 to 5V output Open Lead: Upscale
May be configured for 500 to 5000 Ω ranges: ±0.1% of span, all other analog Shorted RTD: Downscale
span based at zero ohms output ranges: ±0.05% of span Sensor OK LED turned off with sensor
Tracking Accuracy (SC-7402 only): failure. Failure defined as 5% over or
Input Accuracy: 4 to 20 mA ±0.5% max - others ±1% under the selected input range or input
mV: ±0.02% of reading ±0.005 mV, typical channel out of range. Analog output
Linear with input Trip Output Accuracy: configurable for either upscale or
±0.01% of span downscale burnout. Trip output
V: ±0.05% of reading ±0.6 mV, Functional Characteristics configurable for alarm if sensor fails.
Linear with input Analog Output Step Response: T/C Burnout Current:
For a step of 0 to 100% of span the 10 Less than 0.1 µA
mA: ±0.05% of reading ±3.0 µA,
to 90% response time is less than 0.5 T/C, mV, mA, V Failure:
Linear with input
second. The response time from input Sensor OK LED turned off with sensor
T/C: Accuracy listed in table plus cold change to 90% output change is less failure. Failure defined as ±5% over or
junction error than 1 second. under the selected input range or input
Trip Output Step Response: channel out of range. Analog output
For a step of 0 to 100% and the delay configurable for either upscale or
7.6
downscale burnout. Trip output Operating Influences Effect on Accuracy: <±0.05% of span
configurable for alarm if sensor fails. Input Reference Conditions: Drop and Topple: <±0.05% of span
Dielectric Strength: mV: 0 to 10 mV Common Mode Effect:
2.5kV AC 50/60 Hz from input to T/C: 0 to 200 °C “J” T/C <120 dB at 120V AC 50/60 Hz
output/power/ground RTD: 0 to 200 °C 100 Ω Platinum Normal Mode Effect:
1KV AC from power to output/ground Ohm: 0 to 100 Ω <40 dB with peak to peak signal within
1kV AC between output and ground Analog Output Reference Condition: maximum input range
1KV AC between analog and relay 4 to 20 mA, 250 Ω load Supply Voltage:
outputs if applicable Ambient Temperature: Nominal: 24V DC, 48 VDC,110 VDC,
Insulation Resistance: Nominal: 23 ±1°C 120 VAC 50/60 Hz
Less than 5 M Ω at 500V DC after 1 Operating Range: -20 to +70°C Range: <±15%
minute Storage Range: -40 to +85°C Effect on Accuracy: <±0.05% of span
Leakage Current: Effect on Accuracy: ±0.005%/°C max. over the range
Less than 1 mA at 2500 VAC after 1 For Current Input ±0.0075%/°C max. Magnetic Field Effect:
minute For Copper RTD Input ±0.01%/°C max. <±0.05% of span at 0.5 mT, 50/60 Hz
Long Term Stability: Effect on Cold Jct: ±0.015°C/°C max. Electromagnetic Susceptibility:
Less than 0.1% of span over 6 months Relative Humidity: <±1% of span over the frequency
Warm Up: Range: 25 to 95% non-condensing range of 20 to 1000 MHz at a field
Full accuracy within 5 minutes of power Effect on Accuracy: <±0.075% of span strength of 10V/M
applied for a change in RH of 25 to 95% <±2% of span over the frequency
Power Consumption: at 23 °C ranges of 50-55 MHz and 95-115 MHz
DC: Nominal 2.5 W with one transmit- Vibration Effect: at a field strength of 1V/M
ter or trip output (transmitter Range: A constant displacement of Tested to: IEC 801.3 Level 2
output at 20 mA or relay on). 1mm over the range of 5 to 15 Hz, SWC Protection:
Nominal 3.0 W with two outputs and an acceleration of 5 m/s/s Conforms to IEC 801-4 level 2
(same conditions) over the range of 15 to 150 Hz ESD (electric discharge):
120V AC, 50/60Hz: Nominal 4 VA at a IEC801-2 level 3 (8kV), No permanent
leading power factor damage
Weight: 0.18 lbs (0.4 Kg) Agency Approvals
Ordinary location:
Specifications subject to change FM: FM3810 ANSI/ISA S82.01,
without notice. 4.6" S82.02, S82.03
(121.9mm)
CSA: C22.2 NO.142
Surge withstand capability: per
CEI/IEC 801-4 level 2
Intrinsic safety
SC-7400 Dimensions Hazardous location:
FM: FM-3610
Class 1, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C & D
CSA: C22.2 NO. 157
Class 1, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C & D
7.3" Division 2:
(185.4mm)
FM: FM-3611
Class 1, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C &
D
CSA: C22.2 No. 213
4.5"
(114.3mm)
1.0"
(25.4mm)
1.0"
(25.4mm)
5.3"
(134.6mm)
7.7
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
Inputs Slidewire SC-7401-N, SC-7402-N, SC-7401-I and SC-7402-I
2-Wire Ohm, RTD
SC-7400- SC-7400-
SC-7400- SC-7400- N I OUTPUT 1 POWER
N I TB L2/N (-)
TB TB 1 NOT AVAILABLE L1 (+)
1 1 1 3
1 3 3 TB
TB TB 4 1
TB1 * JUMPER TB1-1 TO
4 4 1 TB1-2 AND
TB2 TB2-1 TO TB2-2
FOR VOLTAGE
OUTPUTS ONLY
3-Wire Ohm, RTD Current

SC-7400- SC-7400- SC-7400- SC-7400- OUTPUT 2
N I N I (SC-7402-N, SC-7402-I ONLY)
TB TB 1
TB
1 1
1 3 3 1 4 NOT AVAILABLE
TB TB
4 4 SC-7403-N, SC-7404-N, SC-7403-I and SC-7404-I
OUTPUT 1 POWER
4-Wire Ohm, RTD L2/N (-)
mV, T/C L1 (+)
SC-7400- SC-7400-
N I SC-7400- SC-7400- TB1
N I 1
1
TB 1
TB 1
3 3 TB TB TB2
1 TB TB 1 1
1 3 3 NOTE: RELAYS SHOWN IN
4 4 TB DE-ENERGIZED STATE
4 OUTPUT 2
(SC-7404-N, SC-7404-I ONLY)
3-Wire Differential, RTD

SC-7400- SC-7400- Volts
N I SC-7405-N, SC-7405-I
SC-7400- SC-7400-
TB TB N I
1 1
1 3 3 TB OUTPUT 1 POWER
TB 1
4 1 3 NOT AVAILABLE L2/N (-)
TB L1 (+)
4
1
TB1
T T T T 1
TB2
2 1 2 1
T=T -T * JUMPER TB1-1 TO
1 2 TB1-2 FOR VOLTAGE
OUTPUT 2 OUTPUTS ONLY
NOTE: RELAYS SHOWN IN
DE-ENERGIZED STATE
Ordering Information
Model Description
SC-7401 Single Analog Output
SC-7402 Dual Analog Output
SC-7403 Single Alarm Output
SC-7404 Dual Alarm Output
SC-7405 Single Analog and Single Alarm Output
Code Intrinsic Safety Option
N Non-intrinsically safe unit and base plate
I Intrinsically-safe unit and base plate
Code Base plate mounting
S Surface mount
R DIN rail mount base plate
Code Configuration
NC Not configured
FC Factory configured
SC-7401 I S NC Ordering Example
7.8
Hand Held Configurator
HHC-4400/7400
• Compact, Lightweight
Design
• 3 Levels of Security
• Easy To Read Screens
• Optional interface to PC for

hard copy printout and disk
storage
• Works with both SC-7400

and SC-4400 transmitters
and trips
The Ametek Hand Held Configurator Display: Specifications

communicates with the SC-7400 and • 5 x 7 dot matrix character based Power Supply:
SC-4400 Signal Conditioners. LCD 9V battery
• 4 lines of 20 characters each with
The unit configures transmitters, and 232 character set Power Consumption:
performs inspection and maintenance 100 µA to 60 mA depending on
Keyboard: application
functions. You select and initiate 36 multi-function keys providing:
programs from menus to review and • 26 upper and lower case alphabet Peripheral Port:
configure the transmitter. characters 16-pin slot behind sliding section on
• 10 numeric keys top of unit
An alphanumeric display provides an • 16 operator and punctuation keys
80 character LCD screen in the form of Temperature:
• 4 cursor keys Operating: 0° to 50° C
4 lines of 20 characters each. A • audio ‘click’ and tactile feedback
variable contrast control is located on Storage: -20° to 60° C
• auto-repeat after 1 sec depression.
the right side of the communicator. Weight:
Internal Memory: .88 lb. (250g) approximately
The security system provides three • 64K ROM for operating system, and
standard programs CNF61 Interface:
levels of access: Level A for only Connections:
reviewing parameters; Level B to • 32K RAM
Power and intelligence via 16 pin top-
review and modify parameters; and Mass-storage Device: (Non-Volatile) slot port
Level C to establish passwords and to • DP-7400 - Program/Data Pak for
perform all other functions. If pass- SC-7400 configuration. Internal Memory:
words are not established by the • DP-4400 - Program/Data Pak for EPROM firmware defines communica-
customer, all users will be at Level B. SC-4400 configuration tion format and specifies menu options
• DP-1280 - 128K Data Pak for
An automatic battery saver shuts the program storage
unit off after five minutes of inactivity.
Memory Retention:
Power is provided by a 9V battery. Internal memory: supported by battery
7.9
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
Model Description HHC-7400 Dimensions
HHC- Hand Held Configurator 3.1"
(78.0 mm)
0.9"
(24.0 mm)
Code Program/Datapak and Cable

4400 Program/Datapak and cable for SC-4400 transmitters 1.5"
(39 mm)
7400 Program/Datapak and cable for SC-4400 transmitters and trips

1.6" Display
Code File Storage (40 mm) Contrast
Control
N No additional data storage

D Additional 128K datapak for configuration storage 5.6"
(142.0 mm)
Datapaks
Code Personal Computer Interface Cable 4.0"
(101 mm)
N None
C Cable and software to HHC to personal computer
HHC- 4400 D C Ordering Example
Individual Items Additional datapak SC-7412 Cable to connect HHC to

Program/datapaks DP-1280 128K Datapak for configura- personal computer* cable
DP-4400 Program/datapak for SC-4400 tion storage
DP-7400 Program/datapak for SC-7400 Extra cables *Cables which connect to a PC have a
SC-7411 Universal cable to connect RS-232, 25 pin female connector.
HHC to SC-4400/SC-7400
PC-7400 The Ametek PC configuration kit is to increase the flexibility of operation in

used to set up all parameters of the the field and in the instrument shop.
Configuration Kit SC-4400 and SC-7400 range of
PC-7400
• Configures both SC-4400 and transmitters and trips. The program
Personal computer configuration kit
SC-7400 Transmitters and Trips operates under an easy-to-learn,
consisting of the following:
quick-to-use Windows environment. All
• Windows™-based software parameters may be stored on disk and • Windows-based, IBM compatible
• Configuration storage printed for later reference. The software PC software
requires an IBM-compatible running • PC to transmitter cable
• “As-built” documentation
Windows version 3.0 or above.
• Interface with hand-held • Instruction manual
The configuration kit may be used in
communicator
tandem with a hand-held communicator
Model Description
PC- Windows based personal computer configurator software and cable*
Code Transmitter configuration software
7400 Software for SC-7400 and SC-4400 transmitters
Code Diskette size
3 3.5" Diskette
5 5" Diskette
Code HHC to personal computer connection kit
N None
C Cable and software to connect HHC to personal computer
PC- 7400 3 C Ordering Example
Individual Items
Software
PC-7400 PC software for SC-7400 and SC-4400 transmitters
Cables
SC-7412 Cable to connect HHC to personal computer cable. *Cables which connect to a PC have a
SC-7415 Universal cable to connect PC to SC-4400/7400.* RS-232, 25 pin female connector
7.10
Universal Field /Head
Mounted Transmitter
SC-4400
• Field/Head Mount
• Compact Size
• Universal Inputs
• No Field Adjustments
• Excellent Temperature Stability
• Input-output Isolation
• DIN Mount
The SC-4400 transmitter has been
designed to minimize purchase and
installation costs through its universal
inputs and compact size. Accepting
thermocouple, RTD, mV, voltage, and
resistance inputs, the SC-4400
becomes a universal transmitter which
reduces spare parts inventory and
training/familiarization costs. Its Output Load Regulation: Sensor Failure:
compact design and light weight Between minimum and maximum TC Sensors & mV inputs - Software
allows it to be installed in the sensor supply voltage the output will change selectable Upscale or Downscale for
head thereby reducing installation by <0.005% per volt. open circuit sensor.
costs, and simplifying engineering Output Ripple: RTD Sensor - Software selectable
and documentation. <0.05% of span rms Upscale or Downscale for open circuit
The unit is configured via Hand Held Response Time: sensor, Downscale for short circuit
Configurator, or a PC. Both allow a For a step change in input, the output sensor.
permanent storage of the program for signal will rise to within 1% of its final Under Upscale/Downscale conditions
fast duplication/downloading, and value in < 1.5 seconds. the output will rise to 22 mA ±5% or
through a connection to a printer, a below 3.8mA respectively.
hardcopy of the program configuration Sensor Types and Ranges
can be generated. The use of the
configurators with built-in prompts Sensor Configuration Range Limits Accuracy Minimum
referred to Input Span
eliminates the need for field adjust-
ments or errors, and reduces configu- T/C TYPE MIN (°F) MIN (°C) MAX (°F) MAX (°C) (°C) (°F) (°C)
ration time. NIST-J -292 -180 1400 760 ±0.3 212 100
NIST-K -292 -180 2372 1300 ±0.3 212 100
The use of encapsulated circuitry and a NIST-E -238 -150 1832 1000 ±0.3 194 90
patented cover plate ensures excellent
NIST-R 32 0 932 500 ±1 842 450
temperature stability and RFI rejection
932 500 2912 1600 ±0.7
plus a typical .1% accuracy. They also
enable the units to be installed in NIST-S 32 0 932 500 ±1 896 480
hazardous locations without the need 932 500 2912 1600 ±0.7
for explosion-proof housings. NIST-T -328 -200 32 0 ±0.4 212 100
32 0 752 400 ±0.3
Its unique design requires only 10 Volts B.S.* 32 0 1472 800 ±0.3 284 140
for operation, thereby enabling it to 1472 800 2372 1300 ±0.5
drive into a 700 ohm load with a 24
NIST-B 572 300 932 500 ±2.0 1202 650
Volt supply. Input-output isolation is
932 500 2372 1800 ±1
standard.
RTD ±1 of Reading
Technical Specifications 100Ω Pt -328 -200 1562 850 ±0.1°C
Output Signal 2, 3 or 4-wire Linear w/Temperature 80 25
4 to 20mA = Output will be linear with mV -15mV 85mV ±0.02% of 4mV
temperature up to 21mA. Reading ±5µV
Ohms 0 500Ω ±0.1% of Span 50Ω
Output Load
Vs 10 20 24 30 36 Accuracy stated for thermocouples excludes cold junction compensation error. (See
Operating Temperature Effects for details). (@20°C ± 1°C)
R 0 500 700 1000 1300 Transmitter range can be configured anywhere within the maximum and minimum limits
Output load limit increases 50 Ω per 1V stated providing selected range is more than or equal to the minimum span.
from Vs = 10V up to 36V DC. *British Standard
7.11
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
Sensor Lead Resistance Effect: Long Term Drift • Intrinsically Safe (with certified barriers)
TC/mV Inputs: <100µV/100 Ω Less than 0.1% of span over 6 months Installation in Class I, Div. 1, Groups
RTD Sensors: <±0.1% of span - non accumulative. A, B, C & D; Class II, Div. 1, Groups
for sensor leads 0 to 10 Ω RFI/Enl Compliance E, F & G; Class III, Div. 2 hazardous
Isolation: Reference Conditions: locations.
Input-output-case 500V. RTD inputs: 32-392°F (0-200°C) • CENELEC EN50.014 & EN50.020.
Power Supply mV & TC Type K: 0-10mV Classification Eex ia llc T4 176°F
Maximum: 36V DC (30 VDC Electrostatic Discharge: (80°C) max. Suitable for mounting in
for IS applications) • Meets IEC 801.2 (8kV). Zone 0, 1 and 2 areas when
Minimum: 10VDC • Electromagnetic Fields/Radio Fre- powered through compatible
Maximum output quency Interference Protection. approved safety barrier.
Load @ 24VDC: 700 Ω • Meets IEC 801.3 level 3 and SAMA Transmitter Safety Limits:
Reverse polarity protection provided. PMC 33.1 1878, Class 2-ABC. Vmax: in + 30V Wmax: in = 1W
Output will be within 1% of steady state • Less than 1% deviation of span for field Imax: in = 200mA Ceq: = 0.06µF
value less than 2 seconds after strength 10V/M 20 to 1000MHZ. Equivalent capacitance Ceq must be
applying power. Transient high voltage bursts on I/O deducted from the maximum cable
Operating Influences lines: capacitance specified for the selected
Temperature: Meets IEC 801.4 level 3 safety barrier - see manufacturers data.
Reference: 68°F (20°C) Noise Rejection: Compatible Barriers:
Operating: -13 to +176°F (-25 to +80°C) Common mode: -120dB at 50/60 Hz MTL788, MTL788R, MTL787SP.
Storage: -40 to +185°F (-40 to +85°C) Series mode: -46dB at 50/60 Hz Any equivalent barrier to above or
Operating Temperature Effects Intrinsic Safety isolated safety barrier/repeater that
Span Drift: 0.0025% per °F max. Approvals: meets the stated safety limits providing
(0.005% per °C max.) • Certificate No: EECS (BASEEFA) EX- the total end to end resistance of the
Zero Drift: 94C-2042. barrier circuits, cable resistance plus
0.5 + Input offset x 0.005% per °F max loop resistance is less than 700 Ω
{ }
Input span
• FM (Pending).
• Intrinsically Safe (entity with barriers) - when powered from +24V supply.
Cold Junction Accuracy and Tracking: Installation in Class I, Div. 1, Groups Safety Environmental Protection:
±0.5°F ±0.01°F per °F change from A, B, C & D; Class II, Div. 1, Groups No additional safety protection required
reference. E, R & G; Class III, Div. 1 hazardous for hazardous area mounting.
Humidity locations. Environmental protection
100% condensing when in weather- • C.S.A. (Pending). IP21 IEC 529 1976
proof or explosion proof housing 95% Weight:
non-condensing without housing. 0.1 kg, 0.22 lbs, 3.5 oz.
Connections 1.3"
Programming Port
33mm
–
+
22.5°
2 Holes
1 2
1.46"
1.73" 3 4
Transmitter viewed
1.95" from topside + SUPPLY LOOP +
with cover removed.
4 Tapped Holes – SUPPLY LOOP –
GROUND
+ 1
Model Description T/C & mV – 2
SC-4400 2 wire Head or Fielding Mounting Transmitter
1
Code Configuration RTD - 2 WIRE 2
DS Default Settings (100 Ω RTD 0-100°C) 3
SU Configured to Customer Requirement 4
1
Code Options 2
D1 Din Rail Attachment - G profile RTD - 3 WIRE
3
D2 Din Rail Attachment - Top hat 4
N No Options 1
2
RTD - 4 WIRE
SC-4400 DS N Ordering Example 3
4
7.12
2 Wire AC Current/
Voltage Transmitter
SC-4300 L/U Open cover showing Input
and Range Selection
Switches
• Current or Voltage Input

Selectable
Weather-proof Explosion-proof
• User/Field Rangeable Housing
• 4-20 mA Loop-Powered
• Input/Output Isolation
• DIN Rail Mountable
The Ametek Power Instruments model The compact 4300 L/U is gasketed The combination of field rangeability,
SC-4300 L/U is a 2-wire input select- and sealed from moisture and dirt. It compact design and loop-powered 4-
able AC voltage or current transmitter. mounts on a surface or DIN rail without 20mA output gives the SC-4300 L/U
Both the input type and range are field additional mounting plates or adapters. the flexibility demanded by today’s
selectable using easily accessible Weather-proof and explosion-proof instrumentation users. The Ametek
switches. The isolated 4-20mA loop enclosures are optional. All input tradition of excellent quality, service
current output is proportional to the selections and range adjustments are and safety also makes the
input current or voltage with zero and located on top of the SC-4300 L/U SC-4300 L⁄U the right choice for your
span adjustability. case under a gasketed cover. application.
7.13
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
SC-4300L/U Specifications Input Span: field adjustable, 20-100% Ordering Information
of selected range
Input Range: (Switch Selectable) Specify Model 4300 L/U Transmitter
Input Zero: field adjustable, 0-50% of and any desired options. Factory
AC Voltage AC Current
selected range calibration is available – specify input
0-200 mV 0-200 mA type and range.
Isolation: 600 VDC or peak AC, input/
0-1 V 0-1 A
output/case SC-4300L/U Isolated AC current/
0-5 V 0-5 A
0-10 V voltage transmitter
0-25 V Input Impedance: Options: Factory ranging of any
0-50 V SC-4300
0-125 V 200 mV and 10 V ranges: 250 KΩ
SC-4300XP Explosion/weather-
0-250 V All other voltage ranges: 1 MΩ proof housing for SC-
5 A range: 0.04 Ω shunt 4300 transmitters
Output: 4-20 mA DC 200 mA and 1 A ranges: 1 Ω shunt SC-4300XP2 2” pipe mount kit for
Power Supply: 11.5 - 50 VDC SC-4300XP
Power Supply Effect: 0.005% of Accuracy:

span per volt
Linearity: ±0.15% of span
Load Limitations:
Repeatability: ±0.05% of span
2000 Hysteresis: ±0.02% of span
SC-4300 L/U Connections

Temperature Limits:
Load Operating
Zone Operation: -31°C to +85°C
(ohms)
Storage: -40°C to 120°C 1
0 11.5 Supply VDC 50 Temperature Effects:

Zero: ±0.025% of span/°C INPUT
V/A
{ 2
Span: ±0.025% of span/°C 5 AMP
{ 3
N/C 4
–
5
OUTPUT
{ +
6
3.56"
(90.4mm)
SC-4300 1.76"
(44.8mm)
2.31" .88"
2 HOLES FOR MTG. SURFACE
(58.7mm) (22.4mm)
#6 HARDWARE
4.312" SURFACE MTG.
4.50" (109.5mm)
(114.3mm) "DIN" RAIL
2.60" .88" (NOT SUPPLIED)
(66.0 mm) (22.4mm)
1.437"
(36.55mm) 1.10"
(27.9mm)
1/2 NPT
(2) HLS .24" 3.00" 2.50"
(6.1mm) (76.2mm) (63.5mm)
4.50" .875"
(114.3mm) (22.22mm)
Explosion-Proof Housing Surface or DIN Rail Mounting
Explosion-proof Housing Universal Enclosure

(for Surface or DIN Rail mounting)
7.14
2-Wire Slidewire
Transmitter
SC-4300R
Open cover showing Input
and Range Selection
Switches
Weather-proof / Explosion-proof
Housing
• Switch Selectable Range
• High Accuracy
• Mounting Options
• DIN Mount
The Ametek Power Instruments Model The transmitter circuitry includes low The compact SC-4300R case is
SC-4300R 2-wire Transmitter accepts output ripple, excellent RFI/EMI gasketed and sealed for protection
a slidewire input, typically from a immunity and complete input to output from moisture and dirt. It mounts on a
position measurement device, and isolation, for avoiding ground-loop surface or DIN rail without additional
provides an output loop current of 4-20 problems. Power is obtained from the mounting plates or adapters. Also,
mA proportional to the input resistance. current-loop, so wiring is simplified. weather-proof and explosion-proof
The input may be anywhere in the Since the SC-4300R will operate on as enclosures are available as options. All
range of 50 to 20K ohms. Span and little as 10 volts, use with standard 24V input and range adjustments are
zero offset adjustments are made with power supplies and intrinsic safety located on top of the SC-4300R case,
16 position switches for coarse barriers is possible without needing under a gasketed cover.
settings, and 25 turn potentiometers expensive signal repeaters or re- In addition, each SC-4300R is backed
for fine adjustments. There are no transmitters. by the Ametek organization, with
components or jumpers to change in traditional excellent support, quality
selecting the range. and service.
7.15
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
Specifications Isolation: 600 VDC or peak AC, input/ Ordering Information
Input: Slidewire/potentiometer, 3-wire output, input/case, output/case Specify Model SC-4300R Transmitter
(HI, LO, wiper) Response Time: <75 ms, 10% to 90% and any desired options. Factory
Input Slidewire Impedance: 50 ohm ranging is available. Specify range,
RFI Immunity: ±0.05% of span span and zero offset.
minimum, 20 K ohm maximum maximum per SAMA PMC 33.1C,
Input Range: 0-100% of slidewire transmitter case must be properly SC-4300R Isolated slidewire
impedance grounded. transmitter
Span: Adjustable, 20% of input range Grounding: Instrument must be Options:
minimum, 100% of input range maximum properly grounded at the terminal strip Factory ranging of any SC-4300
for RFI immunity. Also, either the input
Zero Offset: Adjustable, 0 ohm SC-4300XP Explosion /weather-
or output, but not both, may be
minimum, 80% of input range maxi- proof housing for
grounded.
mum SC-4300 transmitters
Temperature Limits:
Common Mode Rejection: SC-4300XP2 2” pipe mount kit for
Operation: -31°C to 85°C
120 dB at 50/60 Hz SC-4300XP
Storage: -40°C to 120°C
Output: 4-20 mA DC, linear with input
Temperature Effects:
Power Supply: 10-50 VDC Zero: ± 0.025% of span/°C
Output Ripple: 0.04% of span rms, max. Span: ± 0.01% of span/°C
Accuracy: Agency Approvals:
SC-4300R Connections
Repeatability: ±0.05% of span, max. FM, CSA, BASEEFA approved for
Hysteresis: ±0.02% of span, max. intrinsically safe operation
1
Linearity: ±0.05% of span, max.
INPUT 3
4-20mA
– 5
OUTPUT
+ 6
SC-4300R Dimensions
3.56"
(90.4mm)
SC-4300 1.76"
(44.8mm)
2.31" .88"
(58.7mm) (22.4mm)
#6 HARDWARE
4.312" SURFACE MTG.
4.50" (109.5mm)
(66.0 mm) (22.4mm)
1.437"
(36.55mm) 1.10"
(27.9mm)
1/2 NPT
(2) HLS .24" 3.00" 2.50"
(6.1mm) (76.2mm) (63.5mm)
4.50" .875"
(114.3mm) (22.22mm)

7.16
2-Wire TC/mV
Transmitter
SC-4326
Open cover showing Input and
Range Selection Switches
• User Selectable Input

Weather-proof /Explosion -proof
• Switch Selectable Range Housing
• FM, CSA, BASEEFA
Approvals For Intrinsically
Safe Operation.
• DIN Mount
The Ametek Power Instruments Model The transmitter circuitry includes: surface or DIN rail without additional
SC-4326 2-wire Transmitter accepts a automatic thermocouple cold-junction mounting plates or adapters. Also,
millivolt input from any specified temperature compensation, low output weather-proof and explosion-proof
thermocouple or millivolt source. The ripple, excellent RFI/EMI noise immu- enclosures are available as options. All
output is an analog 4-20mA current nity and complete input to output input and range adjustments are
signal proportional to the millivolt input. isolation, for avoiding ground-loop located on the top of the SC-4326
The input type and range can be problems. Power is obtained from the case, under a gasketed cover.
changed with switch settings on the current-loop, so wiring is simplified. In addition, each SC-4326 is backed
transmitter, eliminating the need for The compact SC-4326 case is by the Ametek organization, with
jumpers or range resistors. gasketed and sealed for protection traditional excellent support, quality
from moisture and dirt. It mounts on a and service.
7.17
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
Specifications Accuracy: Ordering Information
Inputs: TC conformity: ±0.075% of span, Specify Model SC-4326 Transmitter
Switch selectable, DC millivolts or type max. and any desired options. Factory
J, K, T, E, R, S, B thermocouples Repeatability: ±0.05% of span, max. calibration is available - specify input
Hysteresis: ±0.02% of span, max type and range.
Input Impedance: Stability: ±0.02% of span, max. SC-4326 Isolated thermocouple/
2 megohms minimum; 0.6µA excitation millivolt transmitter
Temperature Limits:
Input Span: Operation: -31° to +85°C Options
3 to 100mV, 16 position rotary switch Storage: -40° to +120°C SC-4300XP Explosion/weather-
coarse adjustment, 20 turn potentiom- proof housing for
eter fine adjustment Temperature Effects: SC-4300 transmitters
Zero: ±0.025% of span/°C, max. SC-4300XP2 2” pipe mount kit for
Input Zero Offset: Span: ±0.01% of span/°C, max. SC-4300XP
-10 to +30mV, 16 position rotary
switch coarse adjustment, 20 turn Cold Junction Error:
potentiometer fine adjustment ±1°C, max., 0° to 50°C.
±3.5°C, max., -31° to +85°C, type J,
TC Burnout Protection: K, T, E inputs
Upscale or downscale, DIP switch ±9°C, max., -31° to +85°C, type R,
selectable S, B inputs
SC-4326 Connections
Output: RFI Immunity:
4-20mADC into 3365 ohms, max., at <0.5% of span, max., tested per SAMA
maximum power supply voltage PMC33.1C
Output Ripple: 0.04% rms, max. 1
Common Mode Rejection:
Isolation: 600VDC or peak AC 120 dB @ 50/60Hz. – 2
INPUT mV OR T/C
Power Supply: 10 to 50VDC Response Time: + 3
<75mS, 10% to 90%
Power Supply Effect: 4
0.002% of span/volt change, max. Agency Approvals:
FM, CSA, BASEEFA, approved for – 5
intrinsically safe operation, also FM and OUTPUT
+ 6
CSA Exp. rated
7
8
9
10
3.56"
(90.4mm)
SC-4300 1.76"
(44.8mm)
2.31" .88"
(58.7mm) (22.4mm)
#6 HARDWARE
4.312" SURFACE MTG.
4.50" (109.5mm)
(66.0 mm) (22.4mm)
1.437"
(36.55mm) 1.10"
(27.9mm)
1/2 NPT
(2) HLS .24" 3.00" 2.50"
(6.1mm) (76.2mm) (63.5mm)
4.50" .875"
(114.3mm) (22.22mm)

7.18
2-Wire RTD Transmitter
SC-4372
Open cover showing Input and
Range Selection Switches
• Ni and Pt input
• Output linearized to Input
Temperature Weather-proof /Explosion-proof
Housing
• Switch Selectable Range
• FM, CSA and BASEEFA
Approved for Intrinsically
Safe Operation
• DIN Mount
The Ametek Power Instruments Model The transmitter circuitry includes mounting plates or adapters. Also,
SC-4372 2-Wire Transmitter accepts a automatic leadwire compensation, low weather-proof and explosion-proof
Ni or Pt RTD input and generates a 4- output ripple, excellent RFI/EMI noise enclosures are available as options. All
20mA current output. The output is immunity and complete input to output input and range adjustments are
isolated and linearized to input tem- isolation, for avoiding ground-loop located on the top of the SC-4372
perature. The input type is single- problems. Power is obtained from the case, under a gasketed cover.
jumper selected, and range is switch current-loop, so wiring is simplified. In addition, each SC-4372 is backed
selected. One model of the SC-4372 The compact SC-4372 case is by the Ametek organization, with
covers both RTD types, 2 and 3 wire gasketed and sealed for protection traditional excellent support, quality
inputs, with full zero and span from moisture and dirt. It mounts on a and service.
adjustability over the entire specified surface or DIN rail without additional
input range.
7.19
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
SC-4372 Specifications Output Ripple & Noise: Response Time: <75mS, 10% to
SC-4372: 0.05% p-p of span 90%
Inputs:
100 ohm Platinum RTD, .385 or .3902 Isolation: 850 VDC, 600 VAC Grounding: Case must be grounded
coefficient, 2 or 3 wire. Power Supply: 10 to 50 VDC for RFI immunity; input or output (but
120 ohm Nickel RTD, 2 or 3 wire not both) may be grounded.
Power Supply Effect: 0.0015% of
Single jumper selectable, Ni or Pt span per volt change, max. Agency Approvals:
Accuracy: FM, CSA, BASEEFA approved for
Excitation Current:
±0.05% of span, max. intrinsically safe operation.
Pt RTD: 325 to 375 µA Repeatability:
Ni RTD: 225 to 350 µA Hysteresis: ±0.02% of span, max.
Stability: ±0.02% of span, max. Ordering Information
Input Span:
Pt RTD: 50°C min., 700°C max. Specify Model SC-4372 Transmitter
Ni RTD: 50°C min., 300°C max. Linearization: and any desired options. Factory
(16 position switch coarse adjustment, 0.25% of input span, or 0.25°C max. calibration is available – specify input
20 turn potentiometer fine adjustment) type and range.
Temperature Limits: SC-4372 Isolated RTD
Input Zero Offset: Operation: -31°C to 85°C
Pt RTD: -31°C to 500°C transmitter
Storage: -40°C to 120°C
Ni RTD: -31°C to 310°C Options
(16 position switch coarse adjustment, Temperature Effects: SC-4300XP Explosion/weather-
20 turn potentiometer fine adjustment) Zero: ±0.025% of span/°C proof housing for SC-
Input Operating Range: Span: ±0.01% of span/°C, max. 4300 transmitters
Pt RTD: -31°C to 850°C RFI Immunity: SC-4300XP2 2” pipe mount kit for
Ni RTD: -31°C to 310°C <0.5% of span per SAMA PMC33.1C, SC-4300XP
Open Sensor Protection: Upscale transmitter case grounded
Leadwire Compensation: >40 ohm Common Mode Rejection:
per lead, 3-wire RTDs 120 dB, 50/60 Hz
Output: 4-20 mA DC, linear with input SC-4372 Connections
temperature
3-wire RTD
1
2-WIRE
INPUT RTD 1
2
3 2
4 3
4
– 5
OUTPUT
+ 6
7
8
9
10
3.56"
(90.4mm)
SC-4300 1.76"
(44.8mm)
2.31" .88"
(58.7mm) (22.4mm)
#6 HARDWARE
4.312" SURFACE MTG.
4.50" (109.5mm)
(66.0 mm) (22.4mm)
1.437"
(36.55mm) 1.10"
(27.9mm)
1/2 NPT
(2) HLS .24" 3.00" 2.50"
(6.1mm) (76.2mm) (63.5mm)
4.50" .875"
(114.3mm) (22.22mm)

7.20
Loop Isolators
SC-2302
• Low Cost
• Compact
• Loop Powered
• Signal Isolation
Ametek Loop Isolators are compact, SC-2302 Specifications Ambient Temperature Range:
low cost devices for isolating and -40° to 85°C
Input Output
converting common process current Ambient Temperature Effect:
SC-2302-1 4-20 mA 4-20 mA
signals. They are loop powered from ± 0.01%/°C Span error
SC-2302-2 10-50 mA 4-20 mA
the input current, requiring no external ± 0.025%/°C Zero shift
SC-2302-10 10-50 mA 10-50 mA
power source.
Isolation: 600 VAC/1000 VDC Common Mode Rejection:
>110 db at 50/60 Hz
Linearity: ± 0.1% of span @ 20°C
RFI Effect:
Repeatability: ± 0.1% of span <1% of span per SAMA PMC33.1C
Hysteresis: ± 0.1% of span Agency Approvals:
Input Voltage Drop: FM and CSA, Ordinary Location
<10V at rated output FM Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D
Output Loop Drive: W/ Explosion Proof Housing Option –

20 mA into 275 ohm maximum FM Class I, Division 2, Groups C and D
50 mA into 110 ohm maximum FM Class II, Division 2, Groups E, F, and G
Output Load Effect: <± 0.05% of span
7.21
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
Loop Isolator Connections Ordering Information
SC-2302 Input Output
SC-2302-1 4-20 mA 4-20 mA
SC-2302-2 10-50 mA 4-20 mA
SC-2302-10 10-50 mA 10-50 mA
1- 2+ 3+ 4-
IN OUT
SC-2302 Loop Isolator Dimensions
.187
DIA.
IN OUT 2.000"
2.500"
2.950"
3.520"
1.880"
1.420"
7.22
Scaleable Field Mounted
Process Indicators
SC-4300M
• 4-20mA current input

• Display scaleable in
engineering units
• 3 Mounting styles
• Easy to range
• Low voltage drop
Series SC-4300M Process Indicators

are compact loop-powered meters
whose displays may be user scaled to
read in the engineering units of the
process. Each model mounts in series
with any 4-20mA signal, and is
powered by that current, with no
external power needed.
Three models are available for field
mounting. Model SC-4300M mounts
on Ametek SC-4300 2-wire transmit-
ters; Model SC-4302M is in a NEMA 4X
housing for weather-proof applications;
Model SC-4303M is for stand alone
surface mounting, or for mounting in an
explosion-proof case.
7.23
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
Specifications SC-4300M mounted on SC-4300 transmitter
Input: 4-20mA DC
3.0"
(76.2mm)
Display:
3 1/2 digit LCD, 0.5" (12.7mm) high, 4.3"
jumper selectable decimal point (109.22mm)
location (1XXX, 1XX.X, 1X.XX, or

1.XXX)
Accuracy: +0.05% Full Scale Range,

+1 count
Span Range: 20 to 1999 counts,
nominal
2.8"
Zero Range: -450 to +450 nominal (71.72mm)
Note that due to the interaction SC-4300MXP housing 4.50"

(114.3mm) #25 DRILL, 5/16 DEEP
between zero and span not all combi- 1/2 NPT (2 PLS.) #6-32 TAP .250 (6.350) DEEP MAX. .750"
TAP# 10-24 UNC-2B X 1/4
DEEP, INSTALL GREEN
PLATED, STEEL BINDING
#6-32 TAP .280 (5.537) DEEP MIN. (19.05mm)
nations of zero and span may be .875"
(22.22mm) #6-32 TAP (2 PLACES)
.375"
HD. SCREW
(9.525mm)
possible.
2.50"(63.50mm) DIA. BOLT
1.44" CIRCLE WITH #6-32 TAP
Temperature Stability: +0.035 Full (36.57mm) .250 (6.350) DEEP MAX.
.280 (5.537) DEEP MIN.
Scale Range per °C change

(2 PLACES)
2.75"
4.50" 4.31" (69.850mm)
(114.3mm) (109.47mm)
1.375"
(34.925mm)
Temperature Range: 450
Operating: -10° to +65°C

1.62"
Storage: -40° to +80°C .375"
(41.14mm)
(INSIDE HEIGHT TO GLASS)
4.88"
NEOPRENE (BUNAN)
GASKET
VENDOR PART NO. 5829
(9.525mm)
Voltage Drop: 2.7 VDC, max. (123.59mm)
5.94"
(150.87mm)
2.25"
(57.15mm)
Ordering 3.19"
(81.03mm)
Specify model number and accessory SC-4302M 4.90"

(THROAT OPENING
IN ENCLOSURE)
(124.46mm)
case, if needed: 2.25" .4"
(57.15mm) (10.16mm)
SC-4300M: .4"
(10.16mm)
Mount on SC-4300 transmitter
3.0"
(76.2mm)
SC-4300MXP: 1.3"
ROCHESTER INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS
(33.02mm)
Explosion-proof case for SC-4300M 3.0"
and transmitter assembly (76.2mm)
SC-4303M 2.44"
(61.96mm)
SC-4302: NEMA 4X housing A

2.31"
(58.72mm)
GROUND SCREW
#6-32
MOUNTING SCREWS
2 PLACES
3.11"
SC-4303M: Surface mount (78.99mm)
SC-4303MXP: 3.11"
(78.99mm)
Explosion-proof case for SC-4303M

1.175"
(29.85mm)
Each SC-4300M meter comes factory

scaled to read out 0.0 to 100.00 for 4 2.75"
(69.85mm)
.175" NOM.
(4.45mm)
A
to 20mA input. Scaling to other ranges 3.11 MAX"
(79.88mm)
by the factory is available, and the

display is user scaleable. SC-4303MXP housing 4.50"
1/2 NPT (2 PLS.)
(114.3mm) #25 DRILL, 5/16 DEEP
.875" TAP# 10-24 UNC-2B X 1/4
(22.22mm) DEEP, INSTALL GREEN
#6-32 TAP .250 (6.350) DEEP MAX. .750"
(19.05mm) PLATED, STEEL BINDING
#6-32 TAP .280 (5.537) DEEP MIN. HD. SCREW
#6-32 TAP (2 PLACES)
.375"
(9.525mm)
2.50"(63.50mm) DIA. BOLT

1.44" CIRCLE WITH #6-32 TAP
(36.57mm) .250 (6.350) DEEP MAX.
.280 (5.537) DEEP MIN.
(2 PLACES)
2.75"
(69.850mm)
4.50" 4.31"
(109.47mm) 1.375"
(114.3mm) (34.925mm)
450
1.62"
(41.14mm)
NEOPRENE (BUNAN) 2.25"
(INSIDE HEIGHT) GASKET (57.15mm)
.375" 2.69"
(9.525mm) (68.33mm) 3.19"
(81.03mm)
(THROAT OPENING
3.56" IN ENCLOSURE)
(90.24mm)
7.24
AC Current/Voltage Alarms
ET-1200L/U
ET-1202L/U
• AC current/voltage input
• Single or dual trips
• Fixed deadband
• Conforms to IEEE SWC Test
These single and dual trip alarms Specifications Outputs:

accept AC current or voltage inputs a. single relay: one DPDT contact
Inputs:
(field alterable) and provide one DPDT rated 5 A at 30 VDC; 5A at 250 VAC
a. Any AC current from 0-1 amp to
5 amp (ET-1200L/U or two SPDT 5 resistive
0-7.5 amps AC, burden less than
amp (ET-1202L/U) universal relay b. dual relay: two SPDT contacts
0.5 VA
contact outputs. Basic input spans are rated 5 A at 30 VDC; 5 A at 250
b. Any AC voltage from 0-16 to 0-200
16 to 200 VAC or 0-1 to 0-7.5 amps. VAC resistive
VAC signal, burden less than 1.5 VA
All models come with fixed deadband c. standard LED: alarm display to
less than 0.5% of span. Response time indicate trip condition
Input Frequency Range: 50-500 Hz
is less than 400 milliseconds. The
frequency range of all models is 50-500 Optional Outputs:
Input Surge Capability:
Hz. Series 1200 ac current/voltage a. contacts rated at 10 A at 28 VDC or
AC Current: 20 amps continuous; 250
alarms conform to the IEEE SWC test. 115 VAC resistive (T10 option); not
amps for 1 second per
available on the P-11 enclosure;
hour
uses dual slot on the A-12 enclo-
AC voltage: 200% of input specified,
sure
continuous
b. environmentally-sealed contacts
rated 2 A at 30 VDC or 115 VAC
Deadband: Fixed deadband; less than
resistive (D option)
0.5% of span
Repeatability: ±0.1% of span,
maximum
Response Time: Less than 400
milliseconds
7.25
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
Controls: Ambient Temperature Range: Enclosures:
ET-1200L/U:Multiturn trip-set potenti- 0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C) a. single unit surface mount (standard)
ometers with clockwise b. A-12, high-density, 19" rack or
rotation to increase setting Operating Power Supplies: surface mount with front access
ET-1202L/U:Two multiturn trip-set a. 115 VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz 5 watts terminal blocks; units with AC input
potentiometers with (standard) require 2 slots
clockwise rotation to b. 24 VDC +20%-15%, 3.5 watts, H c. NEMA 4 and 12, from one to 24
increase setting suffix (non-isolated) units
c. 230 VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts d. explosion-proof single unit; FM
Trip Set Adjustment: 0-100% (H2 suffix) approved for Class 1, Division 1,
continuous, independent adjustment d. 115 VAC ±10%, 60 Hz, 5 watts (H3 Groups C and D
per trip-set point by infinite resolution suffix; P-11 or A-12 option) e. Refer to Options section for a
potentiometer e. 115 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts complete list of options for each
(H4 suffix; P-11 or A-12 option) model
Trip Point Stability and Drift: f. 230 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts
For 25° to 125°F (-4° to 52°C): (H5 suffix; P-11 or A-12 option) Agency Approvals:
±0.5% of span maximum for a 50°F g. 24 VDC ±20%, 4.5 watts (I suffix; FM approved for ordinary locations and
(28°C) change in ambient temperature; isolated) hazardous locations Divisions 1 and 2,
±0.2% typical h. 48 VDC ±20%, 5 watts (I1 suffix; Class I, Groups C & D; Class II, Groups
isolated) E, F & G. Ametek explosion-proof
LED Visual Indication of Alarm Condition: i. Refer to Option section for a housing required for hazardous
ET-1200L/U: One complete list of options for each locations.
ET-1202L/U: Two model.
Power Supply Effect: ±0.15% for Ordering Information:
Relay Action: Specify normally specified power variation refer to pages 7.38, 7.39
energized (failsafe) or de-energized
(non-failsafe) Isolation: 600 VAC or 1000 VDC
ET-1200L/U: Hi Trip or input/output/power for the AC or Dimensions:
Lo Trip isolated DC power version refer to page 7.40
ET-1202L/U: Hi/Lo Trip Net Weight: 3.4 lbs (1.54 kg) approximate
Lo/Hi Trip
Hi/Hi Trip or
Lo/Lo Trip
ET-1200L/U and ET-1202L/U

Connections
ET-1200L/U T2 Option ET-1200 L/U only ET-1202L/U
1 1
CURRENT ONLY CURRENT ONLY
2 2
5
3 3
VOLTAGE ONLY 6 K1A VOLTAGE ONLY
4 4
7
5 13 5
K1A 6 K1B K1A 6
OUTPUT 14 OUTPUT
(TB2)
7 RELAYS 7 RELAYS
(ON THE 15 (ON THE
8 SHELF 8 SHELF
16
POSITION) POSITION)
K1B 9 K2B K2A 9
17
(TB2)
10 10
18
AC (– FOR DC) 11 AC (– FOR DC) 11
POWER 8 POWER
12 INPUT 12 INPUT
AC (+ FOR DC) 9 K2A AC (+ FOR DC)
EARTH G EARTH G
10
7.26
T/C and mV Alarms
ET-1205
• T/C or mV inputs
• Dual relay outputs
• 0-100% continuously
adjustable set point
• Fixed deadband
ET-1208
• T/C or mV inputs
• Single relay output
• 0-100% continuously
adjustable set point
• Adjustable deadband
ET-1205 and ET-1208 Specifications Optional Outputs:

The ET-1205 accepts inputs from any a. contacts rated at 10 A at 28 VDC or
Inputs:
standard thermocouple or millivolt 115 VAC resistive (T10 option); not
a. any thermocouple type (R, S, E, K,
source and provides a dual universal available on the P-11 enclosure;
T, J, B) providing input spans
relay output with a 0-100% continu- uses dual slot on the A-12 enclosure
between 10 and 100 mV, standard;
ously adjustable set point. Cold b. environmentally-sealed contacts
calculated from input temperature
junction compensation is standard on rated 2 A at 30 VDC or 115 VAC
range.
all thermocouple alarms. resistive (D option)
b. input spans between 10 and 100
c. analog output module with the
The ET-1208 is similar to the ET-1205 mV, standard
following available outputs (O
but provides a single relay and an c. zero offsets available from -5 to +70
option):
adjustable deadband. mV, standard
d. optional input spans: Voltage Outputs Current Outputs
SS1: 3.00 to 4.99 mV 2-10 VDC 10-50 mA
SS2: 5.00 to 9.99 mV 1-5 VDC 4-20 mA
0.2-1 VDC 2-10 mA
20-100 mV 1-5 mA
Input Impedance: One megohm 2-10 mV 0.2-1 mA
minimum input impedance without Note: Any analog output may also be
upscale protection zero based.
Outputs: d. Refer to Options section for options
for each model.
a. single relay: one DPDT contact
rated
5 A at 30 VDC; 5 A at 250 VAC
resistive
b. dual relay: two SPDT contacts rated
5 A at 30 VDC; 5 A at 250 VAC
resistive
c. standard LED: alarm display to
indicate trip condition
7.27
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
Trip Point Stability and Drift: Relay Action: Must specify normally Power Supply Isolation: 600 VAC or
energized (failsafe) or de-energized
±0.02%/°F +  offset × 0.01%/°F  maximum
1000 VDC input/output/power for the
 span  (non-failsafe) AC or isolated DC power version
ET-1205: Hi/Lo Trip, Lo/Hi Trip,
  offset  
±0.036%/°C +  span × 0.018%/°C max. Hi/Hi Trip or Lo/Lo Trip Net Weight: 3.4 lbs (1.54 kg) approximate
  ET-1208: Hi Trip or Lo Trip
For 25°F to 125°F (-4°C to 52°C) Enclosures:
Repeatability: ±0.1% of span, maxi- a. single unit surface mount (standard)
Typical is 0.5 x maximum. For spans mum b. P-11, high-density, 19" rack mount
<10 mV, maximum temperature effect is: with rear access terminal blocks
Response Time: Less than 200
 10mV  × 0.02%/°F +  offset × 0.01%/°F  c. A-12, high-density, 19" rack or
 spanmV   span 
milliseconds
surface mount with front access
Ambient Temperature Range: terminal blocks
Deadband:
ET-1205: Fixed deadband; unless 0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C) d. NEMA 4 and 12, from one to 24
otherwise specified, fixed to units
0.5% of span (typical); field e. explosion-proof single unit, FM
Operating Power Supplies: approved for Class 1, Division 1,
alterable from 0.2 to 10% a. 115 VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz 5 watts
ET-1208: Adjustable deadband; from Groups C and D
(standard) f. refer to Options section for a com-
less than 1 to 100% of span b. 24 VDC +20%-15%, 3.5 watts, H
continuously adjustable plete list of options for each model
suffix (non-isolated)
(blind set) c. 230 VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts Agency Approvals:
(H2 suffix) FM approved for ordinary locations and
Controls: d. 115 VAC ±10%, 60 Hz, 5 watts (H3
ET-1205: Two multiturn trip-set hazardous locations Divisions 1 and 2,
suffix; P-11 or A-12 option) Class I, Groups C & D; Class II, Groups
potentiometers e. 115 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts
ET-1208: One multiturn trip-set E, F & G. Ametek explosion-proof
(H4 suffix; P-11 or A-12 option) housing required for hazardous locations.
potentiometer. f. 230 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts
Manual override deadband (H5 suffix; P-11 or A-12 option)
cancel pushbutton CSA approved for ordinary locations, all
g. 24 VDC ±20%, 4.5 watts (I suffix; unit types with either 117 VAC, 24 VDC
isolated) isolated or 24 VDC non-isolated power
Trip Adjustment: 0-100% of span h. 48 VDC ±20%, 5 watts (I1 suffix;
continuously adjustable versions. ET-1200 series contact rating
isolated) at 117 VAC/24 VDC is 3 amps.
i. refer to Option section for a
LED Visual Indication of Alarm complete list of options for each
Condition: Ordering Information:
model. see pages 7.38, 7.39
ET-1205: Two
ET-1208: One Power Supply Effect: ±0.15% for Dimension Drawings:
specified power variation see page 7.40
ET-1205 & ET-1208 Connections
ET-1205 ET-1205 only ET-1208

T2 Option M Option
INPUT (–) 1 5 INPUT (–) 1
INPUT (+) 2 6 K1A INPUT (+) 2
7
13
5 K1B 5
14
K1A (TB2)
6 K1A 6
OUTPUT 15 OUTPUT
7 RELAYS 7 RELAYS
(ON THE 16
(ON THE
8 SHELF K2B 8 SHELF
17
POSITION) (TB2) POSITION)
K2A 9 K1B 9
18
10 10
8
AC (– FOR DC) 11 9 K2A AC (– FOR DC) 11
POWER POWER
12 INPUT 0-1mA 12 INPUT
AC (+ FOR DC) 10 19 (–) UP TO 50 OHM AC (+ FOR DC)
G FIXED LOAD G
EARTH 20 (+) (TB2) EARTH
7.28
Current & Voltage Alarms
ET-1214, ET-1218
• Single trips
• DC current/voltage inputs
• Fixed/adjustable deadband
• Single or dual inputs
ET-1215, ET-1219
• Dual trips
• DC current/voltage inputs
• Fixed/adjustable deadband
The ET-1214 and ET-1218 accept DC Specifications Inputs: For ET-1215 and 1219,
current or voltage inputs and provide a specify if dual input required.
The alarms described above have the
single universal relay output with a 0- Input Input Impedance
following common specifications.
100% continuously adjustable set 0-200 mV 400 kΩ
point. Outputs: 0-500 1 MΩ
a. single relay: one DPDT contact 0-1 VDC 2 MΩ
The ET-1218 differs from the ET-1214 rated 5 A at 30 VDC; 5A at 250 0.25-1.25 VDC 2 MΩ
by offering an adjustable deadband. VAC resistive 1-5 VDC 5 MΩ
b. dual relay: two SPDT contacts 2-10 VDC 200 kΩ
The ET-1215 and ET-1219 accept DC
rated 5 A at 30 VDC; 5 A at 250
current or voltage inputs and provide a 0-1 mA 5000 Ω
VAC resistive
dual universal relay output with a
c. standard LED: alarm display to 1-5 mA 1000 Ω
0-100% continuously adjustable set 2-10 mA 500 Ω
indicate trip condition 250 Ω
point. 4-20 mA
Optional Outputs: 10-50 mA 100 Ω
The ET- 1219 differs from the ET-1215 Note: Any of the above ranges can also be
a. contacts rated at 10 A at 28 VDC
by offering an adjustable deadband. zero based.
or 115 VAC resistive (T10 option);
The ET-1218 and ET-1219 include not available on the P-11 enclo- X-Option: Voltage inputs — 20,000
deadband cancel buttons for manual sure; uses dual slot on the A-12 ohms per volt input impedance;
override. enclosure maximum voltage input, 200 VDC
Low Input Impedance: (LZ Option)
resistive (D option) Input Input Impedance
c. see Options, pages 7.38, 7.39. 1-5 mA 40.2 Ω
2-10 mA 20.0 Ω
Repeatability: ±0.1% of span, 4-20 mA 10.0 Ω
maximum 10-50 mA 4.5 Ω
Note: Any of the above ranges can also be
Response Time: Less than 200 zero based.
milliseconds.
7.29
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
Deadband: Ambient Temperature Range: Enclosures:
ET-1214 & 1215: Fixed deadband; 0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C) a. single unit surface mount (standard)
fixed to 0.5% (typical) b. P-11, high-density, 19" rack mount
of span; field alterable Operating Power Supplies: with rear access terminal blocks, DC
from 0.2% to 10% a. 115 VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz 5 watts inputs only
ET-1218 & 1219: Adjustable deadband; (standard) c. A-12, high-density, 19" rack or
from less than 1 to b. 24 VDC +20%-15%, 3.5 watts, H surface mount with front access
100% of span suffix (non-isolated) terminal blocks; units with AC input
c. 230 VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts require 2 slots
Controls: (H2 suffix) d. NEMA 4 and 12, from one to 24
ET-1214: Multiturn trip-set potentiom- d. 115 VAC ±10%, 60 Hz, 5 watts (H3 units
eter with clockwise rotation suffix; P-11 or A-12 option) e. explosion-proof single unit; FM
to increase setting e. 115 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts approved for Class 1, Division 1,
ET-1215: Two multiturn trip-set (H4 suffix; P-11 or A-12 option) Groups C and D
potentiometers with clock- f. 230 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts f. Refer to Options section for a
wise rotation to increase (H5 suffix; P-11 or A-12 option) complete list of options for each
setting g. 24 VDC ±20%, 4.5 watts (I suffix; model
ET-1218, Multiturn trip-set and isolated)
ET-1219 deadband potentiometers h. 48 VDC ±20%, 5 watts (I1 suffix; Agency Approvals:
with clockwise rotation to isolated) FM approved for ordinary locations and
increase setting. i. Refer to Option section for a hazardous locations Divisions 1 and 2,
Manual override deadband complete list of options for each Class I, Groups C & D; Class II, Groups
cancel pushbutton model. E, F & G. Ametek explosion-proof
housing required for hazardous
Power Supply Effect: ±0.15% for locations.
Trip Point Stability and Drive: specified power variation
For 25° to 125°F (-4° to 52°C) Isolation: 600 VAC or 1000 VDC CSA approved for ordinary locations,
±0.01%/°F (±0.018%/°C) maximum input/output/power for the AC or (except L/U) with either 117 VAC, 24
±0.004%/°F (±0.007%/°C) typical isolated DC power version VDC isolated or 24 VDC non-isolated
power versions. ET-1200 Series
LED Visual Indication of Alarm Condition: Net Weight: 3.4 lbs (1.54 kg) approxi- contact rating at 117 VAC/24 VDC is 5
ET-1214 & 1218: One mate amps.
ET-1215 & 1219: Two
Relay Action: Specify normally Ordering Information:

energized (failsafe) or de-energized refer to page 7.38, 7.39
(non-failsafe)
ET-1214/1218: Hi Trip or Dimensions:
Lo Trip refer to page 7.40
ET-1215/1219: Hi/Lo Trip
Lo/Hi Trip
Hi/Hi Trip or
Lo/Lo Trip
ET-1214/15/18/19 ET-1214 & ET-1218 ET-1215 & ET-1219 T2 Option

INPUT (–) 1 ET-1215 & ET-1219 Only
INPUT (+) 2 5
INPUT 2 (+) (ET-1215 & 1219 ONLY) 3 6 K1A
INPUT 2 (–) (ET-1215 & 1219 ONLY) 4 7
5 5 13
K1A 6 K1A 6 K1B
OUTPUT OUTPUT 14
(TB2)
7 RELAYS 7 RELAYS 15
(ON THE (ON THE
8 SHELF 8 SHELF 16
POSITION) POSITION)
K1B 9 K2A 9 17 K2B
(TB2)
10 10 18
AC (– FOR DC) 11 8
POWER
12 INPUT
AC (+ FOR DC) 9 K2A
EARTH G 10
7.30
Deviation Alarm
ET-1228
• DC current/voltage input
• Two independent trips
The ET-1228 accepts either two inputs ET-1228 Specifications Outputs:

or a single input with an internal a. single relay: one DPDT contact
Inputs:
reference and provides dual contact rated 5 A at 30 VDC; 5A at 250 VAC
outputs based on the deviation from Input Input Impedance resistive
set point. 0-100 mV 200 kΩ b. dual relay: two SPDT contacts rated
0-500 mV 1 MΩ 5 A at 30 VDC; 5 A at 250 VAC
0-1 VDC 2 MΩ
resistive
0.25-1.25 VDC 2 MΩ
1-5 VDC 5 MΩ c. standard LED: alarm display to
0-1 mA 5000 Ω indicate trip condition
1-5 mA 1000 Ω
2-10 mA 500 Ω Optional Outputs:
4-20 mA 250 Ω a. contacts rated at 10 A at 28 VDC or
10-50 mA 100 Ω 115 VAC resistive (T10 option); not
Note: Any of the above ranges can also be available on the P-11 enclosure;
zero based. uses dual slot on the A-12 enclosure
Low Input Impedance: (LZ Option) rated 2 A at 30 VDC or 115 VAC
Input Input Impedance resistive (D option)
0.2-1 mA 100 Ω
1-5 mA 20 Ω
2-10 mA 10 Ω
4-20 mA 5Ω
10-50 mA 2Ω
zero based.
7.31
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
Deadband: Adjustable deadband; Ambient Temperature Range: d. NEMA 4 and 12, from one to 24
from less than 1 to 100% of deviation 0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C) units
Controls: Multiturn trip-set and Operating Power Supplies: e. explosion-proof single unit; FM
deadband potentiometers with a. 115 VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz 5 watts approved for Class 1, Division 1,
clockwise rotation to increase setting. (standard) Groups C and D
Manual override deadband cancel b. 24 VDC +20%-15%, 3.5 watts, H f. Refer to Options section for a
pushbutton suffix (non-isolated) complete list of options for each
c. 230 VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts model
Trip Point Stability and Drive:
For 25° to 125°F (-4° to 52°C) (H2 suffix) Agency Approvals:
±0.01%/°F (±0.018%/°C) maximum d. 115 VAC ±10%, 60 Hz, 5 watts (H3 FM approved for ordinary locations and
±0.004%/°F (±0.007%/°C) typical suffix; P-11 or A-12 option) hazardous locations Divisions 1 and 2,
e. 115 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts Class I, Groups C & D; Class II, Groups
Deviation Set: 0 to 20% of span, (H4 suffix; P-11 or A-12 option) E, F & G. Ametek explosion-proof
continuously adjustable with infinite f. 230 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts housing required for hazardous
resolution 20 turn potentiometer (H5 suffix; P-11 or A-12 option) locations.
Input Reference Option: Used to g. 24 VDC ±20%, 4.5 watts (I suffix;
CSA approved for ordinary locations,
compare a single input to an adjustable isolated)
with either 117 VAC, 24 VDC isolated
reference point. h. 48 VDC ±20%, 5 watts (I1 suffix;
or 24 VDC non-isolated power ver-
isolated)
LED Visual Indication of Alarm sions. ET-1200 Series contact rating at
i. Refer to Option section for a
Condition: Two 117 VAC/24 VDC is 5 amps.
complete list of options for each
Relay Action: Specify normally model.
energized (failsafe) or de-energized Ordering Information:
Enclosures:
(non-failsafe) see page 7.38, 7.39
a. single unit surface mount (standard)
Hi Trip or Lo Trip referenced to input 2 b. P-11, high-density, 19" rack mount
K1 trips on positive deviation of input 1 with rear access terminal blocks, DC Dimensions:
K2 trips on negative deviation of input 1 inputs only see page 7.40
c. A-12, high-density, 19" rack or
surface mount with front access
terminal blocks; units with AC input
require 2 slots
ET-1228 Connections
COMMON 1 T2 Option
INPUT 1 2 COMMON 1
INPUT 2 INPUT 1 2
3
INPUT 2 3
4
4
5
((+) DEVIATION ) K1A 6
7 RELAYS SHOWN
DE-ENERGIZED
8 (SHELF POSITION)
((–) DEVIATION) K2A 9

10
11 11
POWER POWER
12 INPUT INPUT
12
EARTH G EARTH G
7.32
RTD Alarms
ET-1275
• RTD input
• Dual trips
• Fixed deadband
• Optional voltage/current
output
ET-1278
• RTD input
• Single trip
• Optional voltage/current
output
ET-1275 & ET-1278 ET-1275 & ET-1278 Outputs:

Specifications a. single relay: one DPDT contact
The ET-1275 accepts inputs from any
rated 5 A at 30 VDC; 5A at 250 VAC
standard RTD and provides a dual Inputs: resistive
universal relay output with a 0-100% a. Spans from 10 to 1260 ohm. Specify b. dual relay: two SPDT contacts rated
continuously adjustable set point. two or three-wire RTDs, RTD type, 5 A at 30 VDC; 5 A at 250 VAC
The ET-1278 is similar to the ET-1275 input temperature range and the resistive
but provides a single relay output and minimum/maximum resistance. c. standard LED: alarm display to
an adjustable deadband. b. The span must be minimum of 5% of indicate trip condition
the minimum RTD resistance
c. Optional input spans:
SS3: 2.50 to 4.99 ohms Optional Outputs:
SS4: 5.00 to 9.99 ohms a. contacts rated at 10 A at 28 VDC or
115 VAC resistive (T10 option); not
available on the P-11 enclosure;
uses dual slot on the A-12 enclosure
resistive (D option)
c. analog output module with the
following available outputs (O
option):
Voltage Outputs Current Outputs
2-10 VDC 10-50 mA
1-5 VDC 4-20 mA
0.2-1 VDC 2-10 mA
20-100 mV 1-5 mA
2-10 mV 0.2-1 mA
Note: Any analog output may also be
zero based.
7.33
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
Trip Point Stability and Drift: LED Visual Indication of Alarm Power Supply Effect: ±0.15% for
For 25° to 125°F (-4° to 52°C): Condition: specified power variation
ET-1275: Two
± × 0.002% + 0.008%/°F max.
RTD min.( Ω) Power Supply Isolation: 600 VAC or
 spanΩ 
ET-1278: One 1000 VDC input/output/power for the
Relay Action: Specify normally AC or isolated DC power version
  RTD min.( Ω)  
± spanΩ × 0.0036% + 0.015%/°F max. energized (failsafe) or de-energized Net Weight: 3.4 lbs (1.54 kg) approxi-
  (non-failsafe) mate
Example: ET-1275: Hi/Lo Trip
For 25Ω span with 100Ω RTD mini- Lo/Hi Trip Enclosures:
mum: Hi/Hi Trip a. single unit surface mount (standard)
±0.016%/°F maximum (±0.0288%/°C Lo/Lo Trip b. P-11, high-density, 19" rack mount
maximum) ET-1278: Hi Trip or with rear access terminal blocks
Lo Trip c. A-12, high-density, 19" rack or
Deadband: surface mount with front access
ET-1275: Fixed deadband: unless Repeatability: ±0.1% of span, maximum terminal blocks
otherwise specified, fixed to Response Time: Less than 200 d. NEMA 4 and 12, from one to 24
0.5% (typical) of span; field milliseconds units
alterable from 0.2 to 10% e. explosion-proof single unit; FM
ET-1278: Adjustable deadband: from Ambient Temperature Range:
0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C) approved for Class 1, Division 1,
less than 1 to 100% of span Groups C and D
continuously adjustable f. Refer to Options section for a
Operating Power Supplies:
Controls: a. 115 VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz 5 watts complete list of options for each
ET-1275: Two multiturn trip-set (standard) model
potentiometers b. 24 VDC +20%-15%, 3.5 watts, H Agency Approvals:
ET-1278: Multiturn trip-set and suffix (non-isolated) FM approved for ordinary locations and
deadband potentiometers. c. 230 VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts hazardous locations Divisions 1 and 2,
Manual override deadband (H2 suffix) Class I, Groups C & D; Class II, Groups
cancel pushbutton d. 115 VAC ±10%, 60 Hz, 5 watts (H3 E, F & G. Ametek explosion-proof
suffix; P-11 or A-12 option) housing required for hazardous
Trip Set Adjustment: 0-100% of span e. 115 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts locations.
continuously adjustable (H4 suffix; P-11 or A-12 option)
f. 230 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts CSA approved for ordinary locations,
(H5 suffix; P-11 or A-12 option) all unit types with either 117 VAC, 24
ET-1275 & ET-1278 Connections VDC isolated or 24 VDC non-isolated
g. 24 VDC ±20%, 4.5 watts (I suffix;
ET-1275 isolated) power versions. ET-1200 Series
B h. 48 VDC ±20%, 5 watts (I1 suffix; contact rating at 117 VAC/24 VDC is 5
1
isolated) amps.
A 2
RTD
C 3 i. Refer to Option section for a
complete list of options for each Ordering Information:
model. See pages 7.38, 7.39
5
K1A 6
OUTPUT
7 RELAYS
8
(ON THE Dimensions:
SHELF
K2A
POSITION) See page 7.40
9
10
AC (– FOR DC) 11
POWER
Differential
AC (+ FOR DC) 12 INPUT M Option Input Connections ET-1278
EARTH G All Models
RTD 1 IS B
A1 2 1
HIGHER A 2
5 TEMPERATURE RTD
ET-1275 Only RTD
1 C 3
T2 Option 6 K1A B1
7 1
B2
13 5
K1B RTD K1A 6
14 2 OUTPUT
(TB2) A2
15 3 7 RELAYS
(ON THE
16 8 SHELF
POSITION)
17 K2B K1B 9
(TB2)
18 10
8 AC (– FOR DC) 11
POWER
0-1mA INPUT
9 K2A 19 (–) UP TO 50 OHM AC (+ FOR DC) 12
FIXED LOAD
10 20 (+) (TB2) EARTH G
7.34
ET-1200 Alarms Ordering Guide
ET-1200 L/U Single AC Current/Voltage Alarm

ET-1202 L/U Dual AC Current/Voltage Alarm
ET-1205 Dual TC/mV Alarm with Fixed Deadband
ET-1208 Single TC/mV Alarm with Adjustable Deadband
ET-1214 Single Current/Voltage Alarm w/Fixed Deadband

ET-1215 Dual Current/Voltage Alarm w/Fixed Deadband
ET-1218 Single Current/Voltage Alarm w/Adjustable Deadband
ET-1219 Dual Current/Voltage Alarm w/Adjustable Deadband
ET-1228 Single Deviation Alarm w/Adjustable Deadband
ET-1275 Dual RTD Alarm with Fixed Deadband

ET-1278 Single RTD Alarm with Adjustable Deadband
7.35
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
Options ET-1200 Alarms Quick Reference Option Chart
1. Input Options 2. Power Supply
Model No. and Description Option Ordering Suffix RFI* SS1 SS2 SS3 SS4 X LZ IR H* H2* H3 H4
ET-1200 L/U Single AC Current/Voltage Alarm A A O O

ET-1202 L/U Dual AC Current/Voltage Alarm A A O O
ET-1205 Dual TC/mV Alarm with Fixed Deadband SP O O A A O O
ET-1208 Single TC/mV Alarm with Adjustable Deadband SP O O A A O O
ET-1214 Single Current/Voltage Alarm w/Fixed Deadband SP O A A A O O

ET-1215 Dual Current/Voltage Alarm w/Fixed Deadband SP O A A A O O
ET-1218 Single Current/Voltage Alarm w/Adjustable Deadband SP O A A A O O
ET-1219 Dual Current/Voltage Alarm w/Adjustable Deadband SP O A A A O O
ET-1228 Single Deviation Alarm w/Adjustable Deadband SP O A A A O O
ET-1275 Dual RTD Alarm with Fixed Deadband SP O O A A O O

ET-1278 Single RTD Alarm with Adjustable Deadband SP O O A A O O
ET-1200 Alarms Options H5 230 VAC, ±10%, 50/60 Hz, Item 4. Relay Action
for use with A-12 or P-11 Item 5. Enclosure Options
Item 1. Input Options
enclosure mounted units Code Description
Code Description
I 24 VDC ±20%, isolated prime P11* 11 unit, plug-in enclosure
SS1 3 to 4.99 millivolt spans (for
power with rear wiring access
mV and T/C units only)
I1 48 VDC, ±20%, isolated prime A12* 12 unit card enclosure with
SS2 5 to 9.99 millivolt spans (for
power front and rear wiring access
mV and T/C units only)
E Power for external two-wire NEMA 4 enclosures for one to 24
SS3 2.50 to 4.99 ohm spans (RTD
transmitter, 24 VDC at 20 mA, units, standard
units only);
minimum input (Ω) maximum, special order
minimum span ≥ NEMA 12 enclosures for one to 24
20 FS Individual slow blow power- units, standard
SS4 5 to 9.99Ω input spans line fuse XP explosion-proof, single unit,
X voltage inputs: 20,000 ohms If no power supply ordering suffix is FM approved for Class I,
per volt input impedance, indicated on the order, 115 VAC, Class II, Division 1, Groups
maximum voltage input 200 ±20%, 50/60 Hz (standard) will be C and D
VDC supplied. B Conduit mounting plate to
LZ Low impedance current inputs
Item 3. Output Options accommodate two, 1/2 inch
IR Input reference (deviation
Code Description conduit entries.
units only)
O Transmitting output for alarm, C Conduit mounting plate and
RFI Radio frequency filter protec-
refer to unit specifications terminal cover, option B
tion, not available on AC
M 0-1 mA DC meter output above, plus screwed-on
inputs
option, 0-50Ω allowable metal front cover
Item 2. Power Supply Options analog meter loop
*ET-1200L/U and ET-1202L/U require
Code Description T2 DPDT relay output, for dual
dual slot on the A-12 enclosure and not
H 24 VDC (+20%,-15%) non- alarms only (except D1 option)
available on the P-11 enclosure.
isolated prime power T10 10 amp contact rating for
H2 230 VAC, ±20%, 50/60 Hz stand enclosure only
Item 6. Tagging Options
prime power, standard J SPDT relay output environ-
Code Description
enclosure mentally sealed, 2 amp
SST Stainless steel strip tag
H3 115 VAC, ±10%, 60 Hz only, contact rating
EST Stainless steel engraved tag
for use with A-12 or P-11 D DPDT relay output environ-
ELT Plastic lamacoid engraved tag
enclosure mounted units mentally sealed, 2 amp
(Specify lettering of tag)
H4 115 VAC, ±10%, 50/60 Hz, contact rating (requires T2 for
for use with A-12 or P-11 dual units)
enclosure mounted units LR Latching relay, integral or
remote reset, special order
7.36
6. Tagging
Options† 3. Output Options 5. Enclosure Options Options
H5 I I1 E FS O M T2 T10 J D LR P11 A12 N4 N12 XP B C SST EST ELT
O O O SP O O O SP O O O O O O O O O
O O O SP O O O O O SP O O O O O O O O O
O O O SP O O O O O O O SP O O O O O O O O O O
O O O SP O O O O O SP O O O O O O O O O O
O O O SP O O O SP O O O O O O O O O O
O O O SP O O O SP O O O O O O O O O O
O O O SP O O O O O O O SP O O O O O O O O O O
Matrix Legend The option designations are similar for Caution:

many alarms. For a complete descrip-
Certain options are not compatible
A = available option at no additional cost tion of how a particular option applies
with others. Contact your local
O = option available at extra cost
to a particular model, please consult
Ametek representative or the Ametek
the specific model description in this
= not available factory if you have any questions.
catalog.
SP = available on special order only
ET-1200 Alarm Ordering
ET-1205 T/C, J, SS2 H J Failsafe C ELT “Vessel

Range: Hightrip Pressure
0°F to Alarm”
300°F
Model Number Tagging Suffix
Input Signal, Enclosure Suffix

Type, and Range
Relay Action\
Input Suffix
Output Suffixes
Power Supply Suffix (As Required)
This order is for a Model ET-1205 thermocouple alarm which sealed relays (J), with failsafe / hightrip action. It is housed in
accepts a Type lJ thermocouple with a range of 0°F to 300°F. a standard enclosure that includes a conduit mounting plate
The input span is between 5 and 9.99 mV (SS2). The alarm and terminal cover (C) and has a plastic lamacoid tag (ELT)
features 24Vdc prime power (H), two SPDT hermetically engraved with “Vessel Pressure Alarm.”
7.37
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
Standard Enclosure with Suffix B P-11 Dimensions 19.00"
(483.0mm)
Conduit Mounting Plate 0.23"
0.42"
(10.7mm)
TYPICAL
(6.0mm)
STANDARD ENCLOSURE DEPTH
DIAMETER
5.81" 2 PLACES
(147.6mm)
8.71"
(221.2mm)
11.12"
(282.4mm)
BEZEL FRONT VIEW 5.75"
(146.1mm)
8.00"
(208.0mm)
1.48"
8.50" (37.6mm)
(216.0mm)
19.48"
(494.9mm)
TERMINAL BOARDS TB1 - TB11
TB11 TB6 TB1
ENCLOSURE DEPTH WITH "B" OPTION
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
7.75" 2.75"
(197.0mm) (70.0mm)
2.88" (73.0mm) DIAMETER HOLES
FOR 0.50" (130.mm) CONDUIT
8.71"
(221.2mm)
24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
REAR VIEW 10.31"

CUSTOMER WIRING (261.8mm)
PANEL CUTOUT–
17.62" ±0.12" (447.5mm) wide x 9.00" ±0.12" (228.6mm) high
Standard Enclosure with Suffix C 17.25"
Conduit Mounting Plate and Cover (438.2mm)
MOUNTING CLAMP
(4 REQUIRED)
TOP VIEW
10.31"
(261.8mm)
8.00"
(208.0mm)
8.50"
(216.0mm)
BEZEL FOR OPTIONAL

PANEL MOUNTING
7.75" 2.75"
(197.0mm) (70.0mm)
FOR 0.50" (130.mm) CONDUIT A-12 Dimensions
17.00"
(431.8mm)
TOP VIEW
Explosion-Proof Housing
HOLES FOR
SURFACE MOUNTING
7.88"
(200.0mm)
6.38"
(162.0mm)
4.25"
(108.0mm) SIDE VIEW 8.75"
FRONT INSIDE VIEW (222.3mm)
7.25"
(180.0mm)
6.38" FRONT
(162.0mm) CABLE
ACCESS
7.88"
(200.0mm)
0.75" (19.1mm)
1.12" 7.00" DIAMETER KNOCKOUT-
0.68" 15.40" 0.92" 3 EACH END
(17.0mm) (391.0mm) (23.0mm) (28.4mm) (177.8mm)
(ADDITIONAL KNOCKOUTS
11.44" ON BOTTOM)
(291.0mm)
10.25" 19.00"
(260.4mm) (482.6mm)
INSIDE
HINGED ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENT

ACCESS COVER PANEL
AUXILIARY
CARD
CARD GUIDE
FRONT VIEW CARD

FUSE TRAY
(PROJECTED)
115VAC ± 10%
POWER 24 VDC ±10%
TERMINALS 48 VDC ± 10%
7.38
Voltage/Current
Transmitters
SC-1300
SC-1302
• mV, V, mA inputs
• Current/voltage outputs
• Input/output isolation
(SC-1302)
• Optional pulse duration
output
• Surface or rack mount
• High load output option
The SC-1300 and SC-1302 accept SC-1300 Specifications SC-1302 Specifications

voltage or current inputs and
Inputs: Inputs:
provide a current or voltage output.
Input Input Impedance Voltage Current Current Input
The SC-1302 provides isolation 0-1 VDC 2 MΩ
between the input, output and Inputs Inputs Impedance*
0.25-1.25 VDC 2 MΩ 0-100 mVDC 0, 0.2-1 mA DC 5kΩ
power for AC or isolated DC 1-5 VDC 5 MΩ 0-200 mVDC 0,1-5 mA DC 1kΩ
powered units. 0-1 mA 5000Ω 0-500 mVDC 0, 2-10 mA DC 500Ω
1-5 mA 1000Ω 0-1 VDC 0, 4-20 mA DC 250Ω
2-10 mA 500Ω 0.25-1.25 VDC 0, 10-50 mA DC 100Ω
4-20 mA 250Ω 0, 1-5 VDC
10-50 mA 100Ω 0, 2-10 VDC
Note: Any of the above ranges can also be *For low input impedance, use SC-1326
zero based. Linear inverter available for all ranges.
Ambient Temperature Effect: Voltage Input Impedance:
For 25°F to 125°F (-4°C to 52°C) Greater than 5 MΩ
±0.01%/°F (±0.018%/°C) maximum Response Time:
±0.004%/°F (±0.007%/°C) typical Less than 400 mS (10-90%)
Response Time: Ambient Temperature Effect:
Less than 50 milliseconds (10-90%) (1-5 V input)
Isolation: For 25°F to 125°F (-4°C to 52°C)
600 VAC or 1000 VDC input/power ±0.02%/°F (±0.036%/°C) maximum
isolation for AC or isolated DC powered ±0.01%/°F (±0.018%/°C) typical
units Isolation:
Input/output/power is 600 VAC of 1000
VDC for AC or isolated DC powered
units.
7.39
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
Output Signals: Power Supplies: High Load Drive Option (HO):
a. 115 VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts
mA Output Drive Capability mA Output Drive
10-50 mA 320Ω
(standard)
Capability
4-20 mA 800Ω b. 24 VDC ±20%, 3.5 watts (H suffix; 10-50 mA 600Ω
2-10 mA 1600Ω non-isolated) 4-20 mA 1600Ω
1-5 mA 3200Ω c. 230 VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts 2-10 mA 3200Ω
0.2-1 mA 16,000Ω (H2 suffix) 1-5 mA 6400Ω
VDC Output Impedance d. 115 VAC ±10%, 60 Hz, 5 watts, (H3 0.2-1 mA 32,000Ω
2-10 VDC 500Ω suffix; P-11 or A-12 option) Note: any analog output may also be
1-5 VDC 250Ω e. 115 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts zero based
0.2-1 VDC 50Ω (H4 suffix; P-11 or A-12 option) True Voltage Output Option (VO):
0-100 mVDC 5Ω f. 230 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts
0-10 mVDC 0.5Ω (H5 suffix; P-1 or A-12 option) VDC Minimum Drive Impedance
Note: Any of the above ranges can also be g. 24 VDC ±20%, 4.5 watts (I suffix; 0-10 VDC 300Ω
zero based isolated) 0-5 VDC 150Ω
Linearity: ±0.1% of span, maximum h. 48 VDC ±20%, 5 watts, (I1 suffix; Agency Approvals: FM approved for
error; except SC-1300L and SC-1300U isolated) ordinary locations and hazardous
Repeatability: ±0.1% of span, Controls: Multiturn zero and span locations Divisions I and 2, Class 1,
maximum error potentiometers Groups C & D; Class II, Groups E, F &
G. Explosion-proof housing required for
Ambient Temperature Range: Net Weight (Approximate): hazardous locations.
0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C) 3.4 lbs. (1.54 kg)
Power Supply Effect: ±0.15% for a Enclosures: CSA approved for ordinary locations for
±20% power variation maximum with a. single unit surface mount (standard) SC-1300 and SC-1302 with either 117
800 ohm load and 4-20 mA output b. P-11, high density, 19" rack mount VAC, 24 VDC isolated or 24 VDC non-
(H3, H4, H5 options ±10%) (with rear access terminal blocks) isolated power versions.
Common Mode Rejection: c. A-12, high density, 19" rack and
130 dB at 60 Hz surface mount (with front access
terminal blocks)
d. NEMA 4 and 12 (from one to 24 Ordering Information:
units) see page 7.56, 7.57
e. explosion-proof single unit, FM
approved for Class 1, Division 1,
Groups C and D Dimensions:
see page 7.58
SC-1300/02 SC-1302-P
INPUT (–) 1
INPUT (+) 2
4
OUTPUT (–) 5
OUTPUT (+) 6
7
K2
8
AC (– FOR DC) 11
POWER
12 INPUT
AC (+ FOR DC)
EARTH G
7.40
AC Current/Voltage
Transmitters
SC-1300L
SC-1300U
• 0-7.5 amps input

• 0-200V input
• Input/output/ground
isolation
• Current/voltage output
• Surface or rack mounts
The SC-1300L accepts an AC current SC-1300L Specifications SC-1300U Specifications

input and converts it to a current or DC
Inputs: Inputs:
voltage signal.
From 0-1 to 0-7.5 amps AC, burden Any AC voltage from 0-16 to
The SC-1300U accepts an AC voltage less than 0.5 VA 0-200 V at 50-500 Hz, burden less
input and con-verts it to a current or than 1.5 VA
Isolation Characteristics:
DC voltage signal.
1500 V rms, input to output, input to Isolation Characteristics:
ground; 600 V rms output to ground 2400 V peak, input to output, input to
Input Overdrive Capability: ground; 600 V peak output to ground
20 amps continuous, 250 amps for one Input Overdrive Capability:
second per hour 200% of input specified, continuous
Ambient Temperature Effect: Linearity:
For 25°F to 125°F (-4°C to 52°C): ±0.3% maximum,
±0.01%/°F (±0.018%/°C) maximum ±0.1% typical for 5-100% of span
±0.004%/°F (±0.007%/°C) typical
Linearity:
±0.3% maximum,
±0.1% typical for 5-100% of span
7.41
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
Specifications Power Supply Effect: Enclosures:
SC-1300L, SC-1300U ±0.15% for a ±20% power variation a. single unit surface mount (standard)
maximum with 800 ohm load and 4-20 b. P-11, high density, 19" rack mount
Repeatability: ±0.1% of span, mA output (H3, H4, H5 options ±10%) (with rear access terminal blocks)
maximum error c. A-12, high density, 19" rack and
Power Supplies:
Ambient Temperature Range: a. 115 VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts surface mount (with front access
0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C) (standard) terminal blocks)
b. 24 VDC ±20%, 3.5 watts (H suffix; d. NEMA 4 and 12 (from one to 24
Output Signals:
non-isolated) units)
mA Output Drive Capability e. explosion-proof single unit, FM
10-50 mA 320Ω
c. 230 VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts
(H2 suffix) approved for Class 1, Division 1,
4-20 mA 800Ω Groups C and D
2-10 mA 1600Ω d. 115 VAC ±10%, 60 Hz, 5 watts, (H3
1-5 mA 3200Ω suffix; P-11 or A-12 option) High Load Drive Option (HO):
0.2-1 mA 16,000Ω e. 115 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts mA Output Drive
(H4 suffix; P-11 or A-12 option) Capability
VDC Output Impedance f. 230 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts 10-50 mA 600Ω
2-10 VDC 500Ω (H5 suffix; P-1 or A-12 option) 4-20 mA 1600Ω
1-5 VDC 250Ω g. 24 VDC ±20%, 4.5 watts (I suffix; 2-10 mA 3200Ω
0.2-1 VDC 50Ω isolated) 1-5 mA 6400Ω
0-100 mVDC 5Ω
0-10 mVDC 0.5Ω
h. 48 VDC ±20%, 5 watts, (I1 suffix; 0.2-1 mA 32,000Ω
Any of the above ranges can be zero based. isolated) Note: any analog output may also be
zero based
Lead Compensation Error: Net Weight (Approximate):
Lead Resistance (Ω) x 1% maximum 3.4 lbs. (1.54 kg) True Voltage Output Option (VO):
Span (Ω) VDC Minimum Drive Impedance
This error may be nulled by zero 0-10 VDC 300Ω
adjustment. 0-5 VDC 150Ω
Agency Approvals: FM approved for
Controls: multiturn zero and span ordinary locations and hazardous
potentiometers locations Divisions I and 2, Class 1,
Groups C & D; Class II, Groups E, F & G.
Ametek explosion-proof housing required
for hazardous locations.
CSA approved for ordinary locations, all
unit types with either 117 VAC, 24 VDC
isolated or 24 VDC non-isolated power
versions.
Ordering Information:
see page 7.56, 7.57
Dimensions:
see page 7.58
SC-1300L/U
1
AC AMPS ONLY
2
OR
3
AC VOLTS ONLY 4
OUTPUT (–) 5
OUTPUT (+) 6
AC (– FOR DC) 11
POWER
12 INPUT
AC (+ FOR DC)
EARTH G
7.42
RTD and Slidewire
Transmitters
SC-1300R
• Slidewire inputs
• High output load option
SC-1372, SC-1374
• RTD inputs
• Optional input/output
isolation
• Differential RTD inputs
• High output load option
SC-1300R, SC-1372, SC-1372 and SC-1374 SC-1300R Specifications

and SC-1374 Specifications Input:
The SC-1300R accepts a direct from 10Ω to 20,000Ω spans. Total
Inputs: 100Ω platinum, 10Ω copper
potentiometer input and converts it to a slidewire resistance must be specified
and 120Ω nickel, standard. Consult
current or voltage signal. when ordering.
factory for other available ranges. 3Ω to
The SC-1372 accepts an input from an 1260 Ω spans with differential mea- Slidewire Power Dissipation:
RTD and converts it to a current or surement. less than 175 microwatts
voltage signal. The SC-1372 accepts
Ambient Temperature Effect: Slidewire Constant Current Source:
two or three-wire RTD’s with lead wire
For 25°F to 125°F (-4°C to 52°C):
compensation. Differential RTD Slidewire Range* Slidewire Current
Zero:
measurement is available. This unit is
RTD min.(Ω) x 0.002% + 0.008%/°F max. Min. Max. Maximum
isolated between the input, output and
span (Ω) 0-10Ω 0-50Ω 10 mA
power for AC or isolated DC powered 0-50Ω 0-100Ω 10 mA
Span: 0.008%/°F maximum
units. 0-100Ω 0-199Ω 10 mA
For 10Ω span with 100Ω RTD minimum:
The SC-1374 is similar to the SC-1372 0.028%/°F zero drift 0-200Ω 0-399Ω 5 mA
but is not isolated between the input 0-400Ω 0-799Ω 2 mA
0.008%/°F span drift maximum 0-800Ω 0-1499Ω 1 mA
and power for AC powered units.
Response Time: 0-1500Ω 0-2999Ω 0.5 mA
SC-1372: less than 400 mS (10-90%) 0-3000Ω 0-5999Ω 0.25 mA
SC-1374: less than 50 mS (10-90%) 0-5999Ω 0-10,000Ω 0.15 mA
*Total slidewire resistance must be specified
Isolation: when ordering.
SC-1372: 600 VAC or 1000 VDC
Response Time:
input/output/power for AC
less than 50 milliseconds (10-90%)
or isolated DC powered
units. Isolation:
SC -1374: 600 VAC or 1000 VDC 600 VAC or 1000 VDC input/power
input/power for AC or isolation for AC or isolated DC powered
isolated DC powered units. units
Ambient Temperature Effect:
for 25° to 125°F (-4° to 52°C):
±0.01%/°F (±0.018%/°C) maximum,
±0.004%/°F (±0.007%/°C) typical
7.43
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
SC-1300R, SC-1372, and Common Mode Rejection (SC-1372): d. NEMA 4 and 12 (from one to 24
SC-1374 Specifications 130 dB @ 60 Hz units)
Power Supply Effect: ±0.15% for a e. explosion-proof single unit, FM
Linearity: ±0.1% of span, maximum approved for Class 1, Division 1,
error; ±1°C max. for Ni and Pt RTDs, ±20% power variation maximum with
800 ohm load and 4-20 mA output Groups C and D
0.3°C typical
(H3, H4, H5 options ±10%) High Load Drive Option (HO):
Repeatability: ±0.1% of span,
maximum error Power Supplies: mA Output Drive
a. 115 VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts Capability
Ambient Temperature Range: (standard) 10-50 mA 600Ω
0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C) b. 24 VDC ±20%, 3.5 watts (H suffix; 4-20 mA 1600Ω
Output Signals: non-isolated) 2-10 mA 3200Ω
c. 230 VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts 1-5 mA 6400Ω
mA Output Drive Capability 0.2-1 mA 32,000Ω
10-50 mA 320Ω (H2 suffix)
Note: any analog output may also be
zero based
2-10 mA 1600Ω suffix; P-11 or A-12 option)
1-5 mA 3200Ω e. 115 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts True Voltage Output Option (VO):
0.2-1 mA 16,000Ω (H4 suffix; P-11 or A-12 option) VDC Minimum Drive
f. 230 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts Impedance
VDC Output Impedance (H5 suffix; P-1 or A-12 option) 0-10 VDC 300Ω
2-10 VDC 500Ω g. 24 VDC ±20%, 4.5 watts (I suffix; 0-5 VDC 150Ω
1-5 VDC 250Ω isolated)
0.2-1 VDC 50Ω Agency Approvals: FM approved for
0-100 mVDC 5Ω
h. 48 VDC ±20%, 5 watts, (I1 suffix;
ordinary locations and hazardous
0-10 mVDC 0.5Ω isolated)
locations Divisions I and 2, Class 1,
Any of the above ranges can be zero based. Net Weight (Approximate): Groups C & D; Class II, Groups E, F & G.
Lead Compensation Error: 3.4 lbs. (1.54 kg) Ametek explosion-proof housing required
Lead Resistance (Ω) x 1% maximum Enclosures: for hazardous locations.
Span (Ω) a. single unit surface mount (standard) CSA approved for ordinary locations, all
This error may be nulled by zero b. P-11, high density, 19" rack mount unit types with either 117 VAC, 24 VDC
adjustment. (with rear access terminal blocks) isolated or 24 VDC non-isolated power
Controls: multiturn zero and span c. A-12, high density, 19" rack and versions.
potentiometers surface mount (with front access
terminal blocks)
see page 7.56, 7.57
Dimensions:
see page 7.58
SC-1300R Connections SC-1372 and SC-1374 Connections
1 B
1
SLIDEWIRE A 2
INPUT RTD
(SEE TABLE) C 3
2
Differential Input Connections
3 OUTPUT (–) 5
SC-1372 SC-1374
OUTPUT (+) 6
UPSCALE
A1 2 A1 2
OUTPUT (–) 5 FOR TWO-WIRE RTD
JUMPER TERMINALS RTD RTD
OUTPUT (+) 1 & 3, AND CONNECT 1 1
6 RTD BETWEEN 1 & 2 B1 B1
1 3
11 B2 B2
AC (– FOR DC) POWER
AC (– FOR DC) 11 INPUT RTD RTD
POWER AC (+ FOR DC) 12
INPUT 2 2
AC (+ FOR DC) 12 A2 A2
EARTH G 3 1
EARTH G THREE WIRE CONNECTION SHOWN
7.44
Millivolt and Thermocouple
Transmitters
SC-1326
SC-1326W
• Input/output isolation
• Spans from 3-80mV
• Burnout protection
• Class 1, Div 1 & 2 approvals
• Surface or rack mount
The SC-1326 accepts a millivolt signal

and converts it to a current or voltage SC-1326W Specifications
SC-1326 Specifications
signal.
Inputs: Inputs:
The SC-1326W accepts a thermo- a. any thermocouple type: J, K, T, E,
a. millivolt input spans between 10 and
couple input and produces a current or R, S, B
100 mV with a live zero of -25 to 100
voltage signal. It has built-in cold b. standard input spans (calculated
mV
junction compensation and input/ from input temperature range) are
b. optional input spans:
output isolation. between 10 and 80 mV
SS1 3.00 to 4.99 mV
SS2 5.00 to 9.99 mV c. optional input spans:
SS1 3 to 4.99 mV
Low Input Impedance (LZ Option): SS2 5 to 9.99 mV
Input Input Impedance Cold Junction Error:
0-5 mA 10 Ω ±1°C for J, K, T, E, R, S, B inputs over
` 1-5 mA 12.4 Ω a range of 25° to 125°F (-4° to 52°C)
0-10 mA 5.1 Ω
2-10 mA 6.05 Ω
0-20 mA 2.5 Ω
4-20 mA 3.0 Ω
0-50 mA 1.0 Ω
10-50 mA 1.25 Ω
7.45
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
SC-1326 and SC-1326W Response Time: Enclosures:
Specifications less than 400 milliseconds (10-90%) a. single unit surface mount (standard)
Controls: multiturn zero and span b. P-11, high density, 19" rack mount
Linearity: ±0.1% of span, maximum (with rear access terminal blocks)
error; linearity referred to mV signal for potentiometers
c. A-12, high density, 19" rack and
thermocouple inputs Isolation: 600 VAC or 1000 VDC surface mount (with front access
Repeatability: ±0.1% of span, input/output. Input/power isolation for terminal blocks)
maximum error AC or isolated DC powered units. d. NEMA 4 and 12 (from one to 24
Ambient Temperature Range: Power Supply Effect: ±0.15% for a units)
0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C) ±20% power variation maximum with e. explosion-proof single unit, FM
800 ohm load and 4-20 mA output approved for Class 1, Division 1,
Ambient Temperature Effect: (H3, H4, H5 options ±10%) Groups C and D
a. for 25° to 125°F (-4° to 52°C):
±0.02%/°F (±0.036%/°C) maximum, Common Mode Rejection: High Load Drive Option (HO):
±0.01%/°F (±0.018%/°C) typical 130 dB @ 60 Hz mA Output Drive
b. for spans less than 10 mV, ambient Power Supplies: Capability
temperature effect is: a. 115 VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts 10-50 mA 600 Ω
10 mV x 0.02%/°F (standard) 4-20 mA 1600 Ω
b. 24 VDC ±20%, 3.5 watts (H suffix; 2-10 mA 3200 Ω
span mV 1-5 mA 6400 Ω
non-isolated) 32,000 Ω
Input Impedance: 0.2-1 mA
c. 230 VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts Note: any analog output may also be
a. without downscale: greater than 1 MΩ
(H2 suffix) zero based
b. with downscale: 40 mA T/C excitation
d. 115 VAC ±10%, 60 Hz, 5 watts (H3
current True Voltage Output Option (VO):
suffix; P-11 or A-12 option)
Output Signals: e. 115 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts VDC Minimum Drive Impedance
mA Output Drive Capability (H4 suffix; P-11 or A-12 option) 0-10 VDC 300 Ω
10-50 mA 320 Ω f. 230 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts 0-5 VDC 150 Ω
4-20 mA 800 Ω (H5 suffix; P-1 or A-12 option) Agency Approvals: FM approved for
2-10 mA 1600 Ω g. 24 VDC ±20%, 4.5 watts (I suffix; ordinary locations and hazardous
1-5 mA 3200 Ω isolated)
16,000 Ω
locations Divisions I and 2, Class 1,
0.2-1 mA h. 48 VDC ±20%, 5 watts, (I1 suffix; Groups C & D; Class II, Groups E, F & G.
VDC Output Impedance isolated) Ametek explosion-proof housing required
2-10 VDC 500 Ω Net Weight (Approximate): for hazardous locations.
1-5 VDC 250 Ω 3.4 lbs. (1.54 kg)
0-2.1 VDC 50 Ω CSA approved for ordinary locations, all
0-100 mVDC 5Ω unit types with either 117 VAC, 24 VDC
0-10 mVDC 0.5 Ω isolated or 24 VDC non-isolated power
Note: Any of the above ranges can also be versions.
zero based.
see page 7.56, 7.57
SC-1326 and SC-1326W
Dimensions: Connections
see page 7.58
INPUT (–) 1
INPUT (+) 2
OUTPUT (–) 5
OUTPUT (+) 6
AC (– FOR DC) 11
POWER
12 INPUT
AC (+ FOR DC)
EARTH G
7.46
SC-1300 Specialty Transmitters and
Computational Devices
The SC-1300 Family provides a series SC-1380 Pulse Duration Transmitter

of specialty transmitters and computa- Converts a standard instrument level
tional devices for process control signal input into an output pulse or
applications. They are panel mounted, relay closure. The output duration or
field adjustable, and do not require any “on time” is proportional to the input
software of programming to set up or signal level with a repetition rate
modify their functionality. The transmit- adjustable over preselected ranges.
ter functions include: Typical applications include: use as an
Frequency on-off proportioning device or simple
Lead/lag controller, SCR control for heaters, and
Pulse Duration (Transmitter and valve control in filling applications.
receiver) SC-1382 Pulse Duration Receiver
Strain Gage Accepts an input pulse and converts it
Rate-Limiter to an analog output proportional to the
The computational devices include: duration or duty cycle of the input
High-Low Signal Selector pulse.
Median Selector SC-1390 Strain Gage Transmitter
Signal Limiter Accepts a strain gage input and
Square Root Transmitter converts it to an analog output. Strain
Multiplier/Divider gage bridges of 120 or 350 ohms can
Adder/Subtractor be used. Excitation voltage levels with
Integrator (Linear) remote sensing at the primary transmit-
Integrator (Square Root) ter junction are provided to eliminate
Ratio and Bias Transmitter lead length effects.
These units are available for both stand SC-1396 Rate-Limited Signal
alone panel mount, or in high density Transmitter
multi-card racks or enclosures which This device accepts an input signal and
offer space savings. They can also be limits the speed of the output change.
intermixed with the ET-1200 Series If the input changes at a rate which
alarms in the high density enclosures. exceeds the predetermined value, the
Specialty Transmitters output rate of change is limited to a
rate which can be set between 3.6 and
SC-1350 Frequency Transmitter
3600 seconds (1 hour). Independent
A single channel device which accepts
rising and falling rates can be set via
a frequency or pulse input and con-
two multiturn potentiometers.
verts it to a voltage or current output.
Inputs can range from 5 to 24,000 Hz Applications include speed control for
with amplitudes up to 50 volts peak-to- rotating equipment, and reduction of
peak. valve movement in flow control.
This device is useful for interfacing with It can also be used to generate a ramp
process measurements often found for setpoint control such as found in
with tachometers, mass flow meters, reactor temperature controls.
magnetic flowmeters, turbine meters
and metering pumps.
SC-1364 Lead/Lag Transmitter
Produces a phase lead or phase lag
between .005 and 50 minutes in a
process loop. The main purpose is to
improve stability or control response
due to use of feedforward control
schemes or multiple process lags.
7.47
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
SC-1300 Computational SC-1358 Square Root Integrator
Devices Converts an analog input to a variable
pulse output proportional to the integral
SC-1320 High-Low Signal Selector of the square root of the input. Outputs
Accepts 2, 3 or 4 inputs, and selects can be solid state and/or relay with a
the signal which is the highest or frequency of 0-64,000 counts per hour.
lowest. High or low operation is easily This device is often used in conjunction
changed via jumpers, and is useful in with a differential pressure flow
override control schemes for Tempera- transmitter to generate a value repre-
ture/Pressure control. senting the number of gallons or liters
SC-1324 Median Selector flowing through a line.
Accepts three inputs and provides an SC-1362 Signal Limiter
output which is proportional to the Limits the output to a predetermined
median or middle input. If one of the level regardless of input signal. The unit
inputs should fail, the output will be contains independent adjustments for
proportional to the lower of the two both high and low limits. Applications
remaining inputs. include limiting motor or pump speeds
SC-1330 Square Root Extractor and valve openings.
Provides an output signal proportional SC-1398 Scale and Bias Transmitter
to the square root of the input signal. Accepts an input signal which can be
Typical uses include: linearizing the biased up to ± 100%. Typical applica-
signal from a differential pressure flow tions include: drum level control, and
transmitter, linearing the signal in a gas temperature and/or speed control
flow calculation and squaring-type where it is necessary to keep one
RMS voltage or current transducers. variable higher than another process
SC-1352 Multiplier/Divider parameter.
Accepts up to 3 inputs and provides a
wide range of equations which include:
D=A*B*C
D=A*B/C
D=A2/C
D=A/C
D=A/B
These devices are used in applications
such as: gas flow and BTU calcula-
tions, inferred levels and other indirect
quantitative measurements where
direct measurements are not possible.
SC-1354 Adder/Subtractor
Accepts 2, 3 or 4 inputs and provides
the function Y = ±A±B±C±D. It can be
used to determine the total flow
through several lines, or determine the
differential between an inflow and
outflow.
SC-1356 Linear Integrator
Converts an analog input to a variable
pulse output proportional to the integral
of the input. Outputs can be solid state
and/or relay with a frequency of 0-
64,000 counts per hour. The field
alterable rate often represents the
quantitative number of units such as
liters, gallons, pounds or cubic feet.
7.48
Common Specifications
Output Signals: Ambient Temperature Range: Power Supplies:
All models except: SC-1356, 1358 0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C) a. 115 VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts
and 1380. (standard)
mA Output Drive Capability Ambient Temperature Effect: b. 24 VDC ±20%, 3.5 watts (H suffix;
10-50 mA 320Ω For 25°F to 125°F (-4°C to 52°C): non-isolated)
4-20 mA 800Ω ±0.01%/°F (±0.018%/°C) maximum c. 230 VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts
2-10 mA 1600Ω ±0.004%/°F (±0.007%/°C) typical (H2 suffix)
0.2-1 mA 16,000Ω
Power Supply Effect: ±0.15% for a suffix; P-11 or A-12 option)
±20% power variation maximum with e. 115 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts
VDC Output Impedance (H4 suffix; P-11 or A-12 option)
2-10 VDC 500Ω 800 ohm load and 4-20 mA output
(H3, H4, H5 options ±10%) f. 230 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts
1-5 VDC 250Ω
0.2-1 VDC 50Ω
(H5 suffix; P-1 or A-12 option)
0-100 mVDC 5Ω g. 24 VDC ±20%, 4.5 watts (I suffix;
0-10 mVDC 0.5Ω
Common Mode Rejection: isolated)
Note: Any of the above ranges can also be 130 db at 60 Hz on isolated units h. 48 VDC ±20%, 5 watts, (I1 suffix;
zero based. isolated)
Isolation: All models except SC-
Repeatability: ±0.1% of span, 1390. 600 VAC or 1000 VDC input/
power isolation for AC or isolated DC Net Weight (Approximate):
maximum error
powered units. 3.4 lbs. (1.54 kg)
SC-1320 Specifications SC-1324 Specifications SC-1330 Specifications

Inputs: Inputs: Inputs:
Input Input Impedance Input Input Impedance Input Input Impedance
1-5 VDC 5 MΩ 0-1 VDC 2 MΩ 0-1 VDC 2 MΩ
0-4 VDC 5 MΩ 0.25-1.25 VDC 2 MΩ 0.25-1.25 VDC 2 MΩ
0.25-1.25 VDC 2 MΩ 1-5 VDC 5 MΩ 1-5 VDC 5 MΩ
0.2-1 mA 5000Ω 0-1 mA 5000Ω 0-1 mA 5000Ω
1-5 mA 1000Ω 1-5 mA 1000Ω 1-5 mA 1000Ω
2-10 mA 500Ω 2-10 mA 500Ω 2-10 mA 500Ω
4-20 mA 250Ω 4-20 mA 250Ω 4-20 mA 250Ω
10-50 mA 100Ω 10-50 mA 100Ω 10-50 mA 100Ω
Note: Any of the above ranges can also be Note: Any of the above ranges can also be Note: Any of the above ranges can also be
zero based. zero based. zero based.
Response Time: less than 50 ms (10- Response Time: less than 50 ms (10- Linearity: ±0.1% of span from 2.5 to
90%) 90%) 100% of input maximum; ±0.25% of
span from 1 to 2.5% of input maximum
Controls: Multiturn zero and span Controls: Multiturn zero and span
potentiometers potentiometers Response Time:
less than 200 ms (10-90%)
Controls: Multiturn input zero, output

zero, balance, span and dropout
potentiometers
Low Limit Cutoff: from .25 to 10% of

input span
Basic Equation:
K A =D
7.49
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
SC-1350 Specifications Basic Equation: SC-1356/SC-1358
Inputs: Specifications
Frequency input spans from 5.8 Hz to D = AB which can be expanded to : Inputs:
C
24,000 Hz maximum (zero based)
D=
(Ka × A+ao )(Kb × B + bo ) × Ks Input Input Impedance
Impedance: 1 MΩ
(Kc × C+co ) 1-5 VDC
0-2 VDC
5 MΩ
4 MΩ
2
KA 2 = D,KAB = D, KA = D,K A = D, 0.25-1.25 VDC 2 MΩ
C C 0-1 VDC 2 MΩ
Frequency Range: K AB = D, K = D,K A = D, and 0-500 mVDC 1 MΩ
10 kHz C C 0-200 mVDC 400 kΩ
10 kHz-20 kHz K A =D 0-100 mVDC 200 kΩ
20 kHz-24 kHz B 0-50 mVDC 100 kΩ
0-1 mA 5000Ω
Where: 1-5 mA 1000Ω
Signal Amplitude: Ks = Gain adjustable from 0.5 to 2.5 2-10 mA 500Ω
Minimum Maximum Ka, Kb, Kc = input scale factor 4-20 mA 250Ω
125 mV RMS 50 V P-P adjustable from 0 to 1.5 10-50 mA 100Ω
225 mV RMS 50 V P-P ao, bo = input rebias level adjustable
300 mV RMS 50 V P-P zero based.
from 0 to 1.5
co = input rebias level adjustable from Outputs:
Response Time: 100 ms from 60 Hz 0 to 1.0 Counts: 0-60 to 0-64,000 counts per
to 24,000 Hz; for less than 60 Hz A, B, C = normalized inputs hour, full scale as specified (field
response time is equal to seven input
alterable over the entire range)
pulses
Output Pulse Rating: 24 VDC into a
Controls: Multiturn zero and span SC-1354 Specifications minimum load of 100Ω, nominal 35 ms
potentiometers Inputs: duration
Input Input impedance Relay Output Rating: 15 VA (Suffix
1-5 VDC 5 MΩ K1)
SC-1352 Specifications 0.25-1.25 VDC 2 MΩ
0-1 mA 5000Ω Response Time: Less than 50 ms
Inputs: 1-5 mA 1000Ω (10-90%)
Input Input Impedance 2-10 mA 500Ω
1-5 VDC 5 MΩ Controls: Multiturn zero, span and
4-20 mA 250Ω
0-4 VDC 2 MΩ 10-50 mA 100Ω dropout potentiometers
0.25-1.25 VDC 2 MΩ Note: Any of the above ranges can also be
0-1 mA 5000Ω zero based SC-1356
1-5 mA 1000Ω
2-10 mA 500Ω Linearity: ±0.15% of span maximum Zero Dropout: 0.5 to 20% adjustable,
4-20 mA 250Ω factory set at 1% unless otherwise
Response Time:
10-50 mA 100Ω specified
Less than 50 ms (10-90%)
zero based. Controls: Multiturn potentiometers:
SC-1358
Linearity: ±0.2% of span from 2.5% output zero, span scale factor for input
Zero Dropout: Adjustable 0.5% to 4%
to 100% of input maximum; ±0.1% A, B, C and D
typically, factory set at 1% unless
typical Basic Equation: otherwise specified.
Response Time: Vo = Ks[±Ka(Va-Ao)±Kb(Vb-
Square Root Operation: May not be
Less than 50 ms (10-90%) Bo)±Kc(Vc-Co)±Kd(Vd-Do)]+Ko
converted in the field to linear operation
Where:
Controls: Multiturn zero, span, Ka, Ks adjustable from 0.15 to 1.2
Kb, Kc, ao, bo, co potentiometers Ka, Kb, Kc, Kd adjustable from 0 to
1.75
Va, Vb, Vc, Vd = input level
Ko, Ao, Bo, Co, Do adjustable from
0-20% of nominal full scale output
7.50
SC-1362 Specifications Outputs: SC-1396 Specifications
24 VDC ±20% at 100 mA maximum Inputs:
Inputs:
current draw with a range from 0.6 sec.
Input Input Impedance Input Input Impedance
0-1 VDC 2 MΩ
to 2457.6 seconds. Optional relay
contact output: one form A (single pole 0-1 VDC 2 MΩ
0.25-1.25 VDC 2 MΩ 0.25-1.25 VDC 2 MΩ
1-5 VDC 5 MΩ normally open) mercury film contact,
1-5 VDC 5 MΩ
0-1 mA 5000Ω 150 milliohms maximum contact 0-1 mA 5000Ω
1-5 mA 1000Ω resistance, non-position sensitive (“K2” 1-5 mA 1000Ω
2-10 mA 500Ω suffix) 2-10 mA 500Ω
4-20 mA 250Ω 4-20 mA 250Ω
10-50 mA 100Ω Response Time: 10-50 mA 100Ω
Note: Any of the above ranges can also be Less than 50 ms (10-90%) Note: Any of the above ranges can also be
zero based. zero based.
Response Time: Controls: Multiturn zero and span and
Less than 50 ms (10-90%) period potentiometers Controls: Multiturn zero and span and
rise limiting and fall limiting potentiom-
Controls: Multiturn zero and span, eters
hi-limit and lo-limit potentiometers Contact Rating: 1 amp at 24 VDC (24
watts) or 200 mA at 115 VAC (22 VA),
resistive load only (K2 code) Rate Control: Field adjustable from
3.6 seconds to 3600 seconds in three
SC-1364 Specifications Linearity: ±0.25% of span maximum; ranges
±0.15% typical 3.6-36
Inputs:
36-360
Input Input Impedance 360-3600
0-1 VDC 2 MΩ
0.25-1.25 VDC 2 MΩ SC-1382 Specifications Relay Output Rating: 15 VA, normally
1-5 VDC 5 MΩ Inputs: Full scale pulse width from open contact (reed-relay type).
0-1 mA 5000Ω 200 milliseconds to 409.65 seconds;
1-5 mA 1000Ω input form is dry contact or 10 to 35
2-10 mA 500Ω
4-20 mA 250Ω
VDC pulse
SC-1398 Specifications
10-50 mA 100Ω
Note: Any of the above ranges can also be Linearity: ±0.25% of span maximum; Inputs:
zero based. ±0.15% typical Input Input Impedance
1-5 VDC 5 MΩ
Response Time: Controls: Multiturn zero and span 0.2-1 mA 5000 Ω
Lag Time: 0.005 to 50 minutes (5 potentiometers 1-5 mA 1000 Ω
ranges) 2-10 mA 500 Ω
4-20 mA 250 Ω
Lead Time: 0.005 to 50 minutes (5 10-50 mA 100 Ω
ranges) SC-1390 Specifications Note: Any of the above ranges can also be
zero based.
Controls: Multiturn output zero, input Inputs:
zero, span, low time constant and time One or two 120 ohm or 350 ohm strain Input Bias Range: 100% of full scale
constant controls gage bridge or transducers, with a Response Time: Less than 50
minimum output of 1 mV/V and a milliseconds (10-90%)
Zero Frequency Gain: 0.800 to maximum excitation of 10 volts. Must
specify : Controls: Switches for coarse setting
1.200, adjustable and 20 turn potentiometers for fine
1. bridge type
2. excitation voltage setting of ratio, output bias and input
Rate Gain: lead mode only, 10 bias
3. mV/V
Ratio (Gain) Range: 0.1 to 10.0
Response Time: Less than 50 (100:1)
SC-1380 Specifications milliseconds (10-90%)
Output Bias Range: 0-50% of full
Inputs: scale
Linearity: ±0.25% maximum, ±0.1%
Input Input Impedance typical Equation:
1-5 VDC 5 MΩ D=K(A-a)+d
0.2-1 VDC 2 MΩ
0.25-1.25 VDC 2 MΩ
Controls: Multiturn zero and span and Where:
0-1 mA 5000Ω bridge power potentiometers A=input
1-5 mA 1000Ω a=input bias
2-10 mA 500Ω Bridge Excitation: 4 to 10 VDC, field D=output
4-20 mA 250Ω adjustable d=output bias
10-50 mA 100Ω
K=ratio
Isolation: 600 VAC/1000 VAC input to
zero based. power, excitation to input, output to power
7.51
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
SC-1320 SC-1324 SC-1330 SC-1350
INPUT A (–) 1
INPUT A (–) 1 INPUT (–) 1 24 VDC 2-Wire Power 1
2 INPUT
INPUT A (+) 2 INPUT (+) 2 SIGNAL
INPUT A (+) 2
4-20mA
INPUT B (–) 3 LOOP
INPUT B (–) 3
24 VDC (+) 10 +
INPUT B (+) 4
INPUT B (+) 4
OUTPUT (–) 5 OUTPUT (–) 5 (+) 2 –
OUTPUT (–) 5 OUTPUT (–) 5
OUTPUT (+) 6 OUTPUT (+) 6
OUTPUT (+) 6 AUXILIARY TWO-WIRE OUTPUT (+) 6
INPUT RY TRANSMITTER
INPUT C (–) 7 INPUT C (–) 7
INPUT C (+) 8
INPUT C (+) 8 (–) 5
INPUT D (–) 9
9
INPUT D (+) 24 VDC AT 20mA
10 CURRENT — LIMITED
10
AC (– FOR DC) 11 SUPPLY TO 2-WIRE
POWER 11 AC (– FOR DC) 11 FIELD TRANSMITTER
AC (– FOR DC) POWER POWER AC (– FOR DC) 11
INPUT POWER
AC (+ FOR DC) 12 INPUT 12 INPUT INPUT
AC (+ FOR DC) 12 AC (+ FOR DC) AC (+ FOR DC) 12
EARTH G EARTH G
EARTH G G
EARTH
SC-1352 SC-1354 SC-1356 and SC-1358

INPUT A (–) 1
INPUT A (–) 1
INPUT (–) 1 K1 Option
INPUT A (+) 2 INPUT A (+) 2
INPUT (+) 2
INPUT B (–) 3 INPUT B (–) 3 24 VDC Two Wire Power
INPUT B (+) 4 INPUT B (+) 4
4-20mA
OUTPUT (–) 5 LOOP
OUTPUT (–) 5 24 VDC (+) 10 +
OUTPUT (–) 5
OUTPUT (+) OUTPUT (+) 6
6 OUTPUT (+) 6 (+) 2 –
INPUT C (–) INPUT C (–) 7
7
INPUT C (+) 8 AUXILIARY TWO-WIRE
INPUT C (+) 8 INPUT RY TRANSMITTER
7
INPUT D (–) 9 K2
8 (–)
INPUT D (+) 10 5
AC (– FOR DC) 11 11
POWER AC (– FOR DC) POWER 24 VDC AT 20mA
INPUT AC (– FOR DC) 11 CURRENT — LIMITED
AC (+ FOR DC) 12 12 INPUT POWER
AC (+ FOR DC) INPUT SUPPLY TO 2-WIRE
AC (+ FOR DC) 12
EARTH G G FIELD TRANSMITTER
EARTH
EARTH G
SC-1362 SC-1364 SC-1380

INPUT (–) 1
INPUT (–) 1 INPUT (–) 1
INPUT (+) 2
INPUT (+) 2 INPUT (+) 2
Range Selection
4
OUTPUT (–) 5
OUTPUT (–) 5 OUTPUT (–) 5 Lag/Lead Time Jumper External
OUTPUT (+) 6 7
OUTPUT (+) 6 OUTPUT (+) 6 (Seconds) Terminals K2
8
7 1000-3000 —
8 300-1000 10 to 9
9
100-300 10 to 8
30-100 10 to 7
10
AC (– FOR DC) 11
AC (– FOR DC) 11 AC (– FOR DC) 11 POWER
POWER POWER INPUT
INPUT INPUT AC (+ FOR DC) 12
AC (+ FOR DC) 12 AC (+ FOR DC) 12
EARTH G
EARTH G EARTH G CONTACT OUTPUT
K-2 ONLY
(PULSE AMPLITUDE
0 T0 24 VOLTS (NORMALLY OPEN
DC NORMAL)
CONTACT)
SC-1382 SC-1390 SC-1396 SC-1398

INPUT (–) (PULSE) 1 INPUT (–) 1 INPUT (–) 1
INPUT (+) (PULSE) 2 INPUT (+) 2 INPUT (+) 2
INPUT (–) 1
REMOTE SENSING (+) 7
OUTPUT (–) 5 POWER SUPPLY (+) 8 OUTPUT (–) 5 OUTPUT (–) 5
OUTPUT (+) 6 2 OUTPUT (+) 6 OUTPUT (+) 6
INPUT (+)
POWER SUPPLY (–) 9 RATE 7
EXCEEDED
REMOTE SENSING (–) 10 OUTPUT 8
OUTPUT (–) 5
OUTPUT (+) 6
AC (– FOR DC) 11 AC (– FOR DC) 11 AC (– FOR DC) 11 AC (– FOR DC) 11

POWER POWER POWER POWER
12 INPUT 12 INPUT 12 INPUT 12 INPUT
AC (+ FOR DC) AC (+ FOR DC) AC (+ FOR DC) AC (+ FOR DC)
EARTH G EARTH G EARTH G EARTH G
7.52
SC-1300 Signal Transmitter Ordering Guide
SC-1300 DC Current/Voltage Transmitter SC-1362 Signal Limiter Transmitter

SC-1300L AC Current Transmitter SC-1364 Lead/Lag Transmitter
SC-1300R Slidewire/Potentiometer Transmitter SC-1372 Isolated RTD Transmitter
SC-1300U AC Voltage Transmitter
SC-1302 Isolated Transmitter SC-1374 RTD Transmitter
SC-1380 Pulse Duration Transmitter
SC-1320 High-Low Signal Selector SC-1382 Pulse Duration Receiver
SC-1324 Median Selector SC-1390 Strain Gauge Transmitter
SC-1326 Isolated mV Transmitter SC-1396 Rate-Limited Signal Transmitter
SC-1326W Isolated T/C Transmitter SC-1398 Ratio and Bias Transmitter
SC-1330 Square Root Transmitter
SC-1350 Frequency Transmitter

SC-1352 Multiplier/Divider Transmitter
SC-1354 Adder/Subtractor Transmitter
SC-1356 Linear Integrator
SC-1358 Square Root Integrator
7.53
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
Options SC-1300 Signal Transmitter Quick Reference Option Chart
1. Input Options 2. Power Supply
Model No. and Description Option Ordering Suffix RFI2 SS1 SS2 SS3 SS4 X LZ SL H H2 H3 H4 H5
SC-1300 DC Current/Voltage Transmitter 0 0 A A 0 0 0

SC-1300L AC Current Transmitter1 A A 0 0 0
SC-1300R Slidewire/Potentiometer Transmitter 0 A A 0 0 0
SC-1300U AC Voltage Transmitter1 A A 0 0 0
SC-1302 Isolated Transmitter 0 0 A A 0 0 0
SC-1320 High-Low Signal Selector 0 A A 0 0 0

SC-1324 Median Selector 0 A A 0 0 0
SC-1326 Isolated mV Transmitter 0 0 0 A A A 0 0 0
SC-1326W Isolated T/C Transmitter 0 0 0 SP A A 0 0 0
SC-1330 Square Root Transmitter 0 0 A A 0 0 0
SC-1350 Frequency Transmitter 0 A A 0 0 0

SC-1352 Multiplier/Divider Transmitter 0 A A 0 0 0
SC-1354 Adder/Subtractor Transmitter 0 A A 0 0 0
SC-1356 Linear Integrator 0 0 A A 0 0 0
SC-1358 Square Root Integrator 0 0 A A 0 0 0
SC-1362 Signal Limiter Transmitter 0 0 A A 0 0 0

SC-1364 Lead/Lag Transmitter 0 0 A A 0 0 0
SC-1372 Isolated RTD Transmitter 0 0 0 A A A 0 0 0
SC-1374 RTD Transmitter 0 0 0 A A A 0 0 0

SC-1380 Pulse Duration Transmitter1 0 0 A A 0 0 0
SC-1382 Pulse Duration Receiver 0 A A 0 0 0
SC-1390 Strain Gauge Transmitter 0 0 0 A A 0 0 0
SC-1396 Rate-Limited Signal Transmitter 0 0 A A 0 0 0
SC-1398 Ratio and Bias Transmitter 0 0 A A 0 0 0
1 2
Requires dual slot on A12 enclosure. Available on stand alone units only.
Options LZ Low impedance current inputs H4 115 VAC, ±10%, 50/60 Hz, for
3N, 3P Signal linearization, applies to use with A-12 or P-11
SC-1300 Transmitter Options RTD units enclosure mounted units
Item 1. Input Options RFI Radio frequency filter protec- H5 230 VAC, ±10%, 50/60 Hz, for
Code Description tion, not available on AC inputs use with A-12 or P-11
SS1 3 to 4.99 millivolt spans (for Item 2. Power Supply Options enclosure mounted units
mV and T/C units only) Code Description I 24 VDC ±20%, isolated prime
SS2 5 to 9.99 millivolt spans (for H 24 VDC (+20%,-15%) non- power
mV and T/C units only) isolated prime power I1 48 VDC, ±20%, isolated prime
SS3 2.50 to 4.99 ohm spans (RTD H2 230 VAC, ±20%, 50/60 Hz power
units only) prime power, standard E Power for external two-wire
SS4 5 to 9.99Ω input spans enclosure transmitter, 24 VDC at 20 mA,
X voltage inputs: 20,000 ohms H3 115 VAC, ±10%, 60 Hz only, maximum, special order
per volt input impedance, for use with A-12 or P-11 FS Individual slow blow power-line
maximum voltage input 200 enclosure mounted units fuse
VDC
7.54
03
02
05
5. Tagging
-5
-5
-3
Options† 3. Output Options 4. Enclosure Options
08
Options
08
26
60
60
10
I I1 E FS P1 K1 K2 77 HO1 VO1 IMC P11 A12 N4 N12 XP B C SST EST ELT
0 0 SP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 SP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 SP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 SP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 SP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 SP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 SP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 SP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 SP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 SP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 SP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 SP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 SP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 SP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 SP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 SP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 SP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 SP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 SP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 SP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 SP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1
Requires dual slot on A12 and P11 enclosures.
Item 3. Output range – Specify 115 VAC (22 VA), resistive load 6008-502 Six digit, mechanical reset
Item 4. Output Options only. For SC-1380 or P option. counter
Code Description 77 Pneumatic output, 3-15 psig 1026-305 Six digit, electrical reset
P* Pulse duration output, any SC at 0.25 SCFM maximum air counter
model. See Special Purpose consumption; requires 20 psig IMC Integrally mounted counter, for
Instruments section for regulated supply, Moore SC-1356 and SC-1358
specifications. Model 77
K1 Form A (single pole, normally HO* High output resistance load
open) reed relay output, 15 VA drive, 4-20 mA into 0-1600
contact rating. For SC-1356 ohms or 10-50 mA into 0-600 Matrix Legend
and SC-1358 integrators. ohms
A = option supplied at no additional cost
K2 Form A (single pole, normally VO* True voltage output 0-5 V(Z0
less than 150 ohms); 0-10 V O = option available at extra cost
open) mercury-film contact
output, rated 0.25 amp at 24 (Z0 less than 300 ohms) = not available
VDC (24 watts) or 100 mA at 6008-503 Eight digit, non-resettable SP = available on special order only
counter
7.55
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
Item 5. Enclosure Options C Conduit mounting plate and
Code Description terminal cover, option B
P11* 11 unit, plug-in enclosure with above, plus screwed-on metal
rear wiring access front cover
A12* 12 unit card enclosure with Item 6. Tagging Options
front and rear wiring access Code Description
NEMA 4 Enclosures for one to 24 units, SST Stainless steel strip tag
standard EST Stainless steel engraved tag
NEMA 12 Enclosures for one to 24 units, ELT Plastic lamacoid engraved tag
standard (Specify lettering of tag)
XP Explosion-proof, single unit, FM
†
approved for Class 1, Division If no power supply order suffix is
given, the unit will have standard 115 Caution:
1, Groups C and D Certain options are not compatible
B Conduit mounting plate to VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz.
with others. Contact your local
accommodate two, 1/2 inch *SC-1300L/U and SC-1380 require Ametek representative or the
conduit entries. dual slot on the A-12 enclosure. Units Ametek factory if you have any
with P, HO and VO options require dual questions.
slot on the A-12 and P-11 enclosures.
Series 1300 Signal Transmitters

SC-1326 0-21 mV Span N/A I1 4-20 mA H0 P0-11 ELT N/A
Model Number “Tank Additional Data as
Input Signal, Level” Requested (See A
Type, and Range on Model Tables)
Input Suffix Tagging Suffix
Power Supply Suffix Enclosure Suffix
Output Signal Range Outputs Option
(As Required)
This order is for a Model SC-1326 millivolt transmitter which accepts a
20 mV span. It includes no special input options and operates on 48 configured for plug-in use in a P-11 rack mount and has a lamacoid tag
Vdc (I1). The output range is 4-20 mA with high output drive (HO). It is that reads “Tank Level.” No additional variables need to be specified.
Single Unit Enclosure

Dimension Drawings
SC-1300 Transmitters
Standard Enclosure with Suffix B Standard Enclosure with Suffix C Explosion-Proof Housing
Conduit Mounting Plate Conduit Mounting Plate and Cover
0.23"
(6.0mm)
STANDARD ENCLOSURE DEPTH
DIAMETER
5.81" 2 PLACES
(147.6mm) 7.88"
(200.0mm)
6.38"
(162.0mm)
8.00"
(208.0mm)
8.00"
(208.0mm)
8.50" 6.38"
(216.0mm) (162.0mm)
8.50"
(216.0mm)
7.88"
(200.0mm)
11.44"
7.75" 2.75" (291.0mm)
(197.0mm) (70.0mm) 10.25"
ENCLOSURE DEPTH WITH "B" OPTION
(260.4mm)
7.75" 2.75" 2.88" (73.0mm) DIAMETER HOLES INSIDE
(197.0mm) (70.0mm) FOR 0.50" (130.mm) CONDUIT
FOR 0.50" (130.mm) CONDUIT
7.56
High Density
Instrument Enclosures
A-12 Rear Access

P-11 Front Access
A-12 Rack
• Multiple Card Enclosures

• Plug-In Enclosures
• Panel Mount
• Surface Mount
• And Combinations of the
Above
P-11 Rack
ET-1200 and SC-1300 Instrument Enclosure Multiple Instrument Enclosure

High Density Enclosures The P-11 enclosure provides efficient The Ametek A-12 multi-unit enclosure
and high-density means packaging of is an efficient means of packaging up
Ametek Power Instruments makes two 11 instruments in a space measuring to 12 instruments in a space 17" x
high-density enclosures for packaging only 19" x 8.75" x 10" (483mm x 8.75" x 7". This enclosure is suitable for
ET-1200 alarms and SC-1300 signal 222mm x 254mm). mounting either in a standard 19" relay
conditioners: the P-11, 19" rack rack or for wall mounting. Most SC-
mount (with rear access terminal Instrument modules may be arranged
in any order providing that the arrange- 1300 and ET-1200 instruments need
blocks) and the A-12, 19" rack mount only a single rack position.
(with front access terminal blocks). ment does not take up more than 11
spaces. Most of the SC-1300 and ET-
P-11 Rack Mounted Multiple 1200 units fit into a single plug-in slot.
Some options require two slots.
Application Considerations
The P-11 is available with 24 VDC, 48
VDC or 115 VAC prime power. 24 VDC
power may be ordered with common
non-isolated or individual isolated DC-
to-DC supplies.
A-12 Rack or Surface Mounted
7.57
AMETEK
Signal Conditioning
P-11 Dimensions
19.00"
(483.0mm)
0.42"
(10.7mm)
TYPICAL
P-11 Enclosure Ordering

8.71"
1. Specify the quantity of P-11 enclo-
8.71" (221.2mm)
11.12"
(282.4mm)
(221.2mm)
sures required.
FRONT VIEW
BEZEL 5.75"
(146.1mm) 2. Specify the appropriate power code
for each instrument. Example: SC-
1.48"
(37.6mm) 10.31"
(261.8mm)
1300R-H-P-11, which designates
24 VDC non-isolated prime power.
19.48"
(494.9mm) See individual instrument sections
for more information.
TERMINAL BOARDS TB1 - TB11
3. Specify the arrangement (order) of
17.25"
TB11
1 1 1 1 1
TB6
1 1 1 1 1
TB1
1
(438.2mm)
instruments within the P-11
enclosure, so input shunts for 4-20
MOUNTING CLAMP
(4 REQUIRED)
mA or current inputs can be
TOP VIEW
properly installed.
10.31"
(261.8mm)
Note: If options P, HO or VO are
24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
specified, two rack positions per
REAR VIEW
CUSTOMER WIRING
module are required. ET-1200L/U, ET-
PANEL CUTOUT–
17.62" ±0.12" (447.5mm) wide x 9.00" ±0.12" (228.6mm) high
1202L/U, SC-1300L/U not available in
BEZEL FOR OPTIONAL
PANEL MOUNTING P-11.
A-12 Dimensions
19.00"
(482.6mm)
HINGED ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENT

A-12 Enclosure Ordering
ACCESS COVER PANEL
1. Specify the quantity of A-12

AUXILIARY
CARD SIDE VIEW 8.75"
(222.3mm)
enclosures required. Include a list
of card locations on the same
CARD GUIDE
FRONT
order with the enclosures.
CABLE
ACCESS
2. Specify the appropriate power code
0.75" (19.1mm)
for each instrument. For ex-
CARD
FRONT VIEW
(PROJECTED)
FUSE TRAY
1.12"
(28.4mm)
7.00"
(177.8mm)
DIAMETER KNOCKOUT-
3 EACH END
(ADDITIONAL KNOCKOUTS
ample: SC-1300R-H-A12 for 24
115VAC ± 10% ON BOTTOM)
POWER 24 VDC ±10%
TERMINALS 48 VDC ± 10% volts DC non-isolated prime
power.
3. Specify the arrangement of the
instruments in the A-12 enclo-
sure on the purchase order.
HOLES FOR
SURFACE MOUNTING Note: If options P, HO, or VO are
specified, two rack positions per
17.00"
(431.8mm)
module are required.
4.25"
(108.0mm) FRONT INSIDE VIEW
7.25"
(180.0mm)
TOP VIEW
0.68" 15.40" 0.92"

(17.0mm) (391.0mm) (23.0mm)
7.58
AMETEK
Transducers
Current & Voltage
Transducers for
Single Phase
Measurements
CCC-1B
VCC-1B
VCX-1B
• Used and Approved

Worldwide
• High Accuracy
• Outstanding Overload and
Temperature Performance
• Excellent Long-Term
Stability
• Meets ANSI C37.90.1-1974
(IEEE SWC) and BEAMA Applications
No. 219 Tests • Closed loop process
• Wide Selection of Input/ control element
Output Ranges • Motor overload
protection
• Process Outputs (4-20 mA) • Substation line and bus
monitoring
• Distribution circuit
monitoring
• Supervisory control and
data acquisition
• Improved precision of
dynamic network models
The Ametek Power Instruments CCC Like all Ametek Power Instruments two easily-accessible screws without
Current Transducer and VCC Voltage transducers, these current and voltage dismounting the enclosure from the
Transducer are compact instruments units incorporate state-of-the art electrical panel.
designed to accept an AC current or and mechanical design. Only the highest For more information on current and
voltage input and provide a propor- quality components, latest production voltage transducers, application
tional DC output. The VCX Voltage techniques and most advanced test assistance on a special project, or
Transducer is a suppressed zero unit equipment and procedures are used in simply to place an order, consult your
that provides the same type of output their manufacture. All models are de- nearest Ametek Sales Office.
signal. These transducers are designed signed to meet the ANSI SWC (surge
to respond to the average value of the withstand capability) test and BEAMA
input signal, but all models are cali- Test No. 219, to assure reliable perfor-
brated to indicate the RMS of a pure mance in the field.
sinusoid. All models are constructed CCC, VCC and VCX transducers are
with an ultra-linear transformer input housed in rugged drawn-steel enclosures
stage isolating the input from the solid- with welded-on mounting plates. The
state output amplifier. entire circuitry may be pulled by removing
8.1
AMETEK
Transducers
CCC-1B Current Transducers

VCC-1B Voltage Transducers
VCX-1B Suppressed Zero Voltage Transducers
CURRENT TRANSDUCER OPTIONS & STANDARD CALIBRATION (TABLE NO. 1)
CURRENT INPUT OVERLOAD WITHSTAND

OPTIONS RANGE (O-F.S.) OVER RANGE CONTINUOUS
STANDARD WITH FULL @ 65° C 3 SEC./HOUR 1 SEC./HOUR
CALIBRATION ACCURACY
X1, X5, XA, X X10, X20
C1 0-1 Amps 0-1.5 Amps 10 Amps 10 Amps 20 Amps 50 Amps
C10 0-10 Amps 0-15 Amps 20 Amps 10 Amps 250 Amps 400 Amps
VOLTAGE TRANSDUCER INPUT OPTIONS & STANDARD CALIBRATION (TABLE NO. 2)

POTENTIAL INPUT OVERLOAD WITHSTAND
OPTIONS RANGE (O-F.S.) OVER RANGE
STANDARD WITH FULL CONTINUOUS
CALIBRATION ACCURACY @ 65° C 1 SEC./HOUR
P1 0-150 Volts 0-200 Volts 1.5xF.S. 2xF.S.

POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS (TABLE NO. 3)
EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY

OPTIONS
RANGE BURDEN (MAXIMUM)
E0 Self-powered Note: P2-X5, C10-X5, and any — —

E1 combinations including XA, X10 85-150 VAC 4 VA
E2 or X20 options, require an 170-300 VAC 4 VA
E3 external power supply 300-550 VAC 4 VA
OUTPUT OPTIONS, CURRENT & VOLTAGE TRANSDUCERS (TABLE NO. 4)
OUTPUT INPUT BURDEN (MAXIMUM @ 50-60 Hz)

OPTIONS RANGE LOAD CURRENT LIMITING CURRENT VOLTAGE
TRANSDUCERS TRANSDUCERS
Self-Powered Externally-Powered
X1 0-1 mADC 0-10KΩ — 0.5 VA 0.5 VA 2.0 VA
X5 0-5 mADC 0-3KΩ — 1.0 VA 0.5 VA 2.0 VA
X10 0-10 mADC 0-1.5KΩ 15-20 mADC 1.5 VA 0.5 VA 2.5 VA
X20 0-20 mADC 0-750Ω 30-40 mADC 2.0 VA 0.5 VA 3.0 VA
XA 4-20 mADC 0-750Ω 30-40mADC — 0.5 VA 3.0 VA
X( )* 0-DC Volts Consult Factory — — 0.5 VA
*Example: X (0-10 VDC)
8.2
FREQUENCY OPTIONS (TABLE NO. 5) CALIBRATION (TABLE NO. 6)
OPTIONS CALIBRATION FREQUENCY OPTIONS F.S. CALIBRATION
F50 50 Hz Z0 Defined by Tables 1&2 (Standard)

F60 60 Hz Z1 Special factory calibration
Specify F.S. output and F.S. input: any value
between 1-10 Amps or 85-550 Volts.
External power option required
Specifications Output Ripple, Peak: 1% all models Surge Withstand: Meets ANSI
CCC-1B & VCC-1B except with option X10, 0.5% all C37.90.1-1974 (IEEE Std. 472 SWC)
models with option X10 and BEAMA No. 219 Tests
Accuracy: ±.25% full scale at 25°C
±2°C for combinations of C5 (X1, XA, Response Time: <400 ms from 0 to Influences Affecting Accuracy:
or X) and P1 (X1, XA or X). All other 99% for all models except with option A. Temperature: ±0.5%, max.
combinations ±0.50% full scale. X10, 400 ms from 0 to 90% for all B. Long-term Stability: ±0.25% per year,
models with option X10 max., non-cumulative
Operating Temperature Range: C. Frequency: ±0.2%/Hz from nominal
-20°C to +65°C Calibrate Adjustment: ±10% mini-
mum to ±10Hz
Operating Humidity: 0-95%, non- Weight (nominal):
condensing Dielectric Test: 2000 VAC rms,
minimum
WITHOUT OPTION XA WITH OPTION XA
Pounds 1.0 1.4

Kilograms .5 .65
A case ground terminal is standard.
Specifications, VCX-1B Refer to the following specifications Self-Powered

Suppressed Zero Voltage when placing an order. Accuracy: ±0.5% F.S. @ 25°C ±2°C
Transducers Maximum F.S. Input: 150 VAC Calibration Adjustment: 10 to 35 volt
The VCX voltage transducer provides a Minimum Input: 85 VAC span
0 to 1 mADC analog output for a Burden: 3 VA Zero Adjustment: 85-140 VAC in two
variety of customer selected input ranges (85-115 VAC and 115-140 VAC)
ranges. Narrowing the input range Temperature Influence: ±1% full
improves output resolution by a factor scale, max. All other specifications are the same as
of four over a zero-based input range. F.S. Output: 1 mADC into 0-10KΩ load those for Series VCC.
To avoid delays in delivery, always specify by model number and appropriate option suffixes in the order shown in the following
example. No order is complete unless all suffixes are specified.
Model Number:
CCC-1B C5 EO X1 F60 Z0 A1
CCC/VCC/VCX A1=±0.50% F.S.

Current or Potential Input A2=±0.25% F.S. Accuracy
(Table Nos. 1 or 2) (Table No. 6) Calibration
Power Supply (Table No. 3) (Table No. 5) Frequency
Output (Table No. 4)
8.3
AMETEK
Transducers
Dimensions:
ALL MOUNTING HOLES #8.32 TERMINAL SCREW

.203" (5.15 mm) FOR # 10 SCREWS
(4.5 mm DIA.)
.48" 3.04"
(12.19 mm) (77.21 mm)
2.00"
(50.8 mm)
1.50"
(38.1mm) 4.20"
CAL (106.68 mm)
.25"
.25" 3.50" (6.35 mm)
(6.35 mm) (88.9 mm)
4.00"
(101.6 mm)
CASE GROUND TERMINAL (STANDARD)
Connections:
Current & Voltage—Single Phase

EXTERNALLY POWERED DIMENSIONS
CCC-1B, VCC-1B
#8.32 TERMINAL SCREW
(4.5 mm DIA.)
1 OUTPUT (–)
2 OUTPUT (+)
5.08"
3 INPUT (129.18 mm)
4 INPUT
5 REQUIRED FOR E1
THROUGH E3
EXTERNAL POWER
SUPPLY OPTIONS.
6
8.4
Combined Watt/VAR
Transducers
For Three-Phase and
Single-Phase Systems
WV-15
WV-20
WV-25
WV-30
Applications
• Substation line
and bus
• Two Transducers in
monitoring
One Enclosure
• Motor overload
• Common Inputs for protection
Separate Watt & VAR • Distribution
Outputs circuit
• Occupies 50% Less Panel monitoring
Space • Closed loop
process control
• Requires 50% Fewer element
Connections
• Provides Greatest Economy
in Watt & VAR
Measurements
• Meets ANSI C37.90.a-1974
(IEEE SWC) & BEAMA No.
219 Tests
• Wide Selection of Current
& Potential Input Ranges
• Choice of Voltage or the WV combined transducer occupies used at a power interchange point,
half the panel space required by two positive for importing power, in the
Current Outputs units. A single PT and a single CT Watt output, and positive for lagging
connection per element means half of power factor in the VAR output. Any
the connections. These factors provide load resistance from short-circuit to
a substantial space and cost savings maximum load can be applied and the
with no sacrifice in performance. output load may be changed in-service
The electronic circuits of the WV without affecting accuracy or calibra-
transducer make it possible to guaran- tion.
tee a temperature influence of less than The WV transducer is mounted in a
0.25% (for the X1 output) over a range rugged drawn steel enclosure with a
The Ametek Power Instruments
of -20° to +65°C. Long term stability is welded-on plate for easy installation.
combined Watt/VAR transducers are
±.25% per year non-cumulative, For more information on the combined
compact power transducers that
permitting greatly extended calibration Watt/VAR transducer, application
provide two Direct Current (DC)
schedules and considerable cost assistance on a special project, or to
outputs proportional to the real and
savings. place an order, consult your nearest
reactive power input. The output
accuracy is 0.25% including the effects The DC output signals, representing Ametek Sales Office.
of current, voltage, power factor, Watts and VARs, not only indicate the
frequency, and output load. Housed in magnitude, but the direction of the
the same size enclosure as the PCE measured quantities. The polarity is
and VCE (discrete) Watt and VAR units, positive for unity power factor, or when
8.5
AMETEK
Transducers
General Specifications
Series WV Combined Watt / VAR Transducers
APPLICATION GUIDE (TABLE NO. 1)
MODEL NUMBER CONNECTION VOLTAGE LOAD
1 phase unrestricted unrestricted

WV-15* 3 phase
3 wire balanced balanced
WV-20 3 phase
unrestricted unrestricted
3 wire
3 phase
WV-25 4 wire balanced unrestricted
3 phase
WV-30 4 wire unrestricted unrestricted
*Specify single-phase or three-phase connection.
POTENTIAL OPTIONS (TABLE NO. 2)
POTENTIAL INPUT RANGE

OPTIONS NOMINAL
SELF-POWERED MODEL EXTERNALLY-POWERED MODEL
P1 120 VAC 90-150 VAC 0-150 VAC

P2 240 VAC 170-300 VAC 0-300 VAC
P3 480 VAC 300-550 VAC 0-550 VAC
Potential Burden, Maximum 6 VA 0.5 VA

Potential Overload Withstand maximum rating, continuous 1.5 x nominal rating, continuous

OPTIONS
E0, self-powered –– ––
E1 90-150 VAC 5.5 VA
E2
E3
} externally
powered 170 - 300 VAC
300 - 550 VAC
5.5 VA
5.5 VA
CURRENT OPTIONS (TABLE NO. 4)

CURRENT INPUT CURRENT OVERLOAD WITHSTAND
OPTIONS OVER RANGE BURDEN

NOMINAL WITH FULL CONTINUOUS 3 SEC./ HOUR 1 SEC./ HOUR
(MAXIMUM) AT 65° C
ACCURACY
C1 0-1 Amps 0-1.25 Amps 0.05 VA 10 Amps 40 Amps 50 Amps

8.6
OUTPUT OPTIONS (TABLE NO. 5)
OUTPUT
OPTIONS
RANGE (F.S.) LOAD COMPLIANCE
X1 0-±1 mADC 0-10 KΩ ± 11 Volts

X5 0-±5 mADC 0-2.4 KΩ ± 12 Volts
X10 0-±10 mADC 0-1.2 KΩ ± 12 Volts
XA 4-20 mADC (unipolar power) 0-600 Ω ± 12 Volts
XB 4-12-20 mADC (bipolar) 0-600 Ω ± 12 Volts
X (0-VDC) DC voltage, ±10 V max. –– ––
FREQUENCY OPTIONS (TABLE NO. 6) CALIBRATE ADJUSTMENT OPTIONS (TABLE NO. 7)

Separate zero and calibrate controls are provided for watt and VAR sections.
OPTIONS FREQUENCY (NOMINAL)
CALIBRATE GAIN ZERO
OPTION ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENT
F50 50 Hz
F60 60 Hz W0 (standard) ±10% ±2%
W1 (extended) 50-125% ±2%
W2 (extended) 75-200% ±2%
STANDARD CALIBRATION, WATTS OR VARS (TABLE NO. 8)

Multiply the appropriate values shown in Table B by the factor shown in Table A to determine the full-scale calibration – watts or VARs – for the
desired instrument. Specify Option Z0 for standard calibration as defined by these tables. Specify Option Z1 for special factory calibration and
indicate the full scale value.
TABLE A TABLE B
FOR MODEL NUMBER MULTIPLY BY POTENTIAL CURRENT INPUT RANGE

WV-15 1 INPUT C1 C2 C5 C10
1 phase connection OPTION (0-1) (0-2) (0-5) (0-10)
WV-15 2 P1 (85-150) 100 200 500 1000
3 phase connection P2 (170-300) 200 400 1000 2000
P3 (300-550) 400 800 2000 4000
WV-20 2
WV-25,30 3
Accuracy: .25% F.S. at 25° C ± 5° C Power Factor Range: Unity to lead or lag zero
Operating Temperature Range: -20° to +65° C Self Powered: Yes, unless one of options E1-E3 is specified
Operating Humidity: 0-99%, non-condensing Isolation: 2000 V rms, minimum, Input/Output/Power/Case
Output Riipple, Peak: <1% Surge Withstand: ANSI C37.90.a-1974 (IEEE SWC)
Output Current Limiting: 1.5 x maximum for option numbers X10, BEAMA Test No. 219
XA and XB Size: See outline dimensions, page 8.8
Response Time (to 99%): <400 m.s. Case ground terminal standard
Influences Affecting Accuracy:
Temperature: ±0.25%, max for Option X1 Weight (nominal):
±0.5%, max. for all other output options
Long Term Stability: ±0.25%/yr., max., noncumulative WV-15 WV-20 WV-25 WV-30
Frequency: 0.1%/Hz, max. from nominal frequency, ±10 Hz for Pounds 3.4 4.0 4.0 4.5
watt transducer output.
Kilograms 1.5 1.8 1.8 2.0
Typical ±3% at nominal frequency plus 400 Hz for watt
transducer output
Model Number:
WV-20 P2 EO C2 X1 F60 WO Z0
Model No. (Table #1) (Table 8) Calibration

Potential Input (Table No. 2) (Table 7) Calibration Aids
Power Supply (Table No. 3) (Table No. 6) Frequency
Current (Table No. 4) (Table No. 5) Output
8.7
AMETEK
Transducers
Connection Diagrams &
Outline Dimensions
WV-15 WV-15
Single-Phase Connection Three-Phase Connection
Unrestricted LOAD
Balanced Load
WATT LOAD
OUTPUT A B WATT
(+) OUTPUT A B C
WATT & VAR (+)
OUTPUT COMMON WATT & VAR
(-) OUTPUT COMMON
(-)
1 2 3 4 5 6 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 13 14
NC NC NC NC
NC NC NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
7 8 9 10 11 12 15 16
7 8 9 10 11 12 15 16
JUMPER (-) (+)

VAR OUTPUT (-) (+)
VAR OUTPUT
A B
A B C
LINE
LINE
For options E1-E3, connect external power to terminals 13 and 14. For options E1-E3, connect external power to terminals 13 and 14.
WV-20 WV-25
Unrestricted Balanced Load
LOAD LOAD
WATT A B C WATT A B C NEUTRAL
OUTPUT OUTPUT
(+) (+)
WATT & VAR WATT & VAR
OUTPUT COMMON OUTPUT COMMON
(-) (-)
1 2 3 4 5 6 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 13 14
NC NC NC NC
NC NC 7 8 9 10 11 12 15 16
7 8 9 10 11 12 15 16
(-) (+)
VAR OUTPUT
A B C NEUTRAL
(-) (+)
A B C VAR OUTPUT LINE
LINE
WV-30 LOAD
Outline Dimensions, All Models
Unrestricted A B C NEUTRAL
CASE GROUND TERMINAL

WATT 3.62" #8.32 TERMINAL SCREW (4.5 mm DIA.)
OUTPUT .25" (91.95 mm) ALL MOUNTING HOLES
(+) (6.35 mm) 1.50" 1.06" .203" (5.15 mm0 FOR #10 SCREWS
WATT & VAR (38.1 mm) (26.92 mm)
OUTPUT COMMON
(-)
16
13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 13 14
ZERO CAL. ZERO CAL.
NC NC
5.25"
15
(133.35 mm)
12
6
WATT VAR
4.75" 3.921"
(120.65 mm) (99.59 mm)
5
1 0 11
7 8 9 10 11 12 15 16
4
9
3
8
2
6.342"
(161.09 mm)
7
1
.664"
(16.88 mm)
(-) (+) A B C NEUTRAL 3.736"

VAR OUTPUT (94.89 mm)
LINE
For options E1-E3, connect external power to terminals 13 and 14. Case Ground Terminal Standard
Above transducers are also available in rack-mounted configurations.
8.8
Electronic Watt &
VAR Transducers
PCE
VCE
For Three-Phase and Single-

Phase Systems
• 0.25% Accuracy
• Used and Approved
Worldwide
Stability
• Meets ANSI C37.90.A-1974
(IEEE SWC) and BEAMA
No. 219 Tests
• High Accuracy with
Distorted Waveforms
• Wide Selection of Current
and Potential Input Ranges
• Available with Choice of
Voltage or Current Output Applications
Signals • Substation line and bus
monitoring
• Motor overload protection
• Distribution circuit
monitoring
• Closed loop process
control element
The Ametek Power Instruments Watt schedules and considerable cost The PCE and VCE are mounted in a
and VAR transducers provide a Direct savings. rugged drawn steel enclosure with a
Current (DC) output proportional to the The DC output signal, representing welded-on mounting plate for easy
real or reactive power input. The output Watts or VARs, not only indicates the mounting.
accuracy is 0.25% including the effects magnitude but the direction of the For more information on Watt or VAR
of current, voltage, power factor, measured quantity. The polarity is transducers, application assistance on
frequency, and output load. positive for unity power factor in the a special project, or to place an order,
The electronic circuits of the PCE and PCE, and positive for lagging power consult your nearest Ametek Sales
VCE make it possible to guarantee a factor in the VCE. Any load resistance Office.
temperature influence of less than from short-circuit to maximum load can
0.25% (for the X1 output) over a range be applied and the output load may be
of -20° to +65°C. Long term stability is changed in-service without affecting
±0.25% per year non-cumulative, accuracy or calibration.
permitting greatly extended calibration
8.9
AMETEK
Transducers
General Specifications
PCE & VCE Watt and VAR Transducers
MODEL NUMBER
CONNECTION VOLTAGE LOAD
WATT VAR

PCE-15* VCE-15* 3 phase
3 wire balanced balanced
3 phase
PCE-20 VCE-20 unrestricted unrestricted
3 wire
3 phase
PCE-25 VCE-25 4 wire balanced unrestricted
3 phase
PCE-30 VCE-30 4 wire unrestricted unrestricted
*Specify single-phase or three-phase connection when used with the Option “Z1”.

POTENTIAL INPUT RANGE
OPTIONS
SELF-POWERED MODEL EXTERNALLY-POWERED MODEL
P1 (120 VAC nominal) 85-150 VAC 0-150 VAC

Potential Burden, Maximum 4 VA 0.1 VA

Potential Overload Withstand maximum rating, continuous 1.5 x nominal rating, continuous

OPTIONS
E1 85-150 VAC 4 VA
E2
E3
} externally
300 - 550 VAC
4 VA
4 VA


(MAXIMUM) AT 65° C
ACCURACY

C10 0-10 Amps 0-15 Amps 0.50 VA 20 Amps 250 Amps 400 Amps
8.10
OUTPUT
OPTIONS
X1 0-±1 mADC 0-10 KΩ ± 11 Volts

X5 0-±5 mADC 0-3 KΩ ± 15 Volts
X10 0-±10 mADC 0-1.4 KΩ ± 14 Volts
X (0-VDC) DC voltage, ±10 v max. –– ––
FREQUENCY OPTIONS (TABLE NO. 6) CALIBRATE ADJUSTMENT OPTIONS (TABLE NO. 7)
OPTIONS FREQUENCY (NOMINAL) CALIBRATE GAIN ZERO

OPTION ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENT
F50 50 Hz
W0 (standard) ±10% ±2%
F60 60 Hz
W1 (extended) 50-125% ±2%
F400 400 Hz
W2 (extended) 75-200% ±2%
STANDARD CALIBRATION, WATTS OR VARS (TABLE NO. 8)

Multiply the appropriate values shown in Table B by the factor shown in Table A to determine the full-scale calibration – watts or VARs – for the
desired instrument. Specify Option Z0 for standard calibration as defined by these tables. Specify Option Z1 for special factory calibration and
indicate the full scale value.
TABLE B
TABLE A
POTENTIAL CURRENT INPUT RANGE
FOR MODEL NUMBER MULTIPLY BY INPUT C1 C2 C5 C10
PCE / VCE-15 OPTION (0-1) (0-2) (0-5) (0-10)
1
1 phase connection P1 (85-150) 100 200 500 1000
PCE / VCE-15 P2 (170-300) 200 400 1000 2000
2 P3 (300-550) 400 800 2000 4000
3 phase connection
PCE / VCE-20 2
PCE / VCE-25,30 3 Operating Temperature Range: -20° to +65° C
Operating Humidity: 0-99%, non-condensing
Output Ripple, Peak: <1%
ACCURACY OPTIONS (TABLE NO. 9)
Output Current Limiting: 1.5 x maximum for options X10, XA and XB
OPTION ACCURACY Accuracy includes the effects of: Response Time (to 99%): <400 m.s.
% F.S.
• potential, within range Power Factor Range: Unity to lead or lag zero
• current, within range
• power factor, within range
Self Powered: Yes, unless one of options E1-E3 is specified
±0.1% typical • frequency, nominal Isolation: 2000 V rms, minimum, Input/Output/Power/Case
A2 ±0.25% • load, within range Surge Withstand: ANSI C37.90.a-1974 (IEEE SWC) BEAMA Test No. 219
• humidity, within range Influences Affecting Accuracy:
worst case • ambient temperature 25°C ±5°C
• external power supply, within range Temperature: ±0.25%, max for Option X1
±0.5%, max. for all other output options
Long Term Stability: ±0.25%/yr., max., noncumulative
Weight (nominal): Frequency: 0.1%/Hz, max. from nominal frequency, ±10 Hz for all
PCE/VCE-15 PCE/VCE-20 PCE/VCE-25 PCE/VCE-30 watt transducers.
Typical ±3% at nominal frequency plus 400 Hz.
Pounds 3.0 3.4 3.5 3.8 Size: See outline dimensions, page 8.12
Kilograms 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 Case ground terminal standard
Model Number:
PCE-20 P1 E0 C5 XA F60 W0 Z0 A2
Series (Table No. 1)

Potential (Table 2) (Table No. 9) Accuracy
Power Supply (Table No. 3) (Table No. 8) F.S. Calibration
Current (Table No. 4) (Table No. 7) Calibrate Adjustment
Output (Table No. 5) (Table No. 6) Frequency
8.11
AMETEK
Transducers
Outline Dimensions
PCE-15 & VCE-15 PCE-15 & VCE-15
Unrestricted LOAD Balanced Load LOAD
A B A B C
OUTPUT OUTPUT
(-) (+) (-) (+)
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
NC NC NC NC
NC NC NC NC
7 8 9 10 11 12 7 8 9 10 11 12
JUMPER
A B A B C
LINE LINE
PCE-20 & VCE-20 PCE-25 & VCE-25 LOAD

Unrestricted LOAD
Balanced Load A B C NEUTRAL
A B C
OUTPUT
(-) (+)
OUTPUT
(-) (+)
1 2 3 4 5 6 13 14
NC NC
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
NC NC
7 8 9 10 11 12
A B C NEUTRAL
A B C
LINE
LINE
For options E1-E3, connect external power to terminals 13 and 14.
For options E1-E3, connect external power to terminals 11 and 12. An 8-point terminal block is furnished with this option.
PCE-30 & VCE-30 LOAD Outline Dimensions, All Models

A B C NEUTRAL
Unrestricted
CASE GROUND TERMINAL
3.62" #8.32 TERMINAL SCREW (4.5 mm DIA.)
.25" (91.95 mm) ALL MOUNTING HOLES
OUTPUT (6.35 mm) 1.50" 1.06" .203" (5.15 mm0 FOR #10 SCREWS
(-) (+) (38.1 mm) (26.92 mm)
1 2 3 4 5 6 13 14
NC NC
5.25"
12
(133.35 mm)
6
CAL
5
1 0 11
4.75" 3.921"
4
(120.65 mm) (99.59 mm)

7 8 9 10 11 12
9
3
ZERO
8
2
7
1
6.342"
(161.09 mm)
.664"
(16.88 mm)
A B C NEUTRAL
3.736"
(94.89 mm)
LINE
For options E1-E3, connect external power to terminals 13 and 14.
An 8-point terminal block is furnished with this option.
8.12
Triple Current and
Voltage Transducers for
Three Phase
Measurements
CCC-30B
VCC-30B
• Three-In-One Packaging
(three voltage or current
transducers)
• ±0.25% Intrinsic Accuracy
Stability
• Meets IEEE SWC Test
Applications
• Current or Voltage Output
• Supervisory control and
• Compact Size data acquisition systems
• Substation line and bus
monitoring
• Motor overload protection
distribution circuit
monitoring
• Closed loop process control
element
The Ametek Power Instruments CCC- transducers, these current and voltage sible screws without dismounting the
30B Current Transducers and VCC- units incorporate state-of-the-art enclosure from the panel.
30B Voltage Transducers are compact electrical and mechanical design. Only For more information on current and
and highly accurate instruments the highest quality components, latest voltage transducers, application
designed to accept three independent production techniques and most assistance on a special project, or
AC current or voltage inputs, and advanced test equipment and proce- simply to place an order, consult your
provide proportional DC outputs. Each dures are used in their manufacture. All nearest Ametek sales office.
transducer section is designed to models incorporate temperature
respond to the average value of its compensated circuits and are designed
input signal, but is calibrated to indicate to meet the IEEE SWC (surge with-
the RMS of a pure sinusoid. The three stand capability) test to assure reliable
elements are totally isolated input to performance in the field.
output, input to input, output to output CCC-30B and VCC-30B transducers
and everything to case. are housed in rugged drawn-steel
Like all Ametek Power Instruments enclosures with welded-on mounting
plates. The entire circuitry may be
pulled by removing four easily acces-
8.13
AMETEK
Transducers
CCC-30B Current and VCC-30B Voltage Transducers
CURRENT TRANSDUCER OPTIONS & STANDARD CALIBRATION (TABLE NO. 1)
OPTION CURRENT INPUT OVERLOAD WITHSTAND
RANGE (0-F.S.) OVER RANGE CONTINUOUS
STANDARD CALIBRATION WITH FULL ACCURACY @ 65° C 3 SEC./HOUR 1 SEC./HOUR
C5 0-5 AMPS 0-7.5 AMPS 20 AMPS 100 AMPS 250 AMPS
VOLTAGE TRANSDUCER INPUT OPTIONS & STANDARD CALIBRATION (TABLE NO. 2)

OPTION POTENTIAL INPUT OVERLOAD WITHSTAND
RANGE (0-F.S.) OVER RANGE CONTINUOUS
STANDARD CALIBRATION WITH FULL ACCURACY @ 65° C 1 SEC./HOUR
P1 0-150 VOLTS 0-200 VOLTS 1.5 x F.S. 2 x F.S.
POWER SUPPLY All units are self-powered. Specify EO when ordering.
OUTPUT OPTIONS, CURRENT & VOLTAGE TRANSDUCERS (TABLE NO.3)

OUTPUT OVERLOAD WITHSTAND
OPTIONS
RANGE LOAD CURRENT LIMITING CURRENT TRANSDUCERS VOLTAGE TRANSDUCERS
X1 0-1 mADC 0-10KΩ — 0.5 VA 2.0 VA
X (0-VDC) 0 + DC Volts Consult Factory — — —
FREQUENCY OPTIONS (TABLE NO. 4) CALIBRATION (TABLE NO. 5)
OPTIONS CALIBRATION FREQUENCY OPTIONS F.S. CALIBRATION

F50 50 Hz Z0 Standard, defined by Tables 1 & 2
F60 60 Hz Z1 Special factory calibration
(Specify F.S. output and F.S. input)
Specifications
Accuracy: 0.25% Full Scale at 25° C ±2° C Ordering Information:
Model Number: CCC-30B C5 E0 X1 F60 Z0
Influences Affecting Accuracy:
A. Temperature: ±0.5%, max.
B. Long-term Stability: ±0.25% per year, max., non- CCC/VCC
cumulative Current or Potential Input
C. Frequency: ± 0.2%/Hz from nominal to ± 10 Hz
(Table Nos. 1 or 2
Operating Temperature Range: -20° C to +65° C
Self-Powered
Operating Humidity: 0-95%, non-condensing
Output (Table No. 3)
Output Ripple, Peak: <1%
Frequency (Table No. 4)
Response Time: <400 ms from 0-99% of final value
Calibration (Table No. 5)
Calibrate Adjustment: ± 10%
Isolation: 200 VAC RMS, min., Input/Output/Power/Case
Outline Dimensions
Surge Withstand: meest ANSI C37.90.1-1974 (IEEE SWC)
CASE GROUND TERMINAL (STANDARD)
and BEAMA No. 219 Tests 3.62"
(91.95 mm) #8.32 TERMINAL SCREW (4.5 mm DIA.)
.25"
Case Ground Terminal Standard (6.35 mm) 1.50"
(38.1 mm)
1.06"
(26.92 mm)
ALL MOUNTING HOLES
.203" (5.15 mm) FOR #10 SCREWS
Connection Diagram
Current & Voltage— 5.25"
CAL A CAL B CAL C
12
6
OUTPUT A OUTPUT B OUTPUT C (133.35 mm)

5
1 0 11
Three Phase + - + - + - 4.75" 3.921"

4
(120.65 mm) (99.59 mm)

CCC-30B, VCC-30B
9
1
3
2 3 4 5 6
8
2
7
1
SECTION A SECTION B SECTION C

6.342"
(161.09 mm)
7 8 9 10 11 12 .664"
(16.88 mm)
3.736"
INPUT A INPUT B INPUT C (94.89 mm)
8.14
Electronic Watt/Watthour
& VAR / VARhour
Transducers for Three-
Phase & Single-Phase
Systems
WWH
VVH
• Accuracy ±0.25% F.S.

• Measures Forward/Reverse
Power & Energy
• Calibration Traceable to
N.I.S.T.
• Outstanding Temperature
Performance
Stability
Applications
• Meets ANSI/IEEE STD.
(IEEE SWC) and BEAMA • Utility revenue
metering
No. 219 Tests
• Industrial power
• Wide Selection of Input & demand control
Output Levels
The Ametek Power Instruments Watt/ The K-Y-Z Relay Contacts are mercury To complete the package Ametek
Watthour (WWH) and VAR/VARhour wetted, and rated at 1 billion opera- Power Instruments offers a companion
(VVH) Transducers are versatile, tions to provide years of bounce free product, a self-contained, stand-alone
compact power transducers that KWH counts. Both the analog and register module (RM) with one or two
provide simultaneous power (watts or digital signals are available in bi- rollover or counters for direct readout
VARs) and energy (watthours and directional form for co-generation, of KWH. The RM includes an internal
VARhours) measurement. The watt or interchange transactions, or lead/lag power supply and rugged mechanical
VAR output is an analog signal reactive power measurement. case that mounts easily on any
proportional to the real or reactive Conversion of power and time into horizontal or vertical surface.
power input. The output accuracy is watthour or VARhour measurement is For more information on watt/watthour,
0.25% including the effects of current, accomplished with analog and digital - VAR/VARhour transducers, application
voltage, power factor, frequency and circuitry providing a wide variety of assistance on a special project, or to
output load. The watthour or VARhour output ranges without compromising place an order, consult your nearest
pulses are continuously transmitted as measurement accuracy. Ametek Sales Office.
form “C”, three wire, break before
make K-Y-Z Relay contact transitions.
8.15
AMETEK
Transducers
WWH & VVH Transducers
MODEL NUMBER
CONNECTION VOLTAGE LOAD
WATT/WATTHOUR VAR/VARHOUR
WWH-15* VVH-15*
3 phase / 3 wire balanced balanced
WWH-20 VVH-20 3 phase / 3 wire unrestricted unrestricted
WWH-25 VVH-25 3 phase / 4 wire balanced unrestricted
WWH-30 VVH-30 3 phase / 4 wire unrestricted unrestricted
*Specify single-phase or three-phase calibration.
A2 OPTION
OPTIONS NOMINAL SELF EXTERNALLY
POWERED POWERED
P1 120 VAC 85-150 VAC 0-150 VAC
P2 240 VAC 170-300 VAC 0-300 VAC
P3 480 VAC 300-550 VAC 0-500 VAC
Potential Burden
Maximum (at normal input) 10VA .05 VA
Potential Overload Withstand 1.5 x normal rating, continuous

OPTIONS RANGE BURDEN MAXIMUM
NOMINAL (AT NOMINAL INPUT)
A2
E0, self powered none required for self-powered unit N/A
E1 120 85-150 10 VA
E2
E3 } externally
powered
240
440
170-300
300-550
10 VA
10 VA


ACCURACY (MAXIMUM) AT 65° C
C1 A2 only 0-1 Amps 0-1.5 Amps 0.25 VA 10 Amps 20 Amps 50 Amps

C2 A2 only 0-2 Amps 1-3.0 Amps 0.25 VA 10 Amps 40 Amps 100 Amps
C10 A2 only 0-10 Amps 0-15 Amps 0.50 VA 20 Amps 250 Amps 400 Amps
ANALOG OUTPUT OPTIONS, WATT OR VAR (TABLE NO. 5)

OUTPUT
OPTIONS CURRENT
LIMITING
X1 0-± 1 mADC — 0-10K ± 11 volts
X5 0-± 5 mADC — 0-3K ± 15 volts
X10
X20
XA
XB
}
A2 only
X (0-VDC)
0-± 10 mADC
0-± 20 mADC
4-20 mADC (unipolar power)
4-12-20 mADC (bipolar)
DC voltage, ± 10 V max
15-20 mADC
30-40 mADC
30-40 mADC
30-40 mADC
—
0-1.5K
0-750
0-750
0-750
—
± 15 volts
± 15 volts
+ 15 volts
+ 15 volts
—
DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTIONS WATTHOUR OR VARHOUR (TABLE NO. 6)

OPTIONS OUTPUT - WATTHOUR OR VARHOUR CONTACT RATING CONTACT LIFE
Y1 Uni-directional — single 3-wire output 100 VA, 2 A, and 500V
maximum, resistive load) 109 operations
Y2 Bi-directional — dual 3-wire outputs
8.16
FREQUENCY OPTIONS (TABLE NO. 7) MOUNTING ORIENTATION (TABLE NO. 8)
OPTIONS CALIBRATION FREQUENCY OPTIONS ORIENTATION (MOUNTING PLATE)

F50 50 Hz ± 2 Hz H0 horizontal mounting ±30°
F60 60 Hz ± 2 Hz H1 vertical mounting ±30°
CALIBRATE ADJUSTMENT OPTIONS (TABLE NO. 9)

CALIBRATE ADJUSTMENT ZERO ADJUSTMENT
OPTIONS WITH ACCURACY WITH ACCURACY
OPTION A2 OPTION A2
W0 (standard ± 10% ± 2%
W1 (extended) 50-125% ± 2%
W2 (extended) 75-200% ± 2%
TABLE 10B
CALIBRATION (TABLE NO. 10)
Standard Digital Option: 1 count (contact transfer)/watthour or CURRENT INPUT OPTION
POTENTIAL
VARhour, specify option ZDO. INPUT C1 C2 C5
Standard Analog Option: Full scale calibration, watts or VARs, OPTIONS (0-1) (0-2) (0-5)
determined by multiplying value in Table 10A by factor shown in
Table 10B. Specify option ZAO. P1 100 200 500
Non-Standard Digital Option: State desired counts per hour at the P2 200 400 1000
secondary of the PT and CTs and indicate the PT and CT ratios. P3 400 800 2000
Non-Standard Analog Option: Indicate fullscale value in watts or
VARs, or provide fullscale load, PT & CT ratios. Specify option ZA1. ACCURACY (TABLE NO. 11)
OPTION ACCURACY Accuracy includes the effects of:
TABLE 10A
±0.1% F.S. • potential, within range
FOR MODEL NUMBER MULTIPLY BY typical • current, within range
A2 • power factor, within range
WWH/VVH-15 1 ±0.25% F.S. • frequency, nominal
1 phase connection worst case • load, within range
WWH/VVH-15 • humidity, within range
3 phase connection 2 • ambient temperature 25°C ±2°C
• external power supply, within
WWH/VVH-20 2 range
WWH/VVH-25, 30 3
Operating Temperature Range: -20° to +65°C External Magnetic Field

Operating Humidity: 0-99%, non-condensing Less than 0.01% of rated output with a magnetic field of 100
Output Ripple, Peak: 1% for option A2 ampere-turns produced by a straight conductor six-feet long
Response Time (to 99%): 400 m.s. carrying a current of the same frequency and phase as the
Power Factor Range: Unity to lead or lag zero applied voltage and positioned in any direction 10 inches from the
Self Powered: Available with option E0 (A2 only) center of the unit.
Isolation: 2000 V rms, minimum, Input/Output/Power/Case Size: See outline dimensions on page 8.20
Influences Affecting Accuracy: Orientation: see table 8.
Temperature: ±0.25%, max. for option X1 from -20° to +65° C Weight (nominal): 6.5 pounds (2.95 kilos)
±0.5%, max. for all other output options from
-20° to +65° C
Long Term Stability: ± 0.25%/year, max., noncululative
Frequency: ± 0.1%/Hz max. from 50 or 60 Hz, ± 10 Hz, for all
watt/watthour transducers ± 3% max. up to 450 Hz
Model
Number: WWH-20 P1 E1 C5 X1 Y1 F60 W0 ZA0/ZD0 A2 H0
Series (Table No. 1)

Potential (Table 2) Mounting Orientation (Table No. 8)
Power Supply (Table No. 3) Accuracy (Table No. 11)
Current (Table No. 4) Calibration (Table No. 10)
Analog Output (Table No. 5) Calibrate Adjustment (Table No. 9)
Digital Output (Table No. 6) Frequency (Table No. 7)
8.17
AMETEK
Transducers
Outline Dimensions
WWH-15 & VVH-15 WWH-15 & VVH-15
22 WATT (-) 1 22 WATT (-) 1
or or
21 REV VAR (+) 2 21 REV VAR (+) 2
20 3 20 3
19 4 19 4
18 FWD 5 18 FWD 5
17 6 17 6
16 7 16 7
15 8 15 8
14 13 12 11 10 9 14 13 12 11 10 9
JUMPER
LINE LOAD
A A
B B
LINE LOAD
C
C
Connect external power to terminals 15 and 16. Connect external power to terminals 15 and 16.
WWH-20 & VVH-20 WWH-25 & VVH-25

22 WATT (-) 1 22 WATT (-) 1
REV or or
21 VAR (+)
2 21 REV VAR (+) 2
20 3 20 3
19 4 19 4
18 FWD 5 18 FWD 5
6 17 6
17
16 7
16 7
15 8
15 8
14 13 12 11 10 9
14 13 12 11 10 9
LINE LOAD
LINE LOAD A A
A A
B B
B B
C C
C C
N N
Connect external power to terminals 15 and 16. Connect external power to terminals 15 and 16.
WWH-30 & VVH-30 Outline Dimensions, All Models

Balanced Load 1.50" 1.16"
(38.1 mm) (29.6 mm)
22 WATT (-) 1
REV or
21 VAR (+) 2
20 3
19 4
ZERO
7.31"
18 FWD 5 (185.67 mm)
WATT HOUR
17 6 7.81"
(198.37 mm)
CAL.
16 7
CAL.
15 8
14 13 12 11 10 9
LINE LOAD
A A
B B
C C
N N
3.97" 6.470"
Connect external power to terminals 15 and 16. (100.8 mm) (164.34 mm)
8.18
Display Register Module
for WWH and VVH
Transducers
RM-10
RM-20
• Single or Dual Displays

• Non-Volatile Display
Register
• Self-Contained Power
Supply
• Dual Displays for Forward
and Reverse Energy
Metering Applications
• Meets ANSI-C37.90.1-1974
IEEE SWC and BEAMA No.
219 Tests
The Ametek Power Instruments General Specifications Visual Output:

watthour and VARhour register modules Digit height: 0.125” (3.18mm)
Display Register Operation:
are an optional companion product to 6 digit display: resettable via push-button
The non-volatile display will register one
the Ametek watt/watthour (WWH) and 8 digit display: non-resettable
count for each transfer of the input (bi-
VAR/VARhour (VVH) transducers. The Re-Transmitting Relay Output Option:
stable Form C, 3-wire). RM display
RM-10 single register module will Isolated mercury-wetted contact relay
modules have a typical life of 108
accumulate and visually display the (single or dual), Form C, 3-wire SPDT.
counts.
total watthour or VARhour pulses from Contact rated for 2 Amps at 100 VA
the WWH or VVH electronic transduc- Operating Temperature Range: -20°
and 500 Volts resistive. The relay
ers. to +70°C
output is a bi-stable device with one
The RM modules can be ordered with RM-10 Single Display Register Input normally open and one normally closed
these options: Characteristics: Single Form C relay, contact. Each time a count registers,
• Single display for uni-directional (co- 3-wire, SPDT dry contact. Maximum both contacts change state.
generation) energy readings. rate 15,500 counts per hour.
Weight: Approximately 3.9 lbs. (1.7kg)
• Resettable or non-resettable displays RM-20 Dual Display Register Input
• Re-transmitting mercury-wetted For more information on the Register
Characteristics: Dual Form C relay, 3-
relays for interfacing to remote Module, application assistance on a
wire, SPDT dry contact each input.
displays or centralized data acquisi- special project or to place an order, call
Maximum rate 15,500 counts per hour.
tion systems. your nearest Ametek sales office.
• A wide range of external power
supply inputs
8.19
AMETEK
Transducers
Specifications
Type and Quantity of Display Registers (Table 1)
OPTION RM-10 (SINGLE DISPLAY REGISTER) OPTION RM-20 (DUAL DISPLAY REGISTER)
One 6-digit register Two 6-digit registers
R1 Resettable (Useable with Y1 R2 Resettable (Useable with Y2
option on the WWH-VVH Transducer option on the WWH-VVH Transducer
One 8-digit register Two 8-digit register
R3 No-resettable (Useable with Y1 R4 No-resettable (Useable with Y2
option on the WWH/VVH Transducer). option on the WWH/VVH Transducer).
External Power Option (Table 2)
OPTION EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY (Nominal) OPERATING RANGE TYPICAL RANGE

E1 120 VAC 50/60 Hz 85-150 1.5 VA
E2 240 VAC 50/60 Hz 170-300 1.5 VA
E3 480 VAC 50/60 Hz 300-550 1.5 VA
Re-transmitting Relay Option (Table 3) Mounting Orientation (Table 4)
OPTION RELAYS OPTION ORIENTATION (MOUNTING PLATE)

B0 No Re-transmitting Relays H0 Horizontal Mounting ±30°
B1 One Re-transmitting Relay H1 Vertical Mounting ±30°
B2 Two-Retransmitting Relays
To avoid delays in delivery, always specify by model number and appropriate option suffixes.
The order is complete with all suffixes are specified
Model Number: RM-20 R2 E1 B1 H0

Series
Register Configuration (Table 1) (Table 4) Mounting Position
External Power Option (Table 2) (Table 3) Re-transmit Relay Option
Connection Diagram Outline Dimensions
Reverse
Forward
AC Power
.50"
(12.7 mm)
.26"
(6.6 mm)
1 2 3 4 5 6 6.470"
INPUTS (164.34 mm)
1.50" Reverse
(38.1 mm) Forward Count
Count
1.18" Optional Outputs
(30.0 mm)
Retransmit Retransmit 7.81"

Reverse 12 11 10 9 8 7 Forward (198.4 mm)
8.20
Phase Angle and
Power Factor
Transducers
PFA
PFN
PAN
• 0.5% Accuracy
• Calibration Capability to
±170° in Phase Angle
Measurements
• Meets ANSI C37.90.1-1974
(IEEE SWC) and BEAMA
No. 219 Tests
• Current or Voltage Output
• Compact size
Ametek Power Instruments Phase Operation

Angle/Power Factor Transducers (PFA) precision reference power supply
Current and potential input signals are
are designed to measure the angle provides a zero drift bias to the phase
isolated through input transformers,
between the voltage and current in a comparison circuitry. A cycle to cycle
which have been designed for low
circuit or between the voltages of two comparison is made, and the output
burden and zero phase error contribu-
isolated circuits. amplifier and its associated filters are
tion. These signals are then applied,
The PFN model measures the voltage through filters, to integrated circuit zero updated every cycle. A high gain
to current phase angle in a 3-phase 3- crossing detectors. operational amplifier output stage
wire or 4-wire circuit. The PAN receives the signal from the output
The output of these detectors is
measures the phase angle between the integrator, and provides a proportional
applied to frequency division and
voltage of two isolated circuits. A DC current or voltage output.
phase comparison digital circuitry. A
common application of a PAN is
measurement of the voltage phase
angle across an open circuit breaker.
Bus tie breakers and generator unit Output Scaling:
breakers require voltage to voltage line OUTPUT VS. PHASE ANGLE
OUTPUT VS. POWER FACTOR
synchronization that only a phase angle

transducer can measure. +1.0 +1.0
+0.5 +0.5
The Power Factor Transducers are 0 0
ideal for monitoring power factor for –0.5 –0.5
FULL SCALE = 60° LAG
correction in energy management –1.0 LEAD –1.0
applications. In addition, they do not
require dedicated current or potential 90 75 60 45 30 15 0 15 30 45 60 75 90 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4
LEADING LAGGING LEAD UNITY LAG
transformers, offering a significant cost
savings to the end user.
For more information, application
assistance on a special project or to
place an order, consult your nearest
Ametek sales office.
8.21
AMETEK
Transducers
MODEL NUMBERS
SINGLE PHASE THREE PHASE VOLT/VOLT

PHASE ANGLE
PFA-1B-60 PFA-1B-90 PFA-1B-180 PFN-1B-60 PFN-1B-90 PAN-1B-180

0 - ± 60° 0 - ±90°
0 TO ± 60° 0 TO ± 90° 0 TO ± 180° (0.5 PF) (0.0 PF) 0 TO ± 180°
NOTES:
1. Model PAN-1B-180 measures the phase angle between two voltages.
2. For Model PAN-1B-180 the output is positive when V43 lags V21.
NOMINAL POTENTIAL INPUT RANGE

OPTIONS
VOLTAGE SELF-POWERED MODEL EXTERNALLY-POWERED MODEL
P1 120 VAC 85-150 VAC 10-150 VAC

P2 240 VAC 170-300 VAC 20-300 VAC
P3 480 VAC 300-550 VAC 30-550 VAC
Potential Burden, Maximum 4 VA, total including

electronics supply circuit 1 VA, total
Potential Overload Withstand 1.5 x nominal rating, continuous

OPTIONS
E1 85-150 VAC 4 VA
E2
E3
} externally
300 - 550 VAC
4 VA
4 VA


(MAXIMUM) AT 65° C
ACCURACY
C1 0.1-1 Amps 1.5 Amps 0.25 VA 10 Amps 20 Amps 50 Amps

C5 0.5-5 Amps 7.5 Amps 0.25 VA 20 Amps 100 Amps 250 Amps
8.22
OUTPUT
OPTIONS
X1 0-±1 mADC 0-10 KΩ ± 11 Volts

X5 0-±5 mADC 0-3 KΩ ± 15 Volts
X10 0-±10 mADC 0-1.5 KΩ ± 15 Volts
X20 0-±20 mADC 0-750 Ω ± 15 Volts
X (0-VDC) DC voltage, ±10 v max. –– ––
FREQUENCY OPTIONS (TABLE NO. 6)

OPTIONS FREQUENCY (NOMINAL)
F50 50 Hz
F60 60 Hz
Specifications:
Accuracy: ±0.2% full scale typical, ±0.5% full scale worst Calibration Adjustment: ± 10%
case at 25° C ±5° C Weight (nominal): 3.0 pounds / 1.4 Kilograms
Operating Temperature Range: -20° to +65°C Surge Withstand: ANSI C37.90.1-1974 (IEEE SWC) BEAMA
Operating Humidity: 0-99%, non-condensing Test No. 219
Output Ripple, Peak: 1% Influences Affecting Accuracy:
Output Current Limiting: 1.5 x maximum for option numbers Temperature: ± 0.5%, Max.
X10, X20, XA, and XB Long Term Stability: ± 0.25%/Yr., max., noncumulative
Response Time (to 99%): 400 mS Size: see outline dimensions, page 8.24
Isolation: 2000V rms, minimum, Input/Output/Power/Case Case Ground Terminal Standard
Zero Adjustment: ± 2%
Model Number:
PFA-1B-60 P1 E1 C1 X1 F60
Series (Table No. 1) (Table No. 6) Frequency
Potential (Table 2) (Table No. 5) Output
Power Supply (Table No. 3) (Table No. 4) Current
8.23
AMETEK
Transducers
Outline Dimensions
PFA Single Phase

3.62"
LINE (91.95 mm)
.25"
L1L2
(6.35 mm) 1.50" 1.06"
(38.1 mm) (26.92 mm)
OUTPUT
– +
12
6
CAL
5
1 0 11
4.75" 3.921"
6 5 4 3 2 1
4
(120.65 mm) (99.59 mm)
9
3
ZERO
8
2
7
1
7 8 10 11 12 13
.664"
(16.88 mm)
FOR OPTION “E” CONNECT
EXTERNAL POWER TO TERMINAL 7 & 8
3.736"
(94.89 mm)
LOAD
GROUND SCREW #8–32
PFN Three Phase/Three of Four Wire

Balanced Load ALL MOUNTING HOLES
LINE .203" (5.15 mm) FOR #10 SCREWS
A B C N
#8.32 TERMINAL SCREW (4.5 mm DIA.)
OUTPUT
– +
5.25"
6 5 4 3 2 1 (133.35 mm)
7 8 10 11 12 13
6.342"
FOR OPTION “E” CONNECT (161.09 mm)
LOAD
PAN Volt/Volt Phase Angle
OUTPUT
– + L1L2
L3L4
6 5 4 3 2 1
7 8 10 11 12 13
FOR OPTION “E” CONNECT

8.24
Frequency Transducers
FCX-1B
FCN-1B
• .01% Accuracy
• .01% Linearity
• Crystal-Based Internal
Reference
• Narrow Frequency
Spans
• Wide Range of Input/
Output Options
• Outstanding
Temperature
Performance
Applications
Stability
• Closed loop process control
element
• Supervisory control and data
acquisition
• Local substation and plant
metering
Ametek Power Instruments FCX and Each unit accepts an AC input signal FCX and FCN Transducers are
FCN Frequency Transducers are that is transformer isolated and filtered available in numerous input ranges,
precision-engineered instruments to eliminate noise or harmonics-based including a very narrow frequency
designed to provide a constant current errors. The signal is then compared to deviation span for maximum resolution.
output into a variable impedance. The a precision frequency generated by a For more information on the frequency
DC output from the device(s) very quartz crystal, and the difference is transducer, application assistance on a
accurately represents the input converted to an analog current output. special project, or to place an order,
frequency deviation from a selected Use of the integral crystal-based consult your nearest Ametek Sales
center frequency of 50 or 60 Hz. frequency standard, in combination Office.
with drift-free digital circuitry, delivers
high accuracy and excellent tempera-
ture performance.
8.25
AMETEK
Transducers
Specifications
APPLICATION GUIDE (TABLE 1) POTENTIAL OPTIONS (TABLE 2)
FREQUENCY SPAN OPTIONS POTENTIAL INPUT

MINIMUM CENTER MAXIMUM P1 85-150 VAC
MODEL FREQUENCY FREQUENCY FREQUENCY P2 170-300 VAC
negative full scale zero DC positive full scale P3 300-550 VAC
FCN-1B
DC output output DC output
one-half full scale FREQUENCY OPTIONS (TABLE 4)
FCX-1B zero DC output full scale DC output
OPTIONS CENTER FREQUENCY
DC output
F50 50 Hz
F60 60 Hz
APPLICATION GUIDE (TABLE 3)*

DEVIATION OPTIONS (TABLE 5)
FCN-1B FCX-1B
OPTION MODELS MODELS LOAD COMPLIANCE OPTION DEVIATION SPAN
D1 ± 1 Hz
X1 0-±1 mA 0-1 mA 0-10 KΩ ± 11 Volts
D2 ± 2 Hz
X2.5 0-±2.5 mA 0-2.5 mA 0-6 KΩ ± 15 Volts
D3 ± 3 Hz
X5 0-±5 mA 0-5 mA 0-3 KΩ ± 15 Volts
D5 ± 5 Hz
X10 0-±10 mA 0-10 mA 0-1.5 KΩ ± 15 Volts
XA — 4-20 mA 0-750 Ω ± 15 Volts Operating Temperature Range:
XB 4-12-20 mA — 0-750 Ω ± 15 Volts
X (0-VDC) DC voltage, ±10 VDC max. — —
-20°C to +65°C
Operating Humidity:
* See general specifications below, for temperatue influence. 0-99%, non-condensing
Output Ripple Peak:
Dimensions <.25% of rated output
Dielectric Test:
2000 V rms minimum
Surge Withstand:
3.62" ALL MOUNTING HOLES ANSI C37.90a 1974 (IEEE)
(91.95 mm) .203" (5.15 mm) FOR #10 SCREWS
.25"
(6.35 mm) 1.06" Beama Test No. 219
1.50" #8.32 TERMINAL SCREW (4.5 mm DIA.)
(38.1 mm) (26.92 mm) Response Time:
(to 99%) <250 ms.
Burden: <2 VA
Zero Adjustment: ±2% span
SPAN
4.75" 3.921"
5.25" Calibrate Adjustment: ±4% span
(133.35 mm)
(120.65 mm) (99.59 mm) Accuracy:
±.01% of center frequency at 25°C
ZERO
Temperature Influence on Accuracy:

<20 ppm/°C
.664" Long-Term Stability:
(16.88 mm) 6.342"
(161.09 mm) <±.008%/year drift, non-cumulative
3.736"
(94.89 mm) Weight:
3.0 lb., (1.4 kilograms)
1 2 3 4 5 6
Case Ground Terminal: standard
– +
OUTPUT INPUT
Model Number:
FCN-1B P1 X1 F60 D5
Series (Table 1)
Potential (Table 2) Deviation Span (Table 5)
Power Supply (Table 3) Center Frequency (Table 4)
Specifications subject to change without notice.
8.26
Power Monitors* For
Watthour Measurement
Series PM-1000
• Low Cost, Direct Electrical

Energy Monitoring
• Provides Pulse Output
Proportional to Watthours
• Ideally Suited to Sub
Metering, Load Shedding,
and Energy Management
Systems
• Single and Three Phase
120, 208, 240, 277, 480 and
575 Volts AC Models
• Complete Kits Include
Current Transformer(s)
• Easily Installed and
Maintenance Free
• Five Current Ranges
Available from 0-50 to
0-1000 Amps
• Optional Non-Volatile
Integral Electronic Display
of Kilowatthours
*U.S. Patent No. 4437,059
Ametek power monitors accurately Ametek power monitors are designed The monitors install quickly and easily.
measure the line voltage, current and for use with line voltages ranging from Split-core current transformers,
power factor, then internally compute 95 to 630 Vac, for single-phase (two designed for use on insulated
the consumed energy and deliver a wire or split leg) or three-phase (three- conductors only, reduce the power
pulse output proportional to the kwh wire or four-wire) service. Current interruption duration during installation.
used. transformers are rated at 50A, 100A, The output of the transformer is a low
Ametek power monitors are directly 200A, 500A and 1000A to satisfy the level AC voltage, allowing installation on
compatible with most energy control widest range of uses. If your needs fall existing systems. Installation should be
equipment: computers, programmable outside these ranges, Ametek can consistent with the most recent edition
controllers, electronic counters and custom fit for virtually any service. of the National Electric Code.
microprocessor-based energy manage- Ametek power monitors are furnished as
ment systems. An optional, direct- complete kits with a sealed electronics
reading digital display with non-volatile package, clearly marked barrier-type
memory shows cumulative kwh. terminals, a safety cover and the
necessary current transformers. A six-
digit, non-volatile*, optional display is * Operates from 2 "N" Type batteries. Alkaline cells are
available for local readout in kwh. recommended. Average battery life is four years.
8.27
AMETEK
Transducers
Model Selection Charts Application Hints
Follow these simple steps to select the 1. Current inputs should be selected for
proper power monitor for your needs. the lowest possible range to assure
the highest possible accuracy, i.e., a
circuit with a load that never exceeds
Code Service Step 1 the 50 am range under normal
10 Single Phase 2-wire (120 or 240 Vac) conditions should not be monitored
15 Three Phase 3-wire (balanced load only, 208 or 480 Vac) with a higher range current trans-
22 Single Phase 3-wire (120 or 240 Vac) former.
20 Three Phase 3-wire (208, 480 or 575 Vac) 2. The output mechanism is a solid-
30 Three Phase 4-wire (120 or 277 Vac) state swich that passes an electrical
pulse, either AC or DC, with rates as
specified in step 4. Output options
Code Line Current Step 2 as shown below provide interface
with all common computing and
01 50 Amp (Ring Core CT)
controlling devices.
02 100 Amp PROGRAMMABLE
03 200 Amp POWER MONITOR LOGIC CONTROLLER
+5 TO 24VDC NOMINAL
04 500 Amp OPTICAL
COUPLER
+
05 1000 Amp POWER
COMUTATION
PULSE
ACCUMULATOR
INPUT
CIRCUITS
06 50 Amp (Split Core CT) –
DC OUTPUT CAPABILITY (“D” OPTION)
Code Line Voltage (Vac) Step 3 (PLC CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
REMOTE 120 VAC

POWER MONITOR COUNTER READOUT
120 95-150 Vac 120 VAC
TRIAC
208 164-250 Vac POWER
+
240 195-285 Vac COMUTATION

CIRCUITS –
1 2 3 4 5
277 195-305 Vac

480 340-530 Vac
AC OUTPUT CAPABILITY (“T” OPTION)
575 525-630 Vac (REMOTE COUNTER READOUT CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
3. A non-volatile, 6-digit LCD display is

Code Output Pulse Rating per KWH Step 4 available as an option. This integral,
Amp rating of current transfores tamper-resistant display shows
Service 0-50 0-100 0-200 0-500 0-1000 cumulative kwh for local readout.
KO† Single Phase 4000 2000 1000 400 200

2-wire (10) Pulse Rate: See step 4
KO† Three Phase 1000 500 250 100 50
3-wire (15) Pulse Width: PM 1000: 30 to 70 msec
(balanced load) PM 2000, 2200, 3000: 50 to 70 msec
K1‡ All services 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 DC Output:

K2‡ All services 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 voltage: +5 to +30 Vdc (Customer specified)
current: 200 mA maximum
† standard ‡ optional off-stage leakage current: <500 µ A @ 24 vdc
Code Output Drive Step 5 AC Output:

voltage: 10 to 140 Vac (Customer supplied)
D 5 to 30 Vdc, 200 mA (Standard) current: 50 mA maximum
T to 140 Vac, 50 mA (TRIAC)
Code Digital Display Step 6

M Non-resettable 6-digital display counter (requires K1 option)
R Resettable 6-digital display counter (requires K1 option)
O No display (Standard)
EXAMPLE:
PM - 30 02 - 120 - K1 - D - O
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6
8.28
Power Monitor
Connections
Power Distribution Configurations
1 ø 3W 3 ø 3W L–L
3 ø 4W
B L–N
L1 L–N L–L L–L
208, 480V
120
208 277V
208 A B 480V
N 120
277V 480V N
L2 C A C
Connections
PM-10XX Single Phase Two-Wire PM-15XX Three Phase Three-Wire PM-20XX Three Phase Three-Wire
LINE A LINE
A B C
B
NEUTRAL C
LINE LOAD
BLACK
LINE LOAD
BLACK
BLACK
RED
RED
RED
CURRENT VOLTAGE CURRENT VOLTAGE

415
110 220
BLK RED N 120 240 BLK RED N 206 480 A B C
PHASE
VOLTAGE INPUTS
ROCHESTER INSTRUMENT ROCHESTER INSTRUMENT

ROCHESTER INSTRUMENT ROCHESTER, NY TORONTO, CAN
ROCHESTER, NY TORONTO, CAN ROCHESTER, NY TORONTO, CAN
CRAYFORD, U.K.
OUTPUT
CRAYFORD, U.K. CRAYFORD, U.K.
+ –
PM-1000 PM-1500 PM-2000
CURRENT INPUTS
WARRANTY VOID IF COVER REMOVED WARRANTY VOID IF COVER REMOVED
READ INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE INSTALLING READ INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE INSTALLING A B
BLK RED BLK RED
+ – + –
OUTPUT OUTPUT
RED
BLACK
RED
PM-22XX Single Phase PM-30XX Three Phase

BLACK
Split-LegThree-Wire LINE Four-Wire LINE
L1 N L2
A B C N
LOAD
L1 L2 N
PHASE A B CN
PHASE
VOLTAGE INPUTS
VOLTAGE INPUTS
ROCHESTER INSTRUMENT
ROCHESTER, NY TORONTO, CAN ROCHESTER INSTRUMENT
CRAYFORD, U.K.
OUTPUT
ROCHESTER, NY TORONTO, CAN

+ –
CRAYFORD, U.K.
OUTPUT
PM-2200
+ –
CURRENT INPUTS PM-3000

L1 L2
BLK RED BLK RED
CURRENT INPUTS
A B
BLK RED BLK RED BLK RED
C Notes:
a. Polarity sensitive phasing dots must
RED
RED
be aligned properly.
BLACK b. All terminal block screws are #6.
BLACK
RED
c. Do not ground secondary side of
RED BLACK supplied CT's
RED
BLACK
BLACK
LOAD LOAD
8.29
AMETEK
Transducers
Specifications Dimensions:
Accuracy*:
a. 0.5% of range + 1.5% of reading
maximum error
b. 0.2% of range + 0.5% of reading
typical error REMOVABLE
HALF OF
CORE TIE WRAP
*Includes CT accuracy, temperature and
humidity at reference condition, linearity,
current inputs within specified range, MARKINGS
power factor at unity with 120/240 VAC 1045-722 INDICATE START
model on 240 volt range and 208/480 A
VAC model on 480 volt range. Operation A MARKINGS
on 120 VAC or 208 VAC may add 0.5% START INDICATE START
inaccuracy (maximum). 36"
-82 1 (914.4 mm)
Operating Temperature Range: 0°F to 43
N A-1 0
140°F, Display 32˚F to 122˚F 36"
RED
BLACK RED (914.4 mm)
Operating Humidity Range: 0 to 95%,
50
P/
A BLACK
non-condensing RI S
Temperature Effect on Accuracy:

.04%/°F over the temperature range, INTERNAL DIMENSION 'A' 50 AMP — 0.8" (20.3 mm)
maximum .02%/°F over the temperature 100 AMP — 0.8" (20.3 mm)
range, typical 200AMP — 1.1" (27.9 mm)
500AMP — 1.25" (31.8 mm)
Power Consumption: 0.5 to 1.0 watt 1000AMP — 2.25" (57.2 mm)
Power Factor Effects on Accuracy:
Power factor changes between unity INTERNAL DIAMETER — 0.75" (19.1 mm) approx.
and ±0.8 less than ±1.0% OUTSIDE DIAMETER — 1.825" (46.4 mm) approx.
Isolation: 1500 VAC/2500 VDC

between any input and the output (with Larger Currents Available
CT(s) attached) Split Core Transformer Ring Core Transformer
(50 Amps)
Input Ranges (50 or 60 Hz):
AC Voltage (Nominal) Operating Range
110/120 VAC 95-150 Volts
220/240 VAC 195-285 Volts
208 VAC 164-250 Volts
277 VAC 195-305 Volts
480 VAC 340-530 Volts
575 VAC 525-630 Volts
AC Current Operating Range
0-50 Amps 0-60 Amps
0-200 Amps 0-240 Amps
0-500 Amps 0-600 Amps
0-1000 Amps 0-1200 Amps
Case Dimensions:
4.6" wide x 4.8" deep x 4.6" high
(116.8 mm x 121.9 mm x 116.8 mm)
* Accuracy stated at reference temperature and humidity,

current inputs within CT nominal range, power factor at one.
8.30
Utility Power Transducers
Ametek Power Instruments’ utility Watt & VAR Transducers pulse output proportional to totalized
power transducers meet the IEEE The Watt Transducers convert real AC power or VARs, with an accuracy of
surge withstand and isolation levels to power to a proportional DC output. .15% of reading. The outputs are
provide high level reliability in substa- Similarly, the VAR Transducers convert unidirectional for positive flow and
tion, switchgear and plant applications. reactive AC power (VARs) to a propor- housed in one enclosure. The output
The 0-1mA output models are ideal tional DC output with an accuracy of pulse rate is equal to one pulse per
input for meters, RTU’s, SCADA and .15% of reading. Both designs incorpo- Watthour or VARhour. Register
other substation devices as well as rate totally electronic computational modules are offered providing a direct
satisfying switchgear requirements. The circuits for the Watt and VAR calcula- digital readout of the accumulated
4-20mA output models compliment tions. The VAR Transducer includes an power of VARs.
this by offering inputs to switchgear integral phase shifter, thus eliminating Metering Accuracy Watt Transducers
and plant control panels. any need for expensive external phase These units convert real AC power to a
Universal terminations are provided to shifting transformers. proportional DC output with an
support direct replacement using your Combined Watt/VAR Transducers accuracy of .1% of reading.
existing wiring. Standard nominal The Watt/VAR Transducer combines Frequency Transducers
inputs of 120 VAC and 5 Amps AC both a Watt Transducer and a VAR The deviation to a center frequency of
provide direct connection to existing Transducer in one enclosure. The the line being monitored will be
PT’s and CT’s. outputs are two separate DC signals converted to a low level DC signal. The
Current and Voltage/Transducers proportional to Watt and VAR inputs on standard deviation is ±5 Hertz from a
Each converts sinusoidal AC voltage or one circuit with an accuracy of .15% of center frequency with optional 1 and 2
current inputs into a proportional DC reading. Hertz deviation.
output. These units respond to the Watt/Watthour and VAR/VARhour Power Factor and Phase Angle
average value, but are calibrated to Transducers Transducers
have the output represent the RMS of a These transducers offer a combined Two separate models are offered for
pure sine wave. instantaneous output proportional to conversion of a single phase power
either Watts or VARs, combined with a factor or line phase angle into a low
level DC signal.
8.31
AMETEK
Transducers
Specifications
CURRENT VOLTAGE
MODEL INPUT INPUT OUTPUT FULL SCALE
DESCRIPTION NUMBER RANGE RANGE RANGE CALIBRATION POWER ACCURACY
Current Models
1 phase current UCX1F6 0-5A N/A 0-1mA 5A Self-powered 0.20% R.O.
3 phase current UCX3F6 0-5A N/A 0-1mA 5A Self-powered 0.20% R.O.
1 phase current UCXAF6 0-5A N/A 4-20mA 5A Separate 120VAC 0.20% R.O.
Voltage Models
1 phase voltage UVX1F6 N/A 0-150V 0-1mA 150V Self-powered 0.20% R.O.
3 phase voltage UVX3F6 N/A 0-150V 0-1mA 150V Self-powered 0.20% R.O.
1 phase voltage UVXAF6 N/A 0-150V 4-20mA 150V Separate 120VAC 0.20% R.O.
1 phase voltage-compressed UVXCF6 N/A Note 2 0-1mA 150V Self-powered 0.20% R.O.
Watt Models
3 phase 3 wire balanced 1-1/2 element WS33B 0-5A 85-150V ±1mA ±1000 Watts Self-powered .15% RDG
3 phase 3 wire balanced 1-1/2 element WSA3B 0-5A 85-150V 4-20mA 1000 Watts Self-powered .15% RDG
3 phase 3 wire 2 element WS33U 0-5A 85-150V ±1mA ±1000 Watts Self-powered .15% RDG
3 phase 3 wire 2 element WSA3U 0-5A 85-150V 4-20mA 1000 Watts Self-powered .15% RDG
3 phase 4 wire balanced 2-1/2 element WS34B 0-5A 85-150V ±1mA ±1500 Watts Self-powered .15% RDG
3 phase 4 wire balanced 2-1/2 element WSA4B 0-5A 85-150V 4-20mA 1500 Watts Self-powered .15% RDG
3 phase 4 wire 3 element WS34U 0-5A 85-150V ±1mA ±1500 Watts Self-powered .15% RDG
3 phase 4 wire 3 element WSA4U 0-5A 85-150V 4-20mA 1500 Watts Self-powered .15% RDG
VAR Models
3 phase 3 wire balanced 1-1/2 element VS33B 0-5A 85-150V ±1mA ±1000 VARs Self-powered .15% RDG
3 phase 3 wire balanced 1-1/2 element WSA3B 0-5A 85-150V 4-20mA 1000 VARs Self-powered .15% RDG
3 phase 3 wire 2 element VS33U 0-5A 85-150V ±1mA ±1000 VARs Self-powered .15% RDG
3 phase 3 wire 2 element VSA3U 0-5A 85-150V 4-20mA 1000 VARs Self-powered .15% RDG
3 phase 4 wire balanced 2-1/2 element VS34B 0-5A 85-150V ±1mA ±1500 VARs Self-powered .15% RDG
3 phase 4 wire balanced 2-1/2 element VSA4B 0-5A 85-150V 4-20mA 1500 VARs Self-powered .15% RDG
3 phase 4 wire 3 element VS34U 0-5A 85-150V ±1mA ±1500 VARs Self-powered .15% RDG
3 phase 4 wire 3 element VSA4U 0-5A 85-150V 4-20mA 1500 VARs Self-powered .15% RDG
Watt/VAR Combined Models

3 phase 3 wire balanced 1-1/2 element WVS33B 0-5A 90-150V ±1mA ±1000 Watt/VARs Self-powered .15% RDG
3 phase 3 wire balanced 1-1/2 element WVSA3B 0-5A 90-150V 4-20mA 1000 Watt/VARs Self-powered .15% RDG
3 phase 3 wire 2 element WVS33U 0-5A 90-150V ±1mA ±1000 Watt/VARs Self-powered .15% RDG
3 phase 3 wire 2 element WVSA3U 0-5A 90-150V 4-20mA 1000 Watt/VARs Self-powered .15% RDG
3 phase 4 wire balanced 2-1/2 element WVS34B 0-5A 90-150V ±1mA ±1500 Watt/VARs Self-powered .15% RDG
3 phase 4 wire balanced 2-1/2 element WVSA4B 0-5A 90-150V 4-20mA 1500 Watt/VARs Self-powered .15% RDG
3 phase 4 wire 3 element WVS34U 0-5A 90-150V ±1mA ±1500 Watt/VARs Self-powered .15% RDG
3 phase 4 wire 3 element WVSA4U 0-5A 90-150V 4-20mA 1500 Watt/VARs Self-powered .15% RDG
Watt/Watthour Models
3 phase 3 wire balanced 1-1/2 element WHR33B 0-5A 85-150V 0-1mA/pulse 1000 Watt/WH Self-powered .15% RDG
3 phase 3 wire 2 element WHR33U 0-5A 85-150V 0-1mA/pulse 1000 Watt/WH Self-powered .15% RDG
3 phase 4 wire balanced 2-1/2 element WHR34B 0-5A 85-150V 0-1mA/pulse 1500 Watt/WH Self-powered .15% RDG
3 phase 4 wire 3 element WHR34U 0-5A 85-150V 0-1mA/pulse 1500 Watt/WH Self-powered .15% RDG
VAR/VARhour Models
3 phase 3 wire balanced 1-1/2 element VHR33B 0-5A 85-150V 0-1mA/pulse 1000 VARs/VH Self-powered .15% RDG
3 phase 3 wire 2 element VHR33U 0-5A 85-150V 0-1mA/pulse 1000 VARs/VH Self-powered .15% RDG
3 phase 4 wire balanced 2-1/2 element VHR34B 0-5A 85-150V 0-1mA/pulse 1500 VARs/VH Self-powered .15% RDG
3 phase 4 wire 3 element VHR34U 0-5A 85-150V 0-1mA/pulse 1500 VARs/VH Self-powered .15% RDG
8.32
Current Voltage
Model Input Input Output FullScale
Description Number Range Range Range Calibration Power Accuracy
Register Modules
Used With Watthour &
VARhour Models
6 digit resettable RM10R1 N/A N/A — 1 Count/WH or VH Separate 120VAC —
8 digit non-resettable RM10R3 N/A N/A — 1 Count/WH or VH Separate 120VAC —
Frequency Models
1 phase bipolar F1BD5 N/A 85-150V ±1mA 60Hz ±5Hz Self-powered .01%CF
1 phase unipolar F1UD5 N/A 85-150V 0-1mA 60Hz ±5Hz Self-powered .01%CF
Phase Angle/
Power Factor Models
1 phase 180 power factor PF180 N/A 85-150V ±1mA ±180° Self-powered .2%FS
Volt/volt phase angle 180 PA180 N/A 85-150V ±1mA ±180° Self-powered .2%FS
Common Specifications
Accuracy: as stated Notes:
1. External power option available on all
Drift: .003% per C°
models except on the following:
Operating Temperature: -20°C to UCX1F6, UCX3F6, UVX1F6, UVX3F6.
+65°C 2. UVXCF6 has 2 calibration ranges,
Response Time: <400mSec. 85-115V and 115-140V with
adjustable 10-50V span.
Humidity: 0-99% non-condensing 3. 1 and 2 Hertz deviation available in
Output Compliance: frequency models.
11 Volts for 1mA (10K ohms) 4. 60 and 90 degree models available
15 Volts for 20mA (750 ohms) on power factor models.
Current Input Burden: 5. All models calibrated for 60Hz. 50Hz
is available as an optional calibration.
Current models: .5VA
6. Output for power factor models is
Power models: .25VA
linear to the cosine of the phase
Current Input Overload (all models): angle.
Continuous: 20A 7. Separate power 85-150VAC for
1 sec/hr: 250A metering accuracy. 90-150VAC for
Current Overrange With Accuracy combined Watt/Var.
(all models): 7.5 Amps 8. Derate voltage input burden to 4VA
for power input for externally
Voltage Input Burden: powered models and for phase A
Voltage models: 2VA input for self-powered models.
Power models: .1VA 9. Pulse rate for Watt/Watthour and
Standards: VAR/VARhour models are 1 pulse
UCX1F6, UVX1F6: ANSI/IEE C37.90. 1-1987 per Watthour.
ANSI/IEEE 460-1988 10. Power units available in single
All other models: phase.
ANSI C37.90a-1974/IEEE 472 BEAMA 219
8.33
AMETEK
Transducers
Dimensions: Connections
Current & Voltage - Single Phase
Current & Voltage — Single Phase WS33U 2 element Watt
UCX1F6 1 phase current (1mA) WSA3U 2 element Watt
UCXAF6* 1 phase current (20mA) VS33U 2 element VAR
UVX1F6 1 phase voltage (1mA) VSA3U 2 element VAR LOAD
UVXAF6* 1 phase voltage (20mA) A B C
4.20"
4.35"
(106.68 mm)
(110.49 mm) OUTPUT
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6
(-) (+)
OUTPUT AC INPUT
7 8 9 10 11 12
*Utilizes 6 position terminal block.
5 & 6 used for connection to external
power.
UCXAF6
UVXAF6 5.08" (129.18 mm)
External power option
A B C
.48" 3.04" Current & Voltage —Three Phase connections 9 & 12
(77.21 mm) LINE
(12.19 mm)
UCX3F6 3 phase current
UVX3F6 3 phase voltage
2.00" OUTPUT A OUTPUT B OUTPUT C
WS34B 2 1/2 element Watt
(50.8 mm)
1.50"
+ - + - + - WSA4B 2 1/2 element Watt
(38.1mm)
1 2 3 4 5 6
VS34B 2 1/2 element VAR
VSA4B 2 1/2 element VAR
.25" LOAD
3.50" (6.35 mm) SECTION A SECTION B SECTION C
.25"
(6.35 mm) (88.9 mm) A B C NEUTRAL
4.00"
(101.6 mm) 7 8 10 12 OUTPUT
9 11
Current & Voltage - Three Phase INPUT A INPUT B INPUT C

1 2 3 4 5 6 6A
7 8 9 10 11 12 12A
Watt & Var

6.342"
(161.09 mm) WS33B 1 1/2 element Watt
WSA3B 1 1/2 element Watt External power option A B C NEUTRAL
LINE
VS33B 1 1/2 element VAR connections 6A & 12A
VSA3B 1 1/2 element VAR LOAD
A B C
OUTPUT
WS34U 3 element Watt
WSA4U 3 element Watt
VS34U 3 element VAR
1 2 3 4 5 6 VSA4U 3 element VAR
5.25" LOAD
A B C NEUTRAL
(133.35 mm)
4.75" .25" 7 8 9 10 11 12 OUTPUT

(120.65 mm) (6.35 mm)
3.62"
1 2 3 4 5 6 (91.95 mm) 1 2 3 4 5 6 6A
3.736" 1.50"
(94.89 mm) CAL A CAL B CAL C (38.1 mm)
7 8 9 1 0 11 12
1.06"
External power option A B C
(26.92 mm) connections 9 & 12 7 8 9 10 11 12 12A
LINE
(Also available in single
3.921"
(99.59 mm) phase)
.664"
(16.88 mm)
A B C NEUTRAL
External power option
LINE
connections 6A & 12A
8.34
WVS33B 1 1/2 element Watt/VAR WVS34U 3 element Watt/VAR WHR34B 2 1/2 element Watt/Watthour
WVSA3B 1 1/2 element Watt/VAR WVSA4U 3 element Watt/VAR
LOAD LOAD 22 WATT (-) 1
DC Output A B C A B C D or
(+) VAR
21 REV VAR (+) 2
(+) WATT 20 3
(-) COMM 19 4
DC Output
(+) VAR 18 FWD 5
1 2 2A 3 4 5 6
(+) WATT 17 6
(-) COMM 16 7
1 2 2A 3 4 5 6 6A 15 8
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 13 12 11 10 9
LINE LOAD
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 12A A A
B B
External power option A B C

C C
LINE
connections 9 & 12 N N
(Also available in single phase)
External power option connections 15 & 16
External power option A B C D
connections 6A & 12A LINE
WVS33U 2 element Watt/VAR

WVSA3U 2 element Watt/VAR LOAD
A B C WHR34U 3 element Watt/Watthour
WHR33B 1 1/2 element Watt/Watthour
DC Output
22 WATT (-) 1
(+) VAR REV or
(+) WATT 22 WATT (-) 1 21 VAR (+) 2
(-) COMM or
20 3
21 REV VAR (+) 2
20 3 19 4
1 2 2A 3 4 5 6
18 FWD 5
19 4
18 FWD 5 17 6
16 7
17 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 8
16 7
14 13 12 11 10 9
15 8
14 13 12 11 10 9
LINE LOAD
A A
LINE LOAD B B
A B C A A
External power option connec- LINE C C
tions 9 & 12 B B
N N
C
C
WVS34B 2 1/2 element Watt/VAR

WVSA4B 2 1/2 element Watt/VAR
WHR33U 2 element Watt/Watthour Frequency
LOAD
A B C D
FIBD5
DC Output 22 WATT (-) 1 FIUD5 LINE
REV or
(+) VAR
21 2 L1 L 2
VAR (+)
(+) WATT
(-) COMM 20 3 OUTPUT
19 4 – +
1 2 2A 3 4 5 6 6A
18 FWD 5
17 6
16 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 12A 15 8
14 13 12 11 10 9 1 2 3 4 5 6
LINE LOAD
A A
B B
C C
External power option A B C D
NO EXTERNAL POWER
connections 6A & 12A LINE LOAD
8.35
AMETEK
Transducers
Calibration Guide & Ordering Guide
This simple procedure will help you identify the calibration within the standard adjustment range.
needed to support any Watt, VAR, Watt/VAR combined Standard adjustment = 10%
application.
From the example above standard adjustment is 480KW ±
Step 1: Determine the proper model and circuit and the 10% = 432KW to 528KW primary (or 900 to 1100 secondary)
associated standard calibration (Watts or VARs):
If the calibration range is within this limit, the following 2
separate choices apply; if the calibration range is outside this
Standard limit, proceed directly to step 4.
# of Calibration Calibration 1. Order the standard unit and fine tune the calibration at use
Circuit Elements Full Scale Range site.
2. Order the base unit with the special calibration option code
1 phase 1 500 250-1000
“Z” (please specify the exact calibration and PT & CT
3 phase/3 wire balanced 1-1/2 1000 500-2000 ratios). The unit will be calibrated to the exact calibration
3 phase/3 wire unbalanced 2 1000 500-2000 range specified.
3 phase/4 wire balanced 2-1/2 1500 750-3000
Step 4: Determine if the actual primary calibration is
3 phase/4 wire unbalanced 3 1500 750-3000 within the allowable extended range.
There are extended ranges allowable per the table in step 1. If
The above standard calibration is the PT/CT secondary side the exact calibration is within these extended limits, order the
calibration range or what is measured directly at the unit’s base unit with the special calibration option code “Z” (please
terminals. When the unit senses the standard full scales specify the exact calibration and PT & CT ratios).
Watts or VARs the resulting output will be full scale. The If the calibration is outside these limits, please consult the
above extended range is the allowable extension to the factory for more details and options.
standard range for special calibration.
If the calibration needs to be verified proceed to the next step.
Ordering Guide
Step 2: Determine primary side calibration with following 1. Choose proper base model for application.
equation: 2. Determine external or internal power.
Primary calibration = std calibration x PT ratio x CT ratio 3. Determine calibration range.
Example: 3 phase 3 wire unbalanced Watt unit (2 element) 4. Verify 60Hz or 50Hz operation.
PT ratio primary:secondary = 1440:120 (or 12) Example: Base model: (from list)
CT ratio primary:secondary = 200:5 (or 40) External power (if required): -E
Inserting these numbers into the equation: Special calibration (if required): -Z
Primary calibration = 1000 x 12 x 40 50 Hz operation (if required): -5
Primary calibration = 480,000 (480KW) For a 3 phase 3 wire unbalanced Watt transducer with
When the unit senses 480KW primary (1000 Watt secondary) • 5A Current Input
the output will be at full scale.
• 150 V Voltage Input
If this equals the required primary calibration range, stop here
and order the appropriate unit. • 1000 Watt Calibration
If the primary calibration range differs from the standard • ±1mA Output
equation, proceed to the next step. • External Power
Step 3: Determine if the actual primary calibration is
Model number is WS33U-E
8.36
Current Transducer
with 4-20 mAdc
Clamping Circuit
UCXAF6CLP
• 1 Phase Current
• 21.1 mAdc Maximum
Output
• 0.25% FS Accuracy
• ISO 9000
Applications
• Eliminate inrush current
to your Distributed
Control System (DCS)
Ametek introduces a new current Like all Ametek Power Instruments two easily-accessible screws without
limiting 4-20 mAdc Current transducers, these clipping CT units dismounting the enclosure from the
Transducer that clamps the output to incorporate state-of-the art electrical panel.
21.1 mAdc with current overload. This and mechanical design. Only the For more information on current
current limiting feature is ideal for all highest quality components, latest transducers, application assistance on
Distributed Control System (DCS) production techniques and most a special project, or simply to place an
applications where inrush current can advanced test equipment and proce- order, consult your nearest Ametek
cause the DCS to misinterpret the dures are used in their manufacture. All Sales Office.
signal resulting in equipment failure or models are designed to meet the ANSI
erroneous system operation. SWC (surge withstand capability) test
and BEAMA Test No. 219, to assure
reliable performance in the field.
Ametek power transducers meet the
IEEE surge withstand and isolation The Clipping CT transducer is housed
levels to provide high level reliability in in rugged drawn-steel enclosures with
substation, switchgear and plant welded-on mounting plates. The entire
application. circuitry may be pulled by removing
8.37
AMETEK
Transducers
Specifications Dimensions and Wiring UCXAF6CLP CURRENT TRANSDUCER
EXTERNAL POWER
Current Input Range: 0-5A
4 - 20 mA 0- 5A 85- 150 VAC
Output Range: 4-20 mAdc OUTPUT INPUT EXT PWR
- +
Maximum Output: 21.1 mAdc
Full Scale Calibration: 5A 1 2 3 4 5 6
Power: Seperate 120 VAC

Accuracy: 0.25% FS
Operating Temperature:
-20˚C to 65˚C 3.50" .25"
(88.9 mm) (6.35mm)
Humidity: 0-99% non-condensing
Output Ripple: <1% peak all models
Response Time: <400 msec, 0-99%
Standard: UCXAF6CLP – ANSI/IEEE
C37.90.a-1989
1.50"
1 - 2 + 3 4 5 6
Warmup: Full accuracy in 15 minutes OUTPUT INPUT EXT PWR (50.8mm) 2.00"
4-20mA 0-5A 85-150VAC
Frequency: 60Hz1 ZERO CAL (91.95mm)

UCXAF6CLP
ROCHESTER AC CURRENT
Stability: .25%/year, nonaccumulative INSTRUMENT
SYSTEMS, INC.
TRANSDUCER
CALIBRATION: 5A
Drift: 0.003% per ˚C 3.04"

.48"
Accuracy: <0.25% FULLSCALE (12.19mm) (77.21mm) .25"
(6.35mm)
Output Compliance: 15 Volts for 4.00"
20mA (750Ω) (101.6mm)
Current Input Burden: .5A ALL MOUNTING HOLES
.203" (5.15mm)
Current Input Overload: FOR #10 SCREWS (TYP 4 PL)
Continuous – 20A
1 sec/hr – 250A
Current Overrange with Accuracy: #8-32 TERMINAL SCREW (4.5mm DIA.)
5.05A
1
All models are calibrated for 60Hz.
50Hz is available as an optional calibration
(-z option).
CLAMPING CURRENT TRANSDUCER

Model UCXAF6CLP
5.08"
Specify model number UCXAF6CLP. (129.18mm)
AMETEK
POWER
INSTRUMENTS
MADE IN U.S.A.
8.38
UL Recognized Power
Transducer
ULtra™ Series
• Voltage, Current, Watt,

and Var Transducers
• US and Canadian
UL Recognized
• 0.2% of Reading Accuracy
• 4-20 mAdc or 0-1 mAdc
Output Available
• Small Can Sizes
UL Recognized
• 50 Hz or 60 Hz USA and Canada
• 2500 VRMS Isolation
C
R R
• Easy Model Number E149133 E149133
System
The ULtra™ Series of AC power Like all Ametek Power Instruments The entire circuitry may be pulled by
transducer addresses all your process transducers, the ULtra Series units removing two easily-accessible screws
control and industrial requirements incorporate state-of-the art electrical without dismounting the enclosure
where AC measurements are required. and mechanical design. Only the from the panel.
The new series is available in Current, highest quality components, latest For more information on Ametek
Voltage, Watt and VAR, in either 50 or production techniques and most transducers, assistance on special
60 Hz. The current transducer is advanced test equipment and proce- applications, or simply to place an
available in a standard 4-20 mAdc or dures are used in their manufacture. All order, consult your nearest Ametek
0-1 mAdc output configuration. They models are designed to meet the ANSI Sales Office.
meet ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 - 1989 SWC (surge withstand capability) test
surge withstand test. They are available and BEAMA Test No. 219, to assure
at 5 Amp and 120 Volts; 10 Amp and reliable performance in the field.
240 Volts options available on the ULtra Series power transducers are
Current and Voltage transducer housed in rugged drawn-steel enclo-
respectively. sures with welded-on mounting plates.
8.39
AMETEK
Transducers
ULtra Series Specifications
AC CURRENT/Voltage Transducer
Current Input: Standard Calibration Adjustments:
Nominal 5A 10A 0-1 mAdc Output
Calibrating Range 0-5A 0-10A Gain ±10% of Reading (minimum)
Range with Linearity 0-7.5A 0-15A 4-20 mAdc Output (Current/Voltage)
Overload Continuous 15A 20A Gain ±20% of Reading (minimum)
Overload 1 sec/hour 250A 250A 4-20 mAdc Output
Burden per Element 0.25 VA 0.35 VA Zero ±5% of Zero Point (minimum)
at 5A at 10A
Frequency: 58Hz - 62Hz
Voltage Input:
Nominal 120V 240V Stability (per year):
Calibrating Range 0-150V 0-300V ±0.25% RO Non-Accumulative
Overload Continuous 180V 300V
Burden per Element 1.2 VA 1.2 VA Operating Humidity:
at 120V at 240V 0-95% Non-Condensing
External Power (4-20 mAdc Output): Isolation:

Input Range 85-150 Vac Dielectric Withstand 2500 VRMS (60Hz)
Frequency Range 50-500 Hz 0-1 mAdc Output
Burden per Element 2.5 VA (max.) Complete (Input/Output/Case)
4-20 mAdc Output
Rated Output (RO): Complete (Input/Output/Power/Case)
0-1 mAdc Output
1 mAdc for Standard Calibration Surge Withstand:
4-20 mAdc Output ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1-1989
20 mAdc for Standard Calibration
Maximum Net Weight:
Accuracy: ±0.2% of RO One Element 1lb., 1oz. (0.48kg)
Three Element 2lbs., 9oz. (1.16kg)
±0.0075%/˚C (typical) - Current Approximate Dimesions:
±0.015%/˚C (typical) - Voltage (excluding mounting plate)
One Element
Operating Temperature Range: 3.1"W x 2.0"D x 4.1"H
0-1 mAdc Output -20˚C to +60˚C (79mm x 51mm x 104mm)
4-20 mAdc Output -20˚C to +50˚C Style III Case
Three Element
Compliance Voltage: 4.4"W x 3.8"D x 4.7"H
0-1 mAdc Output 10 Vdc (112mm x 97mm x 119mm)
4-20 mAdc Output 15 Vdc Style II Case
Load:
0-1 mAdc Output
Any load from 0-10,000Ω at 1 mAdc
4-20 mAdc Output
Any load from 0-750Ω at 20 mAdc
Output Ripple Peak: <0.05% RO
Response Time:
0-1 mAdc <400ms to 99%
4-20 mAdc <500ms to 99%
8.40
XLG Model Number: ULt __________ __________ __________ __________ – __________
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Transducer Type
A = Current
V = Voltage
Elements
10 = One Element
30 = Three Element
Power
S = Self-Powered
E = External Power (120 Vac)
Output
1 = 0-1 mAdc Output
4 = 4-20 mAdc Output (Unidirectional)
Input
A = 5 Amps 1 = 120 Volts
D = 10 Amps 3 = 240 Volts
For additional ordering information, please consult the factory at 1-800-274-5368
Wiring Diagrams
AC Voltage Transducer with 0-1 mAdc Outputs AC Voltage Transducer with 4-20 mAdc Outputs
One Element One Element 120 VAC
EXT. POWER
DC INPUT INPUT
OUTPUT DC
- +
-
OUTPUT
+
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
+
Three Element Adjust Three Element
AO BO CO
DC DC DC AO BO CO
OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT DC DC DC
- + - + - + OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT
- + - + - +
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 6A
120 VAC.
EXT. POWER
7 8 9 10 11 12 7 8 9 10 11 12 12A
AO BO CO AO BO CO
INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT
E Models: Shown
S Models: External auxiliary power not required.
Bottom terminal strip (7-12) omitted on S-model 1-element units
8.41
AMETEK
Transducers
ULtra Series Specifications Load:
AC Watt or VAR Transducer 0-1 mAdc Output
Current Input: 4-20 mAdc Output
Nominal 5A Any load from 0-750Ω at 20 mAdc
Range* 0-10A
Overload Continuous 15A Output Ripple Peak: <0.05% RO
Overload 1 sec/hour 250A
Burden per Element 0.3 VA (max.) at 5A Response Time:
0-1 mAdc <400ms to 99%
Voltage Input: 4-20 mAdc <500ms to 99%
Nominal 120V
Range* 0-150V Power Factor: Any
Overload Continuous 180V
Burden per Element 0.035 VA (max.) Power Factor Effect on Accuracy:
at 120V ±0.2% RO (maximum)
External Power: Standard Calibration Adjustments:

Input Range 85-150 Vac 0-1 mAdc Output
Frequency Range 50-500 Hz Gain ±2% of Reading (min.)
Burden (watt) 4 VA (max.) Zero None Required
(var) 4.5 VA (max.) 4-20 mAdc Output
at 120V Gain ±20% of Reading (min.)
Zero ±5% of Zero Point (min.)
Rated Output (RO) =
500 Watts per Element: Operating Humidity:
0-1 mAdc Output 0-95% Non-Condensing
±1 mAdc for Standard Calibration
4-20 mAdc Output Isolation:
20 mAdc for Standard Calibration Dielectric Withstand 2500 VRMS at 60Hz for 1 minute.
Complete (Input/Output/Power/Case)
Frequency:
Watt: 58Hz - 62Hz Surge Withstand:
Var: 60Hz (standard) ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1-1989
Stability (per year): Maximum Net Weight:

±0.25% RO Non-Accumulative One Element 1lb., 1oz. (0.48kg)
Three Element 2lbs., 9oz. (1.16kg)
Accuracy:
0-1 mAdc Output Approximate Dimesions:
Watt ±(0.1% Reading + 0.05% RO) (excluding mounting plate)
Var ±(0.1% Reading + 0.1% RO) 4.4"W x 3.9"D x 4.9"H
at 0-200% RO (112mm x 97mm x 124mm)
4-20 mAdc Output Style III Case
±0.2% of Output Range
Overrange with Linearity:
Temperature Effect on Accuracy: 0-1 mAdc Output
0-1 mAdc Output 500-1000 Watts/Vars per Element
Watt ±0.005%/˚C (typical) 4-20 mAdc Output
Var ±0.0075%/˚C (typical) 500-600 Watts/Vars per Element
4-20 mAdc Output
Watt ±0.0075%/˚C (typical)
Var ±0.008%/˚C (typical)

Watt 0-1 mAdc Output -20˚C to +70˚C
Var 0-1 mAdc Output -20°C to 60°C
4-20 mAdc Output -20˚C to +50˚C
* Total input not to exceed 200% of standard-calibration watts on units with 0-1
Compliance Voltage: mAdc output. Total input not to exceed 120% of standard-calibration watts on
0-1 mAdc Output 10 Vdc units with 4-20 mAdc output.
4-20 mAdc Output 15 Vdc
8.42
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Transducer Type
R = Reactive (Var)
W = Watt
Elements
10 = 1 Element 25 = 21/2 Element
20 = 2 Element 30 = 3 Element
Auxiliary Power
S = Self-Powered (internal auxiliary power)
E = External Auxiliary Power (120 Vac std.)
Output
1 = 0-1 mAdc Output
12=4-12-20 mAdc Output (Bidirectional)
Input
A = 5 Amps
1 = 120 V
Wiring Diagrams
1 Element, Single Phase, 2 wire 2 1/2 Element, 3 Phase, 4 Wire, Wye LINE
LINE L1 L2 L3 N
L1 L2
DC
OUTPUT DC
- + OUTPUT
- +
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 6A
EXTERNAL
AUX. POWER
7 8 9 10 11 12 7 8 9 10 11 12 12A
LOAD
EXTERNAL LOAD
AUX. POWER
2 Element, 3 Phase, 3 Wire, Delta 3 Element, 3 Phase, 4 Wire, Wye

LINE LINE
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 N
DC
OUTPUT
- +
DC
OUTPUT 1 2 3 4 5 6 6A
- +
EXT.
AUX.
1 2 3 4 5 6 POWER
7 8 9 10 11 12 12A
7 8 9 10 11 12 LOAD
E Models: Shown
EXTERNAL S Models: External auxiliary power not required.
LOAD
AUX. POWER Bottom terminal strip (7-12) omitted on S-model 1-element units
8.43
AMETEK
Transducers
ULtra Series Specifications Output Ripple Peak: <0.05% RO
AC Watt/Var Transducer
Response Time:
Current Input: 0-1 mAdc <400ms to 99%
Nominal 5A 4-20 mAdc <500ms to 99%
Range* 0-10A
Overload Continuous 15A Power Factor: Any
Overload 1 sec/hour 250A
Burden per Element 0.3 VA (max.) at 5A Power Factor Effect on Accuracy:
±0.2% RO (maximum)
Voltage Input:
Nominal 120V Standard Calibration Adjustments:
Range* 0-150V 0-1 mAdc Output
Overload Continuous 180V Gain ±2% of Reading (min.)
Burden per Element 0.035 VA (max.) Zero None Required
at 120V 4-20 mAdc Output
Gain ±20% of Reading (min.)
External Power: Zero ±5% of Zero Point (min.)
Input Range 85-150 Vac
Frequency Range 50-500 Hz Frequency: 60Hz (standard)
Burden 8 VA (max.)
at 120V Stability (per year):
±0.25% RO Non-Accumulative
Isolation between Watt and Var Options
±10 Vdc Dynamic Separation Operating Humidity:
(±15 Vdc separation on all E1 & S1 models) 0-95% Non-Condensing
Rated Output (RO) = Isolation:

500 Watts per Element: Dielectric Withstand 2500 VRMS at 60Hz for 1 minute.
0-1 mAdc Output Complete (Input/Output/Power/Case)
±1 mAdc for Standard Calibration
4-20 mAdc Output Surge Withstand:
20 mAdc for Standard Calibration ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1-1989
Accuracy: Maximum Net Weight:

0-1 mAdc Output 3lbs., 5oz. (1.51kg)
Watt ±(0.1% Reading + 0.05% RO)
Var ±(0.1% Reading + 0.1% RO) Approximate Dimesions:
at 0-200% RO (excluding mounting plate)
4-20 mAdc Output 4.4"W x 3.8"D x 6.5"H
±0.2% of Output Range (112mm x 97mm x 165mm)
Style IV Case
0-1 mAdc Output Overrange with Linearity:
Watt ±0.005%/˚C (typical) 0-1 mAdc Output
Var ±0.0075%/˚C (typical) 500-1000 Watts/Vars per Element
4-20 mAdc Output 4-20 mAdc Output
Watt ±0.0075%/˚C (typical) 500-600 Watts/Vars per Element
Var ±0.008%/˚C (typical)
No additional error within voltage compliance.
Operating Temperature Range: Reduce load resistance as required.
0-1 mAdc Output -20˚C to +70˚C
0-1 mAdc Output -20°C to 60°C
Compliance Voltage:
* Total input not to exceed 200% of standard-calibration watts and vars on
Load:
units with 0-1 mAdc output. Total input not to exceed 120% of standard-
0-1 mAdc Output
calibration watts and vars on units with 4-20 mAdc output.
4-20 mAdc Output
Any load from 0-750Ω at 20 mAdc
8.44
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Transducer Type
C = Combination Watt/Var
Elements
10 = 1 Element 25 = 21/2 Element
20 = 2 Element 30 = 3 Element
Auxiliary Power
S = Self-Powered (internal auxiliary power)
E = External Auxiliary Power (120 Vac std.)
Output
1 = 0 to ±1 mAdc
12=4-12-20 mAdc Output (Bidirectional)
15=4-20 mAdc Unidirectional (watts)/4-12-20 mAdc Bidirectional (vars)
Input
A = 5 Amps
1 = 120 V
Wiring Diagrams
1 Element, Single Phase, 2 wire 2 1/2 Element, 3 Phase, 4 Wire, Wye
LINE
L1 L2 LINE
L1 L2 L3 N
DC
DC
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
WATT
WATT
- + - +
1 2 3 4 5 6 6A 6B
1 2 3 4 5 6 6A
EXT.
AUX.
EXTERNAL POWER
AUX. POWER
7 8 9 10 11 12 12A 12B
7 8 9 10 11 12 12A
- + LOAD
DC
- DC
OUTPUT + LOAD +
OUTPUT
VAR
VAR
Adjust
2 Element, 3 Phase, 3 Wire, Delta 3 Element, 3 Phase, 4 Wire, Wye
LINE
LINE L1 L2 L3 N
L1 L2 L3 DC
OUTPUT
WATT
DC
- +
OUTPUT
WATT 1 2 3 4 5 6 6A 6B
- +
EXT.
AUX.
1 2 3 4 5 6 6A POWER
EXTERNAL 7 8 9 10 11 12 12A 12B

AUX. POWER
7 8 9 10 11 12 12A
- + LOAD
DC
OUTPUT
VAR
DC
- OUTPUT + LOAD E Models: Shown
VAR S Models: External auxiliary power not required.
Bottom terminal strip (7-12) omitted on S-model 1-element units
8.45
AMETEK
Transducers
Ordering Information*
UltW 2 0 S 1 - A 1
V = Vo l t a g e 1=5 Amps
A=Current 2=10 Amps
W = Wa t t
R = Va r A = 1 2 0 Vo l t s
B = 2 4 0 Vo l t s
10=1 Element
20=2 Element 1=0-1 mAdc
25=2.5 Element S=Self-Powered 4=4-20 mAdc
30=3 Element E=External Power 12=4-12-20 mAdc
Case Dimensions
ULtra Series Transducers
Style II
.75"
1.14" .43" (19.05 mm)
(28.96 mm) (10.92 mm) .25"
(6.35 mm)
.094" RAD.
(2.39 mm)
(50.80 mm)
3.77" .23"
(95.76 mm) (5.84 mm)
2.00"
4.15"
.36" DIA. (105.41 mm)
1.50" (9.14 mm)
(38.10 mm) 2 KEYSLOTS
.187" DIA.
(4.75 mm)
4.40" 2 MOUNTING
(111.76 mm) HOLES .07"
4.75" (1.78 mm)
(120.65 mm)
5.25"
(133.35 mm)
Style III
SCREW HEAD PROTRUDES .25"
.09" (2.29 mm) (TYP.) (6.35 mm) .75"
.46" FROM CASE - .094" RAD. (19.05 mm)
(11.68 mm) 2 SCREWS (2.39 mm)
.23"
(52.07 mm)
(38.10 mm)
(5.84 mm) 3.53"

2.05"
1.50"
(89.66 mm)
.36" DIA.
(9.14 mm)
2 KEYSLOTS
3.07" .187" DIA.

.25" (77.98 mm)
(6.35 mm) (4.75 mm)
3.50" 2 MOUNTING .07"
(88.90 mm) HOLES (1.78 mm)
4.00"
(101.60 mm)
NOTE:
Terminal strips shown for illustration purposes only. For exact terminal-strip configuration on specific units, see connection
diagrams on preceding pages.
Drawings not to scale.
* 60 Hz Standard, for 50 Hz just specify "50 Hz" in your description.

8.46
RLP Modular Plug-In
Transducers
The RLP Series of transducers is a family of
power instrumentation transducers in a
compact, modular plug-in form. RLP
transducers are ideal where large quantities
of transducers are required, but space is
limited.
RLP transducers feature three enclosure

widths to accommodate two, four, or eight
modules. Each module consists of two
parts: a plug-in assembly and a
back-panel assembly.
For current inputs, the current transformers

are located on the back-panel assembly so
the current inputs are not opened when the
plug-in assembly is removed. New or
additional plug-ins or back panels can be
added in the field.
Modules Available
• Current
• Voltage
• Combined Current/Voltage
• Expanded-Scale Voltage
• Watt
• Var
• Combined Watt/Var
• Phase Angle
• Voltage Angle
• Frequency
Features
• Modular concept & compact
design save transducer panel space
• Up to six transducers in one
module
• Two, four, or eight modules in one
enclosure
• Lower installation costs
• Easy to install
• Convenient front-panel access
Applications
• Substations
• Generating stations
• SCADA
Outputs
• 0 to ±1 mAdc
• 1–5 or 1–3–5 mAdc
• 4–20 or 4–12–20 mAdc
8.47
AMETEK
Transducers
Specifications
RLP AC Average-Sensing
Current or Voltage Transducers
Specifications 0–1 mAdc Amps P-Option* Amps 0–1 mAdc Volts P-Option* Volts
(Current Transducer) (Current Transducer) (Voltage Transducer) (Voltage Transducer)
Current Nominal 5A 5A
Input Calibrating Range 0–5 A 0–5 A
Range with Linearity 0–10 A 0–6 A N/A N/A
Overload Continuous 20 A 20 A
Overload 1 Second/Hour 250 A 250 A
Burden/Element 0.25 VA (maximum) at 5 A 0.25 VA (maximum) at 5 A
Voltage Nominal 120 V 120 V
Input Calibrating Range 0–150 V 0–150 V
Range with Linearity N/A N/A 0–150 V 0–165 V
Overload Continuous 180 V 180 V
Burden/Element 2.2 VA (maximum) at 120 V 2.2 VA (maximum) at 120 V
External Input Range 100–130 Vac 100–130 Vac
Auxiliary Frequency Range None Required 50–500 Hz None Required 50–500 Hz
Power Burden/Element 3 VA Nominal 3 VA Nominal
Rated Output (RO) = 1 mAdc for 5 or 20 mAdc for 1 mAdc for 5 or 20 mAdc for
5 A or 150 V/Element Standard Calibration Std. Calibration, depending Standard Calibration Std. Calibration, depending on
on selected output range* selected output range*
Accuracy Standard ±0.25% RO ±0.25% RO
± 0.25% of Span ± 0.25% of Span
A4 Models ±0.1% RO ±0.1% RO
Temperature Effect on Accuracy ±0.01% / ° C ±0.015% / ° C ±0.01% / ° C ±0.015% / ° C
Operating Temperature Range -20° C to +60° C -20° C to +50° C -20° C to +60° C -20° C to +50° C
Compliance Voltage 10 Vdc 25 Vdc 10 Vdc 25 Vdc
Load 0–10,000 Ω 0–5,000 W for 1–5 mAdc units 0–10,000 Ω 0–5,000 W for 1–5 mAdc units
0–1,250 W for 4–20 mAdc units 0–1,250 W for 4–20 mAdc units
Output Ripple Peak < 0.25% RO < 0.25% of Span < 0.25% RO < 0.25% of Span
Response Time < 400 ms to 99%
Standard Calibration Gain ±10% of Reading (minimum) ±20% of Span (minimum) ±10% of Reading (minimum) ±20% of Span (minimum)
Adjustments Zero None Required ±5% of Zero Point (minimum) None Required ±5% of Zero Point (minimum)
Frequency Range 50–500 Hz (specify nominal)
Stability (per year) ±0.1% RO, ±0.15% of Span, ±0.25% RO, ±0.3% of Span,
Noncumulative Noncumulative Noncumulative Noncumulative
Operating Humidity 0–95% Noncondensing
Isolation Complete Complete Complete Complete
(Input/Output/Case) (Input/Output/Power/Case) (Input/Output/Case) (Input/Output/Power/Case)
Dielectric Withstand 1500 VRMS at 60 Hz
Surge Withstand ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1
Maximum Net Weight Weights vary by model; consult factory.
Approximate Dimensions See enclosure diagrams on page 85.
*P-Option includes 1–5 and 4–20 mAdc outputs. Not available on all models. Specifications subject to change without notice.
8.48
Specifications
RLP AC Expanded-Scale
Voltage Transducers
Specifications 0–1 mAdc Volts P-Option* Volts

(Expanded-Scale Voltage Transducer) (Expanded-Scale Voltage Transducer)
Voltage Span/Range Any 20–60 V span between 90–150 V (customer specified)**
Input Overload Continuous 150 V
Burden/Element 2 VA (maximum) at 120 V
External Input Range 100–130 Vac
Auxiliary Frequency Range None Required 50–500 Hz
Power Burden 3 VA Nominal
Rated Output (RO) 0 mAdc at low end of range (customer specified) 1 or 4 mAdc at low end of range (customer specified)
1 mAdc at high end of range (customer specified) 5 or 20 mAdc at high end of range (customer specified)
Accuracy ±0.25% of Input Voltage for 60 Hz
Temperature Effect on Accuracy ±0.007% / ° C ±0.01% / ° C
Operating Temperature Range -20° C to +60° C -20° C to +50° C
Compliance Voltage 10 Vdc 25 Vdc
Load 0–10,000 Ω 0–5,000 Ω for 1–5 mAdc units
0–1,250 Ω for 4–20 mAdc units
Output Ripple Peak < 2.5% RO < 2.5% of Span
Standard Calibration Gain ±5% of Span ±20% of Span
Adjustments Zero ±5% of Span ±5% of Span
Frequency Range 55–65 Hz
Stability (per year) ±0.25% of Input Voltage, Noncumulative
Isolation Complete (Input/Output/Case) Complete (Input/Output/Power/Case)
* P-Option includes 1–5 and 4–20 mAdc outputs. Specifications subject to change without notice.
**Minimum span must be at least 18% of low-end voltage.
8.49
AMETEK
Transducers
Specifications
RLP AC Watt
or Var Transducers
Specifications 0 to ±1 mAdc Watts P-Option* Watts 0 to ±1 mAdc Vars P-Option* Vars

(Watt Transducer) (Watt Transducer) (Var Transducer) (Var Transducer)
Current Nominal 5A
Input Range** 0–10 A
Overload Continuous 20 A
Overload 1 Second/Hour 250 A
Burden/Element 0.2 VA (maximum) at 5 A
Voltage Nominal 120 V
Input Range** 0–150 V
Overload Continuous 200 V
Burden/Element 0.02 VA (maximum) at 120 V
External Input Range 85–135 Vac 100–130 Vac 85–135 Vac 100–130 Vac
Auxiliary Frequency Range 50–500 Hz 50–500 Hz 50–500 Hz 50–500 Hz
Power Burden 3 VA Nominal 5 VA Nominal 3 VA Nominal 5 VA Nominal
Rated Output (RO) = ±1 mAdc for 5 or 20 mAdc for ±1 mAdc for 5 or 20 mAdc for
500 Watts or Vars/Element Standard Calibration Std. Calibration, depending on Standard Calibration Std. Calibration, depending on
selected output range* selected output range*
Accuracy ±(0.2% Reading + 0.01% RO) ±(0.2% Reading + 0.05% RO) ±(0.2% Reading + 0.02% RO) ±(0.3% Reading + 0.05% RO)
at 0–200% RO at 0–120% RO at 0–200% RO at 0–120% RO
Load 0–10,000 Ω 0–5,000 Ω for 0–10,000 Ω 0–5,000 Ω for
1–5/1–3–5 mAdc units 1–5/1–3–5 mAdc units
0–1,250 Ω for 0–1,250 Ω for
Output Ripple Peak < 0.5% RO
Power Factor Any
PF Effect on Accuracy ±0.1% VA (maximum) ±0.15% VA (maximum)
Frequency Range 58–62 Hz 60 Hz
Isolation Complete (Input/Output/Power/Case)
Overrange with Linearity 500–1000 Watts/Element 500–600 Watts/Element 500–1000 Vars/Element 500–600 Vars/Element
No additional error within voltage compliance. Reduce load resistance as required.
8.50
Specifications
RLP Combined
AC Watt/Var Transducers
Specifications 0 to ±1 mAdc Watts P-Option* Watts 0 to ±1 mAdc Vars P-Option* Vars

(Combined Watt/Var (Combined Watt/Var (Combined Watt/Var (Combined Watt/Var
Transducer) Transducer) Transducer) Transducer)
Current Nominal 5A
Input Range** 0–10 A
Overload Continuous 20 A
External Input Range 85–135 Vac 100–130 Vac 85–135 Vac 100–130 Vac
Auxiliary Frequency Range 50–500 Hz 50–500 Hz 50–500 Hz 50–500 Hz
Power Burden 3 VA Nominal 7 VA Nominal 3 VA Nominal 7 VA Nominal
Rated Output (RO) = ±1 mAdc for 5 or 20 mAdc for ±1 mAdc for 5 or 20 mAdc for
500 Watts or Vars/Element Standard Calibration Std. Calibration, depending on Standard Calibration Std. Calibration, depending on
Accuracy ±(0.2% Reading + 0.01% RO) ±(0.2% Reading + 0.05% RO) ±(0.2% Reading + 0.02% RO) ±(0.3% Reading + 0.05% RO)
at 0–200% RO at 0–120% RO at 0–200% RO at 0–120% RO
Load 0–10,000 Ω 0–5,000 Ω for 0–10,000 Ω 0–5,000 Ω for
0–1,250 Ω for 0–1,250 Ω for
Output Ripple Peak < 0.5% RO
Power Factor Any
PF Effect on Accuracy ±0.1% VA (maximum) ±0.15% VA (maximum)
Frequency 60 Hz
Isolation Complete (Input/Output/Power/Case)
Overrange with Linearity 500–1000 Watts/Element 500–600 Watts/Element 500–1000 Vars/Element 500–600 Vars/Element
No additional error within voltage compliance. Reduce load resistance as required.
8.51
AMETEK
Transducers
Specifications
RLP AC Phase Angle
or Voltage Angle Transducers
Specifications 0 to ±1 mAdc P-Option* 0 to ±1 mAdc P-Option*

(Phase Angle (Phase Angle (Voltage Angle (Voltage Angle
Transducer) Transducer) Transducer) Transducer)
Current Nominal 5A
Input Range** 0.5–5 A
Overload Continuous 10 A N/A
Second Nominal 120 V
Voltage Range** N/A 50–135 V
Input Overload Continuous 150 V
Auxiliary Frequency Range None Required 50–500 Hz None Required 50–500 Hz
Power Burden 2 VA Nominal 2 VA Nominal
Rated Output (RO) ±1 mAdc for 5 or 20 mAdc for ±1 mAdc for 5 or 20 mAdc for
Standard Calibration Std. Calibration, depending on Standard Calibration Std. Calibration, depending on
Accuracy ±1° at 25° C
Phase Angle Range
0 to ±45°, 0 to ±60°, 0 to ±75°, and 0 to ±180°
(without ambiguous readings)
Temperature Effect on Accuracy ±0.5° ±0.6° ±0.5° ±0.6°
Load 0–10,000 Ω 0–5,000 Ω for 1–3–5 mAdc units 0–10,000 Ω 0–5,000 Ω for 1–3–5 mAdc units
0–1,250 Ω for 0–1,250 Ω for
4–12–20 mAdc units 4–12–20 mAdc units
Output Ripple Peak < 1% RO
Adjustments Zero ±2% RO (minimum) ±5% of Zero Point (minimum) ±2% RO (minimum) ±5% of Zero Point (minimum)
Frequency Nominal ±3%
Stability (per year) ±1% RO, ±1% of Span, ±1% RO, ±1% of Span,
Isolation Complete Complete Complete Complete
(Input/Output/Case) (Input/Output/Power/Case) (Input/Output/Case) (Input/Output/Power/Case)
8.52
Specifications
RLP AC Frequency
Transducers
Specifications 0–1 mAdc P-Option*

(Frequency Transducer) (Frequency Transducer)
Input Range 90–150 V
External Input Range 100–130 Vac
Auxiliary Frequency Range None Required 50–500 Hz
Power Burden 2 VA Nominal
Rated Output (RO) 1 mAdc at Maximum Rated Frequency 5 or 20 mAdc for Standard Calibration,
depending on selected output range*
Accuracy ±0.02% of Center Frequency at 25° C ±0.005% of Center Frequency at 25° C
Temperature Effect on Accuracy ±0.0025% / ° C ±0.005% / ° C
Operating Temperature Range -20° C to +60° C -20° C to +50° C
Output Ripple Peak < 1% RO < 1% of Span
Standard Calibration Gain ±5% of Span (minimum) ±20% of Span (minimum)
Adjustments Zero ±10% of Span (minimum) ±5% of Zero Point (minimum)
Stability (per year) ±0.02% of Center Frequency ±0.04% of Center Frequency
Isolation Complete (Input/Output/Case) Complete (Input/Output/Power/Case)
8.53
AMETEK
Transducers
Specifications
RLP Temperature
Transducers
Specifications 0–1 mAdc P-Option*

(Temperature Transducer) (Temperature Transducer)
Auxiliary Frequency Range 50–500 Hz 50–500 Hz
Power Burden 3.5 VA Nominal 5.5 VA Nominal
Rated Output (RO) 1 mAdc at Maximum Calibrated Temperature 5 or 20 mAdc for Standard Calibration,
depending on selected output range*
Accuracy Nickel-Iron 0.8% of Span
Platinum 0.5% of Span
Copper 0.8% of Span
Temperature Effect on Accuracy ±0.015% / ° F ±0.017% / ° F
Operating Temperature Range -20° C to +60° C (-4° F to +140° F) -20° C to +50° C (-4° F to +122° F)
Open Circuit Voltage 16 Vdc 30 Vdc
Output Ripple Peak < 1% RO < 1% of Span
Standard Calibration Gain ±5% of Span (minimum) ±20% of Span (minimum)
Adjustments Zero ±3% of Span (minimum) ±5% of Zero Point (minimum)
Stability (per year) ±0.4% RO, Noncumulative ±0.5% of Span, Noncumulative
Isolation Input/Power/Case and Output/Power/Case
8.54
Enclosure Drawings
RLP Modular
Plug-In Transducers
ENCLOSURE DRAWINGS
2-Module Enclosure 4-Module Enclosure
6.57"
10.70" (271.78 mm)
(166.89 mm)
5.82"
(147.83 mm) 9.94" (252.48 mm)
4.00" 7.00"
(101.60 mm) (177.80 mm) (1
4.52" 1.50" 8.65" MAX.

MAX. (38.10 mm) (219.71 mm) (3
(114.81 mm)
(WIDTH BEHIND FRONT)
(WIDTH BEHIND FRONT)
8-Module Enclosure (front view)
18.95" (481.33 mm)
18.19" (462.03 mm)
4.00" 7.00"
(101.60 mm) (177.80 mm)
16.90" MAX. (429.26 mm) 1.50"

(WIDTH BEHIND FRONT) (38.10 mm)
Enclosure FRONT OF MODULE

0.061" (1.55 mm)
Module BEHIND THIS LINE
(side view)
11.65" (295.91 mm)

0.126"
(3.20 mm)
1.19"
(30.23 mm)
8.55
AMETEK
Transducers
Ordering Procedure
RLP Modular
Plug-In Transducers
ORDERING PROCEDURE
Specify by base model number and appropriate selection or option suffixes in the order shown in the following example.
Option Option External

Base Model No. Output #1 #2 Aux. Power
Tables 1 thru 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 6
0 to ±1 mAdc
output
RLPWV20 A2 -FA
P-Option
outputs P7-B Most RLP units have internal aux. If other than 120 Vac (std.), specify ext. aux
power. Select A2 for external power voltage: 69 Vac Aux., 240 Vac Aux.,
aux. power (120 Vac std.) 277 Vac Aux., or 480 Vac Aux.
EXAMPLES: RLPWV20A2-FA
2-element, 0 to ±1 mAdc Watt/Var Plug-In Transducer; 120 Vac external auxiliary power; front access.
RLPWV20P7-BA2-FA
2-element, 4-12-20 mAdc Watt/Var Plug-In Transducer; 120 Vac external auxiliary power; front access.
You must specify a model number for each module position in the You must specify the size of enclosure and quantity of blank
bin (l-r). Specify unused positions as either "blank" or "empty". modules (if required). This information is not part of the model
number, but must be provided to the factory when you place
Position 1 your order. Delete the "K" from the part numbers below if you
Position 2 do not want the factory to assemble your enclosure.
Position 3
Position 4
Position 5 8-Position Bin 10093-001K
Position 8 Quantity of Blanks 10184-001
Table 1 Current or Voltage Base Model Numbers

CURRENT OR VOLTAGE TRANSDUCERS IN ONE PLUG-IN MODULE COMBINED CURRENT/VOLTAGE TRANSDUCERS IN ONE PLUG-IN MODULE
Current Model No. Description Combined Current/

RLPC One Current Unit Voltage Model No. Description
RLPC2 Two Current Units RLPCE One Current Unit/One Voltage Unit
RLPC3 Three Current Units RLPC2E Two Current Units/One Voltage Unit
RLPC3E* Three Current Units/One Voltage Unit
Voltage Model No. Description RLPCE2 One Current Unit/Two Voltage Units
RLPE One Voltage Unit RLPCE3* One Current Unit/Three Voltage Units
RLPE2 Two Voltage Units RLPCE4* One Current Unit/Four Voltage Units
RLPE3 Three Voltage Units RLPC2E2* Two Current Units/Two Voltage Units
RLPE4* Four Voltage Units RLPC2E3* Two Current Units/Three Voltage Units
Expanded-Scale RLPC2E4* Two Current Units/Four Voltage Units
Voltage Model No. Description RLPC3E2* Three Current Units/Two Voltage Units
RLPEX One Voltage Unit (with 90-150 V RLPC3E3* Three Current Units/Three Voltage Units
expanded-scale option)
RLPEX2 Two Voltage Units (with 90-150 V
RLPEX3 Three Voltage Units (with 90-150 V *Not available with 1-5 or 4-20 mAdc outputs.
8.56
Ordering Procedures
RLP Modular
Plug-In Transducers
Table 2 Watt or Var Base Model Numbers

WATT OR VAR TRANSDUCERS IN ONE PLUG-IN MODULE COMBINED WATT/VAR TRANSDUCERS IN ONE PLUG-IN MODULE
Watt Var Combined Watt/
Model No. Description Model No. Description Var Model No. Description
RLPW10 1-Element Watt RLPV10 1-Element Var RLPWV10 1-Element Watt/Var
RLPW15 11/2-Element Watt RLPV15 11/2-Element Var RLPWV15 11/2-Element Watt/Var
RLPW25 21/2-Element Watt RLPV25 21/2-Element Var RLPWV25 21/2-Element Watt/Var
RLPWV10-30* Three 1-Element Watt/Vars
*Not available with 1-5 or 4-20 mAdc outputs.

Table 3 Phase Angle or Voltage Angle Base Model Numbers
ONE OR TWO PHASE ANGLE TRANSDUCERS IN ONE PLUG-IN MODULE ONE OR TWO VOLTAGE ANGLE TRANSDUCERS IN ONE PLUG-IN MODULE
Phase Angle Model No. Description Voltage Angle Model No. Description
RLPF1-45 One 45° Phase Angle Unit RLPA1-45 One 45° Voltage Angle Unit
RLPF2-45 Two 45° Phase Angle Units RLPA2-45 Two 45° Voltage Angle Units
Table 4 Frequency Base Model Numbers

ONE OR TWO FREQUENCY TRANSDUCERS IN ONE PLUG-IN MODULE
Frequency Model No. Description
RLPZ150 One 50 Hz Frequency Unit
RLPZ250 Two 50 Hz Frequency Units
Table 5 Output Selection

P-Option Output Range Compliance Voltage Maximum Load Max. Open Circuit Voltage
0 to ±1 mAdc output is standard,
P6** 1-5 mAdc 25 Vdc 5000 Ω 30 Vdc
and is specified by the Base
P7** 4-20 mAdc 25 Vdc 1250 Ω 30 Vdc
Model Numbers. For outputs
other than 0 to ±1 mAdc, indi- P6-B*** 1-3-5 mAdc 25 Vdc 5000 Ω 30 Vdc
cate the appropriate P7-B*** 4-12-20 mAdc 25 Vdc 1250 Ω 30 Vdc
P-Option in the "Output" position
**P6 and P7 options are available for all RLP types except Phase Angle and Voltage Angle.
of the complete model number.
***P6-B and P7-B options are available for all RLP types except Current, Voltage, Frequency, and Temperature.
Table 6 Options
Option Description ****Most RLP transducers come standard with internal auxiliary power (A4 option).
-1 240 V Input If you require external auxiliary power, the A2 option designator should come
-5 10 A Input before any other options in the complete model number.
A2**** External Auxiliary Power (120 Vac std.)
-FA Front Access If you require additional options not shown here, please consult the factory.
Combined Watt/Watthour or Var/Varhour and Combined Phase/Voltage Angle transducers are available in RLP format on special order.
Please consult the factory for more information.
8.57
AMETEK
Transducers
Wiring Diagrams
RLP Modular
Plug-In Transducers
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Models C, C2, C3 Current Models CP7A2, C2P7A2, C3P7A2 Current with External Aux. Power
1
INPUT AMPS
1 CURRENT 1 1
AMPS INPUT 2
1 CURRENT 1
2
3
INPUT AMPS
CURRENT 2 2
3 4
AMPS INPUT
2 CURRENT 2
4 5
INPUT AMPS
CURRENT 3 3
5 6
AMPS INPUT
3 CURRENT 3
6 7 +
+
OUTPUT 1 * 1
7 8
OUTPUT 1 0-1 mAdc
OUTPUTS
1
8
LOAD 0-10K OHMS * OUTPUT LOAD RANGE
9 +
OUTPUT LOAD RANGE
1-5 mA 0-5K OHMS
OUTPUT 2 * 2
+ 10
OUTPUTS
4-20 mA 0-1250 OHMS

9
OUTPUT 2 0-1 mAdc
2
LOAD 0-10K OHMS 11 +
10 OUTPUT 3 * 3
+ 12
11
OUTPUT 3 0-1 mAdc
3
LOAD 0-10K OHMS 13
12 EXTERNAL AUX. PWR.
AUX. POWER
14
-007
-005
Models E, E2, E3 Voltage Models EP7A2, E2P7A2, E3P7A2 Voltage with External Aux. Power
Models EX, EX2, EX3 Expanded-Scale Voltage Models Z1P7A2, Z2P7A2 Frequency with External Aux. Power
Models Z1, Z2 Frequency (Consult factory for drawing of Expanded-Scale Voltage with External Aux. Power)
1
INPUT
VOLTS
1 VOLTAGE 1
1
VOLTS INPUT 2
1 VOLTAGE 1
2
3
INPUT VOLTS
VOLTAGE 2 2
3 4
VOLTS INPUT
2 VOLTAGE 2
4 5
INPUT VOLTS
VOLTAGE 3 3
5 6
VOLTS INPUT
3 VOLTAGE 3
6 7 +
+
OUTPUT 1 * 1
7 8
OUTPUT 1 0-1 mAdc
1
OUTPUTS
8
LOAD 0-10K OHMS
* OUTPUT LOAD RANGE 9 +
OUTPUT
1-5 mA
LOAD RANGE
0-5K OHMS
OUTPUT 2
* 2
+ 10
OUTPUTS
4-20 mA 0-1250 OHMS

9
OUTPUT 2 0-1 mAdc
2
LOAD 0-10K OHMS 11 +
10
OUTPUT 3 * 3
+ 12
11
OUTPUT 3 0-1 mAdc
3 13
LOAD 0-10K OHMS
12 EXTERNAL AUX. PWR.
AUX. POWER
14
-006
-006
8.58
Wiring Diagrams
RLP Modular
Plug-In Transducers
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Models CE, CE2, Current/Voltage Model CEP7A2 Current/Voltage with External Aux. Power
(Consult factory for drawing of CE2P7A2)
NUMBERS CORRESPOND TO
CHANNEL NUMBERS ON P/C
BOARD
1 1
AMPS INPUT
AMPS INPUT
1 CURRENT 1
1 CURRENT 1
2 2
3 3
VOLTS INPUT
VOLTS INPUT
2 VOLTAGE 2
4 VOLTAGE 4
4 4
5 5
EXTERNAL
VOLTS INPUT AUX. PWR.
AUX. POWER
5 VOLTAGE 5
6 6
+ +
7 7
OUTPUT 1 0-1 mAdc 1 OUTPUT 1 *
OUTPUTS
1
LOAD 0-10K OHMS
8 8 * OUTPUT LOAD RANGE
OUTPUT LOAD RANGE
+ + 1-5 mA 0-5K OHMS
OUTPUTS
9 9 4-20 mA 0-1250 OHMS
4
OUTPUT 4 0-1 mAdc
LOAD 0-10K OHMS
2 OUTPUT 2 *
10 10
11
+ 11
OUTPUT 5 0-1 mAdc
5
LOAD 0-10K OHMS
12 12
-013
-008
Models CE3, C2E, C2E2, C2E3, C3E, C3E2, C3E3 Current/Voltage Models CE4, C2E4, Current/Voltage
Model E4 Voltage
NUMBERS CORRESPOND NUMBERS CORRESPOND
TO CHANNEL NUMBERS TO CHANNEL NUMBERS
ON PC BOARD ON PC BOARD
1 13 1 13
INPUT INPUT INPUT VOLT VOLT
INPUT
VOLT AMP
VOLTAGE 4 4 1 CURRENT 1 VOLTAGE 4 4 1 VOLTAGE 1
2 14 2 14
3 15 3 15
INPUT VOLT AMP
INPUT INPUT VOLT AMP INPUT
VOLTAGE 5 5 2 CURRENT 2 VOLTAGE 5 5 2 CURRENT 2
4 16 4 16
5 17 5 17
INPUT AMP INPUT INPUT VOLT AMP INPUT XLPC2E4
VOLT
VOLTAGE 6 6 3 CURRENT 3 VOLTAGE 6 6 3 CURRENT 3 ONLY
6 18 6 18
+ 7 + + 7 19
+
OUTPUT 4
19 OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT 1
OUT OUT OUTPUT 1 OUT OUT
0-1 mAdc 4 1 0-1 mAdc 0-1 mAdc 4 1 0-1 mAdc
8 20 8 20
+ 9 + + 9 21
+
OUTPUT 5
21 OUTPUT 5 OUTPUT 2
OUT OUT OUTPUT 2 OUT OUT
10 22 10 22
+ 11 + + 11 23
+
23 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 6 OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 6 OUT OUT OUT OUT
12 24 12 24
OUTPUT(S) 0-1 mA OUTPUT(S) 0-1 mA
INTO 0-10K OHMS LOAD INTO 0-10K OHMS LOAD
-013 -014
8.59
AMETEK
Transducers
Wiring Diagrams
RLP Modular
Plug-In Transducers
WIRING DIAGRAMS
1-Element Watt, Var, Watt/Var 1-Element Watt, Var, Watt/Var with External Aux. Power
LINE LINE
A B A B
1 1
IA AMPS IA AMPS
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
EA VOLTS EA VOLTS
6 6
7 7 LOAD
AUX. PWR. EXTERNAL
AUX. POWER
8 8
LOAD
9 9
VAR VAR OUTPUT * * OUTPUT LOAD RANGE VAR VAR OUTPUT * * OUTPUT LOAD RANGE
+ +
OUTPUTS
OUTPUTS
10 OUTPUT LOAD RANGE 10 OUTPUT LOAD RANGE

0 to + 1 mA 0-10K OHMS 0 to + 1 mA 0-10K OHMS
1-5 mA 0-5K OHMS 1-5 mA 0-5K OHMS
11
+ 1-3-5 mA 0-5K OHMS
11 + 1-3-5 mA 0-5K OHMS
4-20 mA 0-1250 OHMS 4-20 mA 0-1250 OHMS
4-12-20 mA 0-1250 OHMS 4-12-20 mA 0-1250 OHMS
WATT WATT OUTPUT * WATT WATT OUTPUT *
12 12
-001 -004
11/2-Element Watt, Var, Watt/Var 11/2-Element Watt, Var, Watt/Var with External Aux. Power
LINE LINE
A B C A B C
1 1
IA IA AMPS
AMPS
2 2
3 3
IC IC AMPS
AMPS
4 4
5 5
E AC VOLTS
E AC VOLTS
6 6
7 7 LOAD
AUX. PWR. EXTERNAL
AUX. POWER
LOAD 8
8
9 9
VAR VAR OUTPUT * * OUTPUT LOAD RANGE VAR VAR OUTPUT * * OUTPUT LOAD RANGE
+
OUTPUTS
+
OUTPUTS
OUTPUT LOAD RANGE 10 OUTPUT LOAD RANGE

10 0 to + 1 mA 0-10K OHMS 0 to + 1 mA 0-10K OHMS
1-5 mA 0-5K OHMS 1-5 mA 0-5K OHMS
+ 1-3-5 mA 0-5K OHMS 11
+ 1-3-5 mA 0-5K OHMS
11 4-20 mA 0-1250 OHMS 4-20 mA 0-1250 OHMS
WATT WATT OUTPUT * 4-12-20 mA 0-1250 OHMS WATT WATT OUTPUT * 4-12-20 mA 0-1250 OHMS
12 12
-002 -005
8.60
Wiring Diagrams
RLP Modular
Plug-In Transducers
WIRING DIAGRAMS
LINE LINE
A B C A B C
1
1 AMPS IA
IA AMPS 2
2
3
3 AMPS IC
IC AMPS 4
4
5
VOLTS E AB
5
6
E AB VOLTS
6
7
VOLTS E CB
7 8
E CB VOLTS
LOAD
8 9
EXTERNAL AUX. PWR.
LOAD AUX. POWER
9 10
VAR VAR OUTPUT * * OUTPUT LOAD RANGE
+
OUTPUTS
10 OUTPUT LOAD RANGE 11

0 to + 1 mA 0-10K OHMS * OUTPUT LOAD RANGE VAR OUTPUT * VAR
1-5 mA 0-5K OHMS
OUTPUTS
OUTPUT LOAD RANGE
11
+ 1-3-5 mA 0-5K OHMS 0 to + 1 mA 0-10K OHMS 12 +
4-20 mA 0-1250 OHMS 1-5 mA 0-5K OHMS
4-12-20 mA 0-1250 OHMS
WATT WATT OUTPUT * 1-3-5 mA
4-20 mA
0-5K OHMS
0-1250 OHMS 13 +
12 4-12-20 mA 0-1250 OHMS
*
WATT OUTPUT WATT
-003 14
-001
LINE LINE
A B C N A B C N
1
AMPS IA 1 13
2 AMPS IA
2 14
3
AMPS IB 3 15
4 AMPS IB * OUTPUT LOAD RANGE
OUTPUT LOAD RANGE
4 16 0 to + 1 mA 0-10K OHMS
5 1-5 mA 0-5K OHMS
1-3-5 mA 0-5K OHMS
AMPS IC 5 17 4-20 mA 0-1250 OHMS
6 IC 4-12-20 mA 0-1250 OHMS
AMPS
6 18
7
VOLTS E AN 7 19
8 VOLTS EAN
8 20
9
VOLTS E CN
9 21
10 VOLTS ECN EXTERNAL
AUX. POWER
LOAD 10 22
11
* OUTPUT LOAD RANGE VAR OUTPUT * VAR LOAD + +
11 23
OUTPUTS
OUTPUT LOAD RANGE

12 +
0 to + 1 mA 0-10K OHMS WATT OUTPUT * VAR OUTPUT *
1-5 mA 0-5K OHMS
12 24
1-3-5 mA
4-20 mA
0-5K OHMS
0-1250 OHMS
13 +
4-12-20 mA 0-1250 OHMS WATT OUTPUT * WATT
14 -011
-002
8.61
AMETEK
Transducers
Wiring Diagrams
RLP Modular
Plug-In Transducers
WIRING DIAGRAMS
LINE LINE
A B C N A B C N
1
IA 1 13
AMPS IA
AMPS
2
2 14
3
AMPS IB 3 15
AMPS IB * OUTPUT LOAD RANGE
4 OUTPUT LOAD RANGE
4 16 0 to + 1 mA 0-10K OHMS
1-5 mA 0-5K OHMS
5 1-3-5 mA 0-5K OHMS
AMPS IC 5 17 4-20 mA 0-1250 OHMS
4-12-20 mA 0-1250 OHMS
6 AMPS IC
6 18
7 EA
VOLTS
7 19
VOLTS
8 EB EA
VOLTS
EB
8 20
9 EC
VOLTS
9 21
VOLTS
10 N EC EXTERNAL
AUX. POWER
11 N
10 22
VAR
VOLTS
+ +
OUTPUTS
LOAD + 23
12 11
VAR OUTPUT * *
* OUTPUT LOAD RANGE VAR OUTPUT
OUTPUT LOAD RANGE 13 + LOAD 12 24

0 to + 1 mA 0-10K OHMS
1-5 mA 0-5K OHMS
WATT OUTPUT * WATT WATT OUTPUT *
1-3-5 mA 0-5K OHMS 14 -012
4-20 mA 0-1250 OHMS
-003
4-12-20 mA 0-1250 OHMS
Three 1-Element Watt/Vars in One Module with or without External Aux. Power
LINE
A B C N
COM
1 13
VAR A O
AMPS IA VA OUTPUT U
2 14 + T
P
3 15
+ U
WATT A T
AMPS IB WA OUTPUT S
4 16 COM
COM
5 17 O
VAR B
AMPS IC VB OUTPUT U
6 18 + T
P
7 19
+ U
EA
VOLTS
WATT B T
WB OUTPUT S
8 20 COM
EB
COM
9 21
VOLTS
EC VAR C O
VC OUTPUT U
N
10 22 + T
P
+
VOLTS
U
11 23 T
WATT C
WC OUTPUT S
EXTERNAL
AUX. POWER
12 24 COM
(opt.)
OUTPUT(S) 0 to + 1 mA
LOAD -015 INTO 0-5K OHMS LOAD
8.62
Wiring Diagrams
RLP Modular
Plug-In Transducers
WIRING DIAGRAMS
LINE LINE
A B C A B C
1
1 AMPS IA
IA AMPS 2
2
3
3 AMPS IC
IC AMPS 4
4
5
VOLTS E AB
5
6
E AB VOLTS
6
7
VOLTS E CB
7 8
E CB VOLTS
LOAD
8 9
EXTERNAL AUX. PWR.
LOAD AUX. POWER
9 10
VAR VAR OUTPUT * * OUTPUT LOAD RANGE
+
OUTPUTS
10 OUTPUT LOAD RANGE 11

0 to + 1 mA 0-10K OHMS * OUTPUT LOAD RANGE VAR OUTPUT * VAR
1-5 mA 0-5K OHMS
OUTPUTS
OUTPUT LOAD RANGE
11
+ 1-3-5 mA 0-5K OHMS 0 to + 1 mA 0-10K OHMS 12 +
4-20 mA 0-1250 OHMS 1-5 mA 0-5K OHMS
4-12-20 mA 0-1250 OHMS
WATT WATT OUTPUT * 1-3-5 mA
4-20 mA
0-5K OHMS
0-1250 OHMS 13 +
12 4-12-20 mA 0-1250 OHMS
*
WATT OUTPUT WATT
-003 14
-001
LINE LINE
A B C N A B C N
1
AMPS IA 1 13
2 AMPS IA
2 14
3
AMPS IB 3 15
4 AMPS IB * OUTPUT LOAD RANGE
OUTPUT LOAD RANGE
4 16 0 to + 1 mA 0-10K OHMS
5 1-5 mA 0-5K OHMS
1-3-5 mA 0-5K OHMS
AMPS IC 5 17 4-20 mA 0-1250 OHMS
6 IC 4-12-20 mA 0-1250 OHMS
AMPS
6 18
7
VOLTS E AN 7 19
8 VOLTS EAN
8 20
9
VOLTS E CN
9 21
10 VOLTS ECN EXTERNAL
AUX. POWER
LOAD 10 22
11
* OUTPUT LOAD RANGE VAR OUTPUT * VAR LOAD + +
11 23
OUTPUTS
OUTPUT LOAD RANGE

12 +
0 to + 1 mA 0-10K OHMS WATT OUTPUT * VAR OUTPUT *
1-5 mA 0-5K OHMS
12 24
1-3-5 mA
4-20 mA
0-5K OHMS
0-1250 OHMS
13 +
4-12-20 mA 0-1250 OHMS WATT OUTPUT * WATT
14 -011
-002
8.63
AMETEK
Transducers
8.64
Ametek DIN
Series
Transducers
The model number of each R-SERIES
transducers includes coded information
regarding the FUNCTION, INPUT
SIGNAL and OUTPUT. Determine the
desired FUNCTION and refer to the
Table of Contents to locate the page on
which the transducers that perform that
function are listed. The model numbers
are coded as explained below:
The first group of letters designate the

FUNCTION, such as “RV”, “RMSV”,
“RI”, “RW”, etc. Multifunction models
include a combination of letters denot-
ing specific functions, such as V, I, W.
For three-channel transducers, the digit MODEL DESCRIPTION
“3” appears after the FUNCTION code.
The second group of digits indicates RMSV-150-1M TRUE RMS voltage transducer with a
the full scale of the INPUT PARAME- 150 VAC input range and an output of
TER, i.e., VOLTAGE or current or 1 mADC.
BOTH.
RMSV3-150-4/20 Three-channel TRUE RMS voltage
For DC CURRENT and DC POWER
transducers, the input current is speci- transducer with 150 VAC input for each
fied as a voltage obtained from a DC channel and a 4/20 mADC output for
current shunt, (e.g., “.05” indicates 50 each channel.
Millivolt at full scale DC current).
RW-300-5-10 AC WATT transducer with 300 VAC input
Finally, the third group of digits indicates voltage, 5 AAC input current and 10 VDC
the output signal. One or two digits output.
indicates a DC VOLTAGE output. When
these are followed by “M”, the output RWDC-50-0.1-10 DC WATT transducer with 50VDC input
is in mADC. If the part number ends
voltage, 100 mADC input current and
with a “4/20”, the output is 4 to 20
Milliamperes DC. For explanation of the 10 VDC output.
codes of FREQUENCY transducers,
please refer to page 24. Several exam-
ples of transducers model numbers are
shown below:
8.65
AMETEK
Transducers
Theory of WHAT IS A TRUE RMS

TRANSDUCER?
A TRUE RMS converter is a specialized
electronic circuit that measures the
Operation incoming voltage or current signal,
amplifies it, multiplies the value by itself,
The voltages and currents in AC power
lines, when not affected by a complex computes the mean value of this
INTRODUCTION product, computes the square root
non-linear load, are basically sine waves
which represent voltage produced by a value of the mean, and provides an
The R-Series Transducers are designed output signal which is the true RMS
for accurately measuring electrical rotating generator. The average value of
a sine wave voltage is 70.7% of the value of the signal.
parameters of AC and DC electric net-
works. The transducers convert the peak value of the sine wave as shown
incoming voltage and current signals in the following diagram.
to a DC analog signal that can be
TRANSDUCERS with
processed by external monitoring and ANALOG OUTPUTS
logging circuits and provide a high volt-
age isolation between the input and the AC voltage and current transducers
output. True RMS AC voltage and cur- that provide an analog output are very
rent transducers provide output signals common in the process industry and in
that are TRUE RMS values of the input electrical switchboard systems. Such
parameters independent of the signal transducers provide either a DC voltage
waveshape. The averaging AC voltage or a DC current that can be read by
and current transducers provide output monitoring meters, loggers, oscillo-
signals which are proportional to the scope and recorders. A 4-20
average value of the incoming signal Milliampere DC output signal is com-
and are calibrated as the RMS of a sine In a network that has non-linear loads, monly used in control systems.
wave input signal. The AC WATT such as rectifiers, adjustable speed
transducers provide output signals that drives or switching power supplies that
represent REAL ACTIVE POWER for are used in many computers, the ISOLATION
any network power waveshapes of the voltage and the
factor. Other transducers are available current are distorted. The waveshapes To protect the operator and the equip-
for measuring KVAR, KVA and FRE- of a rectifier circuit are shown in the ment connected to a transducer from
QUENCY. following diagram. the high voltages present in electric
networks, electrical transducers incor-
The standard output options of the porate means of isolating the output
transducers are 0-10 VDC, 0-1 mADC, wires and the enclosure from the line
or 4-20 mADC. voltage. Isolating the input from the
output can be achieved either by
The current transformers are available means of transformers or by optical
with either a 1-Ampere or a 5-Ampere isolating circuits.
output at full scale.
The true value of a distorted wave is Electrical transducers can be connect-
not represented by an average reading ed directly to a power line or they can
instrument. The more accurate method be connected to voltage reducing
is the TRUE ROOT MEAN SQUARE, or transformers and current reducing
RMS, value as obtained by a TRUE transformers. Voltage reducing trans-
RMS converter. formers, known as Potential
Transformers (PTs), reduce the high
voltage of a power line to a level that is
compatible with the input range of the
transducer being used. Current trans-
formers, sometimes referred to as
“CTs”, reduce the high current in a
power line to a level that is compatible
with the transducer range or the meter
range. The output of many installed
metering CTs is 5 Amperes at full scale.
8.66
WHAT ARE POWER
TRANSDUCERS?
Monitoring the power delivered to a
load provides important information on
the power line. When dealing with a
purely linear resistive load, the power
consumed by the load can be obtained
by multiplying the voltage by the cur-
rent. In actual practice, however, loads
are rarely purely resistive. Practical
loads contain capacitive or inductive
components which cause a phase shift
between the voltage and the current.
The phase shift and the distortion are The Power Factor
taken into consideration by the Ametek
power transducers. The Cosine of the phase angle is referred to as the Power Factor. The Real Power
can, therefore, be obtained by:
The Real Power W = E x I x PF (4)
consumed by a load is :
Where PF is the Power Factor
W = E x I x COSINE q
(1)
WHAT ARE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS?
Where W= Real Power in Watts
E = Voltage in Volts The CURRENT ratio of a standard magnetic-core transformer, ignoring losses, is
I = Current in Amperes defined by the equation:
q = Phase Angle
I2 = (N1/N2) x I1
The Apparent Power is the product of
the voltage and the current: Where I1 = Input current, I2 = Output current
N1 = Number of turns of primary coil
VA = E x I (2) N2 = Number of turns of secondary coil
The Reactive Power is expressed as: An AC current transformer is a special kind of

transformer which does not have a primary coil. The conductor whose current is to
VAR = E x I x SINE q be measured acts as the primary coil when it is placed inside the magnetic path of
(3) the core.
The Power Triangle The signal obtained from an AC current transformer has the same waveshape as the
current being measured. However, current transformers introduce measurement
The relationship between the apparent errors of amplitude, phase and waveshape due to frequency range limitations.
power, the real power, the reactive
power and the phase angle can be dis- A current transformer converts the primary current of the conductor to a current out-
played as shown below: put whose value depends on N2. Using equation (1), the output current can be com-
puted if N2 is known. If N2 is 1000 turns, the output current is 1/1000 of the primary
current, which can be expressed as 1 Milliampere per Ampere. Such a current trans-
former is referred to as having a ratio of 1000:1. The output of this CT can be read
by any AC ammeter whose input impedance is compatible with the specifications of
the current transformer.
8.67
AMETEK
Transducers
MEASURING POWER GLOSSARY OF TERMS

The active power in Watts in a single-phase electric network Ampere: The unit of measuring alternating (AC) or direct (DC)
with a linear load can be obtained by the electric current.
following equation:
Volt: The unit of measuring alternating (AC) or direct (DC)
W = E x I x PF electric potential force (voltage).
For a resistive load, the Power Factor is 1.0. For reactive RMS: Root Mean Square is the square root of the sum of the
loads, such as motors and compressors, the voltage and the squares of instantaneous amplitudes of a waveform. It is the
current are not in phase, and the power factor is always less effective value of an AC waveform that produces heat equiva-
than 1.0. The Ametek transducers and power line monitors lent to a DC of the same value.
perform this computation internally. They measure the voltage
either directly or by the use of a step-down transformer. The Power: Electrical energy expended per unit time.
current is measured either directly or by using a current
transformer. Apparent Power: (in VA) is the product of the voltage and
the current delivered to a load.
In a balanced three-phase WYE network, where all three loads
are identical, only one current clamp or current transformer is Real Power: (in Watts) is the component of the
needed, and the power is given by the following equation: apparent power that represents true work.
W = 3 x Va x I1 x PF Reactive Power: (in VAR) is the component of the apparent

power which performs no real work.
Where Va = Vb = Vc = Phase-to-Neutral voltage
I1 = I2 =I3 = Phase current Frequency: (in Hertz) the number of periods of a
waveform that occurs in one second.
If the loads are unbalanced, three current transformers are
required, and the following equation applies: Power Line Frequency: The fundamental frequency of a
power system (60 Hz in the US, 50 Hz in many other countries).
W = (Va x I1 x PF1)+(Vb x I2 x PF2)+(Vc x I3 x PF3)
Transformer: A device that transfers a voltage (PT) or a
In a balanced DELTA network, again only one current trans- current (CT) using a coupling of electromagnetic flux fields of
former is needed, and the power is: its windings.
W = 3 x Va-b x I1 x PF Power Factor: The ratio of Real Power to the Apparent

Where Power (W/VA).
Va-b = Vb-c = Vc-a = Phase-to-Phase voltage
I1 = I2 = I3 = Phase current Single-Phase: Electric network in which only one phase of
current is available in a two-conductor or a
If the load is unbalanced, either two or three CTs are three-conductor circuit.
required. The power of each phase must be computed and
summed to obtain the total network power. Delta Connection: Electric network using a 3-phase trans-
former where the windings form an electrical triangle whose
Non-linear loads, such as SCR control circuits and switching corners are the connections to the 3-phase load.
power supplies, cause distortion of the currents and the volt-
ages, and they introduce harmonic frequencies to the power Wye ("Y") Connection: Electric network using a 3-phase
line. Under these conditions, PTs and CTs must have a wide transformer with all phase windings connected to a common
frequency response so that the harmonics of the line fre- (Neutral) point.
quency are not eliminated from the power computation. In
addition, the power transducers must be capable of process- Accuracy Class: The percent of the reading of an
ing distorted waveforms caused by non-linear loads. instrument plus a constant.
8.68
EXAMPLES OF THE R-SERIES TRANSDUCERS
SIZE A SIZE B SIZE C

TRANSDUCER TRANSDUCER TRANSDUCER
SIZE D SIZE E
TRANSDUCER TRANSDUCER
THE R-SERIES TRANSDUCERS ARE PACKAGED IN

ENCLOSURES DESIGNED FOR DIN-RAIL MOUNTING.
THE DIMENSIONS OF EACH MODEL ARE INCLUDED ON
THE FOLLOWING PAGE.
THESE ENCLOSURES HAVE EXTERNAL AND INTERNAL

BARRIERS BETWEEN TERMINALS TO PROVIDE ISOLATION
AND TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL TOUCHING OF LIVE
VOLTAGES THAT MAY BE PRESENT ON THE TERMINALS.
OPTIONAL SNAP-ON TERMINAL COVERS ARE AVAILABLE

TO PROVIDE ADDED PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRICAL
SHOCK AND SHORTING.
OPTIONAL TERMINAL COVERS
8.69
AMETEK
Transducers
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE R-SERIES TRANSDUCERS

SIZE A SIZE B SIZE C
WIDTH: 1.77" (45.0 mm) WIDTH: 2.17" (55.0 mm) WIDTH: 2.95" (75.0 mm)
HEIGHT: 2.9" (75.0 mm) HEIGHT: 2.9" (75.0 mm) HEIGHT: 2.9" (75.0 mm)
DEPTH: 4.4" (112 mm) DEPTH: 4.4" (112 mm) DEPTH: 4.4" (112 mm)
No. of TERMINALS: 10 No. of TERMINALS: 12 No. of TERMINALS: 16
SIZE D SIZE E
WIDTH: 3.94" (100.0 mm) WIDTH: 5.9" (150.0 mm)

HEIGHT: 2.9" (75.0 mm) HEIGHT: 2.9" (75.0 mm)
DEPTH: 4.49" (114 mm) DEPTH: 4.4" (112 mm)
No. of TERMINALS: 20 No. of TERMINALS: 32
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
ENCLOSURE TYPE: TERMINALS:
Standard 35mm DIN Rail TERMINAL PRESSURE PLATES:
and/or panel mounting holes Zinc Plated, Chromated Steel
HOUSING: ABS TERMINAL SCREWS:
PANEL: Polycarbonate, 10% Glass Filled For Flat-head or Phillips Screwdrivers
COLOR: Light Gray Phillips Zinc Plated, Chromated Steel
CONNECTOR CONTACT:
Tin Plated Bronze
TERMINAL COVERS ARE OPTIONAL
8.70
AC VOLTAGE TRANSDUCERS RV
0.5% ACCURACY
SPECIFICATIONS Applications and Features

INPUT SIGNAL RANGE: FULL SCALE - CONTINUOUS AVERAGE READING TRANSDUCERS.
50% OVERRANGE - 3 MINUTES
(600 Volts Maximum) FOR USE IN INEXPENSIVE VOLTAGE
OUTPUT SIGNAL: AVERAGE (Calibrated as RMS value MONITORING.
of a sinewave)
OUTPUT OPTIONS: 0-10 VDC;
0-1 or 4-20 mADC
LINE FREQUENCY: 50-400 Hz
ACCURACY AT 60 Hz: 0.5% of full Scale For Sine Wave
OUTPUT RIPPLE: 1% Peak-to-Peak Maximum
ISOLATION TEST: 1 kV - 1 MINUTE
TEMPERATURE RANGE: 0 to +50 Deg. C
STORAGE TEMPERATURE: -20 TO +80 Deg. C
POWER: 120 VAC 50/60 Hz
ENCLOSURE: DIN RAIL TYPE 46277
SIZE A: 1.77" x 2.9" x 4.4"
SELECTION CHART OF OUTPUT OPTIONS

MODEL NUMBER RV-
INPUT 10 VDC P/N 1 mADC P/N 4-20 P/N
mADC
100 VAC 100-10 1083-000 100-1M 1083-004 100-4/20 1083-008
150 VAC 150-10 1083-001 150-1M 1083-005 150-4/20 1083-009
300 VAC 300-10 1083-002 300-1M 1083-006 300-4/20 1083-010
600 VAC 600-10 1083-003 600-1M 1083-007 600-4/20 1083-011
8.71
AMETEK
Transducers
3-CHANNEL AC VOLTAGE TRANSDUCERS RV3

0.5% ACCURACY

INPUT SIGNAL RANGE: FULL SCALE - CONTINUOUS
AVERAGE READING TRANSDUCERS.
(600 Volts Maximum)
FOR USE IN INEXPENSIVE VOLTAGE
OUTPUT SIGNALS: AVERAGE (Calibrated as RMS value
MONITORING.
of a sinewave)
One output for each channel
OUTPUT OPTIONS: 0-10 VDC
0-1 or 4-20 mADC
ACCURACY AT 60 Hz: 0.5% of full Scale For Sine Wave
SIZE E: 5.9" x 2.9" x 4.4"

MODEL NUMBER RV3-
mADC
100 VAC 100-10 1083-012 100-1M 1083-016 100-4/20 1083-020
150 VAC 150-10 1083-013 150-1M 1083-017 150-4/20 1083-021
300 VAC 300-10 1083-014 300-1M 1083-018 300-4/20 1083-022
600 VAC 600-10 1083-015 600-1M 1083-019 600-4/20 1083-023
8.72
TRUE RMS AC VOLTAGE TRANSDUCERS RMSV
0.5% ACCURACY
SPECIFICATIONS
Applications and Features
TRUE RMS TRANSDUCERS.
(600 Volts Maximum)
FOR NON-SINUSOIDAL VOLTAGE
OUTPUT SIGNAL: TRUE RMS
MONITORING.
0-1 or 4-20 mADC
ACCURACY at 60 Hz: 0.5% of Full Scale
STORAGE TEMPERATURE: -20 to +80 Deg. C
SIZE A: 1.77" x 2.9" x 4.4"

MODEL NUMBER RMSV-
mADC
100 VAC 100-10 1083-024 100-1M 1083-028 100-4/20 1083-032
150 VAC 150-10 1083-025 150-1M 1083-029 150-4/20 1083-033
300 VAC 300-10 1083-026 300-1M 1083-030 300-4/20 1083-034
600 VAC 600-10 1083-027 600-1M 1083-031 600-4/20 1083-035
8.73
AMETEK
Transducers
3-CHANNEL RMS AC VOLTAGE TRANSDUCERS RMSV3

0.5% Accuracy
SPECIFICATIONS
TRUE RMS TRANSDUCERS.
(600 Volts Maximum)
FOR NON-SINUSOIDAL VOLTAGE
THREE OUTPUT SIGNALS: TRUE RMS
MONITORING.
0-1 or 4-20 mADC
ACCURACY CLASS: 0.5% of Full Scale
SIZE E: 5.9" x 2.9" x 4.4"

MODEL NUMBER RMSV3-
mADC
100 VAC 100-10 1083-036 100-1M 1083-040 100-4/20 1083-044
150 VAC 150-10 1083-037 150-1M 1083-041 150-4/20 1083-045
300 VAC 300-10 1083-038 300-1M 1083-042 300-4/20 1083-046
600 VAC 600-10 1083-039 600-1M 1083-043 600-4/20 1083-047
8.74
AC CURRENT TRANSDUCERS RI
0.5% ACCURACY

OUTPUT SIGNAL: AVERAGE. CALIBRATED AS RMS FOR INEXPENSIVE CURRENT
VALUE OF A SINE WAVE MONITORING.
0-1 or 4-20 mADC
ACCURACY at 60 Hz: 0.5% of Full Scale For Sine Wave
SIZE A: 1.77" x 2.9" x 4.4"

MODEL NUMBER RI-
mADC
1 AAC 1-10 1083-048 1-1M 1083-051 1-4/20 1083-054
5 AAC 5-10 1083-049 5-1M 1083-052 5-4/20 1083-055
10 AAC 10-10 1083-050 10-1M 1083-053 10-4/20 1083-056
8.75
AMETEK
Transducers
3-CHANNEL AC CURRENT TRANSDUCERS RI3

0.5% ACCURACY

THREE OUTPUT SIGNALS: AVERAGE. CALIBRATED AS RMS FOR INEXPENSIVE CURRENT
VALUE OF A SINE WAVE MONITORING.
0-1 or 4-20 mADC
ACCURACY CLASS: 0.5% of Full Scale For Sine Wave
SIZE E: 5.9" x 2.9" x 4.4"

MODEL NUMBER RI3-
mADC
1 AAC 1-10 1083-057 1-1M 1083-060 1-4/20 1083-063
5 AAC 5-10 1083-058 5-1M 1083-061 5-4/20 1083-064
10 AAC 10-10 1083-059 10-1M 1083-062 10-4/20 1083-065
8.76
TRUE RMS AC CURRENT TRANSDUCERS RMSI
0.5% ACCURACY

INPUT SIGNAL RANGE: FULL SCALE - CONTINUOUS TRUE RMS TRANSDUCERS
OUTPUT SIGNAL: TRUE RMS FOR NON-SINUSOIDAL CURRENT
OUTPUT OPTIONS: 0-10 VDC; MONITORING.
0-1 or 4-20 mADC
ACCURACY at 60 Hz: 0.5% of Full Scale
SIZE A: 1.77" x 2.9" x 4.4"

MODEL NUMBER RMSI-
mADC
1 AAC 1-10 1083-066 1-1M 1083-069 1-4/20 1083-072
5 AAC 5-10 1083-067 5-1M 1083-070 5-4/20 1083-073
10 AAC 10-10 1083-068 10-1M 1083-071 10-4/20 1083-074
8.77
AMETEK
Transducers
3-CHANNEL RMS CURRENT TRANSDUCERS RMSI3

0.5% ACCURACY

INPUT SIGNAL RANGE: FULL SCALE - CONTINUOUS TRUE RMS TRANSDUCERS.
THREE OUTPUT SIGNALS: TRUE RMS FOR NON-SINUSOIDAL CURRENT
OUTPUT OPTIONS: 0-10 VDC MONITORING.
0-1 or 4-20 mADC
SIZE C: 5.9" x 2.9" x 4.4"

MODEL NUMBER RMSI3-
mADC
1 AAC 1-10 1083-075 1-1M 1083-078 1-4/20 1083-081
5 AAC 5-10 1083-076 5-1M 1083-079 5-4/20 1083-082
10 AAC 10-10 1083-077 10-1M 1083-080 10-4/20 1083-083
8.78
8.78
AC WATT TRANSDUCERS RW
0.5% ACCURACY

INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE: FULL SCALE - CONTINUOUS
FOR NON-SINUSOIDAL POWER
50% OVERRANGE - 3 SECONDS
MONITORING.
(600 Volts Maximum)
INPUT CURRENT RANGE: FULL SCALE - CONTINUOUS
OUTPUT PROPORTIONAL TO ACTIVE
POWER, WHERE:
LINE FREQUENCY: 50/60 Hz
W = E x I x POWER FACTOR
OUTPUT SIGNAL: TRUE ACTIVE POWER (WATTS)
OUTPUT OPTIONS: 0-10 VDC; 0-1 or 4-20 mADC
OUTPUT IS INDEPENDENT OF VOLTAGE
OR CURRENT WAVEFORMS.
SIZE B: 2.17" x 2.9" x 4.4"

VOLTAGE CURRENT MODEL NUMBER RW-
INPUT INPUT 10 VDC P/N 1 mADC P/N 4-20 mADC P/N
150 VAC 1 AAC 150-1-10 1083-084 150-1-1M 1083-090 150-1-4/20 1083-096
150 VAC 5 AAC 150-5-10 1083-085 150-5-1M 1083-091 150-5-4/20 1083-097
300 VAC 1 AAC 300-1-10 1083-086 300-1-1M 1083-092 300-1-4/20 1083-098
300 VAC 5 AAC 300-5-10 1083-087 300-5-1M 1083-093 300-5-4/20 1083-099
600 VAC 1 AAC 600-1-10 1083-088 600-1-1M 1083-094 600-1-4/20 1083-100
600 VAC 5 AAC 600-5-10 1083-089 600-5-1M 1083-095 600-5-4/20 1083-101
8.79
AMETEK
Transducers
AC WATT TRANSDUCERS – 3-PHASE, DELTA RW32

0.5% ACCURACY

MONITORING IN 3-PHASE 3-WIRE
(600 Volts Maximum)
INSTALLATIONS.
POWER.
OUTPUT SIGNAL: TRUE ACTIVE 3-PHASE POWER
OUTPUT IS INDEPENDENT OF VOLT-
AGE OR CURRENT WAVEFORMS.
SIZE E: 5.9" x 2.9" x 4.4"

VOLTAGE CURRENT MODEL NUMBER RW32-
INPUT INPUT
10 VDC P/N 1 mADC P/N 4-20 mADC P/N
150 VAC 1 AAC 150-1-10 1083-120 150-1-1M 1083-126 150-1-4/20 1083-132
150 VAC 5 AAC 150-5-10 1083-121 150-5-1M 1083-127 150-5-4/20 1083-133
300 VAC 1 AAC 300-1-10 1083-122 300-1-1M 1083-128 300-1-4/20 1083-134
300 VAC 5 AAC 300-5-10 1083-123 300-5-1M 1083-129 300-5-4/20 1083-135
600 VAC 1 AAC 600-1-10 1083-124 600-1-1M 1083-130 600-1-4/20 1083-136
600 VAC 5 AAC 600-5-10 1083-125 600-5-1M 1083-131 600-5-4/20 1083-137
8.80
AC WATT TRANSDUCERS – 3-PHASE, WYE RW43
0.5% ACCURACY

MONITORING IN 3-PHASE 4-WIRE
(600 Volts Maximum)
INSTALLATIONS.
POWER.
OUTPUT SIGNAL: TRUE ACTIVE POWER
OUTPUT IS INDEPENDENT OF VOLTAGE
OR CURRENT WAVEFORMS.
SIZE E: 5.9" x 2.9" x 4.4"

VOLTAGE CURRENT MODEL NUMBER RW43-
INPUT INPUT
10 VDC P/N 1 mADC P/N 4-20 mADC P/N
150 VAC 1 AAC 150-1-10 1083-138 150-1-1M 1083-142 150-1-4/20 1083-146
150 VAC 5 AAC 150-5-10 1083-139 150-5-1M 1083-143 150-5-4/20 1083-147
300 VAC 1 AAC 300-1-10 1083-140 300-1-1M 1083-144 300-1-4/20 1083-148
300 VAC 5 AAC 300-5-10 1083-141 300-5-1M 1083-145 300-5-4/20 1083-149
8.81
AMETEK
Transducers
AC VOLTAGE and CURRENT TRANSDUCERS RVI

0.5% ACCURACY TWO OUTPUTS: ONE for AC VOLTS and ONE FOR AC AMPERES

INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE: FULL SCALE - CONTINUOUS FOR MONITORING AC VOLTAGE and
50% OVERRANGE - 3 SECONDS AC CURRENT SIMULTANEOUSLY.
(600 Volts Maximum)
INPUT CURRENT RANGE: FULL SCALE - CONTINUOUS AVERAGE READING TRANSDUCERS.
LINE FREQUENCY: 50 - 400 Hz
TWO OUTPUT SIGNALS: AVERAGE. CALIBRATED AS RMS
VALUE OF SINE WAVE
Both channels the same
SIZE B: 2.17" x 2.9" x 4.4"
SIZE C for 4-20 mADC: 2.95" x 2.9" x 4.4"

VOLTAGE CURRENT MODEL NUMBER RVI-
150 VAC 1 AAC 150-1-10 1083-150 150-1-1M 1083-156 150-1-4/20 1083-162
150 VAC 5 AAC 150-5-10 1083-151 150-5-1M 1083-157 150-5-4/20 1083-163
300 VAC 1 AAC 300-1-10 1083-152 300-1-1M 1083-158 300-1-4/20 1083-164
300 VAC 5 AAC 300-5-10 1083-153 300-5-1M 1083-159 300-5-4/20 1083-165
600 VAC 1 AAC 600-1-10 1083-154 600-1-1M 1083-160 600-1-4/20 1083-166
600 VAC 5 AAC 600-5-10 1083-155 600-5-1M 1083-161 600-5-4/20 1083-167
8.82
8.82
RMS VOLTAGE and CURRENT TRANSDUCERS RMSVI
0.5% ACCURACY TWO OUTPUTS: ONE for RMSVOLTS and ONE FOR RMS AMPERES
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Applications and Features

INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE: FULL SCALE - CONTINUOUS FOR MONITORING NON-SINUSOIDAL
50% OVERRANGE - 3 SECONDS AC VOLTAGE and AC CURRENT
(600 Volts Maximum) SIMULTANEOUSLY.
50% OVERRANGE - 3 SECONDS TRUE RMS TRANSDUCERS.
TWO OUTPUT SIGNALS: TRUE RMS
(Independent of input waveforms)
Both channels the same
ACCURACY at 60 Hz 0.5% of Full Scale
SIZE B: 2.17" x 2.9" x 4.4"
SIZE C for 20 or 4-20 mADC: 2.95" x 2.9" x 4.4"

VOLTAGE CURRENT MODEL NUMBER RMSVI-
150 VAC 1 AAC 150-1-10 1083-168 150-1-1M 1083-174 150-1-4/20 1083-180
150 VAC 5 AAC 150-5-10 1083-169 150-5-1M 1083-175 150-5-4/20 1083-181
300 VAC 1 AAC 300-1-10 1083-170 300-1-1M 1083-176 300-1-4/20 1083-182
300 VAC 5 AAC 300-5-10 1083-171 300-5-1M 1083-177 300-5-4/20 1083-183
600 VAC 1 AAC 600-1-10 1083-172 600-1-1M 1083-178 600-1-4/20 1083-184
600 VAC 5 AAC 600-5-10 1083-173 600-5-1M 1083-179 600-5-4/20 1083-185
8.83
AMETEK
Transducers
AC KW, VOLTAGE AND CURRENT TRANSDUCERSR WVI

0.5% ACCURACY THREE OUTPUTS: WATTS, RMS VOLTS and RMS AMPERES

FOR MEASURING TRUE KW ACTIVE
POWER, TRUE RMS VOLTAGE and TRUE
(600 Volts Maximum)
RMS CURRENT SIMULTANEOUSLY.
THREE OUTPUT SIGNALS: W out: REAL ACTIVE POWER
V out: TRUE RMS
I out: TRUE RMS
OUTPUT OPTIONS: 0-10, VDC; 0-1 or 4-20 mADC
All channels the same
ACCURACY CLASS 0.5% of Full Scale

SIZE C: 2.95" x 2.9" x 4.4"
SIZE E for 4-20 mADC: 5.9" x 2.9" x 4.4"

VOLTAGE CURRENT MODEL NUMBER RWVI-
150 VAC 1 AAC 150-1-10 1083-186 150-1-1M 1083-192 150-1-4/20 1083-198
150 VAC 5 AAC 150-5-10 1083-187 150-5-1M 1083-193 150-5-4/20 1083-199
300 VAC 1 AAC 300-1-10 1083-188 300-1-1M 1083-194 300-1-4/20 1083-200
300 VAC 5 AAC 300-5-10 1083-189 300-5-1M 1083-195 300-5-4/20 1083-201
600 VAC 1 AAC 600-1-10 1083-190 600-1-1M 1083-196 600-1-4/20 1083-202
600 VAC 5 AAC 600-5-10 1083-191 600-5-1M 1083-197 600-5-4/20 1083-203
8.84
AC KVA, VOLTAGE AND CURRENT TRANSDUCERSR VA
0.5% ACCURACY THREE OUTPUTS: VA, RMS VOLTAGE and RMS CURRENT

INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE: FULL SCALE - CONTINUOUS FOR MEASURING KVA APPARENT
50% OVERRANGE - 3 SECONDS POWER, TRUE RMS VOLTAGE and TRUE
(600 Volts Maximum) RMS CURRENT SIMULTANEOUSLY.
THREE OUTPUT SIGNALS: VA out: APPARENT POWER
V out: TRUE RMS
I out: TRUE RMS

SIZE C: 2.95" x 2.9" x 4.4"
SIZE E for 20 OR 4-20 mADC: 5.9" x 2.9" x 4.4"

VOLTAGE CURRENT MODEL NUMBER RVA-
150 VAC 1 AAC 150-1-10 1083-204 150-1-1M 1083-210 150-1-4/20 1083-216
150 VAC 5 AAC 150-5-10 1083-205 150-5-1M 1083-211 150-5-4/20 1083-217
300 VAC 1 AAC 300-1-10 1083-206 300-1-1M 1083-212 300-1-4/20 1083-218
300 VAC 5 AAC 300-5-10 1083-207 300-5-1M 1083-213 300-5-4/20 1083-219
600 VAC 1 AAC 600-1-10 1083-208 600-1-1M 1083-214 600-1-4/20 1083-220
600 VAC 5 AAC 600-5-10 1083-209 600-5-1M 1083-215 600-5-4/20 1083-221
8.85
AMETEK
Transducers
AC VAR, VOLTAGE & CURRENT TRANSDUCERS RVAR

0.5% ACCURACY THREE OUTPUTS: VAR, RMS VOLTAGE and RMS CURRENT
SPECIFICATIONS
50% OVERRANGE - 3 SECONDS FOR MEASURING KVAR REACTIVE
(600 Volts Maximum) POWER, TRUE RMS VOLTAGE and TRUE
INPUT CURRENT RANGE: FULL SCALE - CONTINUOUS RMS CURRENT SIMULTANEOUSLY.
THREE OUTPUT SIGNALS: VAR out: REACTIVE POWER
V out: TRUE RMS
I out: TRUE RMS

SIZE C: 2.95" x 2.9" x 4.4"
SIZE E for 4-20 mADC: 5.9" x 2.9" x 4.4"

VOLTAGE CURRENT MODEL NUMBER RVAR-
150 VAC 1 AAC 150-1-10 1083-222 150-1-1M 1083-228 150-1-4/20 1083-234
150 VAC 5 AAC 150-5-10 1083-223 150-5-1M 1083-229 150-5-4/20 1083-235
300 VAC 1 AAC 300-1-10 1083-224 300-1-1M 1083-230 300-1-4/20 1083-236
300 VAC 5 AAC 300-5-10 1083-225 300-5-1M 1083-231 300-5-4/20 1083-237
600 VAC 1 AAC 600-1-10 1083-226 600-1-1M 1083-232 600-1-4/20 1083-238
600 VAC 5 AAC 600-5-10 1083-227 600-5-1M 1083-233 600-5-4/20 1083-239
8.86
FREQUENCY TRANSDUCERS RF
0.5% ACCURACY

INPUT SIGNAL RANGE: FULL SCALE - CONTINUOUS FOR MEASURING POWER LINE
50% OVERRANGE - 3 MINUTES FREQUENCY AND WIDE RANGE
(600 Volts Maximum) FREQUENCY.
OUTPUT SIGNAL PROPORTIONAL TO FREQUENCY
OUTPUT OPTIONS: 0-10 VDC; 0-1 or 4-20 mADC OUTPUT IS PROPORTIONAL TO THE
ACCURACY CLASS: 0.5% of Full Scale INPUT FREQUENCY.
SIZE B: 2.17" x 2.9" x 4.4"
Input Voltage Range

80-150 V, 120 V
Nominal

MODEL NUMBER RF-
Frequency 10 VDC P/N 1 mADC P/N 4-20 mADC P/N
Range
45 to 55 Hz 50-120-10 1083-240 50-120-1M 1083-249 50-120-4/20 1083-258
55 to 65 Hz 60-120-10 1083-241 60-120-1M 1083-250 60-120-4/20 1083-259
8.87
AMETEK
Transducers
DC VOLTAGE TRANSDUCERS RVDC

0.5% ACCURACY

DC VOLTAGE MONITORING WHERE
INPUT-OUTPUT ISOLATION IS
(600 Volts Maximum)
IMPERATIVE.
OUTPUT SIGNAL: PROPORTIONAL TO INPUT DC VOLTS
SIZE B: 2.17" x 2.9" x 4.4"

MODEL NUMBER RVDC-
INPUT 10 VDC P/N 1 mADC P/N 4-20 mADC P/N
1 VDC 1-10 1083-267 1-1M 1083-273 1-4/20 1083-279
10 VDC 10-10 1083-268 10-1M 1083-274 10-4/20 1083-280
60 VDC 60-10 1083-269 60-1M 1083-275 60-4/20 1083-281
100 VDC 100-10 1083-270 100-1M 1083-276 100-4/20 1083-282
150 VDC 150-10 1083-271 150-1M 1083-277 150-4/20 1083-283
300 VDC 300-10 1083-272 300-1M 1083-278 300-4/20 1083-284
8.88
DC CURRENT TRANSDUCERS RIDC
0.5% ACCURACY
SPECIFICATIONS
50% OVERRANGE - 3 MINUTES FOR DC CURRENT SHUNT
OUTPUT SIGNAL: PROPORTIONAL TO DC INPUT SIGNAL MONITORING WHERE
OUTPUT OPTIONS: 0-10 VDC; 0-1 or 4-20 mADC INPUT-OUTPUT ISOLATION IS
ACCURACY CLASS: 0.5% of Full Scale IMPERATIVE.
SIZE B: 2.17" x 2.9" x 4.4"

MODEL NUMBER RIDC-
INPUT 10 VDC P/N 1 mADC P/N 4-20 mADC P/N
50 mVDC 0.05-10 1083-285 0.05-1M 1083-288 0.05-4/20 1083-291
100 mVDC 0.1-10 1083-286 0.1-1M 1083-289 0.1-4/20 1083-292
8.89
AMETEK
Transducers
DC WATT TRANSDUCERS RWDC

0.5% ACCURACY

INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE: FULL SCALE - CONTINUOUS FOR MEASURING DC POWER.
INPUT CURRENT RANGE: FULL SCALE - CONTINUOUS TRANSDUCER MULTIPLIES THE DC
50% OVERRANGE - 3 SECONDS LINE VOLTAGE BY THE DC VOLTAGE
FREQUENCY RANGE: DC to 2,000 Hz OBTAINED FROM A CURRENT SHUNT
OUTPUT SIGNAL: DC POWER (WATTS)
ACCURACY CLASS: .5% of Full Scale
SIZE B: 2.17" x 2.9" x 4.4"
8.90
DPMS port to use with the DPMS-D exter-
nal display. It gets even better! The
Digital DPMS also supports TLC. In those
applications where accuracy is
Programmable important, but it may not be practi-
cal to install equipment at the point
Measurement you wish to actually measure, use
System TLC to correct for inaccuracies
brought on by transformer and line
With traditional transducers, one losses.
transducer is required for each
measurement that you need. With Check the specs! You will find the
the DPMS, one transducer can DPMS to be highly accurate,
make multiple measurements. In durable, flexible, and economical.
fact, you can take up to 34 mea- The future of transducers has
surements simultaneously with just arrived, and it’s the DPMS – Digital
one DPMS unit! This means you Programmable Measurement
can often specify one DPMS System from Ametek Power
instead of multiple transducers. Instruments, the world leader in
With direct communications capa- transducer technology!
bility, think of the savings that can The advanced
be achieved in every aspect of a technology of the DPMS
makes it easy to set up and configure.
new project. Not only is it easier for
Engineering, the DPMS will also
save on wiring and valuable panel
space.
Fully Programmable Digital
& Analog Transducer with
The DPMS can be configured to Built-in Communications
the exact measurement you need. • Multi-Function Transducer is
Configuration is done easily with the perfect solution for many varied
included PC configuration software, applications
or you can request that your DPMS
• Configured by User (or factory
come pre-configured from the fac-
as needed)
tory. With optional voltage ranges,
there is virtually no transducer • Programmable as 2, 2.5 or 3
application that a DPMS can’t fill. elements
The DPMS ships with configuration • Configurable Analog Outputs
The DPMS makes an excellent software to get you up and running and Digital Contact & Alarm
back up strategy. Rather than quickly. Outputs
stocking numerous types and
• Excellent for replacement
quantities of back-up transducers,
strategy: One unit replaces
you can now stock far fewer DPMS
many makes and models
units, which can be quickly and
easily configured to your replace- • Highly Accurate
ment needs. • Excellent for back-up strategy:
One unit on shelf backs up many
One of the most exciting innovations varied units in the field.
of the DPMS is its communication
• Programmable Communications
capabilities. With MODBUS and
of MODBUS and DNP 3.0
DNP as standard protocols, connec-
tions have never been simpler. The • True RMS
RS-485 port allows the transducer • Remote Display Option available
to communicate directly to your • Space Saving Size 3.75" x
equipment through a multi-drop 5.375" x 6.5"
configuration, saving you valuable Easily change transducer settings
input ports and the need for multi- and outputs with DPMSTalk configu- • Transformer Loss Compensation
plexors. All this and also a separate ration software. (TLC)
8.91
AMETEK
Transducers
DPMS Order Configuration Sheet

A base DPMS is standard equipped with: a nominal potential of 120V, nominal current of 5 Amps, no analog outputs,
no digital outputs, and communications kit for programming the DPMS. The communications kit is standard and
includes DPMSTalk programming software and a RS-232/485 adapter with cable.
Additional Options:
Nominal voltage input: P2 = 277V Fill in the order codes as shown below to create model
P3 = 480V number:
P4 = 69V.
Analog output option: A1 = 0-1mA Example:
A2 = 4-20mA. DPMS-P3-A1-D1 is a DPMS at 480V with 1mA analog
Digital output option: D1 = Contact outputs. outputs, digital contact outputs, and with RS-232/485
Programming Kit: R0 = Without Programming kit adapter cable and DPMSTalk configuration software.
consisting of DPMSTalk
Configuration Software and
RS-232/485 adapter cable
Digital Power Measurement System Outputs

3 Channel Analog:
Specifications All (3) channels are independently configured and
scaled with DPMSTalk software
Programmable Configuration Option A1: 0 to ± 1 ma, maximum 10 volt compliance
2 element for 3 phase 3 wire delta Option A2: 4 to 20 ma, maximum 12 volt compliance
2 1/2 element for 3 phase 4 wire wye Response Time </= 200 mS
3 element for 3 phase 4 wire wye 6 Channel Digital – Option D1:
All (6) channels are independently configured and
Measured and/or calculated quantities scaled with DPMSTalk software as KYZ contacts for
Watts – per phase and total energy measurements or as high/low threshold alarms.
Vars – per phase and total Solid state rated 50 ma @135 VAC/VDC with less than
Voltage – phase to neutral (4 wire), phase to phase (3 wire) 5 volt drop
Current – phase and neutral (calculated) 54,000 CPH maximum
Volt Amps – per phase and total
Frequency Environment
Distortion – Total Harmonic Distortion Operating Temperature range: -20° to +70°C
of each voltage & current Storage Temperature: -40° to +85°C
Watthours – delivered and received Humidity: 20 to 90% RH non condensing
Varhours – delivered and received RFI: <1% when subjected to 10 V/M @ 1 meter
Power Factor – per phase and system ESD: IEC 801-2 level 3 (8 kV) with no damage
Surge Withstand: ANSI/IEEE C37.90, IEC 801-4 Class 4
Inputs Isolation: 2500 VAC RMS from Input/Output/Power/Case
Current Nominal – 5 amps 500 VAC RMS between digital outputs
Operating Range – 0 to 10 amps Communication/Configuration ports share common
Burden per Element = 0.25 VA with the analog outputs
Voltage Nominal – 120 volts
Operating Range – 85 to 150 volts Influences Affecting Accuracy
Optional: 69 VAC Nominal, Range 50-85 Temperature: Conversion only: 75 ppm/°C
277 VAC Nominal, Range 180-320 VAC Including analog outputs: 125 ppm/°C
480 VAC Nominal, Range 310-550 VAC Long Term Stability: 0.1% of rated output/year,
Burden per Element: 0.05 VA noncumulative
Frequency 45 to 65 Hertz Humidity: less than 0.05% of rated output
Sample Rate 128 Samples/Cycle over the operating range
Power Supply 95 to 265 VAC @ 50/60 Hz or DC
6 VA Maximum @ 120 V Mechanical
Size: 3.75" x 5.375" x 6.5"
Measurement/Calculation Accuracy Weight: 2.6 lbs. (1.2 kg.)
Volts, Amps, Watts, Vars: 0.2%
Watthours, Varhours: 0.2% Communications
Neutral current: 0.75% Hardware Protocol: RS-232 (full duplex)
Volt Amps: 0.5% or RS-485 (half duplex)
Power Factor: ±0.008* (rated VA/input VA) Programmable Software Protocol
Analog output: ±0.1% Modbus: RTU or ASCII Mode
DNP 3.0
8.92
DPMS-D
Optional Digital
Display
Display
• 4 line x 20 character vacuum
fluorescent display allows Unit ID
and 3 simultaneous measurements
to be viewed
• Character height 0.19 inch
• Color-blue
• 3 key switches allow selection of
data to be viewed
• 12 standard display screens and
Power Requirements
4 custom display screens
• 95 to 256 VAC @ 50/60 Hz or DC
• Displays in primary units
(CT&PT ratios configured in DPMS)
Mechanical
Quantities available for display • Panel cutout 4.38 x 3.75 inches
• Watts – per phase and total • Weight 1.4 lbs. (0.64 kg.)
• Vars – per phase and total
• Watthours – delivered and Environmental
received • Operating Temperature range:
• Varhours – delivered and received -20° to +70°C
• Voltage – phase to neutral • Storage Temperature: -40° to
(4 wire), phase to phase (3 wire) +85°C
• Current – phase and neutral • Humidity: 20 to 90% RH
(calculated) non condensing
• Volt Amps – per phase and total • RFI: no effect when subjected to
10 V/M @ 1 meter
• Power Factor – per phase and
system frequency • ESD: IEC 801-2 level 3 (8 kV) with
no damage
• Distortion – total harmonic distor-
tion of each voltage and current • Surge Withstand: ANSI/IEEE
C37.90, IEC 801-4 Class 4
• Watthours – bidirectional
• Isolation: 2500 VAC RMS from
• Varhours – bidirectional
power to Case or
• Unit ID Communications port 1
Communications
• Multi Addressing allows commu-
nication to up to 15 DPMS units
per DPMS-D display module
• Half duplex RS-485
• Recommended maximum
distance between DPMS and
DPMS-D is 4000 feet
A portion of the DPMS was funded by the New York State Energy Research and Development Authority (NYSERDA)
8.93
AMETEK
Transducers
8.94
AMETEK
AccuPro Calibrators
A full line of portable Product Description
instrument calibrators to meet
CL-4002 Loop current calibrator
the needs of all process
instrument users. CL-9000 Diamond™ universal, multifunction calibrator series
Total IQ Instrument management software
Ametek/AccuPro™ calibrators can be DPG-700 Digital pressure gauge
used to calibrate most process
instrumentation ranging from signal
conditioners to temperature transmitters.
All Ametek calibrators are NIST

traceable and can read and/or source
signals including:
• Frequency
• Volts
• Millivolts
• Milliamps
• T/C
• RTD
• Ohms
• Pressure
• Vacuum
9.1
AMETEK
AccuPro Calibrators
CL-4002 Multifunction
Process Current
Calibrator
SIM: Simulate mode sets the calibrator CL-4002 Specifications

to simulate operation of a 2-wire Accuracy:
transmitter in a loop with external ±0.05% of full scale reading, ± 1 count
power. Set the loop current in percent
Display: Liquid crystal display,
or milliamps in the same way as in
3.5 digit, 0.6" (15.2mm) high
SOURCE mode. The CL-4002 regu-
lates the loop current to the set value Display Range:
over the range of 0.00 to 24.0 mA. 0.00 to ± 19.99 mA
READ: Read DC milliamp currents from ± 20.0 to ± 50.0 mA
0.00 to ± 50.0 mA The display may be 0.0 to ± 199.9%
set to read in percent (of 4-20 mA Temperature Ranges:
range) by pressing the “%” button. The Operating: -20° to 50°C
percent reading will track the current Storage: -40° to 60°C
input to 199.9% (about 40 mA).
Temperature Effect:
RD/PWR: Provides 24 VDC power for 50ppm/°C, nominal, 100ppm/°C, max.
operating a 2-wire transmitter. Calibra-
tor display reads the loop current in Relative Humidity:
• Sources & Simulates 0 to 24 mA 0 to 95%, non-condensing
percent or milliamps over a range of
• Reads 0 to ± 50 mA 0.00 to 24.0 mA (-25.0 to 125.0%). Output/2-wire Range:
• Displays in Milliamps or Percent Other features of the CL-4002 are: low 0.00 to 24.0 mADC (-25.0 to 125.0%),
battery indicator on the LCD display, SOURCE, SIM and RD/PWR modes
• Powers 2-wire Transmitters While
single sealed ON/OFF button on the Instant Output Settings:
Reading Loop Current
keypad, bipolar autoranging display for 0.00 mA (-25.0%), 4.00 mA (0.0%),
milliamp readings (10 microamp 12.00 mA (50.0%, 20.0 mA (100.0%)
Ametek Model CL-4002 Current resolution from 0.00 to 19.99 mA, 0.1 SOURCE and SIM modes
Calibrator is a rugged, compact battery mA resolution from 20.00 to 50.0 mA),
standard zippered case with belt loop Output Drive: 1000 ohms, max.,
powered tool for reading, sourcing and
and an easily replaced single 9 V SOURCE mode
simulating common process control
currents to calibration accuracy. It battery for power. Input Impedance: 20 ohms ±5%,
features a large LCD display and READ mode
sealed membrane keypad for selecting Input Protection: No damage to
the operating mode and output current. instrument or calibration from inputs to
The high quality case has provision for
±75 V. Internal Field replaceable fuse
input/output leads via standard banana for inputs greater than ±75 V.
jacks, and a plug for the optional AC
power adaptor. Battery: 1 each 9 V alkaline, included
SOURCE: The output current may be Battery Life: 8 hours, typical,
set to any value from 0.00 to 24.0 mA SOURCE and RD/PWR modes; 40
DC. Use the up and down buttons to hours, typical READ and SIM modes
continuously set the output, or step to
0.00, 4.00, 12.00 or 20.0 mA instantly AC Adaptor: Optional, Model CL-
4100 (-120 for 120V), 50/60 Hz; (-240
by pressing the labeled buttons. If
for 240 V), 50/60 Hz. Output 9 VDC
desired, select the display in percent
(of 4-20 mA range) rather than
milliamps by pressing the ‘%’ button.
Pressing the “mA” button returns the
display to milliamps.
9.2
CL-4002 Connections
Read Mode: Sensor

Source Mode:
(+)
(-)
2-Wire
R+ B- Receiving Instrument Transmitter (+) (-)
(Recorder, Controller,
Actuator
Display, etc.)
R+ B-
CL-4002
(+) (-)
Power
Supply
CL-4002
Sensor
SIM Mode: Controller RD/PWR Mode:
(+)
(+)
RL (-) 2-Wire
(-)
Transmitter
R+ B-
R+ B- Power Supply
CL-4002
CL-4002
Low Voltage Indicator: LO BAT

indicator of LCD display when internal
battery drops below 6.5 VDC
Loop Voltage Limits: 1 to 60 VDC

external loop power, SIM mode;
24 VDC ±0.2 V internal supply,
SOURCE and RD/PWR modes.
Size: 144.8 x 88.9 x 35.6mm

(5.7 x 3.5 x 1.4 inches)
Weight: 12 oz. (0.34 Kg.)
Model Description
CL-4002 Precision hand-held loop current calibrator
Code Carrying Case
C Carrying Case
NC Not required
Code AC Power Adaptor
120 120V AC adaptor
NA Not required
CL-4002 C NA Ordering Example
Precision hand-held CL-4002 loop current calibrator with carrying case.
No power supply adaptor required.
9.3
AMETEK
AccuPro Calibrators
CL-8026 Universal The CL-8026 is a universal temperature SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Calibrator calibrator capable of sourcing and Display: 128 x 64 point LCD
monitoring temperature signals Connections: 6 posts accepting
including RTDs, thermocouples, mV banana plugs and wires
and resistance. Utilizing the latest Real Time Clock Accuracy:
techniques in software filtering enables < 1 minute per month @ 25˚C
the CL-8026 to work with the major Power: AC Adapter or six “C-cell”
brands of smart temperature Alkaline or NiCd batteries
transmitters without the need to enter Battery Life (minimum):
“trim” mode. It features a large, easy-
40 hours (measure)
to-read LCD display, and easily
8 hours (source)
accessible terminals at the top of the
Weight: 2 lb. (0.9 kg)
unit. The calibrator’s rugged housing
and the sealed keyboard insure trouble Dimensions:
free operation in the harshest 9.75h x 5.25w x 2.5d inches
environments. (24.8h x 13.3w x 6.4d cm)
Signal Type Range Input (Accuracy) Output
mV 0-200mV 0.025% 0.025%

Resistance (0-500Ω) 0.035% 0.050%
RTDs
STANDARD FEATURES: 100Ω Pt (a = 0.385) -200°C to 850°C 0.5°C 0.8°C
• Input (monitor) and output (source) functions
• Monitors and simulates: 100Ω Pt (a = 0.3916) -200°C to 850°C 0.5°C 0.8°C
– 13 Thermocouples - J,K,E,T,R,S,B,N,C,D,G,L,U 100Ω Pt (a = 0.3923) -200°C to 850°C 0.5°C 0.8°C
– 5 RTDs -Platinum, Copper, Nickel
– mV, resistance 120Ω Ni (a = 0.385) -80°C to 320°C 0.25°C 0.5°C
• Intuitive soft-keys
10Ω Cu (a = 0.385) -100°C to 260°C 1.0°C 2.0°C
• 10 User defined set points
• Automatic/Manual set point cycling
• Easy-to-read display Thermocouples
• Internal/external cold junction compensation
• Alkaline or rechargeable NiCd batteries J -210°C to 1200°C 0.5°C 0.5°C
• AC Power option K -200°C to 1370°C 0.5°C 0.5°C
• Carrying Case and Test Leads included
• NIST Certificate of Traceability included T -200°C to 400°C 0.5°C 0.5°C
E -200°C to 1000°C 0.5°C 0.5°C
R -50°C to 430°C 2.0°C 2.0°C
R 430°C to 1760°C 1.0°C 1.0°C

Included with AccuPro Temperature Calibrator
Battery pack, 6 'C' alkaline batteries, multi-tip lead set, S -50°C to 430°C 2.0°C 2.0°C
instruction manual, NIST certified traceable test data and S 430°C to 1760°C 1.0°C 1.0°C
carrying case.
B 200°C to 1200°C 3.0°C 3.0°C
Ordering Information B 1200°C to 1820°C 1.0°C 1.0°C
CL-8026 Ametek Temperature Calibrator N -150°C to 1300°C 0.5°C 0.5°C

Code Optional Power Adapter C 0°C to 2320°C 1.5°C 1.5°C
120 120V AC power adapter
240 240V AC power adapter D 0°C to 2320°C 1.5°C 1.5°C
NR Not required
G 100°C to 2320°C 2.0°C 2.0°C
CL-8026 120 Ordering Example L -200°C to 900°C 0.5°C 1.0°C
Ametek Temperature Calibrator with 120V AC power adapter U -200°C to 600°C 0.5°C 1.0°C
9.4
DPG-700 Precision DPG-700 Specifications
Digital Pressure Gauge
Pressure Ranges and Accuracies
Model Range Accuracy Resolution
DPG-700-015 -10 to +15 PSIG
15 PSIG max. -10 to 0 PSIG ± 0.1% FS, ± 1 count 0.001 PSIG
0 to +15 PSIG ±0.05% FS, ± 1 count 0.001 PSIG
DPG-700-030 -10 to +30 PSIG
0 to +30 PSIG ± 0.05% FS, ± 1 count 0.002 PSIG
DPG-700-100 -10 to +100 PSIG
0 to +100 PSIG ± 0.05% FS, ± 1 count 0.01 PSIG
Calibration: Milli Ampmeter:

DPG-700 digital pressure gauges are
The DPG can be calibrated using a Range: -50.00 to +50.00 mADC
hand-held calibrators that simultaneously
precision pressure source and a special Accuracy: ± 0.05% of full scale
display and measure pressure, vacuum
keypad sequence. No potentiometer ± 1 count
and DC milliamp industrial process
adjustments are required. Resolution: 0.005 mA
signals. They are battery powered and
Impedance: <100 ohms
housed in rugged cases with membrane
Pressure Medium:
keypads to resist harsh industrial
Non-corrosive gas, dry or moist air
environments. Agency Approvals:
LCD Display: DPG-700 is CSA and FM Division 2,
The DPG-700 has large, easy to read, 5
Simultaneous readout of pressure and Class I, II, and III, Groups A, B, C, and D
digit LCD displays for pressure and approved.
current measurements. The sealed current; pressure and current engineering
membrane switches allow easy selection units; low battery indicator; warm-up
indicator; updated three times per Pressure Display Units:
of multiple engineering units and DPG-700-015 and DPG-700-030:
process reference zero. The DPG-700 is second.
PSI, in Hg, in H2O, ft H2O, Atm, Bar,
powered by five C cell batteries which
Instrument Power: mBar, mm H2O, cm H2O, m H2O,
allow for more than 8 hours of continu- mm Hg, cm Hg, Torr, kPa, gm/cm2, kg/
ous operation. Pressure connections are Alkaline batteries (5 C cells); more than 8
hours of operation at room temperature cm2, lb/ft2, tn/ft2
made via a 1/4" quick connect fitting on
the bottom of the unit. on a set of batteries or AC line adapter
for 117/230 VAC, ± 10% @ 50/60 Hz. DPG-700-100:
Units Key: PSI, in Hg, in H2O, ft H2O, Atm, Bar,
The units key is used to select the desired Overrange Protection: mBar, cm H2O, m H2O, mm Hg, cm Hg,
engineering units for pressure and vacuum. 3X full range pressure without damage or Torr, kPa, gm/cm2, kg/cm2, lb/ft2, tn/ft2
The corresponding DC mA reading is need to recalibrate.
displayed directly below the pressure value. DPG-700 Ordering
Temperature Range:
Zero Key: Standard items included are:
Operation: 0° to +50° C
The Zero Key allows the selection of your • Digital Pressure Gauge DPG-700
Storage: -20° to +60°C
reference pressure. If a suppressed or • Certificate of calibration and NIST
elevated zero reference is required, the traceability
Temperature Effect:
pressure on the system should be • Carrying case (DPG-712)
± 0.01%/°C span
brought to the required level, then the • 1 set of test leads (DPG-713)
zero key depressed. This will reset the • Instruction manual
Pressure Port:
display to 0, and is the reference point for ° 117 VAC Power Adapter
Quick connect style fitting for 1/4" i.d.
further measurements. tubing with mating adapter. Options:
Optional Pump Use: DPG-711: 230 VAC adapter
The DPG-720A pump is capable of Size: DPG-720A: Pressure/Vacuum Pump
pressure or vacuum operation (both in 63.5 x 144.8 x 208.3mm Precision hand pump with multiturn
one unit). It can be connected to the DPG (2.5 x 5.7 x 8.2 inches) vernier adjustment for calibration.
via the pressure port. The pump can be 1074 - 746 Quick Connect Kit
supplied complete with tubing and Weight: 1 lb. 14 oz. (0.85 kg)
fittings for calibration of most pressure
instrumentation. See the following pages.
9.5
AMETEK
AccuPro Calibrators
DPG-700 Dimensions Ordering Information
Model Description
DPG-700 Precision Digital Pressure Gauge
Code Pressure Range
15 -10 to +15 PSIG
30 -10 to + 30 PSIG
100 -10 to + 100 PSIG
Code AC Power Adaptor
117 117 V AC adapter
NA Not required
Code Pressure Vacuum Pump
P Precision pressure / vacuum hand pump
NP Not required
Code Quick Connect Kit
C Quick connect tubing and fittings kit
NC Not required
DPG-700 30 230 P NC Ordering Example
DPG-700 precision digital pressure gauge, measuring pressures in the range -10 to
+30 PSIG, with 230 VAC power adapter and precision hand pump.
Typical Connection Configuration
PMM-9700 Connection DPG-700 Connection
9.6
DPG-720A Precision DPG-720A Specifications DPG-700 Quick Connect Kit
Pressure Pump Output Range: -2 to 200 psi
The Ametek DPG-700 Quick-Connect
The Ametek DPG-720A Precision
Resolution: 0.001 psig Kit (P/N 1074-746) connects a DPG-
Pressure Pump is a hand-operated
720A Precision Pressure Pump to a
mechanical pump. It is designed to
Compatible Media: Non-conductive, DPG-700 Digital Pressure Gauge and a
generate precise pressures to 200 psi for
non-corrosive instrument grade clean pneumatic transmitter. The kit consists
use in pneumatic testing and calibration.
air or inert gas of:
The DPG-720A combines simplicity of Item Part No. Qty. Description
design with quality construction for long Pump Body Construction: Machined
1. 6002-392 2 1/8” Coupling Insert,
service life with virtually no maintenance. brass casting
1/8” MNPT
The compound-leverage, squeeze-action 2. 6002-391 2 1/8” Coupling Body,
design and light weight permit easy, one- Pressure Connections: Dual 1/8”-27
.17” I.D. Tubing
handed operation at any angle. Dual FNPT output ports
1/8”-27 FNPT output ports located in the .17” I.D. Tubing
machined brass pump body permit the Weight: 1.9 pounds (0.87 kg)
application of pressure to two devices 1/4” MNPT
simultaneously. 5. 6002-004 1 1/8” Coupling Body
w/Shut-off,
Precise output to 0.001 psig resolution is 1/8” MNPT
possible through the manipulation of the 6. 0630-514 2 .17” I.D. Tubing,
Coarse and Fine Pressure Adjustments. 6 Feet long
The DPG-720A can also generate 7. 6002-458 1 1/4” Hex Fitting,
negative pressures to -2 psi through the 1/4” FNPT
use of the Fine Pressure Adjustment. 8. 6002-456 1 1/8” Coupling Body,
1/4” MNPT
An accessory Quick Connect Kit

(P/N 1074-746), consisting of
chrome-plated brass fittings and two
3-foot sections of polypropylene
tubing rated to 250 psi, provides
easy connection to most pneumatic
transmitters.
9.7
AMETEK
AccuPro Calibrators
AccuPro Diamond functions like ramping and stored computer-aided calibration system. If
setpoints are designed to assist you you need to calibrate a number of
CL-9000 Series still further. instruments in the field, you can carry
With the newest in low-voltage all required calibration information in
electronics, the AccuPro Diamond is a your Diamond Plus calibrator. Simply
real energy saver. There is even a download pre-programmed proce-
special battery save option. All so that dures, instructions and calibration
you won’t have to keep running back specifications from Total IQ™–
to the shop for new batteries. Ametek’s Windows™-based instru-
ment management–or from the
When you need reliable signal mea- emerging standard for computer-aided
surement and simulation, you will want calibration software, Cornerstone™
an AccuPro Diamond Series calibrator. Base Station from Applied System
To ensure maximum accuracy, the Technologies.
calibrator keeps constant track of
output signals with a special feedback Attach the Diamond Plus to the
circuit. All thermocouple measurements instrument under test and use it to
are made using automatic internal perform these procedures automati-
Universal Multi-Function cold-junction compensation, or with cally. The calibrator stores all test
Field Calibrators reference to an external probe. You details, including the time, date and the
can even enter reference temperatures operator. Return the information to
• Universal calibrator for all your PC at your convenience.
manually.
instrument types
The Diamond Plus can even be used to
Always have the right tool at hand print calibration reports without a
• Ergonomic design and carrying The AccuPro Diamond Plus personal computer. Attach its serial
case The AccuPro Diamond Plus CL-9002 port directly to a printer, and it will
Easy to carry into the field or CL-9004 has all the features of the download calibration records as an
standard Diamond model, but can also ASCII text file.
• Operates as part of computer-
be used as part of a sophisticated
aided calibration system
Automate the documentation and
management of instrument
recalibrations
• NIST Traceable
The AccuPro™ Diamond™ Calibrator

The AccuPro Diamond Series-9000
calibrators are easy-to-use, universal,
multi-function process instrumentation
calibrators. Use them to calibrate the
widest possible range of process
instruments. Diamond Series calibra-
tors are compatible with current,
voltage, frequency, resistance and
temperature signals, including thirteen
thermocouples and five RTD types.
Dedicated connectors allow any
combination of input and output
signals. With one device to service all
your instrument calibration needs,you’ll
always have the right tool at hand.
Lightweight and housed in a sleek case
that fits in one hand, the Diamond is
the ideal tool to carry into the field. The
calibrator combines an easy-to-read
graphical display and color-coded
alphanumeric keypad with an intuitive
‘soft-key’ system. All this makes
operation quick and simple. Special
9.8
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
CAPABILITY Display: 240 x 128 pixel graphic
LCD, 95 x 54 mm
DOCUMENTATION
Power: 6 ‘C’ size alkaline (standard)
HART INTERFACE
or NiCd cells (optional)
Battery life:
ELECTRICAL*
Continuous sourcing > 8 hours
Continuous monitoring > 40 hours
PRESSURE
Dimensions: 229 x 133 x 64 mm
(9 x 5.2 x 2.5 inches)
Weight: 1.37 kg (3 lbs.)
0˚C to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range:
MODEL –20˚C to 60°C
Operating Humidity Range: 20 to
CL9001 X X 90% relative humidity, non-
condensing. The effect on accuracy
STANDARD FEATURES CL9002 X X X is <0.05°C for a change in relative
humidity from 20 to 90% at 23°C.
• Simultaneous Inputs and Outputs
• 13 Thermocouples: B, C, D, E, CL9003 X Radio-Frequency Interference
G, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U (RFI): Conforms to SAMA PMC 33.1
• 5 RTDs: 100Ω Pt, 120Ω Ni, CL9004 X X 1978, mV input and output will not
10Ω Cu shift more than 1% of full-scale
• mA, mV, Voltage, Resistance, CL9005 X X X X when tested at a field strength of 10
Frequency V/M at a distance of 1m from 20
• Trip Detection MHz to 1 GHz.
• Pressure * RTD, TC, mV, V, Ohms, Warranty: Three year parts and
• 24 Vdc Transmitter Power
• Transmitter Simulator mA, Frequency
• mA Input/Output
• Automatic Data Collection
• Manual Data Entry
• 21 Point As Found/As Left
Calibrations
• 21 Step Set Point
• Auto/Manual Set Point Cycling
• Output Ramping
• Full Alphanumeric Keypad
• Field Entry of Calibration Notes
• Serial Output (PC or Printer)
• Storage for 50 Calibrations
• Sealed Keypad Case
• NIST Certificate of Traceability
• 3 Year Warranty
• Alkaline and Rechargeable Batteries
• Test Leads and Carrying Case
9.9
AMETEK
AccuPro Calibrators
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ACCURACY (% fs) DISPLAY
SIGNAL INPUT OUTPUT RESOLUTION
0mV to 200mV 0.025% 0.025% 0.01mV Input Impedance (mV): >10 MΩ
0V to 20V 0.025% 0.001V Input Impedance (V): >2 MΩ
0V to 50V 0.025% 0.001V
0mA to 24mA 0.025% 0.001mA Input Impedance: <25 Ω / Output Compliance: 19V minimum
0mA to 50mA 0.025% 0.001mA Maximum Input Voltage: 24 VDC
1Hz to 1000Hz 0.1 count 0.1 count 0.1Hz
100Hz to 10KHz 1.0 count 1.0 count 0.001KHz Frequency Measurement: 0.1V to 100V peak-to-peak
1 CPM to 1000 CPM 1.0 count 1.0 count 0.1 CPM Frequency Output: 0.1V to 10V peak-to-peak
Input Impedance: 2 MΩ // 123.5 pF
Zero-based squarewave
0.1 CPH to 100 CPH 0.05 count 0.05 count 0.01 CPH Output Amplitude Accuracy: 5% of full Scale
5 to 500 Ohms 0.035% 0.05% 0.1 Ohm
RTD (2, 3 or 4 wire)
100Ω Pt (∞ = .385) 0.5˚C 0.8˚C 0.1˚C 100Ω Pt: -200 2 +850°C
100Ω Pt (∞ = .3916) 0.5˚C 0.8˚C 0.1˚C
100Ω Pt (∞ = .3923) 0.5˚C 0.8˚C 0.1˚C
120Ω Ni 0.25˚C 0.5˚C 0.1˚C 120Ω Ni: -80° to +320° C
10Ω Cu 1.0˚C 2.0˚C 0.1˚C 10Ω Cu: -10° to +260° C
Thermocouples (internal or external CJC)
B 1200 to 1820˚C 1.0˚C 1.0˚C 0.1˚C
C 0 to 2320˚C 1.5˚C 1.5˚C 0.1˚C
D 0 to 2320˚C 1.5˚C 1.5˚C 0.1˚C
E -200 to 1000˚C 0.5˚C 0.5˚C 0.1˚C
G 100 to 2320˚C 2.0˚C 2.0˚C 0.1˚C
J -210 to 1200˚C 0.5˚C 0.5˚C 0.1˚C Ordering Information
K -200 to 1370˚C 0.5˚C 0.5˚C 0.1˚C
L -200 to 900˚C 1.0˚C 1.0˚C 0.1˚C Included with AccuPro Diamond
N -150 to 1300˚C 0.5˚C 0.5˚C 0.1˚C and AccuPro Diamond Plus
R 430 to 1760˚C 1.0˚C 1.0˚C 0.1˚C Battery pack, 6 ‘C’ alkaline
S 430 to 1760˚C 1.0˚C 1.0˚C 0.1˚C batteries, multi-tip lead set,
T -200 to 400˚C 0.5˚C 0.5˚C 0.1˚C instruction manual, NIST certified
U -200 to 600˚C 1.0˚C 1.0˚C 0.1˚C traceable test data, carrying case.
Model Description
CL-9001 AMETEK AccuPro Diamond
CL-9002 AMETEK AccuPro Diamond Plus
CL-9003 AMETEK AccuPro Diamond without pressure input
CL-9004 AMETEK AccuPro Diamond Plus without pressure input
Code Optional Power Adapter
NP Not required
Code Test Lead Sets
STL Strandard Test Lead Set
DTL Deluxe Test Lead Set
Code Instrument Management Software
IQ1 Total IQ™—Ametek Windows-based instrument management software
CST2 Cornerstone™ Base Station—Windows-based instrument management software
NS Not required
CL-9002 120 DTL IQ Ordering Example
Ametek AccuPro Diamond Plus with 120V AC adapter and with Total IQ instrument management software. 1,2
9.10 Compatible with AccuPro Diamond Plus CL-9002/4/5.
AccuPro Diamond The CL-9005 HART® Calibrator Trimming the output or sensor require
CL-9005 HART® Calibrator eliminates the need to carry a hand- less than 5 keystrokes each. Up to 50
held communicator when performing documented calibrations, each with 21
calibrations on HART instruments. The As Found and 21 As Left analog data
CL-9005 combines the full capabilities values can be held by the CL-9005.
of the Diamond Plus Multi-Function, Calibration data can be transferred to a
Documenting Calibrator with the HART PC, printer or calibration management
hand-held communicator functions of program such as Total IQ™ or
Output Trim, Sensor Trim, Re-ranging Cornerstone™.
(Zero and Span), Tag, Description and Supported HART Instruments:
Date changes. The closed loop
feedback of the calibrator’s output Rosemount
provides the high accuracy required for Rev Rev
Smart transmitter calibrations. 1151 1-6 3044C 1
3144 1, 2 3051C 1, 2
The HART Interface Adapter (HIA) Yokogawa
provides the communications interface EJA
between the calibrator and instrument Foxboro
under test. It automatically energizes, RTT IGP
establishes communications, and IAP IDP
downloads the proper command set IPS IFL
when activated by the user. Held in its
Universal Multi-Function own carrying case, it is attached to the
Documenting Calibrator for HART® back of the calibrator and holds the
and Conventional Instruments Deluxe Test Lead Set Option
command sets for the HART instruments. 1-48" Cable w/alligator clips
New HART devices or new revisions 1 48" cable with mini grabbers
STANDARD FEATURES can be added through its serial port 2 shorting double banana plugs
• Capacity for 40 or 75 HART and a PC. 1 case
Command Sets When viewing HART instruments, the
• Non-Volatile Memory user is able to view the analog and
• Field Upgradeable digital input and output variables.
• Automatic Battery Save Function
• Simultaneous Inputs and Outputs
• 13 Thermocouples: B, C, D, E, G, J,
K, L, N, R, S, T, U
• 5 RTDs: 100Ω Pt, 120Ω Ni, 10Ω Cu Analog Output
Frequency Analog Input
• Trip Detection
• Pressure
• 24 Vdc Transmitter Power HART
• Transmitter Simulator Interface
• Simultaneous mA Input/Output Adapter
• Automatic Data Collection
• Manual Data Entry
• 21 Point As Found/As Left HART
Calibrations XMTR
• 21 Step Set Point
• Auto/Manual Set Point Cycling PRESSURE
• Output Ramping MEASURING
• Full Alphanumeric Keypad MODULE
• Field Entry of Calibration Notes
• Serial Output (PC or Printer)
• Storage for 50 Calibrations Pressure Ranges
• Sealed Keypad Case Gage: 0 – 7500
• NIST Certificate of Traceability Absolute: 0 – 7500
• 3 Year Warranty CL-9005 Vacuum: -10, -15 psig PRESSURE
HART Compound: -10 to +60 psig
• Alkaline and Rechargeable Batteries
Differential: 1 – 2000" H2O
SOURCE
• Test Leads and Carrying Case CALIBRATOR
9.11
AMETEK
AccuPro Calibrators
General Specifications ACCURACY (% fs) DISPLAY
Display: 240 x 128 pixel graphic LCD, SIGNAL INPUT OUTPUT RESOLUTION
95 x 54 mm 0mV to 200mV 0.025% 0.025% 0.01mV
Power: 0V to 20V 0.025% 0.001V
Calibrator — six ‘C’ size alkaline 0V to 50V 0.025% 0.001V
(standard) or NiCd cells (optional) 0mA to 24mA 0.025% 0.001mA
HART Interface Adapter — one 9V 0mA to 50mA 0.025% 0.001mA
alkaline 1Hz to 1000Hz 0.01% 0.01% 0.1Hz
Battery life: 100Hz to 10KHz 0.01% 0.01% 0.001KHz
Calibrators: 1 CPM to 1000 CPM 0.01% 0.01% 0.1 CPM
Continuous sourcing > 8 hours 0.1 CPH to 100 CPH 0.05% 0.05% 0.01 CPH
Continuous monitoring > 40 hours
Frequency Measurement: 0.1V to 100V peak-to-peak
Hart Interface adapter: > 8 hours
Frequency Output: 0.1V to 10V peak-to-peak,
Zero-based squarewave
Dimensions: 229 x 133 x 64 mm
5 to 500 Ohms 0.035% 0.05% 0.1 Ohm
(9 x 5.2 x 2.5 inches)
Weight: 1.37 kg (3 lbs.) RTD (2, 3 or 4 wire)
Operating Temperature Range: 100Ω Pt (∞ = .385) 0.5˚C 0.8˚C 0.1˚C 100Ω Pt: -200 2 +850°C
0 to 50°C 100Ω Pt (∞ = .3916) 0.5˚C 0.8˚C 0.1˚C
Storage Temperature Range: 100Ω Pt (∞ = .3923) 0.5˚C 0.8˚C 0.1˚C
–20 to 60°C 120Ω Ni 0.25˚C 0.5˚C 0.1˚C 120Ω Ni: -80° to +320° C
Operating Humidity Range: 10Ω Cu 1.0˚C 2.0˚C 0.1˚C 10Ω Cu: -10° to +260° C
20 to 90% relative humidity, non-
Thermocouples (internal or external CJC)
condensing. The effect on accuracy B 1200 to 1820˚C 1.0˚C 1.0˚C 0.1˚C
is <0.05°C for a change in relative
C 0 to 2320˚C 1.5˚C 1.5˚C 0.1˚C
humidity from 20 to 90% at 23°C. D 0 to 2320˚C 1.5˚C 1.5˚C 0.1˚C
Radio-Frequency Interference (RFI):
E -200 to 1000˚C 0.5˚C 0.5˚C 0.1˚C
Conforms to SAMA PMC 33.1 1978, G 100 to 2320˚C 2.0˚C 2.0˚C 0.1˚C
mV input and output will not shift more
J -210 to 1200˚C 0.5˚C 0.5˚C 0.1˚C
than 1% of full-scale when tested K -200 to 1370˚C 0.5˚C 0.5˚C 0.1˚C
at a field strength of 10 V/M at a
L -200 to 900˚C 1.0˚C 1.0˚C 0.1˚C
distance of 1m from 20 MHz to N -150 to 1300˚C 0.5˚C 0.5˚C 0.1˚C
1 GHz.
R 430 to 1760˚C 1.0˚C 1.0˚C 0.1˚C
Warranty: Three year parts and labor S 430 to 1760˚C 1.0˚C 1.0˚C 0.1˚C
T -200 to 400˚C 0.5˚C 0.5˚C 0.1˚C
U -200 to 600˚C 1.0˚C 1.0˚C 0.1˚C
Model Description
CL-9005 Ametek Diamond Plus with Pressure Capability and HART® Interface
Internal Memory will hold up to 50 instrument calibrations
Code HART Interface Module Memory
SM Standard Memory - up to 40 HART instruments
EM Extended Memory - up to 75 HART instruments
Code Optional Power Adaptor
NR Not required
Calibrator Displays: Input and Output Code Test Lead Sets
viewing options (above) and HART STL Strandard Test Lead Set
Instrument configuration (below). DTL Deluxe Test Lead Set
Code Optional HART Command Tables
ABB ABB Kent-Taylor 600T
FPB Fisher & Porter-Bailey 50DP, 50 PL
MOR Moore Products 341 XTC, 344 XTC
SMR SMAR LD301, TT301
FOX Foxboro, RTT2, IAP, IDP, IGP, IFL
CL-9005 EM 120 DTL FOX Ordering Example
Ametek CL-9005 Diamond Plus with Extended Memory Option, 120V AC adapter,
Deluxe Test Lead Set and Foxboro Instrument Command Tables.
9.12
PMM-9700 Series The PMM-9700 pressure measuring Output Resolution:
modules enable the measurement of 15 and 30 psig models
Pressure Measuring gases and liquids with the Diamond 0.007% maximum of full scale
Modules calibrators. Each module has a 316 100 psig model
stainless steel sensor which allows an 0.010% maximum of full scale
interface with pressure media that may Over Range Protection:
contain corrosive materials. 2 times full scale pressure without
Each module includes a serial interface damage
cable that plugs into the side of the Long Term Drift:
Diamond calibrator which enables the Less than ±0.05% of full scale
calibrator to be located a comfortable accuracy shift per year
distance away from process
connections such as steam, hot liquids Power Supply:
and caustic materials. This feature The module(s) are powered by the
minimizes the possibility of accidental Diamond calibrator or can be operated
personnel injury and/or equipment from 24 Vdc +10%, -25%.
damage. Power Consumption:
The pressure modules support a Maximum: 20 mA @ 19 Vdc (380
0.07% accuracy thereby ensuring mW)
accurate calibration of instruments Typical: 130-150mW
and pressure devices such as
transmitters, gages and indicators. Communications Format:
8 data, 1 stop bit, no parity, 9700
Each module provides on-board baud
temperature compensation and signal
conversion. The digital signal Temperature Range:
transmission attenuates the effects of Operating: 0 to +50˚C
• 3 Ranges: 0-15 psig RFI and EMI, and also permits the Storage: 0 to +60˚C
0-30 psig modules to be interfaced with a Maximum Process Temperature:
0-100 psig personal computer or terminal. 70˚C without damage
• High accuracy - 0.07% Over range protection to twice the Temperature Effect:
Ensures accurate calibration of range of the module is standard. A 1/4" The temperature effect on accuracy is
instruments NPT male connector permits easy 150 ppm/˚C maximum over the
• Stainless steel sensors connection to process pressure. operating temperature range.
Accepts corrosive liquids and gases The Diamond calibrator firmware Relative Humidity:
• Temperature compensated permits zeroing of the module at non- Operating Range: 20% to 90% non-
zero pressures which is ideal for liquid condensing
sensors
level and other elevated pressure Humidity Effect:
Ensures performance over a wide
applications. The humidity effect on accuracy is
temperature range
The calibrator firmware also supports 0.05% of span for a
• Over range protection 19 different engineering units including change in RH from 20% to 90% at
Sensor protection to twice input in H2O, psig, mm Hg, Atm, kPa and 23˚C.
range more.
• Remote mounting from calibrator
Protects personnel and calibrator
from steam, heat and other process Model Description
hazards PMM-9700 Pressure Measuring Module
Code Input Pressure Range
• NIST traceable -15G 0 to ±15 psig
Accurate calibration of module and -30G 0 to ±30 psig
instruments -100G 0 to ±100 psig
• Three year warranty
Rugged design reduces life cycle PMM-9700 -30G Ordering Example
costs Pressure Measuring Module with 0-30 psig Input Range
Model Number Input range Accuracy *

PMM-9700 Specifications PMM-9700-15G 0 to +15 psig ±0.07% F.S., ±0.02 psig
PMM-9700-30G 0 to +30 psig ±0.07% F.S., ±0.03 psig
Available Engineering Units (all models): Atm, psig, in Hg 0˚C, in
PMM-9700-100G 0 to +100 psig ±0.07% F.S., ±0.01 psig
H2O 20˚C, ft H2O 20˚C, Bar, mBar, mm H2O 4˚C, m H2O 0˚C, cm Hg
* Accuracy is dependent upon zeroing the unit prior to taking the measurement
0˚C, Torr, kPa, g/cm2, kg/cm2, lb/ft2, in H2O 60˚C, in H2O 4˚C.
9.13
AMETEK
AccuPro Calibrators
PMM-9850 Multi-Range
Pressure Pack
• 3 Ranges: 0-15 psig

0-30 psig
0-100 psig
• High accuracy - 0.07%
Ensures accurate calibration of
instruments
• Stainless steel sensors
Accepts corrosive liquids and gases
• Temperature compensated
sensors
Ensures performance over a wide
temperature range
• Over range protection
Sensor protection to twice input
range
• Remote mounting from calibrator
Protects personnel and calibrator
Over range protection to twice the from steam, heat and other process
The Multi-Range Pressure Pack is hazards
available with 2 or 3 ranges for gas and range of the module is standard. A 1/4"
liquid pressure measurement with the NPT male connector permits easy • NIST traceable
Diamond Calibrators. Each pack can connection to process pressure. Accurate calibration of module and
contain any combination of PMM-9700 The serial interface cable which plugs instruments
modules, each which has a 316 into the side of the Diamond calibrator • Three year warranty
stainless steel sensor which allows an enables the calibrator to be located a Rugged design reduces life cycle
interface with pressure media which comfortable distance away from costs
may contain corrosive materials. By process connections such as steam,
combining multiple pressure ranges hot liquids and caustic materials. This
into a single, rugged and lightweight feature minimizes the possibility of
housing, the number of individual accidental injury and/or equipment
devices needed for pressure damage. It detaches to avoid bending
calibrations is reduced. stresses from accidental catching on
The 0.07% high accuracy ensures poles and structural members.
accurate calibration of instruments and The Diamond calibrator firmware
pressure devices such as transmitters, permits zeroing of the module at non-
gages and indicators. zero pressures which is ideal for liquid
Each module provides on-board level and other elevated pressure
temperature compensation and signal applications.
conversion. The digital signal trans- The calibrator firmware also supports
mission attenuates the effects of RFI 19 different engineering units including
and EMI and also permits the modules in H2O, psig, mm Hg, Atm, kPa and
to be interfaced with a personal more.
computer or terminal via the RS-232
serial port.
9.14
PMM-9850 Specifications
Available Engineering Units (all models): Atm, Model Description
psig, in Hg 0˚C, in H2O 20˚C, ft H2O 20˚C, Bar, PMM-9850 Multi-Range Pressure Pack – Requires PMM-9850-C Cable
mBar, mm H2O 4˚C, m H2O 0˚C, cm Hg 0˚C, Code 1st Pressure Module Input Pressure Range
Torr, kPa, g/cm2, kg/cm2, lb/ft2, in H2O 60˚C, -15G 0 to ±15 psig
in H2O 4˚C. -30G 0 to ±30 psig
-100G 0 to ±100 psig
Input Range Options:
Code 2nd Pressure Module
0 to +15 psig, 0 to +30 psig, 0 to +100 psig
-15G 0 to ±15 psig
Input Range Accuracy: -30G 0 to ±30 psig
0 to +15 psig ±0.07% F.S., ±0.002% psig -100G 0 to ±100 psig
0 to +30 psig ±0.07% F.S., ±0.003% psig Code 3rd Pressure Module
0 to +100 psig ±0.07% F.S., ±0.01% psig -15G 0 to ±15 psig
Output Resolution: -30G 0 to ±30 psig
15 and 30 psig models 0.007% maximum of full scale -100G- 0 to ±100 psig
100 psig model 0.010% maximum of full scale
PMM-9850 -15G -30G -100G Ordering Example
Over Range Protection:
2 times full scale pressure without damage Multi-Range Pressure Pack with -15G, -30G and -100G Modules
Long Term Drift:
Less than ±0.05% of full scale accuracy shift per year
Power Supply:
The module(s) are powered by the Diamond calibrator
or can be operated from 24 Vdc +10%, -25%.
Power Consumption:
Maximum: 20 mA @ 19 Vdc (380 mW)
Typical: 130-150mW
Communications Format:
8 data, 1 stop bit, no parity, 9600 baud
Temperature Range:
Operating: 0 to +50˚C
Storage: 0 to +60˚C
Maximum Process Temperature:
70˚C without damage
Temperature Effect:
The temperature effect on accuracy is 150 ppm/˚C
maximum over the operating temperature range.
Relative Humidity:
Operating Range: 20% to 90% non-condensing
Humidity Effect:
The humidity effect on accuracy is 0.05% of span
for a change in RH from 20% to 90% at 23˚C.
RFI:
When tested at field strength of 10 V/M at a distance
of 1M, the pressure reading will not shift by more than
1% of full scale.
Size: 9.25 x 5.5 x 2.25 inches
(24.1 x 14.0 x 5.6 cm)
Weight: 2.8 pounds (1.25 kg)
9.15
AMETEK
AccuPro Calibrators
TOTAL IQTM Calibration Total IQ is a software package for the PC REQUIREMENTS:
Management Software automation of instrument calibration PC 486-SX or higher processor
and documentation. Standard and running at 50 Mhz minimum
for Computer-Aided special calibration procedures can be 12 MB RAM
Calibration and stored, downloaded and automatically 10 MB of hard disk space
Documentation executed by the Diamond Plus (empty database)
calibrators. The “As Found” and “As Microsoft ® mouse or equivalent
Left” data is time and date stamped Microsoft Windows ® 3.1 or higher,
and then uploaded to the serial port of running in 386 enhanced mode
the host PC and stored for analysis and
future comparisons.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Built on Microsoft ACCESS™, its
powerful database editor allows the Total IQ II... Calibration and
creation of instrument inventory lists Documentation Software
based on vendor, installed location, 1080-757 ... PC to Calibrator
calibration dates, types and other Communications Cable
criteria. The commentary fields and
automatic data capture streamlines the
calibration process, insures data
• Automates instrument calibration
integrity, and frees up manpower for
• Downloads pre-programmed
other plant tasks.
calibration procedures
• Built-in scheduling of instrument
calibration routes
Graphs of Instrument Inventory,
• Powerful database for instrument
Workload and Routes
inventory
• Maintains calibration history Instrument Calibration History
• Stores Instrument and calibration
data
• Calibration graphs of instrument
performance
• Printed reports
• Import/export to Microsoft®
EXCEL™ and other Windows™
based programs
• Assists in compliance with ISO,
EPA, OSHA, FDA and insurance
audits
• Four levels of password protected
security
• Allows automatic and manual Calibration Graphs Calibration Schemes: Standard and
data entry User Defined
• Comment fields, drawing
references and special
information fields
• Compatible with Ametek
Power Instruments Diamond
Plus Calibrators
9.16

AMETEK102

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

AMETEK102

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

CAT102 Cover 8.

5x11 12/5/00 2:40 PM Page 2

Alarm Event Recording

Since 1961, Rochester Instrument Systems, a division of Ametek Power

PUBLICATION 102 COPYRIGHT © 2000

Our DMS-2000 system provides Test the accuracy of most process

ROCHESTER NY USA BELFAST OFFICE TERRITORY:

Contacting Ametek SINGAPORE OFFICE TERRITORY:

Requirement Contact Phone Fax

Emergency Ordering Service Hotline 800-881-4156

General Information Switchboard 716-263-7700 716-262-4777

Technical Support or Tech Support Line 800-374-4835 716-238-4985

2. Transducers Cell Manager 716-238-4955 716-238-4945

3. Signal Conditioners Cell Manager 716-238-4944 716-238-4097

6. Calibrator/DPG Cell Manager 716-238-4944 716-238-4097

8. Power Quality Cell Manager 716-238-4700 716-238-4927

Product Literature Only Market Pulse, Inc. 216-460-0809 216-460-0810

Ametek Web Site www.rochester.com Ametek Email info@rochester.com

Factory Training Workshops Annunciators

VT-1215 Vibration Switch ET-8200 Rack Mounted Trip/Alarms

Warranty TR-1620, TR-1630, TR-1640, TR-1650,

RA-800, RA-1800, RA-2800, RA-3800

LP-260 Load Profiler (Replaced by

PR-2050 Tap Position Transmitter

CL-4003 Voltage Calibrator

CL-4004 Loop Powered Indicator

CL-4005 Thermocouple Calibrator

FM FM CSA CSA BASEEFA CENELEC

The AMETEK series of alarm

The following categories describe our product

Integral Annunciators – These annunciators

Display Unit Only – These are lamp boxes

Remote Annunciators – This annunciator is

Description Integral Annunciators Display Unit Only Remote Annunciator

12 point Relay Annunciator SM-100 — —

The AN-3100C annunciator provides Transistor And Logic Level Inputs

Optional Auxiliary Relays

Three-point windows (medium) Four-point windows (standard)

Mounting Depth: 9" (228.6 mm) D

(37.7) (139.3) (177.0)

1.484 5.484 8.484 12.484 13.969

Side View Rear View

Note: Wiring Duct

Dimensions are in inches with millimeters

NUMBER OF CELLS WIDE

1W 2W 3W 4W 5W 6W 7W 8W 9W 10W 11W 12W 13W 14W 15W

NUMBER OF CELLS HIGH

1H 2H 3H 4H 5H 6H 7H 8H 9H 10H 11H 12H 13H 14H 15H

Note: Consult factory for displays beyond 15 high x 15 wide.

General Outline — Front View

TBP, TBB FOR USE WITH

General Outline — Rear View

PANEL MOUNTING BRACKET

TB1 SEQUENCE CONTROL MODULE

EXTRA LARGE WINDOW LARGE WINDOW

Isolated Field Contact Wiring

Standard width is 1.60" (40.6 mm)

Hinged NEMA 4/12 H

Surface Mount NEMA 4/12

140 VDC customer supplied) can C. Test pushbutton.

C. Computer or other instrument-type Packaging:

A. Lights (steady, fast flash, slow Ambient Temperature Range: 1.25"

Universal adaptaplate mounts directly on

1.6875" .375" 1.42" .4375"